An 400

AN400
99500-34100-01E
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FOREWORD
This manual contains an introductory description on the SUZUKI AN400 and procedures for its inspection/service
and overhaul of its main components.
Other information considered as generally known is not included.
Read the GENERAL INFORMATION section to familiarize yourself with the motorcycle and its maintenance. Use
this section as well as other sections to use as a guide for proper inspection and service.
This manual will help you know the motorcycle better so that you can assure your customers of fast and reliable
service.
* This manual has been prepared on the basis of the latest specifications at the time of publication. If modifi-
cations have been made since then, differences may exist between the content of this manual and the
actual motorcycle.
* Illustrations in this manual are used to show the basic principles of operation and work procedures. They
may not represent the actual motorcycle exactly in detail.
* This manual is written for persons who have enough knowledge, skills and tools, including special tools, for
servicing SUZUKI motorcycles. If you do not have the proper knowledge and tools, ask your authorized
SUZUKI motorcycle dealer to help you.
! WARNING
Inexperienced mechanics or mechanics without the proper tools and equipment may not be able to
properly perform the services described in this manual.
Improper repair may result in injury to the mechanic and may render the motorcycle unsafe for the
rider and passenger.
© COPYRIGHT SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION 2006

00
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precautions............................................................... 00-i
Precautions ............................................................ 00-1 1
General Information ................................................... 0-i
General Information ............................................... 0A-1
Maintenance and Lubrication ................................. 0B-1
Service Data...........................................................0C-1 2
Engine ......................................................................... 1-i
Precautions .............................................................. 1-1
Engine General Information and Diagnosis ........... 1A-1
Emission Control Devices ...................................... 1B-1 3
Engine Electrical Devices.......................................1C-1
Engine Mechanical.................................................1D-1
Engine Lubrication System .................................... 1E-1
Engine Cooling System.......................................... 1F-1
Fuel System ...........................................................1G-1 4
Ignition System.......................................................1H-1
Starting System....................................................... 1I-1
Charging System.....................................................1J-1
Exhaust System ..................................................... 1K-1
5
Suspension................................................................. 2-i
Precautions .............................................................. 2-1
Suspension General Diagnosis.............................. 2A-1
Front Suspension ................................................... 2B-1
Rear Suspension....................................................2C-1 6
Wheels and Tires ...................................................2D-1
Driveline / Axle ........................................................... 3-i
Precautions .............................................................. 3-1
Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft ................... 3A-1
Brake ........................................................................... 4-i
Precautions .............................................................. 4-1
Brake Control System and Diagnosis .................... 4A-1
Front Brakes........................................................... 4B-1
Rear Brakes ...........................................................4C-1
Parking Brake.........................................................4D-1
Tranmission / Transaxle ............................................ 5-i
Precautions .............................................................. 5-1 9
Automatic Transmission......................................... 5A-1
Steering....................................................................... 6-i
Precautions .............................................................. 6-1
Steering General Diagnosis ................................... 6A-1
Steering / Handlebar .............................................. 6B-1
Body and Accessories............................................... 9-i
Precautions .............................................................. 9-1
Wiring Systems ...................................................... 9A-1
Lighting Systems.................................................... 9B-1
Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn..................9C-1
Exterior Parts .........................................................9D-1
Body Structure ....................................................... 9E-1

Table of Contents 00- i
Section 00
00
Precautions
CONTENTS
Precautions ...............................................00-1 General Precautions ........................................... 00-1

Precautions........................................................... 00-1 Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service ............ 00-2
Warning / Caution / Note..................................... 00-1

00-1 Precautions:
Precautions
Precautions
Warning / Caution / Note General Precautions
B705H10000001 B705H10000002
Please read this manual and follow its instructions ! WARNING
carefully. To emphasize special information, the symbol
and the words WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE have • Proper service and repair procedures are
special meanings. Pay special attention to the messages important for the safety of the service
highlighted by these signal words. mechanic and the safety and reliability of
the motorcycle.
! WARNING
• When 2 or more persons work together,
Indicates a potential hazard that could result pay attention to the safety of each other.
in death or injury. • When it is necessary to run the engine
indoors, make sure that exhaust gas is
! CAUTION forced outdoors.
Indicates a potential hazard that could result • When working with toxic or flammable
in motorcycle damage. materials, make sure that the area you
work in is well-ventilated and that you
follow all of the material manufacturer’s
NOTE
instructions.
Indicates special information to make • Never use gasoline as a cleaning solvent.
maintenance easier or instructions clearer.
• To avoid getting burned, do not touch the
Please note, however, that the warnings and cautions engine, engine oil, radiator and exhaust
contained in this manual cannot possibly cover all system until they have cooled.
potential hazards relating to the servicing, or lack of • After servicing the fuel, oil, water, exhaust
servicing, of the motorcycle. In addition to the or brake systems, check all lines and
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS stated, you must use good fittings related to the system for leaks.
judgement and basic mechanical safety principles. If you
are unsure about how to perform a particular service
operation, ask a more experienced mechanic for advice.

Precautions: 00-2
! CAUTION • To protect Earth’s natural resources,

properly dispose of used motorcycle and
• If parts replacement is necessary, replace parts.
the parts with Suzuki Genuine Parts or
their equivalent.
Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service
• When removing parts that are to be reused, B705H10000003
keep them arranged in an orderly manner When handling the component parts or servicing the FI
so that they may be reinstalled in the system, observe the following points for the safety of the
proper order and orientation. system.
• Be sure to use special tools when
instructed. Electrical Parts
• Make sure that all parts used in
Connector / Coupler
reassembly are clean. Lubricate them
when specified. • When connecting a connector, be sure to push it in
• Use the specified lubricant, bond or until a click is felt.
sealant.
• When removing the battery, disconnect the
(–) cable first and then the (+) cable.
• When reconnecting the battery, connect
the (+) cable first and then the (–) cable,
and replace the terminal cover on the (+)
terminal.
• When performing service to electrical
parts, if the service procedures do not
I705H1000001-01
require use of battery power, disconnect
• With a lock type coupler, be sure to release the lock
the (–) cable from the battery.
when disconnecting, and push in fully to engage the
• When tightening the cylinder head or case lock when connecting.
bolts and nuts, tighten the larger sizes
• When disconnecting the coupler, be sure to hold the
first. Always tighten the bolts and nuts
coupler body and do not pull the lead wires.
diagonally from the inside toward outside
and to the specified tightening torque. • Inspect each terminal on the connector/coupler for
looseness or bending.
• Whenever you remove oil seals, gaskets,
packing, O-rings, locking washers, self- • Inspect each terminal for corrosion and
locking nuts, cotter pins, circlips and contamination. The terminals must be clean and free
certain other parts as specified, be sure to of any foreign material which could impede proper
replace them with new ones. Also, before terminal contact.
installing these new parts, be sure to
remove any left over material from the
mating surfaces.
• Never reuse a circlip. When installing a
new circlip, take care not to expand the
end gap larger than required to slip the
circlip over the shaft. After installing a
circlip, always ensure that it is completely
seated in its groove and securely fitted.
• Use a torque wrench to tighten bolts to the
specified torque. Wipe off grease and oil if I310G1000002-01
a thread is smeared with them.
• After reassembling, check parts for
tightness and proper operation.
• To protect the environment, do not
unlawfully dispose of used motor oil,
engine coolant and other fluids: batteries
and tires.

00-3 Precautions:
• Inspect each lead wire circuit for poor connection by Fuse

shaking it by hand lightly. If any abnormal condition is • When a fuse blows, always investigate the cause to
found, repair or replace. correct it and then replace the fuse.
• Do not use a fuse of a different capacity.
• Do not use wire or any other substitute for the fuse.
I310G1000003-01
• When taking measurements at electrical connectors

using a tester probe, be sure to insert the probe from
I649G1000001-01
the wire harness side (backside) of the connector/
coupler. Switch
Never apply grease material to switch contact points to
prevent damage.
ECM / Various Sensors

• Since each component is a high-precision part, great
care should be taken not to apply any sharp impacts
during removal and installation.
I705H1000002-01
1. Coupler 2. Probe
• When connecting meter probe from the terminal side

of the coupler (where connection from harness side
not being possible), use extra care not to force and
cause the male terminal to bend or the female
terminal to open. Connect the probe as shown to I310G1000007-01
avoid opening of female terminal. Never push in the • Be careful not to touch the electrical terminals of the
probe where male terminal is supposed to fit. ECM. The static electricity from your body may
• Check the male connector for bend and female damage this part.
connector for excessive opening. Also check the
coupler for locking (looseness), corrosion, dust, etc.
I310G1000008-01
I705H1000003-01
3. Coupler “A”: Where male terminal fits

4. Probe

Precautions: 00-4
• When disconnecting and connecting the ECM • Before measuring voltage at each terminal, check to
couplers, make sure to turn OFF the ignition switch make sure that battery voltage is 11 V or higher.
(1), or electronic parts may get damaged. Terminal voltage check with a low battery voltage will
lead to erroneous diagnosis.
I310G1000012-01
I705H1000004-03
• Never connect any tester (voltmeter, ohmmeter, or
Battery whatever) to the ECM when its coupler is
disconnected. Otherwise, damage to ECM may result.
• Battery connection in reverse polarity is strictly
prohibited. Such a wrong connection will damage the • Never connect an ohmmeter to the ECM with its
components of the FI system instantly when reverse coupler connected. If attempted, damage to ECM or
power is applied. sensors may result.
• Be sure to use a specified voltmeter/ohmmeter.
Otherwise, accurate measurements may not be
obtained and personal injury may result.
Electrical Circuit Inspection Procedures

While there are various methods for electrical circuit
inspection, described here is a general method to check
for open and short circuit using an ohmmeter and a
voltmeter.
Open circuit check

I310G1000010-01
Possible causes for the open circuits are as follows. As
• Removing any battery terminal of a running engine is the cause can exist in the connector/coupler or terminal,
strictly prohibited. The moment such removal is made, they need to be checked carefully.
damaging counter electromotive force will be applied • Loose connection of connector/coupler
to the ECM which may result in serious damage. • Poor contact of terminal (due to dirt, corrosion or rust,
poor contact tension, entry of foreign object, etc.)
• Wire harness being open
• Poor terminal-to-wire connection
I310G1000011-01

00-5 Precautions:
When checking system circuits including an electronic 4) Using continuity inspect or voltage check procedures
control unit such as ECM, etc., it is important to perform as described below, inspect the wire harness
careful check, starting with items which are easier to terminals for open circuit and poor connection.
check. Locate abnormality, if any.
1) Disconnect the (–) cable from the battery.
2) Check each connector/coupler at both ends of the
circuit being checked for loose connection. Also
check for condition of the coupler lock if equipped.
“D” “F”
“A”
“E”
I649G1000028-01
“A”
”D”: Looseness of crimping
ECM “E”: Open
1 “F”: Thin wire (A few strands left)
Continuity check
I705H1000005-02
1) Measure resistance across coupler “B” (between “A”
1. Sensor “A”: Check for loose connection.
and “C” in figure).
If no continuity is indicated (infinity or over limit), the
3) Using a test male terminal, check the female
circuit is open between terminals “A” and “C”.
terminals of the circuit being checked for contact
tension.
Check each terminal visually for poor contact “A”
(possibly caused by dirt, corrosion, rust, entry of
foreign object, etc.). At the same time, check to
“B” ECM
make sure that each terminal is fully inserted in the
coupler and locked.
If contact tension is not enough, rectify the contact to
increase tension or replace. The terminals must be “C”
clean and free of any foreign material which could
impede proper terminal contact.
I705H1000006-02
2) Disconnect the coupler “B” and measure resistance

between couplers “A” and “B-1”.
“B” If no continuity is indicated, the circuit is open
between couplers “A” and “B-1”. If continuity is
indicated, there is an open circuit between couplers
“C”
“B-2” and “C” or an abnormality in coupler “B-2” or
coupler “C”.
I649G1000027-01
“B”: Check contact tension by inserting and removing.

“A”
“C”: Check each terminal for bend and proper alignment. “B-2”
ECM
“B” “C”
“B-1”
I705H1000010-02

Precautions: 00-6
Voltage check Short circuit check (Wire harness to ground)

If voltage is supplied to the circuit being checked, voltage 1) Disconnect the (–) cable from the battery.
check can be used as circuit check.
2) Disconnect the connectors/couplers at both ends of
1) With all connectors/couplers connected and voltage the circuit to be checked.
applied to the circuit being checked, measure
voltage between each terminal and body ground. NOTE
2) If measurements were taken as shown in the figure If the circuit to be checked branches to other
below and results are as listed in the following, it parts as shown, disconnect all connectors/
means that the circuit is open between terminals “A” couplers of those parts. Otherwise, diagnosis
and “B”. will be misled.
Voltage between 3) Measure resistance between terminal at one end of
“A” and body ground: Approx. 5 V circuit (“A” terminal in figure) and body ground. If
“B” and body ground: Approx. 5 V continuity is indicated, there is a short circuit to
“C” and body ground: 0 V ground between terminals “A” and “C”.
3) Also, if measured values are as listed in the
following, a resistance (abnormality) exists which “A”
causes the voltage drop in the circuit between
terminals “A” and “B”. “D”
“B” ECM
Voltage between
“A” and body ground: Approx. 5 V
“B” and body ground: Approx. 5 V – 2 V voltage
drop “C”
“C” and body ground: 3 V – 2 V voltage drop
“A”
“E”
5V
ECM
“B”
“C”
“A” “C”
I705H1000008-01
“D”: To other parts “E”: Other parts
5V
5V
0V 5V
“A” “B” “C”
I705H1000007-01

00-7 Precautions:
4) Disconnect the connector/coupler included in circuit Using the tester

(coupler “B”) and measure resistance between • Incorrectly connecting the (+) and (–) probes may
terminal “A” and body ground. If continuity is cause the inside of the tester to burnout.
indicated, the circuit is shorted to the ground
• If the voltage and current are not known, make
between terminals “A” and “B”.
measurements using the highest range.
• When measuring the resistance with the multi-circuit
“A”
tester (1), ∞ will be shown as 10.00 MΩ and “1”
“D” flashes in the display.
• Check that no voltage is applied before making the
ECM
measurement. If voltage is applied the tester may be
damaged.
“B” • After using the tester, turn the power off.
“C”
Special tool
: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
I705H1000009-02
“D”: To other parts
Using the Multi-Circuit Tester

• Use the Suzuki multi-circuit tester set.
• Use well-charged batteries in the tester.
• Be sure to set the tester to the correct testing range.
Special tool
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
I649G1000002-01
(A)
NOTE
• When connecting the multi-circuit tester,
use the needle pointed probe to the back
side of the lead wire coupler and connect
the probes of tester to them.
• Use the needle pointed probe to prevent
I649G1000024-02 the rubber of the water proof coupler from
damage.
Special tool
(A): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)
(A)
I649G1000025-02

Section 0
General Information
0
CONTENTS
General Information ................................ 0A-1 Final Reduction Gear Oil Replacement.............0B-10

General Description .............................................0A-1 Cooling Fan Filter Removal and Installation .....0B-10
Symbols .............................................................. 0A-1 Cooling Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning ......0B-10
Abbreviations ...................................................... 0A-2 Drive V-belt Removal and Installation ...............0B-11
Vehicle Side View ............................................... 0A-3 Drive V-belt Inspection ......................................0B-11
Vehicle Identification Number ............................. 0A-3 Throttle Cable Play Inspection and
Fuel / Oil / Engine Coolant Recommendation ..... 0A-3 Adjustment ......................................................0B-11
Engine Coolant Recommendation ...................... 0A-4 Cooling System Inspection................................0B-11
BREAK-IN Procedures........................................ 0A-4 Air Bleeding From the Cooling Circuit ...............0B-12
Country and Area Codes .................................... 0A-5 Radiator Hose Inspection..................................0B-13
Wire Color Symbols ............................................ 0A-5 Brake System Inspection ..................................0B-13
Warning, Caution and Information Labels Brake Hose Replacement .................................0B-14
Location ............................................................ 0A-6 Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit ................0B-14
Brake Fluid Replacement..................................0B-14
Component Location ...........................................0A-7
Tire Inspection...................................................0B-15
Electrical Components Location ......................... 0A-7
Steering System Inspection ..............................0B-15
Specifications.......................................................0A-9
Front Fork Inspection ........................................0B-16
Specifications ...................................................... 0A-9
Rear Suspension Inspection .............................0B-16
Special Tools and Equipment ...........................0A-11 Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Mounting
Special Tool ...................................................... 0A-11 Inspection........................................................0B-16
Chassis Bolt and Nut Inspection .......................0B-17
Maintenance and Lubrication................. 0B-1 Compression Pressure Check ..........................0B-19
Precautions...........................................................0B-1 Oil Pressure Check ...........................................0B-19
Precautions for Maintenance .............................. 0B-1 SDS Check........................................................0B-19
General Description .............................................0B-1 Automatic Clutch Inspection..............................0B-19
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants................. 0B-1 Parking Brake (Brake-lock) Inspection..............0B-20
Scheduled Maintenance ......................................0B-1 Parking Brake (Brake-lock) Adjustment ............0B-20
Periodic Maintenance Schedule Chart................ 0B-1 Specifications .....................................................0B-21
Lubrication Points ............................................... 0B-2 Tightening Torque Specifications......................0B-21
Repair Instructions ..............................................0B-2 Special Tools and Equipment ...........................0B-21
Air Cleaner Element Removal and Installation .... 0B-2 Recommended Service Material .......................0B-21
Air Cleaner Element Inspection .......................... 0B-3 Special Tool ......................................................0B-21
Spark Plug Removal and Installation .................. 0B-3
Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning ................... 0B-4 Service Data ............................................. 0C-1
Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment ...... 0B-4 Specifications .......................................................0C-1
Fuel Line Inspection ............................................ 0B-8 Service Data........................................................0C-1
Evaporative Emission Control System (E-33 Tightening Torque Specifications........................0C-7
Only) ................................................................. 0B-8
Engine Oil and Filter Change .............................. 0B-9

0A-1 General Information:
General Information
General Description
Symbols
B705H10101001
Listed in the table below are the symbols indicating instructions and other information necessary for servicing.
The meaning of each symbol is also included in the table.
Symbol Definition
Torque control required.
Data beside it indicates specified torque.
Apply oil.
Use engine oil unless otherwise specified.
Apply molybdenum oil solution
(Mixture of engine oil and SUZUKl MOLY PASTE in a ratio of 1:1).
Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE “A” or equivalent.
99000-25010
Apply SUZUKI MOLY PASTE or equivalent.
99000-25140
Apply SUZUKI SILICONE GREASE or equivalent.
99000-25100
Apply SUZUKI BOND “1207B” or equivalent.
99000-31140
Apply SUZUKI BOND “1215” or equivalent.
99000-31110
Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER “1303” or equivalent.
99000-32030
99000-32110
Apply THREAD LOCK “1342” or equivalent.
99000-32050
99000-32130
Use engine coolant or equivalent.
99000-99032-11X
Use fork oil or equivalent.
99000-99044-10G
Apply or use brake fluid.
Use special tool.
Do not reuse.
Note on reassembly.

General Information: 0A-2
Abbreviations G:
B705H10101002 GEN: Generator
A:
GND: Ground
ABDC: After Bottom Dead Center
GP Switch: Gear Position Switch
AC: Alternating Current
H:
ACL: Air Cleaner, Air Cleaner Box
HC: Hydrocarbons
API: American Petroleum Institute
HO2S: Heated Oxygen Sensor
ATDC: After Top Dead Center
I:
ATM Pressure: Atmospheric Pressure
IAP Sensor: Intake Air Pressure Sensor (IAPS)
A/F: Air Fuel Mixture
IAT Sensor: Intake Air Temperature Sensor (IATS)
B:
IG: Ignition
BBDC: Before Bottom Dead Center
ISC Valve: Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV)
BTDC: Before Top Dead Center
L:
B+: Battery Positive Voltage
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display
C:
LED: Light Emitting Diode (Malfunction Indicator Light)
CKP Sensor: Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS)
LH: Left Hand
CKT: Circuit
M:
CO: Carbon Monoxide
MAL-Code: Malfunction Code (Diagnostic Code)
CPU: Central Processing Unit
Max: Maximum
D:
MIL: Malfunction Indicator Light (LED)
DC: Direct Current
Min: Minimum
DMC: Dealer Mode Coupler
N:
DOHC: Double Over Head Camshaft
NOx: Nitrogen Oxides
DRL: Daytime Running Light
P:
E:
PARK: Parking Brake (Brake-lock)
ECM: Engine Control Module
PCV: Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Crankcase
Engine Control Unit (ECU)
Breather)
(FI Control Unit)
R:
ECT Sensor: Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
RH: Right Hand
(ECTS)
ROM: Read Only Memory
Water Temp. Sensor (WTS)
S:
EVAP: Evaporative Emission
SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers
EVAP Canister: Evaporative EmissionCanister
STP Sensor: Secondary Throttle Position Sensor
(Canister)
STVA: Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator
F:
T:
FI: Fuel Injection, Fuel Injector
TO Sensor: Tip-Over Sensor (TOS)
FP: Fuel Pump
TP Sensor: Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
FPR: Fuel Pressure Regulator
FP Relay: Fuel Pump Relay
FTPC Valve: Fuel Tank Pressure Control Valve

Vehicle Side View Vehicle Identification Number

B705H10101003 B705H10101004
NOTE The frame serial number or V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification
Difference between photographs and actual Number) (1) is stamped on the right side of the frame
motorcycles depends on the markets. tube. The engine serial number (2) is located on the left
side of the crankcase. These numbers are required
especially for registering the machine and ordering
Right Side spare parts.
I705H1010003-01
I705H1010001-02
Left Side
I705H1010004-01
Fuel / Oil / Engine Coolant Recommendation

B705H10101005
Fuel (For USA and Canada)
Use only unleaded gasoline of at least 87 pump octane
(R/2 + M/2) or 91 octane or higher rated by the research
I705H1010002-02
method.
Gasoline containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether),
less than 10% ethanol, or less than 5% methanol with
appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitor is
permissible.
Fuel (For Other Countries)

Gasoline used should be graded 91 octane (Research
Method) or higher. Unleaded gasoline is recommended.

Engine Oil and Final Gear Oil (For USA) Engine Coolant Recommendation
Oil quality is a major contributor to your engine’s B705H10101006
performance and life. Always select good quality engine Engine Coolant
oil. Use an anti-freeze/engine coolant compatible with an
SUZUKI recommends the use of SUZUKI aluminum radiator, mixed with distilled water only.
PERFORMANCE 4 MOTOR OIL or an equivalent
engine oil. Use of SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in Water for mixing
JASO. Use distilled water only. Water other than distilled water
Suzuki recommends the use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil. can corrode and clog the aluminum radiator.
If SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not available, select an
alternative according to the chart. Anti-freeze/Engine coolant
The engine coolant perform as a corrosion and rust
Engine Oil and Final Gear Oil (For Other Countries) inhibitor as well as anti-freeze. Therefore, the engine
Oil quality is a major contributor to your engine’s coolant should be used at all times even though the
performance and life. Always select good quality engine atmospheric temperature in your area does not go down
oil. Use of SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in JASO. to freezing point.
Suzuki recommended the use of SAE 10W-40 engine Suzuki recommends the use of SUZUKI COOLANT anti-
oil. If SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not available, select an freeze/engine coolant. If this is not available, use an
alternative according to the chart. equivalent which is compatible with an aluminum
radiator.
Liquid amount of water/Engine coolant

Solution capacity (total)
1 700 ml (1.8/1.5 US/Imp qt)
For engine coolant mixture information, refer to “Engine
Coolant Description in Section 1F (Page1F-1)”.
! CAUTION
I310G1010005-01
Mixing of anti-freeze/engine coolant should
Brake Fluid be limited to 60%. Mixing beyond it would
reduce its efficiency. If the anti-freeze/engine
Specification and classification
coolant mixing ratio is below 50%, rust
DOT 4
inhabiting performance is greatly reduced.
! WARNING Be sure to mix it above 50% even though the
atmospheric temperature does not go down
Since the brake system of this motorcycle is to the freezing point.
filled with a glycol-based brake fluid by the
manufacturer, do not use or mix different
types of fluid such as silicone-based and BREAK-IN Procedures
B705H10101007
petroleum-based fluid for refilling the During manufacture only the best possible materials are
system, otherwise serious damage will used and all machined parts are finished to a very high
result. standard but it is still necessary to allow the moving parts
Do not use any brake fluid taken from old or to “BREAK-IN” before subjecting the engine to maximum
used or unsealed containers. stresses. The future performance and reliability of the
Never re-use brake fluid left over from a engine depends on the care and restraint exercised
previous servicing, which has been stored during its early life. The general rules are as follows.
for a long period.
1) Keep to these break-in engine speed limits:
Speed limits
Front Fork Oil
Initial 800 km: Below 4 000 r/min
Use fork oil G-10 or an equivalent fork oil.
Up to 1 600 km: Below 6 000 r/min
2) Upon reaching an odometer reading of 1 600 km (1
000 miles) you can subject the motorcycle to full
throttle operation. However, do not exceed 11 000 r/
min at any time.

Country and Area Codes

B705H10101009
The following codes stand for the applicable country(-ies) and area(-s).
Code Country or Area Effective Frame No.
AN400K7
U.K. JS1CG111200100001 –
(E-02)
AN400K7
U.S.A. except for California JS1CK44A 72100001 –
(E-03)
AN400K7
E.U. JS1CG111300100001 –
(E-19)
AN400K7
Australia JS1CG111300100001 –
(E-24)
AN400K7
Canada JS1CK44A 72100001 –
(E-28)
AN400K7
California JS1CK44A 72100001 –
(E-33)
AN400K7
Israel JSCG111470100001 –
(E-54)
Wire Color Symbols

B705H10101010
Symbol Wire Color Symbol Wire Color
B Black Bl/W Blue/White
Bl Blue Bl/Y Blue/Yellow
Br Brown Br/B Brown/Black
Dbr Dark brown Br/W Brown/White
Dg Dark green G/B Green/Black
G Green G/R Green/Red
Gr Gray G/W Green/White
Lbl Light blue G/Y Green/Yellow
Lg Light green Gr/W Green/White
O Orange O/B Orange/Black
P Pink O/Bl Orange/Blue
R Red O/G Orange/Green
V Violet O/R Orange/Red
W White O/W Orange/White
Y Yellow O/Y Orange/Yellow
B/Bl Black/Blue P/B Pink/Black
B/Br Black/Brown P/W Pink/White
B/G Black/Green R/Bl Red/Blue
B/Lg Black/Light green W/B White/Blue
B/O Black/Orange W/G White/Green
B/R Black/Red W/R White/Red
B/W Black/White Y/B Yellow/Black
B/Y Black/Yellow Y/Bl Yellow/Blue
Bl/B Blue/Black Y/G Yellow/Green
Bl/G Blue/Green Y/R Yellow/Red
Bl/R Blue/Red Y/W Yellow/White

Warning, Caution and Information Labels Location

B705H10101011
4 9 9 12, 13
12 10
[A] 5
6 19
15 14
2, 18 11
[C]
[B]
7
3
1, 17
[D]
I705H1010008-02
AN400
1. Noise label For E-03, 24, 33
2. Information label For E-03, 28, 33
3. Vacuum hose routing label For E-33
4. Engine starting label For E-02, 03, 19, 24, 28, 33, 54
5. Engine starting label (French) For E-28
6. Fuel caution label For E-02, 24
7. Manual notice label For E-03, 33
8. Warning screen label For E-02, 19, 24
9. Warning screen label (French) For E-28
10. Tire information label For E-02, 03, 19, 24, 28, 33, 54
11. General warning label For E-02, 03, 19, 24, 28, 33, 54
12. General warning label (French) For E-28
13. Loading capacity label For E-02, 03, 19, 24, 28, 33, 54
14. Loading capacity label (French) For E-28
15. ICES Canada label For E-28
16. I.D. plate For E-02, 19, 24, 54
17. Safety plate For E-03, 28, 33
[A]: Front box lid
[B]: Helmet box front cover
[C]: Seat (Back side)
[D]: Frame side tube (Right side)

Component Location
Electrical Components Location
B705H10103001
2
1
3
7
6
4
9
8
5
18
19
10
15
11
13
12
17
14
16
I705H1010005-04
1. Fuel injector 6. STVA 11. Ambient air temperature sensor 16. Generator
2. IAP sensor 7. Front brake switch 12. Brake-lock relay 17. HO2 sensor
3. ISC valve 8. Right handlebar switch 13. Fuel pump relay 18. ECT sensor
4. TP sensor 9. Starter relay 14. IAT sensor 19. Starter motor
5. STP sensor 10. Mode select switch coupler 15. CKP sensor

20
22
21
26
23
24 25
27
32
30
28
31
29
I705H1010007-04
20. TO sensor 24. Left handlebar switch 28. Side-stand switch 32. Regulator/rectifier
21. Fuse box 25. Rear brake switch 29. Cooing fan thermo-switch
22. Turn signal/Side-stand relay 26. Ignition coil 30. Cooing fan
23. ECM 27. Speed sensor 31. Horn

Specifications
Specifications
B705H10107001
NOTE
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Dimensions and Dry Mass

Item Specification Remark
Overall length 2 270 mm (89.4 in)
Overall width 760 mm (29.9 in)
Overall height 1 385 mm (54.5 in)
Wheelbase 1 585 mm (62.4 in)
Ground clearance 125 mm (4.9 in)
Seat height 710 mm (28.0 in)
200 kg (440 lbs) E-33
Dry mass
199 kg (438 lbs) Others
Engine
Type 4-stroke, liquid-cooled, DOHC
Number of cylinders 1
Bore 81.0 mm (3.189 in)
Stroke 77.6 mm (3.055 in)
Piston displacement 400 cm3 (24.4 cu. in)
10.6 : 1 E-03, 28, 33
Compression ratio
11.2 : 1 Others
Fuel system Fuel injection
Air cleaner Paper element
Starter system Electric
Lubrication system Wet sump
Idle speed 1450 ± 100 r/min
Drive Train
Clutch Dry shoe, automatic, centrifugal type
Gearshift pattern Automatic
Final reduction ratio 5.904 (31/14 x 40/15)
Gear ratio 2.200 – 0.839 (Variable change)
Drive system V-belt drive
Chassis
Front suspension Telescopic, coil spring, oil damped
Rear suspension Link type, coil spring, oil damped
Steering angle 40° (right & left)
Caster 25° 20’
Trail 102 mm (4.0 in)
Turning radius 2.7 m (8.9 ft)
Front brake Double disk brake
Rear brake Disc brake
Front tire size 120/80-14 M/C 58S, tubeless
Rear tire size 150/70-13 M/C 64S, tubeless
Front fork stroke 110 mm (4.3 in)
Rear wheel travel 100 mm (3.9 in)

Electrical
lgnition type Electronic ignition (Transistorized)
lgnition timing 7° B. T. D. C at 1 450 r/min
Spark plug NGK: CR7E or DENSO: U22ESR-N
Battery 12 V 32.4 kC (9 Ah)/10 HR
Generator Three-phase A.C. generator
Main fuse 30 A
Fuse 10/10/15/10/15/10 A
Headlight 12 V 60/55 W (H4) + 55 W (H7)
Position/Parking light 12 V 5 W x 2 E-02, 19, 24, 54
Position light 12 V 5 W x 2 E-03, 28, 33
Brake light/Taillight 12 V 21/5 W x 2
License plate light 12 V 5 W
Helmet box light 12 V 5 W
12 V 27/8 W E-03, 28, 33
Front turn signal light
12 V 21 W Others
Rear turn signal light 12 V 21 W
Speedometer/Tachometer light LED
Coolant temperature meter light LED
Fuel level meter light LED
Turn signal indicator light LED x 2
High beam indicator light LED
Brake-lock indicator light LED
Oil change indicator LCD
Fuel injection warning light LED
Except E-03, 28,
Immobilizer indicator light LED
33
Capacities
Fuel tank, including reserve 13.5 L (3.6/3.0 US/Imp gal)
Oil change 1 200 ml (1.3/1.1 US/Imp qt)
Engine oil With filter change 1 300 ml (1.4/1.1 US/Imp qt)
Overhaul 1 500 ml (1.6/1.3 US/Imp qt)
Oil change 180 ml (6.0/6.3 US/Imp oz)
Final gear oil
Overhaul 190 ml (6.4/6.7 US/Imp oz)
Coolant 1.7 L (1.8/1.5 US/Imp qt)

Special Tools and Equipment

Special Tool
B705H10108001
TT09900-06108-02 TT09900-18710-01 TT09900-20101-00 TT09900-20102-01
09900-06108 09900-18710 09900-20101 09900-20102

Snap ring pliers Hexagon socket (12 mm) Vernier calipers (1/15 mm, Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,
150 mm) 200 mm)
TT09900-20202-01 TT09900-20205-01
TT09900-20203-02 TT09900-20508-01
09900-20202 09900-20203 09900-20205 09900-20508
Micrometer (1/100 mm, 25 – Micrometer (1/100 mm, 50 – Micrometer (0 – 25 mm) Cylinder gauge set
50 mm) 75 mm)
TT09900-20602-01 TT09900-20605-01 TT09900-20607-01 TT09900-20701-01

09900-20602 09900-20605 09900-20607 09900-20701
Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1 Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1 Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 Magnetic stand
mm) mm) mm)
TT09900-20803-01
TT09900-20805-01 TT09900-21303-00 TT09900-21304-01
09900-20803 09900-20805 09900-21303 09900-21304
Thickness gauge Tire depth gauge V-block (75 mm) V-block (100 mm)
TT09900-25008-01
TT09900-22301-01 TT09900-22403-02 TT09900-25009-02
09900-22301 09900-22403 09900-25008 09900-25009
Plastigauge (0.025 – 0.076 Small bore gauge (18 – 35 Multi-circuit tester set Needle probe point set
mm) mm)

TT09900-26006-00 TT09910-32812-01
TT09900-28630-00 TT09904-41010-00
09900-26006 09900-28630 09904-41010 09910-32812
Engine tachometer (solar TPS test wire harness SDS set Crankshaft installer
cell type)
TT09913-50121-01
TT09910-32870-00 TT09910-60611-01 TT09913-10750-00
09910-32870 09910-60611 09913-10750 09913-50121
Crankshaft installer Universal clamp wrench Compression gauge Oil seal remover
attachment adapter
TT09913-70210-01
TT09913-75821-00 TT09913-75830-00 TT09915-64512-01
09913-70210 09913-75821 09913-75830 09915-64512

Bearing installer set Bearing installer Bearing installer Compression gauge
TT09915-74521-01 TT09915-77331-01
TT09915-74511-01 TT09915-74570-01
09915-74511 09915-74521 09915-74570 09915-77331
Compression gauge Oil pressure gauge hose Oil pressure gauge Meter (for high pressure)
attachment
TT09916-10911-01
TT09916-14530-00 TT09916-33210-01
TT09916-14510-02
09916-10911 09916-14510 09916-14530 09916-33210
Valve lapper set Valve spring compressor Valve spring compressor Valve guide reamer (4.5
attachment mm)

TT09916-34542-01
TT09916-34561-01
TT09916-53330-01
TT09916-43210-01
09916-34542 09916-34561 09916-43210 09916-53330
Reamer handle Valve guide reamer (11.3 Valve guide remover/ Attachment
mm) installer
TT09917-47011-00
TT09919-28610-00 TT09920-13120-02
TT09916-84511-01
09916-84511 09917-47011 09919-28610 09920-13120
Tweezers Vacuum pump gauge Sleeve protector Crankcase separating tool
TT09920-31020-01 TT09920-53740-02 TT09921-20240-01

TT09922-21410-00
09920-31020 09920-53740 09921-20240 09922-21410
Extension handle Clutch sleeve hub holder Bearing remover set Long socket (46 mm)
TT09922-31440-02 TT09923-74511-00 TT09924-84521-01

TT09923-73210-01
09922-31440 09923-73210 09923-74511 09924-84521
Clutch spring compressor Bearing remover Bearing puller Bearing installer set
TT09930-31921-00
TT09930-10121-02 TT09930-11950-00 TT09930-30104-01
09930-10121 09930-11950 09930-30104 09930-31921
Spark plug wrench set Torx wrench Rotor remover slide shaft Rotor remover
TT09930-82720-02
TT09930-40113-01
TT09940-11420-00 TT09940-11430-00
09930-40113 09930-82720 09940-11420 09940-11430
Rotor holder Mode select switch Steering stem nut socket Steering stem nut socket

TT09940-14911-01 TT09940-30230-01 TT09940-34520-00 TT09940-34531-00

09940-14911 09940-30230 09940-34520 09940-34531
Steering stem nut wrench Socket hexagon (17 mm) T handle Attachment A
TT09940-40211-01 TT09940-52861-01 TT09940-92720-01

TT09940-40230-00
09940-40211 09940-40230 09940-52861 09940-92720
Fuel pressure gauge Fuel pressure gauge hose Front fork oil seal installer Spring scale
adapter attachment
TT09941-54911-01
TT09941-34513-01 TT09941-34513-01 TT09941-74911-01
09941-34513 09941-34513 09941-54911 09941-74911
Steering race installer Steering race installer Bearing outer race remover Steering bearing installer
TT09943-74111-01 TT99565-01010-008-
09943-74111 99565-01010-008
Fork oil level gauge CD-ROM Ver.8

0B-1 Maintenance and Lubrication:
Maintenance and Lubrication

Precautions
Precautions for Maintenance
B705H10200001
The “Periodic Maintenance Schedule Chart” lists the recommended intervals for all the required periodic service work
necessary to keep the motorcycle operating at peak performance and economy. Maintenance intervals are expressed
in terms of kilometers, miles and months for your convenience.
NOTE
More frequent servicing may be required on motorcycles that are used under severe conditions.
General Description
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
B705H10201001
Refer to “Fuel / Oil / Engine Coolant Recommendation in Section 0A (Page0A-3)”.
Scheduled Maintenance
Periodic Maintenance Schedule Chart
B705H10205001
Interval
km 1 000 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000
Item
miles 600 4 000 7 500 11 000 14 500
months 2 12 24 36 48
Air cleaner element — I I R I
Exhaust pipe bolts and muffler bolts T — T — T
Valve clearance — — — — I
Spark plug — I R I R
Fuel line — I I I I
Evaporative emission control system (E-33 only) — — I — I
Engine oil R R R R R
Engine oil filter R — — R —
Final Reduction gear oil — — R — R
Throttle cable play I I I I I
Engine coolant Replace every 2 years.
Radiator hoses — I I I I
Cooling fan filter Clean every 3 000 km (1 800 miles).
Drive V-belt — — I — R
Brakes I I I I I
— I I I I
Brake fluid
Replace every 2 years.
— I I I I
Brake hoses
Replace every 4 years.
Tires — I I I I
Steering I — I — I
Front forks — — I — I
Rear suspension — — I — I
Chassis bolts and nuts T T T T T
NOTE
I = Inspect and clean, adjust, replace or lubricate as necessary.
R = Replace.
T = Tighten.

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-2
Lubrication Points
B705H10205002
Proper lubrication is important for smooth operation and long life of each working part of the motorcycle.
Major lubrication points are indicated below.
NOTE
• Before lubricating each part, clean off any rusty spots and wipe off any grease, oil, dirt or grime.
• Lubricate exposed parts which are subject to rust, with a rust preventative spray whenever the
motorcycle has been operated under wet or rainy conditions.
1 5 4
2 3
I705H1020001-01
1. Rear brake lever holder 4. Front brake lever holder

2. Side-stand pivot and spring hooks 5. Throttle cables
3. Center stand pivot and spring hooks : Apply grease.
Repair Instructions
Air Cleaner Element Removal and Installation 2) Remove the air cleaner cover (2) and air cleaner
B705H10206001 element.
Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Removal and Installation
(Page0B-2)”.
Inspect air cleaner element
Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months)
Replace air cleaner element
2
Removal
1) Remove the helmet box front cover (1). Refer to I705H1020003-01
“Helmet Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page9D-16)”. Installation
Install air cleaner element in the reverse order of
removal. Pay attention to the following points:
1
• When installing the air cleaner element, fit the
element to the cover first.
• When cleaning or installing the air cleaner element,
drain water from the air cleaner box by removing the
drain plugs. Refer to “Air Cleaner Box Removal and
Installation in Section 1D (Page1D-9)”.
I705H1020002-01

Air Cleaner Element Inspection 2) Disconnect the plug cap (1).

B705H10206002
Inspect air cleaner element

Replace air cleaner element
Every 18 000 km (11 000 miles, 36 months) 1
Remove the air duct (1) and inspect air cleaner element
(2) for clogging. If it is clogged with dirt, replace it with a
new one.
! CAUTION
Do not blow the air cleaner element with I705H1020007-01
compressed air. 3) Remove the spark plug with the spark plug wrench.
Special tool
: 09930–10121 (Spark plug wrench set)
2
1
I705H1020006-01
! CAUTION I705H1020008-01
If driving under dusty condition, replace the

Installation
air cleaner element more frequently. The
Install the spark plug in the reverse order of removal.
surest way to accelerate engine wear is to
Pay attention to the following point:
use the engine without the element or to use
a ruptured element. Make sure that the air ! CAUTION
cleaner is in good condition at all times. Life
of the engine depends largely on this Before tightening the spark plug to the
component. specified torque, carefully turn the spark plug
by finger into the threads of the cylinder head
to prevent damage the aluminum threads.
Spark Plug Removal and Installation
B705H10206003
• Tighten the spark plug to the specified torque.
Inspect spark plug
Tightening torque
Spark plug: 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 lb-ft)
Replace spark plug
Removal
! WARNING
The hot engine can burn you. Wait until the
engine is cool enough to touch.
1) Remove the front frame cover. Refer to “Front Frame

Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D
(Page9D-17)”.

Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment
B705H10206004 B705H10206005
Inspect spark plug Inspect valve clearance

Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) Every 24 000 km (14 500 miles, 48 months)
Replace spark plug Inspection
Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months) The valve clearance specification is different for intake
and exhaust valves. Valve clearance must be checked
Carbon Deposit
and adjusted, a) at the time of periodic inspection, b)
Check to see if there are carbon deposits on the plug. If
when the valve mechanism is serviced, and c) when the
carbon is deposited, remove it using a spark plug
camshafts are removed for servicing.
cleaner.
1) Remove the air cleaner box. Refer to “Air Cleaner
Heat range Box Removal and Installation in Section 1D
Standard Cold type (Page1D-9)”.
NGK CR7E CR8E 2) Dismount the throttle body.
DENSO U22ESR-N U24ESR-N
3) Remove the spark plug. Refer to “Spark Plug
Spark Plug Gap Removal and Installation (Page0B-3)”.
Measure the plug gap with the thickness gauge. If the 4) Remove the cylinder head cover (1).
gap is out of specification, adjust it to the following gap.
Special tool
: 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge) 1
Spark plug gap “a” (Standard)

0.7 – 0.8 mm (0.028 – 0.031 in)
I705H1020009-01
5) Remove the cooling fan duct. Refer to “Cooling Fan

I705H1020070-06 Filter Inspection in Section 5A (Page5A-6)”.
6) Remove the valve timing inspection plug (2) and
Electrodes Condition bring the piston to TDC on the compression stroke
by turning the crankshaft until the line “A” on the
! CAUTION
generator rotor aligns with the slit “B” in the
Confirm the thread size and reach when generator cover.
replacing the plug. If the reach is too short,
carbon will be deposited on the screw
portion of the plug hole and engine damage
may result.
2
Check to see the worn or burnt condition of the
electrodes. If it is extremely worn or burnt, replace the
plug. And also replace the plug if it has a broken
insulator, damaged thread.
“A” “B”
I705H1020010-01
Valve clearance (when cold)

IN 0.10 – 0.20 mm (0.004 – 0.008 in)
Standard
EX 0.20 – 0.30 mm (0.008 – 0.012 in)

NOTE Adjustment
The clearance is adjusted by replacing the existing
• The clearance specification is for COLD
tappet shim by a thicker or thinner one.
state.
1) Remove the intake or exhaust camshaft. Refer to
• To turn the crankshaft for clearance “Engine Top Side Disassembly in Section 1D
checking, be sure to use a wrench, and (Page1D-16)”.
rotate in the normal running direction.
Spark plug should be removed. 2) Remove the tappet (1) and shim (2) by fingers or
magnetic hand.
7) In this condition, read the valve clearance at each
valve. If the clearance is out of specification, adjust
the clearance.
Special tool
(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)
1 2
(A)
I705H1020012-02
3) Check the figures printed on the shim. These figures

indicate the thickness of the shim, as illustrated.
I705H1020011-02
8) Reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of

removal.
I310G1020023-01
4) Select a replacement shim that will provide a

clearance within the specified range. For the
purpose of this adjustment, a total of 25 sizes of
tappet shim are available ranging from 1.20 to 2.20
mm in steps of 0.05 mm.
5) Fit the selected shim to the valve stem end, with
numbers toward tappet. Be sure to check shim size
with micrometer to ensure its size.
6) Install the camshafts. Refer to “Engine Top Side
Assembly in Section 1D (Page1D-18)”.

(INTAKE SIDE)
I310G1020024-02

(EXHAUST SIDE)
I310G1020025-02

NOTE Fuel Line Inspection

B705H10206006
• Be sure to apply engine oil to tappet shim
Inspect fuel line
top and bottom faces.
• When seating the tappet shim, be sure the
figure printed surface faces the tappet. Inspect the fuel line in the following procedures:
1) Remove the helmet box front cover. Refer to “Helmet
7) Rotate the engine so that the tappet is depressed Box Removal and Installation in Section 9D
fully. This will squeeze out oil trapped between the (Page9D-21)”.
shim and the tappet that could cause an incorrect 2) Remove the front frame cover. Refer to “Front Frame
measurement, then check the clearance again to Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D
confirm that it is within the specified range. (Page9D-17)”.
3) Inspect the fuel line (1) for damage and fuel leakage.
If any defects are found, the fuel line must be
replaced.
I310G1020026-01
8) Install the cylinder head cover. Refer to “Engine Top

Side Assembly in Section 1D (Page1D-18)”. 1
9) Install the spark plug and plug cap. Refer to “Spark
Plug Removal and Installation (Page0B-3)”. I705H1020050-01
10) Install other removed parts.
I705H1020051-01
4) Reinstall the removed parts.
Evaporative Emission Control System (E-33

Only)
B705H10206025
Inspect evaporative emission control system

Inspect the evaporative emission control system
periodically (E-33 only).

Engine Oil and Filter Change 6) Turn off the engine and wait about three minutes,
B705H10206007 then check the oil level through the inspection
Replace engine oil window. If the level is below mark “L”, add oil to “F”
Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 month) and every 6 level. If the level is above mark “F”, drain oil to “F”
000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter level.
Replace oil filter
Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 month) and every
18 000 km (11 000 miles, 36 months) thereafter
Oil should be changed while the engine is warm. Oil filter F
replacement at the above intervals, should be done L
together with the engine oil change.
Engine Oil Change

1) Keep the motorcycle upright with the center stand. I705H1020015-01
2) Place an oil pan below the engine, and drain oil by Oil Filter Replacement
removing the drain plug (1) and filler cap (2).
1) Drain engine oil in the same manner of engine oil
replacement procedures.
2) Remove the oil filter cap (1) and oil filter (2).
1
I705H1020014-03
1
2
I705H1020016-01
3) Replace the O-ring (3) with a new one.
2
I705H1020013-02
3) Tighten the oil drain plug to the specified torque.

Tightening torque
Oil drain plug: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
3
4) Pour new oil through the oil filler. When performing I705H1020017-02
an oil change (without oil filter replacement), the 4) Install the spring (4) to the oil filter cap.
engine will hold about 1.2 L (1.3/1.1 US/Imp qt) of oil. 5) Replace the O-ring (5) with a new one and apply
Use SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in JASO. engine oil to it.
5) Start the engine and allow it to run for three minutes
at idling speed. 4 5
I705H1020019-02

6) Install a new oil filter. 5) Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque.
7) Install the oil filter cap. Tightening torque
8) Pour fresh engine oil and check the oil level in the Final reduction gear drain plug: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-
same manner of engine oil replacement procedures. m, 8.5 lb-ft)
OIL: Engine Oil (SAE 10W-40, API SF/SG or SH/ 6) Pour new oil through the oil level check hole until the
SJ with JASO MA) oil overflows from the hole.
Necessary amount of engine oil 7) Tighten the oil level check plug to the specified
Oil change: 1.2 L (1.2/1.0 US/Imp qt) torque.
Filter change: 1.3 L (1.4/1.1 US/Imp qt) Tightening torque
Overhaul engine: 1.5 L (1.6/1.3 US/Imp qt) Final reduction gear oil level check plug: 16 N·m
(1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft)
Final Reduction Gear Oil Replacement
B705H10206026 OIL: Engine Oil (SAE 10W-40, API SF/SG or SH/
SJ with JASO MA)
Replace final reduction gear oil
Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 12 months) thereafter. Necessary amount of final reduction gear oil
Oil check 180 ml (0.38/0.32 US/lmp qt)
Replace the final reduction gear oil in the following
Overhaul 190 ml (0.40/0.33 US/lmp qt)
procedures:
1) Keep the motorcycle upright with the center stand. 8) Install the clutch covers. Refer to “V-belt Type
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission
2) Remove the clutch covers. Refer to “V-belt Type
Removal and Installation in Section 5A (Page5A-3)”.
Cooling Fan Filter Removal and Installation
3) Place the oil pan below the final reduction gear case. B705H10206028
4) Drain final reduction gear oil by removing the drain Refer to “Cooling Fan Filter Inspection in Section 5A
plug (1) and oil level check plug (2). (Page5A-6)”.
Cooling Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning

B705H10206027
Inspection
Refer to “Cooling Fan Filter Inspection in Section 5A
(Page5A-6)”.
2 Cleaning
Clean cooling fan filter
Every 3 000 km (1 800 miles)
1 1) Remove the cooling fan filter. Refer to “Cooling Fan
I705H1020018-01 Filter Inspection in Section 5A (Page5A-6)”.
2) Carefully use compressed air to clean the cooling
fan filter.
3) Install the cooling fan filter. Refer to “Cooling Fan
Filter Inspection in Section 5A (Page5A-6)”.

Drive V-belt Removal and Installation 1) Loosen the lock-nut (1) of the throttle pulling cable
B705H10206029 (2).
Inspect drive V-belt 2) Turn the adjuster (3) in or out until the throttle cable
Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months) play “a” (at the throttle grip) is between 2 – 4 mm
Replace drive V-belt (0.08 – 0.16 in).
Every 24 000 km (14 500 miles, 48 months) 3) Tighten the lock-nut (1) while holding the adjuster
(3).
Refer to “V-belt Type Continuously Variable Automatic
Transmission Removal and Installation in Section 5A
(Page5A-3)”.
Drive V-belt Inspection

B705H10206030
Inspect the drive V-belt in the following procedures:
1) Remove the clutch covers. Refer to “V-belt Type 1 3
2
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission I705H1020021-01
! WARNING
2) Inspect the drive V-belt for crack or other damage
and measure the width of belt if necessary. If any After the adjustment is completed, check that
abnormal point are found, replace the drive V-belt handlebar movement does not raise the
with a new one. Refer to “V-belt Type Continuously engine idle speed and that the throttle grip
Variable Automatic Transmission Removal and returns smoothly and automatically.
Installation in Section 5A (Page5A-3)”.
Cooling System Inspection

B705H10206015
Engine Coolant Level Inspection
Inspect cooling system
Replace engine coolant
Every 2 years
1) Keep the motorcycle upright with the center stand.
2) Open the fuel lid.
I705H1020052-01
3) Install the clutch covers. Refer to “V-belt Type

Throttle Cable Play Inspection and Adjustment

B705H10206031
Inspect throttle cable play

Initially at 1 000 km (6 000 miles, 2 month) and every I705H1020022-01
6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter 3) Check the engine coolant level by observing the full
Inspect and adjust the throttle cable play “a” as follows. and lower lines on the engine coolant reservoir tank.
If the level is below the lower line, add engine
Throttle cable play “a” coolant to the full line from the engine coolant
2.0 – 4.0 mm (0.08 – 0.16 in) reservoir tank filler.
“a”
I705H1020020-01
F
LLC
L
I705H1020023-02

Engine Coolant Change Air Bleeding From the Cooling Circuit

B705H10206032
1) Remove the front panel. Refer to “Front Panel Bleed air from the cooling circuit in the following
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- procedures:
14)”.
1) Remove the front panel. Refer to “Front Panel
2) Remove the under cover. Refer to “Under Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- 14)”.
16)”.
2) Remove the left footboard. Refer to “Footboard
! WARNING Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-
21)”.
Do not open the radiator cap when the engine 3) Support the motorcycle upright.
is hot, as you may be injured by escaping hot
liquid or vapor. Engine coolant may be 4) Pour engine coolant up to the radiator inlet.
harmful if swallowed or if it comes in contact
with skin or eyes. If engine coolant gets into
the eyes or in contact with the skin, flush
thoroughly with plenty of water. If swallowed,
induce vomiting and call physician
immediately.
3) Remove the radiator cap (1).
I705H1020027-01
1
5) Slowly swing the motorcycle, right and left, to bleed
the air trapped in the cooling circuit.
6) Add engine coolant up to the radiator inlet.
7) Start up the engine and bleed air from the radiator
inlet completely.
8) Add engine coolant up to the radiator inlet.
I705H1020024-02
9) Repeat the above procedures until no air bleeds
from the radiator inlet.
4) Drain engine coolant by disconnecting the radiator
outlet hose (2). 10) Loosen the air bleeding bolt (1) and check that the
engine coolant flows out.
1
2
I705H1020026-01
I705H1020028-02
5) Flush the radiator with fresh water if necessary.
6) Reconnect the radiator outlet hose.
7) Pour the specified engine coolant up to the radiator
inlet.
8) Bleed air from the cooling circuit.

11) Close the air bleeding bolt securely. ! WARNING

12) Close the radiator cap securely.
13) After warming up and cooling down the engine • The brake system of this motorcycle is
several times, add the engine coolant up to the full filled with a glycol-based brake fluid. Do
level of the reservoir. not use or mix different types of fluid such
as silicone-based or petroleum-based. Do
14) Install the removed parts.
not use any brake fluid taken from old,
! CAUTION used or unsealed containers. Never re-use
brake fluid left over from the last servicing
Repeat the above procedures several times or stored for a long period.
and make sure that the radiator is filled with
• Brake fluid, if it leaks, will interfere with
engine coolant up to the reservoir full level.
safe running and immediately discolor
painted surfaces. Check the brake hoses
LLC: Engine coolant capacity and hose joints for cracks and fluid
Engine side: 1 600 ml (1.7/1.4 US/lmp pt) leakage before riding.
Reservoir tank side: 250 ml (0.3/0.2 US/lmp qt)
Brake Fluid Level Check
Radiator Hose Inspection 1) Keep the motorcycle upright and place the
B705H10206033
Inspect the radiator hoses in the following procedures: handlebars straight.
1) Remove the left footboard. Refer to “Footboard 2) Check the brake fluid level by observing the lower
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- limit lines on the front and rear brake fluid reservoirs.
21)”. 3) When the level is below the lower limit line, replenish
2) Check the radiator hoses for crack, damage or with brake fluid that meets the following
engine coolant leakage. If any defect is found, specification.
replace the radiator hose with a new one. Specification and classification
DOT 4
LOWER
I705H1020032-01
I705H1020031-01
3) Install the left footboard. Refer to “Footboard LOWER

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-
21)”.
I705H1020033-01
Brake System Inspection

B705H10206016
Inspect Brake System

Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 month) and every 6
000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter
Inspect Brake Hose and Brake Fluid
Replace Brake Hose
Every 4 years
Replace Brake Fluid
Every 2 years I705H1020056-01

Brake Pad Check Front Brake Hose Inspection

The extent of brake pad wear can be checked by Inspect the front brake hoses and hose joints for crack,
observing the grooved limit line “A” on the pad. When the damage or fluid leakage. If any defects are found,
wear exceeds the grooved limit line, replace the pads replace the brake hose with a new one.
with the new ones. Refer to “Front Brake Pad
Replacement in Section 4B (Page4B-2)” and “Rear
Brake Pad Replacement in Section 4C (Page4C-2)”.
! CAUTION
Replace the brake pad as a set, otherwise
braking performance will be adversely
affected.
I705H1020029-01
Rear Brake Hose Inspection

Inspect the rear brake hose for crack, damage or fluid
leakage. If any defects are found, replace the brake
hose with a new one.
“A”
I705H1020053-02
I705H1020034-01
Brake Hose Replacement

B705H10206035
Refer to “Front Brake Hose Removal and Installation in
Section 4A (Page4A-6)” and “Rear Brake Hose Removal
and Installation in Section 4A (Page4A-6)”.
Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit

B705H10206036
Refer to “Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit in Section
4A (Page4A-4)”.
“A”
Brake Fluid Replacement
B705H10206037
Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement in Section 4A
(Page4A-5)”.
I705H1020054-02

Tire Inspection ! CAUTION

B705H10206017
Inspect tire The standard tire fitted on this motorcycle is

Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 6 months) 120/80 14M/C 58S for front and 150/70 13M/C
for rear. The use of tires other than those
Tire Tread Condition specified may cause instability. It is highly
Operating the motorcycle with excessively worn tires will recommended to use the specified tires.
decrease riding stability and consequently invite a
dangerous situation. It is highly recommended to replace Tire type
a tire when the remaining depth of tire tread reaches the BRIDGESTONE
following specification. Front: HOOP B03 G
Special tool Rear: HOOP B02 G
: 09900–20805 (Tire depth gauge)
Steering System Inspection
Tire tread depth (Service Limit) B705H10206018
FRONT: 1.6 mm (0.06 in)
Inspect steering system
REAR: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 month) and every
Steering should be adjusted properly for smooth turning
of handlebars and safe running. Overtighten steering
prevents smooth turning of the handlebars and too loose
steering will cause poor stability.
1) Check that there is no play in the steering stem while
grasping the lower fork tubes by supporting the
motorcycle so that the front wheel is off the ground,
with the wheel straight ahead, and pull forward.
I310G1020068-01
2) If play is found, read just the steering. Refer to
“Steering Stem Bearing Removal and Installation in
Tire Pressure
Section 6B (Page6B-9)”.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, steering will be
adversely affected and tire wear increased. Therefore,
maintain the correct tire pressure for good roadability or
shorter tire life will result. Cold inflation tire pressure is as
follows.
Cold inflation tire pressure
SOLO RINDING DUAL RIDING
kPa kgf/cm2 psi kPa kgf/cm2 psi
FRONT 175 1.75 25 175 1.75 25
REAR 200 2.00 29 250 2.50 36
I705H1020035-02
I310G1020069-01

Front Fork Inspection Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Mounting Inspection

B705H10206019 B705H10206021
Inspect front forks Tighten exhaust pipe bolts and muffler bolts
Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months) Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 month) and every
Inspect the front forks for oil leakage, scoring or
scratches on the outer surface of the inner tubes. Check the exhaust pipe bolts, muffler bolts and nut to the
Replace any defective parts, if necessary. Refer to specified torque.
“Front Fork Disassembly and Assembly in Section 2B
Tightening torque
(Page2B-3)”.
Exhaust pipe bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
Muffler mounting bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
lb-ft)
Muffler connecting bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
lb-ft)
I705H1020036-02
Rear Suspension Inspection (c)

B705H10206020 (a)
Inspect rear suspension I705H1020038-02

Inspect the rear shock absorber for oil leakage and
mounting rubbers for wear and damage. Replace any
(b)
defective parts, if necessary. Refer to “Rear Shock
Absorber Inspection in Section 2C (Page2C-5)”.
(b)
I705H1020040-02
I705H1020037-01

Chassis Bolt and Nut Inspection

B705H10206022
Tighten chassis bolt and nut 5 (e)

Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 month) and every 6
000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter
Check that all chassis bolts and nuts are tightened to
their specified torque.
I705H1020061-01
1 (a)
5. Brake master cylinder mounting bolt
: 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)
6 (f)
7 (g)
I705H1020057-03
1. Handlebar holder clamp bolt

: 55 N⋅m (5.5 kgf-m, 40.0 lb-ft)
I705H1020060-01
2 (b)
6. Front fork clamp bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
7. Front fork cap bolt : 45 N⋅m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 lb-ft)
3 (c)
13 (m)
I705H1020059-01
2. Handlebar holder set bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 165 lb-ft) 10 (j)
3. Steering stem lock nut : 30 N⋅m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.5 lb-ft)
11 (k)
9 (i)
8 (h)
13 (m)
I705H1020062-03
4 (d) 8. Front axle : 65 N⋅m (6.5 kgf-m, 47.0 lb-ft)

9. Front axle pinch bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
10. Front brake caliper mounting : 35 N⋅m (3.5 kgf-m, 25.5 lb-ft)
bolt
11. Brake caliper air bleeder valve : 6.0 N⋅m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)
(Front & Rear)
13. Brake disc bolt (Front & Rear) : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
I705H1020058-06
4. Handlebar clamp bolt

: 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

19 (s)
18 (r)
17 (q)
12 (l)
I705H1020063-03 I705H1020066-04
12. Brake hose union bolt (Front & Rear) 17. Engine mounting nut : 93 N⋅m (9.3 kgf-m, 67.0 lb-ft)
: 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 18. Crankcase bracket nut : 85 N⋅m (8.5 kgf-m, 61.5 lb-ft)
19. Rubber damper bolt : 85 N⋅m (8.5 kgf-m, 61.5 lb-ft)
14 (n)
20 (t) 21 (u)
I705H1020064-01
I705H1020067-01
14. Rear shock absorber mounting bolt/nut
(Upper & Lower) 20. Exhaust pipe bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
: 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft) 21. Muffler connecting bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
22 (v)
16 (p)
16 (p)
15 (o) 22 (v)
I705H1020065-01 I705H1020068-01
15. Cushion lever nut : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft) 22. Muffler mounting bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
16. Cushion rod nut : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

3) Connect the tachometer to the high-tension cord (1).
11 (k)
24 (x)
1
23 (w)
I705H1020069-01
11. Brake caliper air bleeder : 6 N⋅m (6.0 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft) I705H1020055-01
valve (Front & Rear) 4) Seated on the motorcycle with the motorcycle on
23. Rear brake caliper : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
mounting bolt
level ground, increase the engine RPMs slowly and
24. Rear axle nut : 120 N⋅m (12.0 kgf-m, 87.0 lb-ft) note the RPM at which the motorcycle begins to
move forward.
Compression Pressure Check Special tool
B705H10206023
: 09900–26006 (Engine tachometer (solar
Refer to “Compression Pressure Check in Section 1D
cell type))
(Page1D-3)”.
Engagement r/min
Oil Pressure Check 2 100 – 2 700 r/min
B705H10206024
Refer to “Oil Pressure Check in Section 1E (Page1E-3)”.
SDS Check
B705H10206038
Refer to “SDS Check in Section 1A (Page1A-17)”.
Automatic Clutch Inspection

B705H10206039
This motorcycle is equipped with an automatic clutch
and variable ratio belt drive transmission. The
engagement of the clutch is governed by engine RPMs
and centrifugal mechanism located in the clutch.
To insure proper performance and longer lifetime of the I705H1020041-01
clutch assembly it is essential that the clutch engages 5) Disconnect the tachometer and install the frame front
smoothly and gradually. The following inspections must cover.
be performed.
Clutch “Lock-up” Inspection
Initial Engagement Inspection Perform this inspection to determine if the clutch is
1) Warm up the engine to normal operating engaging fully and not slipping.
temperature. 1) Warm up the engine to normal operating
2) Remove the frame front cover. Refer to “Front Frame temperature.
Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D 2) Remove the frame front cover. Refer to “Front Frame
(Page9D-17)”. Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D
(Page9D-17)”.
3) Apply the front and rear brakes as firm as possible.
I705H1020043-01

4) Briefly open the throttle fully and note the maximum Parking Brake (Brake-lock) Adjustment
engine RPMs sustained during the test cycle. B705H10206041
Adjust the brake-lock in the following procedures:
! CAUTION 1) Pull the brake-lock lever by one step (1 notch).
Do not apply full power for more than 3 NOTE
seconds or damage to the clutch or engine
may occur. The brake-lock lever have 2 – 4 steps (2 – 4
notches) when pulling in fully.
Lock-up r/min
4 000 – 5 000 r/min
Parking Brake (Brake-lock) Inspection

B705H10206040
Inspect that the wheel is locked up when pulling the
brake-lock lever 2 – 4 notches and moving the
motorcycle forward to make sure that the brake-lock acts
enough.
I705H1020044-01
2) With the lock-nut (1) loosening, adjust the adjuster

bolt (2) in until the brake pad comes in contact with
brake disc.
3) Tighten the lock-nut (1).
2
I705H1020044-01
I705H1020048-01
4) Return the brake-lock lever to original position and

inspect the brake-lock.
! CAUTION
I705H1020045-01 After the brake-lock adjustment, inspect the
brake fluid level of rear brake.
LOWER
I705H1020033-01

Specifications
Tightening Torque Specifications
B705H10207001
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Spark plug 11 1.1 8.0 )(Page0B-3)
Oil drain plug 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page0B-9)
Final reduction gear drain plug 12 1.2 8.5 )(Page0B-10)
Final reduction gear oil level check plug 16 1.6 11.5 )(Page0B-10)
Exhaust pipe bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page0B-16)
Muffler mounting bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page0B-16)
Muffler connecting bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page0B-16)
NOTE
The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.
“Chassis Bolt and Nut Inspection (Page0B-17)”
Reference:
For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section
0C (Page0C-7)”.

Recommended Service Material
B705H10208001
Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note
Engine Oil SAE 10W-40, API SF/SG or SH/SJ — )(Page0B-10) / )(Page0B-
with JASO MA 10)
NOTE
Required service material is also described in the following.
“Lubrication Points (Page0B-2)”
Special Tool
B705H10208002
09900–20803 09900–20805
Thickness gauge Tire depth gauge
)(Page0B-4) / )(Page0B- )(Page0B-15)
5)
09900–26006 09930–10121
Engine tachometer (solar Spark plug wrench set
cell type)
)(Page0B-19) )(Page0B-3)

Service Data: 0C-1
Service Data
Specifications
Service Data
B705H10307001
Valve + Valve Guide
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
IN. 31.0 (1.22) —
Valve diam.
EX. 27.0 (1.06) —
IN. 0.10 – 0.20 (0.003 – 0.008) —
Tappet clearance (when cold)
EX. 0.20 – 0.30 (0.008 – 0.009) —
IN. 0.10 – 0.37 (0.004 – 0.015) —
Valve guide to valve stem clearance
EX. 0.30 – 0.57 (0.012 – 0.022) —
Valve guide I.D. IN. & EX. 4.500 – 4.512 (0.1772 – 0.1776) —
IN. 4.475 – 4.490 (0.1762 – 0.1768) —
Valve stem O.D.
EX. 4.455 – 4.470 (0.1754 – 0.1760) —
Valve stem deflection IN. & EX. — 0.35 (0.014)
Valve stem runout IN. & EX. — 0.05 (0.002)
Valve head thickness IN. & EX. — 0.5 (0.02)
Valve seat width (30°, 45°, 60°) IN. & EX. 0.9 – 1.1 (0.035 – 0.043) —
Valve head radial runout IN. & EX. — 0.03 (0.001)
Valve spring free length IN. & EX. — 38.6 (1.52)
137.3 N (14.0 kgf, 30.1 lbs) at length 33.35 mm
Valve spring tension IN. & EX. —
(1.313 in)
Camshaft + Cylinder Head

Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
IN. 36.61 – 36.66 (1.441 – 1.443) 36.31 (1.430)
Cam height
EX. 35.94 – 35.99 (1.415 – 1.417) 35.64 (1.403)
Camshaft journal oil clearance IN. & EX. 0.019 – 0.053 (0.0007 – 0.0021) 0.15 (0.006)
Camshaft journal holder I.D. IN. & EX. 22.012 – 22.025 (0.8666 – 0.8671) —
Camshaft journal O.D. IN. & EX. 21.972 – 21.993 (0.8650 – 0.8659) —
Camshaft runout IN. & EX. — 0.10 (0.004)
Cam chain pin (at arrow “3”) 15th pin —
Cylinder head distortion — 0.05 (0.002)

0C-2 Service Data:
Cylinder + Piston + Piston Ring

Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
E-02, 19, 1 060 – 1 140 kPa 660 kPa
Compression pressure 24, 54 (10.6 – 11.4 kgf/cm2, 151 – 162 psi) (6.0 kgf/cm2, 94 psi)
(Automatic de-comp. actuated) E-03, 28, 1 000 – 1 080 kPa 620 kPa
33 (10.0 – 10.8 kgf/cm2, 142 – 154 psi) (6.2 kgf/cm2, 88 psi)
Piston to cylinder clearance 0.025 – 0.035 (0.0010 – 0.0014) 0.120 (0.005)
No nicks or
Cylinder bore 81.000 – 81.015 (3.1890 – 3.1896)
scraches
80.970 – 80.985 (3.1878 – 3.1884)
Piston diam. 80.880 (3.1842)
(Measure at 15 mm (0.6 in) from the skirt end.)
Cylinder distortion — 0.05 (0.002)
1st IT Approx. 7.5 (0.30) 6.0 (0.24)
Piston ring free end gap
2nd 2T Approx. 11.5 (0.45) 9.2 (0.36)
1st 0.06 – 0.21 (0.002 – 0.008) 0.5 (0.02)
Piston ring end gap
2nd 0.06 – 0.18 (0.002 – 0.007) 0.5 (0.02)
1st — 0.18 (0.007)
Piston ring to groove clearance
2nd — 0.15 (0.006)
1st 1.21 – 1.23 (0.0476 – 0.0484) —
Piston ring groove width 2nd 1.01 – 1.03 (0.0398 – 0.0406) —
Oil 2.01 – 2.03 (0.0791 – 0.0799) —
1st 1.17 – 1.19 (0.461 – 0.469) —
Piston ring thickness
2nd 0.97 – 0.99 (0.0382 – 0.0390) —
Piston pin bore 20.002 – 20.008 (0.7874 – 0.7877) 20.030 (0.789)
Piston pin O.D. 19.996 – 20.000 (0.7872 – 0.7874) 19.980 (0.787)
Conrod + Crankshaft
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
Conrod small end I.D. 20.006 – 20.014 (0.7876 – 0.7880) 20.040 (0.789)
Conrod deflection — 3.0 (0.12)
Conrod big end side clearance 0.10 – 0.65 (0.004 – 0.026) 1.0 (0.04)
Conrod big end width 21.95 – 22.00 (0.864 – 0.866) —
Width between crankshaft webs 59.9 – 60.1 (2.358 – 2.366) —
Crankshaft runout — 0.08 (0.003)
Oil Pump
Item Standard Limit
Above 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.27 psi)
Oil pressure (at 60 °C, 140 °F) Below 110 kPa (1.1 kgf/cm2, 15.64 psi) —
at 3 000 r/min
Clutch
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
Clutch wheel I.D. 160.0 – 160.2 (6.30 – 6.31) 160.5 (6.32)
Clutch shoe thickness 3.0 (0.12) 2.0 (0.08)
Engage r/min 2 100 – 2 700 r/min —
Lock-up r/min 4 000 – 5 000 r/min —

Service Data: 0C-3
Transmission
Unit: mm (in) Except ratio
Item Specification Note
Primary reduction ratio 1.000 —
Reduction ratio 2.200 – 0.839
Secondary reduction ratio 2.214 —
Final reduction ratio 2.666 —
Drive V-belt width 25.1 (0.99) 24.1 (0.95)
Movable driven face spring free
150.0 (5.90) 142.5 (5.61)
length
Movable drive face roller O.D. 26.00 – 26.16 (1.024 – 1.030) —
Drive/driven face ware — 0.4 (0.02)
Injector + Fuel Pump + Fuel Pressure Regulator

Injector resistance Approx. 10.3 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F) —
35 ml and more
Fuel pump discharge amount —
For 10 sec., at 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi)
Fuel pressure regulator operating
Approx. 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi) —
set pressure
FI Sensors
CKP sensor resistance 190 – 290 Ω
(+) probe: G/W,
CKP sensor peak voltage 4.5 V and more (When cranking)
(–) probe: Bl
IAP sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
IAP sensor output voltage Approx. 1.5 – 3.5 V at idle speed
TP sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
Closed Approx. 0.6 V
TP sensor output voltage
Opened Approx. 3.8 V
ECT sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
ECT sensor resistance Approx. 2.58 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)
IAT sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
IAT sensor resistance Approx. 2.58 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)
TO sensor resistance 16.5 – 22.3 kΩ
Normal 0.4 – 1.4 V
TO sensor output voltage
Leaning 3.7 – 4.4 V
Injector voltage Battery voltage
(+) probe: W,
Ignition coil primary peak voltage 150 V and more (When cranking)
(–) probe: Ground
HO2 sensor resistance 11.5 – 14.5 Ω at 23 °C (73.4 °F)
Idle speed 0.3 V and less
HO2 sensor output voltage
3 000 r/min 0.7 V and more
STP sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
STP sensor output voltage
STP actuator resistance Approx. 6.5 Ω

0C-4 Service Data:
Throttle Body
Specification
Item
E-02, 03, 19, 24, 28, 54 E-33
ID No. 05H0 05H1
Bore size 38 mm (1.5 in) ←
Fast idle r/min 1 500 – 2 000 r/min ←
Idle r/min 1 450 ± 100 r/min ←
Throttle cable play 2.0 – 4.0 mm (0.08 – 0.16 in) ←
Thermostat + Radiator + Fan + Coolant

Item Standard / Specification Limit
Thermostat valve opening
Approx. 82 °C (180 °F) —
temperature
Thermostat valve lift Over 3 mm (0.12 in) at 95 °C (203 °F) —
20 °C (68 °F) Approx. 2.58 kΩ —
Engine coolant temperature sensor 50 °C (122 °F) Approx. 0.77 kΩ —
resistance 80 °C (176 °F) Approx. 0.28 kΩ —
110 °C (230 °F) Approx. 0.12 kΩ —
Radiator cap valve opening
93.3 – 122.7 kPa (0.93 – 1.23 kgf/cm2, 13.3 – 17.4 psi) —
pressure
Cooling fan thermo-switch operating OFF → ON Approx. 98 °C (208 °F) —
temperature ON → OFF Approx. 92 °C (198 °F) —
Use an anti-freeze/coolant compatible with aluminum
Engine coolant type —
radiator, mixed with distilled water only, at the ratio of 50 : 50.
Reserve tank side Approx. 250 ml (0.3/0.2 US/Imp oz) —
Engine coolant including reserve
Engine side Approx. 1 700 ml (1.8/1.5 US/Imp oz) —
Electrical
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard / Specification Note
Type NGK: CR7E DENSO: U22ESR-N
Spark plug
Gap 0.7 – 0.8 (0.28 – 0.03)
Spark performance Over 8.0 (0.3) at 1 atm.
CKP sensor resistance 190 – 290 Ω G – Bl
(+) probe: G/W,
CKP sensor peak voltage 4.5 V and more
(–) probe: Bl
Primary 1.2 – 3.5 Ω
Ignition coil resistance
Secondary 15 – 30 kΩ
(+) probe: W,
(–) probe: Ground
Generator coil resistance Charging 0.1 – 1.0 Ω Y–Y
Generator no-load voltage
55 V and more at 5 000 r/min
(When engine is cold)
Generator Max. output Approx. 400 W at 5 000 r/min
Standard 7 (0.28)
Starter motor brush length
Limit 3.5 (0.14)
Regulated voltage 14.0 – 15.5 V at 5 000 r/min
Starter relay resistance 3–6Ω
Type designation FTZ9-BS
Battery
Capacity 12 V 32.4 kC (9 Ah)/10 HR
HI 10 A
Headlight
LO 10 A
Meter 15 A
Fuse size Ignition 10 A
Signal 15 A
Fan motor 10 A
Main 30 A

Service Data: 0C-5
Wattage
Unit: W
Standard / Specification
Item
E-02, 19, 24, 54 E-03, 28, 33
HI 60/55 ←
Headlight
LO 55 ←
Parking/position light 5x2 ←
Brake light/Taillight 21/5 x 2 ←
Turn signal light 21 x 2 (Front), 21 x 2 (Rear) 27/8 x 2 (Front), 21 x 2 (Rear)
License plate light 5 ←
Speedometer/tachometer light LED ←
Engine coolant temp. gauge light LED ←
Fuel level gauge light LED ←
Immobilizer indicator light LED ←
Oil change indicator LCD ←
FI indicator light LED ←
Brake-lock indicator light LED ←
High beam indicator light LED ←
Turn signal indicator light LED x 2 ←
Trunk light 5 ←
Brake + Wheel
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
Front 4.5 ± 0.2 (0.18 ± 0.008) 4.0 (0.16)
Brake disc thickness
Rear 5.0 ± 0.2 (0.20 ± 0.008) 4.5 (0.18)
Brake disc runout — 0.30 (0.01)
Front &
Master cylinder bore 12.700 – 12.743 (0.500 – 0.502) —
Rear
Front &
Master cylinder piston diameter 12.657 – 12.684 (0.498 – 0.499) —
Rear
Front 25.400 – 25.450 (1.000 – 1.002) —
Brake caliper cylinder bore
Rear 27.00 – 27.05 (1.063 – 1.065) —
Front 25.318 – 25.368 (0.997 – 0.999) —
Brake caliper piston diameter
Rear 26.918 – 26.968 (1.060 – 1.062) —
Brake fluid type DOT 4 —
Axial — 2.0 (0.08)
Wheel rim runout
Radial — 2.0 (0.08)
Front — 0.25 (0.01)
Wheel axle runout
Rear — 0.25 (0.01)
Front 14 M/C x MT3.00 —
Wheel rim size
Rear 13 M/C x MT4.00 —
Suspension
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Item
Front fork stroke 110 (4.33) —
Front fork spring free length 347.6 (13.69) 340
Front fork oil type G-10 —
Front fork oil capacity (each leg) 301 ml (10.17/10.60 US/lmp oz) —
87 (3.43)
Front fork oil level —
(without spring, inner/outer tube fully pressed)
Front fork inner tube O.D. 41 (1.61)
Rear wheel travel 100 (3.94) —
Rear shock absorber spring adjuster 3rd position —

0C-6 Service Data:
Tire
Item Standard Limit
Front 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm2, 25 psi) —
Solo riding
Cold inflation tire Rear 200 kPa (2.00 kgf/cm2, 29 psi) —
pressure Front 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm2, 25 psi) —
Dual riding
Rear 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) —
Front 120/80-14M/C 58S —
Tire size
Rear 150/70-13M/C 64S —
Front BRIDGESTONE HOOP B03G —
Tire type
Rear BRIDGESTONE HOOP B02G —
Tire tread depth Front — 1.6 mm (0.06 in)
(Recommended depth) Rear — 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Fuel + Oil
Use only unleaded gasoline of at least 87 pump octane or 91
octane (R/2 + M/2) or higher rated by the research method.
Gasoline containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether), less E-03, 28, 33
Fuel type than 10% ethanol, or less than 5% methanol with
appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitor is permissible.
Gasoline used should be graded 91 octane or higher. An The others
unleaded gasoline type is recommended. countries
Fuel tank capacity Including reserve 13.5 L (3.6/3.0 US/lmp gal)
Reserve 4.0 L (3.17/2.64 US/lmp gal)
Engine oil and final gear oil type SAE 10W-40, API SF/SG or SH/SJ with JASO MA
Oil change 1 200 ml (1.3/1.0 US/lmp qt)
Engine oil capacity Filter change 1 300 ml (1.4/1.1 US/lmp qt)
Overhaul 1 500 ml (1.6/1.3 US/lmp qt)
Oil change 180 ml (6.1/6.3 US/lmp oz)
Final gear oil capacity
Overhaul 190 ml (6.4/6.7 US/lmp oz)

Service Data: 0C-7

B705H10307002
Engine
Item N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Cam chain tensioner bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Cam chain guide No.1 bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Camshaft journal holder bolt 10 1.0 7.0
Engine oil drain plug 23 2.3 16.5
Final gear oil drain plug M8 12 1.2 8.5
Final gear oil level bolt M10 16 1.6 11.5
Final gear oil filler bolt M16 23 2.3 16.5
Starter clutch bolt 26 2.6 19.0
Generator stator bolt 11 1.1 8.0
CKP sensor bolt 6 0.6 4.5
8 mm 22 2.2 16.0
Crankcase bolt
6 mm 11 1.1 8.0
Balancer drive gear nut 150 15.0 108.5
Balancer driven gear nut 50 5.0 36.0
Oil pump mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0
Generator rotor nut 160 16.0 115.5
Final gear cover bolt 22 2.2 16.0
Clutch housing nut 85 8.5 61.5
Clutch shoe nut 105 10.5 76.0
Fixed drive face nut 105 10.5 76.0
Inner clutch cover bolt 11 1.1 8.0
Generator cover bolt 11 1.1 8.0
Oil filter cap bolt 10 1.0 7.0
L130 25 2.5 18.0
Cylinder head bolt Initial 25 2.5 18.0
L190
Final 42 4.2 30.5
Cam chain tension adjuster mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0
Cam chain tension adjuster cap bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Cylinder head cover bolt 14 1.4 10.0
Starter motor mounting bolt 7 0.7 5.0
Starter motor lead wire bolt 3 0.3 2.0
Starter motor housing bolt 4 0.4 3.0
Spark plug 11 1.1 8.0
Oil sump filter cover bolt 10 1.0 7.0
Oil gallery plug (cylinder head) 10 1.0 7.0
M8 12 1.2 8.5
Main gallery plug M10 16 1.6 11.5
M14 23 2.3 16.5
TDC inspection plug 23 2.3 16.5
Water jacket plug 40 4.0 29.0
Exhaust pipe bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Muffler connecting bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Muffler mounting bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Cooling System
Cooling fan mounting bolt 7 0.7 5.0
Radiator mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0
Cooling fan thermo-switch 17 1.7 12.5
ECT sensor 12 1.2 8.5
Thermostat case bolt 10 1.0 7.0
Thermostat case air bleeder bolt 5.5 0.6 4.3
Water pump mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0

0C-8 Service Data:
FI System and Intake Air System

Fuel cut valve bolt 3.5 0.35 2.5
Fuel pump mounting bolt 4.5 0.45 3.3
Fuel tank mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0
Fuel hose bolt 10 1.0 7.0
IAT sensor mounting screw 3.5 0.35 2.5
Speed sensor bolt 10 1.0 7.0
Chassis
Pillion rider handle bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Front axle 65 6.5 47.0
Front axle pinch bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Front brake caliper pad pin 18 1.8 13.0
Front brake caliper mounting bolt 35 3.5 25.5
Front brake caliper bracket pin bolt 18 1.8 13.0
Front brake caliper air bleeder valve 6 0.6 4.5
Brake disc bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Brake hose union bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Master cylinder mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0
Handlebar clamp bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Front fork cylinder bolt 30 3.0 21.5
Front fork clamp bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Front fork cap bolt 45 4.5 32.5
Steering stem nut 30 3.0 21.5
Steering stem lock-nut 30 3.0 21.5
Handlebar holder set bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Handlebar holder clamp bolt 55 5.5 40.0
Rear axle nut 120 12.0 87.0
Rear brake caliper mounting bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Rear brake caliper pad pin 18 1.8 13.0
Brake-lock housing bolt 23 2.3 16.5
Brake-lock cable lock-nut 16 1.6 11.5
Crankcase bracket mounting nut 85 8.5 61.5
Crankcase bracket rubber damper bolt 85 8.5 61.5
Engine mounting nut 93 9.3 67.5
Rear shock absorber mounting bolt 50 5.0 36.0
Cushion lever mounting nut 80 8.0 58.0
Rear cushion rod nut 50 5.0 36.0
Swingarm bolt 50 5.0 36.0
Center stand pivot bolt 50 5.0 36.0
Brake lever pivot bolt 1 0.1 0.5
Brake lever pivot bolt lock-nut 6 0.6 4.5

Service Data: 0C-9
Tightening Torque Chart

For other bolts and nuts not listed in the preceding page, refer to this chart:
Bolt Diameter Conventional or “4” marked bolt “7” marked bolt
“a” (mm) N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
4 1.5 0.15 1.0 2.3 0.23 1.5
5 3 0.3 2.0 5 0.5 3.5
6 5.5 0.55 4.0 10 1.0 7.0
8 13 1.3 9.5 23 2.3 16.5
10 29 2.9 21.0 50 5.0 36.0
12 45 4.5 32.5 85 8.5 61.5
14 65 6.5 47.0 135 13.5 97.5
16 105 10.5 76.0 210 21.0 152.0
18 160 16.0 115.5 240 24.0 173.5
1 2 3
“a” “a” “a”
I649G1030001-03
1. Conventional bolt 2. “4” marked bolt 3. “7” marked bolt

0C-10 Service Data:

Section 1
Engine
CONTENTS
Precautions .................................................1-1 DTC “C28” (P1655): Secondary Throttle

Precautions............................................................. 1-1 Valve Actuator (STVA) Malfunction.................1A-45
Precautions for Engine.......................................... 1-1 DTC “C29” (P1654-H/L): Secondary Throttle
Position Sensor (STPS) ..................................1A-49
Engine General Information and DTC “C32” (P0201): Fuel Injector Circuit
Diagnosis ................................................. 1A-1 Malfunction......................................................1A-52
DTC “C40” (P0505, P0506 or P0507): ISC
General Description .............................................1A-1
Valve Circuit Malfunction.................................1A-55
Injection Timing Description ................................ 1A-1
DTC “C41” (P0230-H/L): FP Relay Circuit
Self-Diagnosis Function ...................................... 1A-2
Malfunction......................................................1A-61
Schematic and Routing Diagram........................1A-4 DTC “42” (P1650): IG Switch Circuit
FI System Wiring Diagram .................................. 1A-4 Malfunction......................................................1A-63
Terminal Alignment of ECM Coupler (Harness DTC “C44” (P0130, P0135): HO2 Sensor
Side).................................................................. 1A-5 (HO2S) Circuit Malfunction .............................1A-64
Component Location ...........................................1A-6 Specifications .....................................................1A-67
FI System Parts Location .................................... 1A-6 Service Data......................................................1A-67
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............1A-7 Special Tools and Equipment ...........................1A-68
Engine Symptom Diagnosis ................................ 1A-7 Special Tool ......................................................1A-68
DTC Table......................................................... 1A-11
Fail-Safe Function Table ................................... 1A-11 Emission Control Devices ...................... 1B-1
FI System Troubleshooting ............................... 1A-12
Precautions...........................................................1B-1
Self-Diagnostic Procedures .............................. 1A-13
Precautions for Emission Control Devices ..........1B-1
Self-Diagnosis Reset Procedures ..................... 1A-14
General Description .............................................1B-1
Use of SDS Diagnostic Procedures .................. 1A-14
Fuel Injection System Description.......................1B-1
Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset Procedures......... 1A-15
Crankcase Emission Control System
Show Data When Trouble (Displaying Data at
Description ........................................................1B-2
the Time of DTC) ............................................ 1A-16
Exhaust Emission Control System
SDS Check ....................................................... 1A-17
Description ........................................................1B-3
Malfunction Code and Defective Condition
Noise Emission Control System Description.......1B-3
Table ............................................................... 1A-20
DTC “C12” (P0335): CKP Sensor Circuit Repair Instructions ..............................................1B-4
Malfunction...................................................... 1A-22 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and
DTC “C13” (P0105-H/L): IAP Sensor Circuit Installation .........................................................1B-4
Malfunction...................................................... 1A-25 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Inspection ........1B-4
DTC “C14” (P0120/H/L): TP Sensor Circuit PCV Hose Inspection ..........................................1B-5
Malfunction...................................................... 1A-30 PCV Hose Removal and Installation ...................1B-5
DTC “C15” (P0115-H/L): ECT Sensor Circuit Specifications .......................................................1B-6
Malfunction...................................................... 1A-33 Service Data........................................................1B-6
DTC “C16” (P0500): Speed Sensor .................. 1A-36 Tightening Torque Specifications........................1B-6
DTC “C21” (P0110-H/L): IAT Sensor Circuit Special Tools and Equipment .............................1B-6
Malfunction...................................................... 1A-39 Special Tool ........................................................1B-6
DTC “C23” (P1651-H/L): TO Sensor Circuit
Malfunction...................................................... 1A-42 Engine Electrical Devices ....................... 1C-1
DTC “C24” (P0351): Ignition System Precautions...........................................................1C-1
Malfunction...................................................... 1A-45 Precautions for Engine Electrical Device ............1C-1

1-ii Table of Contents
Repair Instructions ..............................................1C-1 Cylinder Head Disassembly and Reassembly ..1D-25

ECM Removal and Installation............................1C-1 Cylinder Head Related Parts Inspection ...........1D-29
CKP Sensor Inspection .......................................1C-1 Valve Guide Replacement ................................1D-32
CKP Sensor Removal and Installation ................1C-1 Valve Seat Repair .............................................1D-33
IAP Sensor Inspection.........................................1C-2 Cylinder Disassembly and Assembly ................1D-33
IAP Sensor Removal and Installation..................1C-2 Cylinder Inspection............................................1D-34
TP Sensor Inspection..........................................1C-2 Piston Ring Removal and Installation ...............1D-34
TP Sensor Adjustment ........................................1C-2 Piston and Related Parts Inspection .................1D-35
TP Sensor Removal and Installation...................1C-3 Engine Bottom Side Disassembly .....................1D-37
ECT Sensor Inspection .......................................1C-3 Engine Bottom Side Assembly..........................1D-44
ECT Sensor Removal and Installation ................1C-3 Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection......................1D-51
Speed Sensor Inspection ....................................1C-3 Conrod and Crankshaft Inspection....................1D-51
Speed Sensor Removal and Installation .............1C-4 Width Between Crankshaft Webs .....................1D-52
IAT Sensor Inspection.........................................1C-4 Bearing Inspection ............................................1D-52
IAT Sensor Removal and Installation..................1C-4 Bearing Removal and Installation .....................1D-52
TO Sensor Inspection .........................................1C-4 Rear Suspension Mounting Bushing Removal
TO Sensor Removal and Installation ..................1C-5 and Installation ................................................1D-54
STP Sensor Inspection .......................................1C-5 Specifications .....................................................1D-55
STP Sensor Adjustment......................................1C-5 Service Data......................................................1D-55
STP Sensor Removal and Installation ................1C-6 Tightening Torque Specifications......................1D-57
ISC Valve Inspection...........................................1C-6 Special Tools and Equipment ...........................1D-58
ISC Valve Removal and Installation....................1C-6 Recommended Service Material .......................1D-58
HO2 Sensor Inspection .......................................1C-6 Special Tool ......................................................1D-58
HO2 Sensor Removal and Installation ................1C-6
Specifications.......................................................1C-7 Engine Lubrication System .................... 1E-1
Service Data........................................................1C-7 Precautions...........................................................1E-1
Tightening Torque Specifications........................1C-7 Precautions for Engine Oil ..................................1E-1
Special Tools and Equipment .............................1C-7 Schematic and Routing Diagram ........................1E-1
Special Tool ........................................................1C-7 Engine Lubrication System Chart Diagram .........1E-1
Engine Lubrication Circuit Diagram.....................1E-2
Engine Mechanical .................................. 1D-1 Diagnostic Information and Procedures ............1E-3
Precautions...........................................................1D-1 Engine Lubrication Symptom Diagnosis .............1E-3
Precautions for Engine Mechanical.....................1D-1 Oil Pressure Check .............................................1E-3
Schematic and Routing Diagram........................1D-1 Repair Instructions ..............................................1E-4
Camshaft and Sprocket Assembly Diagram .......1D-1 Engine Oil and Filter Replacement .....................1E-4
Throttle Cable Routing Diagram..........................1D-2 Oil Sump Filter Removal and Installation ............1E-4
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............1D-3 Oil Sump Filter Cleaning .....................................1E-4
Compression Pressure Check ............................1D-3 Oil Pump Removal and Installation .....................1E-5
Repair Instructions ..............................................1D-4 Oil Pump Inspection ............................................1E-5
Engine Components Removable with the Piston Cooling Nozzle Removal and
Engine in Place .................................................1D-4 Installation .........................................................1E-5
Engine Assembly Removal and Installation ........1D-6 Piston Cooling Nozzle Inspection........................1E-6
Crankcase bracket Removal and Installation......1D-9 Specifications .......................................................1E-6
Crankcase bracket Inspection.............................1D-9 Service Data........................................................1E-6
Air Cleaner Box Removal and Installation...........1D-9 Tightening Torque Specifications........................1E-6
Air Cleaner Element Inspection.........................1D-10 Special Tools and Equipment .............................1E-7
Air Cleaner Drain Plug Inspection .....................1D-10 Special Tool ........................................................1E-7
Throttle Cable Removal and Installation ...........1D-10
Throttle Cable Adjustment.................................1D-10 Engine Cooling System ...........................1F-1
Throttle Body Components ...............................1D-11 Precautions........................................................... 1F-1
Throttle Body Construction................................1D-12 Engine Cooling System Warning ........................ 1F-1
Throttle Body Removal and Installation ............1D-13
General Description ............................................. 1F-1
Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly........1D-13
Cooling System Description ................................ 1F-1
Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning .............1D-15
Engine Coolant Description................................. 1F-1
Engine Top Side Disassembly ..........................1D-16
Cooling Fan Thermo-Switch Description............. 1F-2
Engine Top Side Assembly ...............................1D-18
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Camshaft Inspection .........................................1D-22
Description ........................................................ 1F-3
Cam Chain Tension Adjuster Inspection...........1D-24
Schematic and Routing Diagram ........................ 1F-4
Cam Chain Guide Inspection ............................1D-25
Cooling Circuit Diagram ...................................... 1F-4

Table of Contents 1-iii
Radiator Hose Routing Diagram ......................... 1F-5 Fuel Pump Inspection ...................................... 1G-14
Component Location ........................................... 1F-5 Fuel Injector Inspection .................................... 1G-14
Engine Cooling System Components Fuel Injector Removal and Installation ............. 1G-14
Location ............................................................ 1F-5 Specifications .................................................... 1G-15
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............ 1F-6 Service Data..................................................... 1G-15
Engine Cooling Symptom Diagnosis................... 1F-6 Tightening Torque Specifications..................... 1G-15
Repair Instructions .............................................. 1F-6 Special Tools and Equipment .......................... 1G-16
Cooling Circuit Inspection ................................... 1F-6 Special Tool ..................................................... 1G-16
Radiator Cap Inspection ..................................... 1F-7
Radiator Removal and Installation ...................... 1F-7 Ignition System ........................................ 1H-1
Radiator Cleaning ............................................... 1F-8 General Description .............................................1H-1
Radiator Hose Inspection.................................... 1F-8 Immobilizer Description (For E-02, 19, 24, 54) ....1H-1
Radiator Hose Removal and Installation............. 1F-9 Schematic and Routing Diagram ........................1H-2
Radiator Reservoir Tank Removal and Ignition System Diagram .....................................1H-2
Installation ......................................................... 1F-9 Diagnostic Information and Procedures ............1H-3
Cooling Fan Inspection ....................................... 1F-9 Ignition System Symptom Diagnosis...................1H-3
Cooling Fan Removal and Installation .............. 1F-10 No Spark or Poor Spark ......................................1H-4
Cooling Fan Thermo-Switch Removal and Repair Instructions ..............................................1H-5
Installation ....................................................... 1F-10 Spark Plug Removal and Installation ..................1H-5
Cooling Fan Thermo-Switch Inspection ............ 1F-11 Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning ...................1H-5
ECT Sensor Removal and Installation .............. 1F-11 Ignition Coil Inspection ........................................1H-5
ECT Sensor Inspection ..................................... 1F-11 Ignition Coil Assembly Removal and
Thermostat Removal and Installation................ 1F-11 Installation .........................................................1H-6
Thermostat Inspection ...................................... 1F-12 Spark Plug Removal and Installation ..................1H-6
Water Pump Components................................. 1F-13 Spark Plug Inspection .........................................1H-6
Water Pump Construction ................................. 1F-14 CKP Sensor Inspection .......................................1H-6
Water Pump Removal and Installation.............. 1F-14 CKP Sensor Removal and Installation ................1H-8
Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly ......... 1F-15 Engine Stop Switch Inspection............................1H-8
Water Pump Related Parts Inspection .............. 1F-17 Ignition Switch Inspection....................................1H-8
Specifications..................................................... 1F-18 Ignition Switch Removal and Installation.............1H-8
Service Data ..................................................... 1F-18 Specifications .......................................................1H-9
Tightening Torque Specifications...................... 1F-18 Service Data........................................................1H-9
Special Tools and Equipment ........................... 1F-19 Special Tools and Equipment .............................1H-9
Recommended Service Material ....................... 1F-19 Special Tool ........................................................1H-9
Special Tool ...................................................... 1F-19
Starting System .........................................1I-1
Fuel System ............................................. 1G-1 Schematic and Routing Diagram ......................... 1I-1
Precautions...........................................................1G-1 Starting System Diagram ..................................... 1I-1
Precautions for Fuel System ...............................1G-1 Component Location ............................................ 1I-1
Schematic and Routing Diagram........................1G-2 Starting System Components Location................ 1I-1
Fuel Tank Hose Construction .............................1G-2 Diagnostic Information and Procedures ............. 1I-2
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............1G-3 Starter Motor will not Run..................................... 1I-2
Fuel System Diagnosis .......................................1G-3 Repair Instructions ............................................... 1I-3
Repair Instructions ..............................................1G-5 Starter Motor Components................................... 1I-3
Fuel System Components...................................1G-5 Starter Motor Removal and Installation................ 1I-3
Fuel Tank Heat Shield Construction ...................1G-6 Starter Motor Disassembly and Assembly ........... 1I-4
Fuel Cut Valve Removal and Installation ............1G-6 Starter Motor Inspection....................................... 1I-5
Fuel Tank Removal and Installation....................1G-7 Starter Relay Removal and Installation................ 1I-6
Fuel Pump Assembly Removal and Starter Relay Inspection....................................... 1I-6
Installation .........................................................1G-8 Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and
Fuel Drain Tray and FTPC Valve Removal Installation .......................................................... 1I-7
and Installation ..................................................1G-9 Side-stand / Ignition Interlock System Parts
Fuel Cut Valve Inspection .................................1G-10 Inspection........................................................... 1I-7
FTPC Valve Inspection .....................................1G-10 Starter Clutch Component.................................... 1I-9
Fuel Pump Disassembly and Assembly............1G-10 Starter Clutch Removal and Installation............... 1I-9
Fuel Pressure Inspection ..................................1G-12 Starter Clutch Inspection.................................... 1I-10
Fuel Pump Relay Inspection .............................1G-13 Starter Clutch Disassembly and Assembly ........ 1I-10
Fuel Mesh Filter Inspection ...............................1G-13 Starter Button Inspection.................................... 1I-11
Fuel Level Gauge Inspection ............................1G-13

1-iv Table of Contents
Specifications...................................................... 1I-11 Battery Visual Inspection..................................... 1J-9

Service Data....................................................... 1I-11 Battery Recharging ........................................... 1J-10
Tightening Torque Specifications....................... 1I-11 Battery Removal and Installation ...................... 1J-10
Special Tools and Equipment ............................ 1I-12 Specifications ..................................................... 1J-11
Recommended Service Material ........................ 1I-12 Service Data...................................................... 1J-11
Special Tool ....................................................... 1I-12 Tightening Torque Specifications...................... 1J-11
Special Tools and Equipment ........................... 1J-11
Charging System ...................................... 1J-1 Special Tool ...................................................... 1J-11
Schematic and Routing Diagram........................ 1J-1
Charging System Diagram .................................. 1J-1 Exhaust System....................................... 1K-1
Component Location ........................................... 1J-1 Precautions...........................................................1K-1
Charging System Components Location............. 1J-1 Precautions for Exhaust System .........................1K-1
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............ 1J-2 Repair Instructions ..............................................1K-1
Charging System Symptom Diagnosis................ 1J-2 Exhaust System Components .............................1K-1
Battery Runs Down Quickly ................................ 1J-3 Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and
Repair Instructions .............................................. 1J-4 Installation .........................................................1K-2
Battery Current Leakage Inspection.................... 1J-4 Exhaust System Inspection .................................1K-4
Regulated Voltage Inspection ............................. 1J-4 HO2 Sensor Inspection .......................................1K-4
Generator Coil Resistance Inspection................. 1J-5 Specifications .......................................................1K-5
Generator No-load Performance Inspection ....... 1J-5 Tightening Torque Specifications........................1K-5
Regulator/Rectifier Inspection ............................. 1J-5 Special Tools and Equipment .............................1K-5
Generator Removal and Installation.................... 1J-6 Recommended Service Material .........................1K-5
Battery Components ........................................... 1J-8
Battery Initial Charging........................................ 1J-8

Precautions: 1-1
Precautions
Precautions
Precautions for Engine
B705H11000001
Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page00-1)” and “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00
(Page00-2)”.

1A-1 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:
Engine General Information and Diagnosis

General Description
Injection Timing Description
B705H11101001
Injection Time (Injection Volume)
The factors to determine the injection time include the basic fuel injection time which is calculated on the basis of the
intake air pressure, engine speed and throttle opening angle, and various compensations. These compensations are
determined according to the signals from various sensors that detect the engine and driving conditions.
I705H1110001-01

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-2
Compensation of Injection Time (Volume)

The following different signals are output from the respective sensors for compensation of the fuel injection time
(volume).
Signal Descriptions
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR When engine coolant temperature is low, injection time (volume)
SIGNAL is increased.
When intake air temperature is low, injection time (volume) is
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
increased.
Air/fuel ratio is compensated to the theoretical ratio from density
of oxygen in exhaust gasses. The compensation occurs in such a
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
way that more fuel is supplied if detected air/fuel ratio is lean and
less fuel is supplied if it is rich.
ECM operates on the battery voltage and at the same time, it
monitors the voltage signal for compensation of the fuel injection
BATTERY VOLTAGE SIGNAL
time (volume). A longer injection time is needed to adjust injection
volume in the case of low voltage.
ENGINE RPM SIGNAL At high speed, the injection time (volume) is increased.
When starting engine, additional fuel is injected during cranking
STARTING SIGNAL
engine.
During acceleration, the fuel injection time (volume) is increased,
ACCELERATION SIGNAL/ DECELERATION
in accordance with the throttle opening speed and engine rpm.
SIGNAL
During deceleration, the fuel injection time (volume) is decreased.
Injection Stop Control

Signal Descriptions
When the motorcycle tips over, the tip-over sensor sends a signal
TIP-OVER SENSOR SIGNAL (FUEL SHUT-OFF) to the ECM. Then, this signal cuts OFF current supplied to the fuel
pump, fuel injectors and ignition coils.
The fuel injector stops operation when engine rpm reaches rev.
OVER-REV. LIMITER SIGNAL
limit rpm.
Self-Diagnosis Function
B705H11101002
The self-diagnosis function is incorporated in the ECM. The function has two modes, “User mode” and “Dealer mode”.
The user can only be notified by the LCD (DISPLAY) panel and LED (FI light). To check the function of the individual FI
system devices, the dealer mode is provided. In this check, the special tool is necessary to read the code of the
malfunction items.
User Mode
Malfunction LCD (Display) Indication FI Light Indication Indication Mode
“NO” Odometer — —
Odometer and “FI” letters Each 2 sec. Odometer or
Engine can start FI light turns ON.
*1 “FI” is indicated.
“YES”
“FI” letters “FI” is indicated
Engine can not start FI light turns ON and blinks.
*2 continuously.
*1
When one of the signals is not received by ECM, the fail-safe circuit works and injection is not stopped. In this case,
“FI” and odometer are indicated in the LCD panel and motorcycle can run.
*2
The injection signal is stopped, when the crankshaft position sensor signal, tip-over sensor signal, ignition signal,
injector signal, fuel pump relay signal or ignition switch signal is not sent to ECM. In this case, “FI” is indicated in the
LCD panel. Motorcycle does not run.
“CHEC”:
The LCD panel indicates “CHEC” when no communication signal from the ECM is received for 5 seconds and more.
For Example:
The ignition switch is turned ON, and the engine stop switch is turned OFF. In this case, the speedometer does not
receive any signal from the ECM, and the panel indicates “CHEC”.
If CHEC is indicated, the LCD does not indicate the trouble code. It is necessary to check the wiring harness between
ECM and speedometer couplers.

The possible cause of this indication is as follows:

Engine stop switch is in OFF position. Side-Stand/ignition inter-lock system is not working. Ignition fuse is burnt.
Dealer Mode
! CAUTION
Before checking the malfunction code, do not disconnect the ECM coupler.
If the coupler from the ECM is disconnected, the malfunction code memory is erased and the
malfunction code can not be checked.
The defective function is memorized in the computer. Use the special tool’s coupler to connect to the dealer mode
coupler (A). The memorized malfunction code is displayed on LCD (DISPLAY) panel. Malfunction means that the ECM
does not receive signal from the devices. These affected devices are indicated in the code form.
Special tool
(A): 09930–82720 (Mode select switch)
(A)
I705H1110111-01 I705H1110112-01
(A)
I705H1110114-01
Malfunction LCD (Display) Indication FI Light Indication Indication Mode

“NO” C00 —
C** code is indicated from FI light turns OFF. For each 2 sec., code is
“YES”
small numeral to large one. indicated.

Schematic and Routing Diagram

FI System Wiring Diagram
B705H11102001
“Y”
30 A
“X”
“R”
“W”
“U”
“T”
15 A
10 A
10 A
“S”
“O”
“H”
“J”
“Q”
“V”
“P”
“K”
“N”
“L”
“I”
“M”
23
20
11
19
33
22
43
44
30
35
34
15
36
12
13
17
16
21
“Z”
8
1
5
ECM
37
14
29
24
25
3
9
2
“C”
“A”
“B”
“D”
“G”
“E”
“F”
I705H1110032-05
“A”: Crankshaft position sensor (CKPS) “J”: Fuel pump (FP) “S”: Starter button
“B”: Throttle position sensor (TPS) “K”: Fuel pump relay (FP relay) “T”: Brake light switch
“C”: Intake air pressure sensor (IAPS) “L”: Ignition coil “U”: Brake relay
“D”: Secondary throttle position sensor (STPS) “M”: Speed sensor “V”: Side-stand switch
“E”: Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) “N”: Idle speed control valve (ISC valve) “W”: Starter relay
“F”: Intake air temperature sensor (IATS) “O”: Secondary throttle valve actuator (STVA) “X”: Starter motor
“G”: Tip-over sensor (TOS) “P”: Engine stop switch “Y”: Battery
“H”: HO2 sensor “Q”: Side-stand relay “Z”: SDS
“I”: Fuel injector “R”: Ignition switch

Terminal Alignment of ECM Coupler (Harness Side)

B705H11102002
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
I705H1110115-01
TERMINAL NO. CIRCUIT TERMINAL NO. CIRCUIT

(1) Power source (23) Power source for back-up
(2) TO sensor signal (TOS) (24) ECT sensor signal (ECT)
(3) CKP sensor signal (CKP+) (25) IAT sensor signal (IAT)
(4) Sensor ground (E2) (26) —
(5) TP sensor signal (TP) (27) —
(6) IAP sensor signal (IAP) (28) —
(7) HO2 sensor signal (HO2) (29) STP sensor signal (STP)
(8) ECM ground (E1) (30) Starter relay
(9) CKP sensor signal (CKP-) (31) SDS
(10) — (32) Mode select switch
(11) Power source for fuel injector (VM) (33) Speed sensor
(12) STVA signal (STVA 1A) (34) ISC valve motor signal (ISCA 1B)
(13) STVA signal (STVA 1B) (35) ISC valve motor signal (ISCA 1A)
(14) Power source for sensors (Vcc) (36) ISC valve motor signal (ISCA 2B)
(15) ISC valve motor signal (ISCA 2A) (37) Meter communication
(16) STVA signal (STVA 2B) (38) —
STVA signal (STVA 2A) Immobilizer (For E-02, 19, 24, 54)
(17) (39)
communication
Immobilizer (For E-02, 19, 24, 54)
(18) — (40)
communication, Ignition signal
(19) Fuel pump relay (FP Relay) (41) —
(20) Fuel injector (42) Tachometer
(21) HO2 sensor heater (43) ECM ground (E1)
(22) Ignition coil (44) ECM ground (E3)

Component Location
FI System Parts Location
B705H11103001
“A”
“B” “C”
“F” “K”
“D”
“E” “H”
“I” “G”
“J”
I705H1110131-01
“A”: ECM “G”: Intake air temperature (IATS)

“B”: Fuel injector (FI) “H”: Fuel pump (FP)
“C”: Idle speed control valve (ISC valve) “I”: Crankshaft position sensor (CKPS)
“D”: Throttle position sensor (TPS) “J”: Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
“E”: Secondary throttle position sensor (STPS) “K”: Fuel pump relay (FP relay)
“F”: Secondary throttle valve actuator (STVA)

“L”
“A”
“M” “N”
“Q”
“O” “P”
I705H1110132-01
“L”: Speedometer “O”: Ignition coil (IG Coil)

“M”: Tip-over sensor (TOS) “P”: Speed sensor
“N”: Intake air pressure sensor (IAPS) “Q”: Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS)
Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Engine Symptom Diagnosis
B705H11104001
Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item

Engine will not start or is Valve clearance out of adjustment. Adjust.
hard to start Worn valve guides or poor seating of Repair or replace.
(Compression too low) valves.
Mistimed valves. Adjust.
Excessively worn piston rings. Replace.
Worn-down cylinder bore. Replace.
Starter motor cranks too slowly. Refer to “Starting System Diagram in Section
1I (Page1I-1)”.
Poor seating of spark plug. Retighten.
Engine will not start or is Fouled spark plug. Clean.
hard to start (Plugs not Wet spark plug. Clean and dry.
sparking) Defective ignition coil. Replace.
Open or short in high-tension cord. Replace.
Defective CKP sensor. Replace.
Defective ECM. Replace.
Open-circuited wiring connections. Repair or replace.


Engine will not start or is Clogged fuel filter or fuel hose. Clean or replace.
hard to start (No fuel Defective fuel pump. Replace.
reaching the intake Defective fuel pressure regulator. Replace.
manifold) Defective fuel injector. Replace.
Defective fuel pump relay. Replace.
Open-circuited wiring connections. Check and repair.
Engine will not start or is TP sensor out of adjustment. Adjust.
hard to start (Incorrect Defective fuel pump. Replace.
fuel/air mixture) Defective fuel pressure regulator. Replace.
Defective TP sensor. Replace.
Defective IAP sensor. Replace.
Defective ECT sensor. Replace.
Defective IAT sensor. Replace.
Engine idles poorly Valve clearance out of adjustment. Adjust.
Poor seating of valves. Replace or repair.
Defective valve guides. Replace.
Worn down camshafts. Replace.
Too wide spark plug gap. Adjust or replace.
Defective ignition coil. Replace.
Defective crankshaft position sensor. Replace.
Defective throttle position sensor. Replace.
Defective fuel pump. Replace.
Defective ISC valve. Replace.
Engine stalls often Defective IAP sensor or circuit. Repair or replace.
(Incorrect fuel/air mixture) Clogged fuel filter. Clean or replace.
Defective fuel pressure regulator. Replace.
Damaged or cracked vacuum hose. Replace.
Defective thermostat. Replace.
Engine stalls often (Fuel Defective fuel injector. Replace.
injector improperly No injection signal from ECM. Repair or replace.
operating) Open or short circuited wiring Repair or replace.
connection.
Defective battery or low battery voltage. Replace or recharge.
Engine stalls often Defective ECM. Replace.
(Control circuit or sensor Defective fuel pressure regulator. Replace.
improperly operating) Defective TP sensor. Replace.
Defective fuel pump relay. Replace.
Engine stalls often Fouled spark plug. Clean.
(Engine parts improperly Defective CKP sensor or ECM. Replace.
operating) Clogged fuel hose. Clean.
Valve clearance out of adjustment. Adjust.
Engine noisy (Excessive Too large valve clearance. Adjust.
valve chatter) Weakened or broken valve springs. Replace.
Worn tappet or cam surface. Replace.
Worn and burnt camshaft journal. Replace.


Engine noisy (Noise Worn down piston or cylinder. Replace.
seems to come from Combustion chambers fouled with Clean.
piston) carbon.
Worn piston pin or piston pin bore. Replace.
Worn piston rings or ring grooves. Replace.
Engine noisy (Noise Stretched chain. Replace.
seems to come from Worn sprockets. Replace.
timing chain) Tension adjuster not working. Repair or replace.
Engine noisy (Noise Rattling bearings due to wear. Replace.
seems to come from Worn and burnt journal bearings. Replace.
crankshaft)
Engine noisy (Noise Worn and burnt journal bearings. Replace.
seems to come from
balancer)
Engine noisy (Noise Worn or rubbing gears. Replace.
seems to come from Worn splines. Replace.
transmission) Worn or rubbing primary gears. Replace.
Worn bearings. Replace.
Engine noisy (Noise Worn or damaged impeller shaft. Replace.
seems to come from Worn or damaged mechanical seal. Replace.
water pump) Contact between pump case and Replace.
impeller.
Engine runs poorly in Weakened valve springs. Replace.
high speed range Worn camshafts. Replace.
(Defective engine internal/ Valve timing out of adjustment. Adjust.
electrical parts) Too narrow spark plug gap. Adjust.
Ignition not advanced sufficiently due to Replace ECM.
poorly working timing advance circuit.
Clogged air cleaner element. Clean.
Clogged fuel hose, resulting in Clean and prime.
inadequate fuel supply to injector.
Defective TP sensor. Replace.
Defective STP sensor/STVA. Replace.
Engine runs poorly in Clogged air cleaner element. Clean or replace.
high speed range Defective throttle valves. Adjust or replace.
(Defective air flow Defective ISC valve. Replace.
system) Sucking air from throttle body joint. Repair or replace.
Engine runs poorly in Low fuel pressure. Repair or replace.
high speed range Defective TP sensor. Replace.
(Defective control circuit Defective IAT sensor. Replace.
or sensor) Defective IAP sensor. Replace.
Defective AP sensor. Replace.
TP sensor out of adjustment. Adjust.
Defective fuel tank pressure control Replace.
valve.


Engine lacks power Loss of valve clearance. Adjust.
(Defective engine internal/ Weakened valve springs. Replace.
electrical parts) Valve timing out of adjustment. Adjust.
Worn piston rings or cylinder. Replace.
Poor seating of valves. Repair.
Fouled spark plug. Clean or replace.
Incorrect spark plug. Adjust or replace.
Clogged injector. Clean.
Clogged air cleaner element. Clean.
Sucking air from throttle valve. Replace.
Too much engine oil. Drain out excess oil.
Defective fuel pump or ECM. Replace.
Defective CKP sensor and ignition coil. Replace.
Engine lacks power Low fuel pressure. Repair or replace.
(Defective control circuit Defective TP sensor. Replace.
or sensor) Defective IAT sensor. Replace.
Defective IAP sensor. Replace.
Defective AP sensor. Replace.
Defective fuel tank pressure control Replace.
valve.
Engine overheats Heavy carbon deposit on piston crown. Clean.
(Defective engine internal Not enough oil in the engine. Add oil.
parts) Defective oil pump or clogged oil circuit. Replace or clean.
Use of incorrect engine oil. Change.
Sucking air from intake pipe. Retighten or replace.
Defective cooling system. Refer to “Engine Cooling System Warning in
Section 1F (Page1F-1)”.
Engine overheats (Lean Short-circuited IAP sensor/lead wire. Repair or replace.
fuel/air mixture) Short-circuited IAT sensor/lead wire. Repair or replace.
Sucking air from intake pipe joint. Repair or replace.
Defective fuel injector. Replace.
Engine overheats (The Ignition timing too advanced due to Replace.
other factors) defective timing advance system (ECT
sensor, CKP sensor and ECM.)
Dirty or heavy exhaust Worn piston rings or cylinder. Replace.
smoke Too much engine oil in the engine. Check and drain excess oil.
Worn valve guides. Replace.
Scored or scuffed cylinder wall. Replace.
Worn valves stems. Replace.
Defective stem seals. Replace.
Worn oil ring side rails. Replace.

DTC Table
B705H11104009
Code Malfunction Part Remarks
C00 None No defective part
C12 Crankshaft position sensor (CKPS) Pick-up coil signal, signal generator
C13 Intake air pressure sensor (IAPS)
C14 Throttle position sensor (TPS) *1
C15 Engine coolant temperature. sensor (ECTS)
C16 Speed sensor Speed sensor signal for FI system
C21 Intake air temperature sensor (IATS)
C23 Tip-over sensor (TOS)
C24 Ignition signal (IG coil)
C28 Secondary throttle valve actuator (STVA)
C29 Secondary throttle position sensor (STPS)
C32 Fuel injector signal
C40 Idle speed control valve (ISC valve)
C41 Fuel pump control system (FP control system) Fuel pump, Fuel pump relay
Ignition switch signal (IG switch signal/Immobilizer Anti-theft
C42
for E-02, 19, 24, 54)
C44 Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
In the LCD (DISPLAY) panel, the malfunction code is indicated from small code to large code.
*1
To get the proper signal from the throttle position sensor, the sensor basic position is indicated in the LCD (DISPLAY)
panel. The malfunction code is indicated in three digits. In front of the three digits, a line appears in any of the three
positions, upper, middle or lower line. If the indication is upper or lower line when engine rpm is 1 450 r/min, slightly
turn the throttle position sensor and bring the line to the middle.
Fail-Safe Function Table

B705H11104010
FI system is provided with fail-safe function to allow the engine to start and the motorcycle to run in a minimum
performance necessary even under malfunction condition.
Item Fail-Safe Mode Starting Ability Running Ability
Intake air pressure is fixed to 101 kPa (760
IAP sensor “YES” “YES”
mmHg).
The throttle opening is fixed to full open
TP sensor position. “YES” “YES”
Ignition timing is also fixed.
Engine coolant temperature value is fixed to
ECT sensor “YES” “YES”
80 °C (176 °F).
Intake air temperature value is fixed to 40 °C
IAT sensor “YES” “YES”
(104 °F).
Secondary throttle valve When motor disconnection or lock occurs,
“YES” “YES”
actuator power from ECM is shut off.
Secondary throttle valve is fixed to full open
STP sensor “YES” “YES”
position.
Feedback compensation is inhibited. (Air/
HO2 sensor “YES” “YES”
fuel ratio is fixed to normal.)
When motor disconnection or lock occurs,
ISC valve “YES” “YES”
power from ECM is shut off.
The engine can start and can run even if the signal in the table is not received from each sensor. But, the engine
running condition is not complete, providing only emergency help (by fail-safe circuit). In this case, it is necessary to
bring the motorcycle to the workshop for complete repair.

FI System Troubleshooting
B705H11104011
Customer Complaint Analysis
Record details of the problem (failure, complaint) and how it occurred as described by the customer. For this purpose,
use of such an inspection form will facilitate collecting information to the point required for proper analysis and
diagnosis.
EXAMPLE: CUSTOMER PROBLEM INSPECTION FORM
User name: Model: VIN: Date of issue:
Date Reg. Date of problem: Mileage:
Malfunction indicator Always ON / Sometimes ON / Always OFF / Good condition

lamp condition (LED)
Malfunction display/code User mode: No display / Malfunction display ( )
(LCD) Dealer mode: No code / Malfunction code ( )
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS
Difficult Starting Poor Driveability
No cranking Hesitation on acceleration
No initial combustion Back fire / After fire
No combustion Lack of power
Poor starting at Surging
(cold / warm / always) Abnormal knocking
Other Engine rpm jumps briefly
Poor Idling Engine Stall when

Poor fast Idle Immediately after start
Abnormal idling speed Throttle valve is opened
(High / Low) ( r/min) Throttle valve is closed
Unstable Load is applied
Hunting ( r/min to r/min) Other
Other
MOTORCYCLE/ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION WHEN PROBLEM OCCURS

Environmental condition
Weather Fair / Cloudy / Rain / Snow / Always / Other
Temperature Hot / Warm / Cool / Cold ( °F / °C) / Always
Frequency Always / Sometimes (times / day, month) / Only once
Under certain condition
Road Urban / Suburb / Highway / Mountainous (Uphill / Downhill)
Tarmacadam / Gravel / Other
Motorcycle condition
Engine condition Cold / Warming up phase / Warmed up / Always / Other at starting
Immediately after start / Racing without load / Engine speed ( r/min)
Motorcycle condition During driving: Constant speed / Accelerating / Decelerating
Right hand corner / Left hand corner / When shifting (Gear position )
At stop / Motorcycle speed when problem occurs ( km/h, mile/h)
Other
NOTE
This form is a standard sample. The form should be modified according to conditions and
characteristic of each market.

Visual Inspection
Prior to diagnosis using the mode select switch or SDS, perform the following visual inspections. The reason for visual
inspection is that mechanical failures (such as oil leakage) cannot be displayed on the screen with the use of mode
select switch or SDS.
• Engine oil level and leakage. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Change in Section 0B (Page0B-9)”.
• Engine coolant level and leakage. Refer to “Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-11)”.
• Fuel level and leakage. Refer to “Fuel Line Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-8)”.
• Clogged air cleaner element. Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-3)”.
• Battery condition. Refer to “Battery Visual Inspection in Section 1J (Page1J-9)”.
• Throttle cable play. Refer to “Throttle Cable Play Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page0B-11)”.
• Broken fuse. Refer to “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00 (Page00-2)”.
• FI light operation. Refer to “Self-Diagnosis Function (Page1A-2)”.
• Each warning light operation. Refer to “Combination Meter Inspection in Section 9C (Page9C-2)”.
• Speedometer operation. Refer to “Combination Meter Inspection in Section 9C (Page9C-2)”.
• Exhaust gas leakage and noise. Refer to “Exhaust System Inspection in Section 1K (Page1K-4)”.
• Each coupler disconnection. Refer to “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00 (Page00-2)”.
Self-Diagnostic Procedures 1) Remove the upper meter panel. Refer to “Upper

B705H11104012 Meter Panel Removal and Installation in Section 9D
NOTE
(Page9D-13)”.
• Do not disconnect coupler from ECM, 2) Connect the special tool to the dealer mode coupler
battery cable from battery, ECM ground (A) at the wiring harness, and start the engine or
wire harness from engine or main fuse crank the engine for more than 4 seconds.
before confirming DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Special tool
Code) stored in memory. Such
disconnection will erase memorized
information in ECM memory.
• DTC stored in ECM memory can be
checked by the special tool.
• Before checking DTC, read SELF-
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION “USER MODE and (A)
DEALER MODE” (Refer to “Self-Diagnosis

Function (Page1A-2)”) carefully to have
good understanding as to what functions
are available and how to use it.
• Be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS for
Electrical Circuit Service” (Refer to I705H1110111-01
“Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service
3) Turn the special tool’s switch ON and check the
in Section 00 (Page00-2)”) before
malfunction code to determine the malfunction part.
inspection and observe what is written
there. Special tool
(A)
I705H1110114-01

Self-Diagnosis Reset Procedures 1) Remove the upper meter panel. Refer to “Upper
B705H11104013 Meter Panel Removal and Installation in Section 9D
1) After repairing the trouble, turn OFF the ignition (Page9D-13)”.
switch and turn ON again. If DTC is indicated (C00),
2) Set up the SDS tools. (Refer to the SDS operation
the malfunction is cleared.
manual for further details.)
Special tool
(A): 09904–41010 (SDS Set)
(B): 99565–01010–008 (CD-ROM Ver.8)
I705H1110112-01
2) Disconnect the special tool from the dealer mode

coupler.
NOTE
• Even though DTC (C00) is indicated, the
previous history DTC still remains stored (A)
in the ECM. Therefore, erase the history
DTC memorized in the ECM using SDS.
• DTC is memorized in the ECM also when
the wire coupler of any sensor is
(B)
disconnected. Therefor, when a wire
coupler has been disconnected at the time
of diagnosis, erase the stored history DTC
using SDS.
Use of SDS Diagnostic Procedures

B705H11104030
NOTE
• Do not disconnect the coupler from ECM,
the battery cable from the battery, ECM I705H1110116-03
ground wire harness from the engine or 3) Read the DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) and show
main fuse before confirming DTC data when trouble (displaying data at the time of
(Diagnostic Trouble Code) stored in DTC) according to instructions displayed on SDS.
memory. Such disconnection will erase the SDS is not only used for detecting Diagnostic.
memorized information in ECM memory. 4) Trouble Codes but also for reproducing and
• DTC stored in ECM memory can be checking on screen the failure condition as
checked by the SDS. described by customers using the trigger.
• Be sure to read “Precautions for Electrical 5) Refer to the SDS operation manual for How to use
Circuit Service in Section 00 (Page00-2)” trigger and further details.
before inspection and observe what is
written there.

Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset Procedures 6) Click “Clear” (2) to delete history code (Past DTC).
B705H11104031
Clear the Past DTC using SDS in the following
procedures:
1) Set up the SDS tools.
2) After repairing the trouble, turn OFF the ignition
switch and turn ON again. 2
3) Click the DTC inspection button (1).
I705H1110005-01
1 7) Follow the displayed instructions.
I705H1110006-01
I705H1110003-01
4) Check the DTC.

5) The previous malfunction history code (Past DTC)
still remains stored in the ECM. Therefore, erase the
history code memorized in the ECM using SDS tool.
NOTE
The malfunction code is memorized in the
ECM also when the wire coupler of any I705H1110009-01
sensor is disconnected. Therefore, when a 8) Check that both “Current DTC” (3) and “Past DTC”
wire coupler has been disconnected at the (4) are deleted (NIL).
time of diagnosis, erase the stored
malfunction history code using SDS.
3 4
I705H1110008-01

Show Data When Trouble (Displaying Data at the Time of DTC)

B705H11104032
ECM stores the engine and driving conditions (in the form of data as shown in the figure) at the moment of the
detection of a malfunction in its memory. This data is called “Show data when trouble”.
Therefore, it is possible to know engine and driving conditions (e.g., whether the engine was warm or not, where the
motorcycle was running or stopped) when a malfunction was detected by checking the show data when trouble. This
show data when trouble function can record the maximum of two Diagnostic Trouble Codes in the ECM.
Also, ECM has a function to store each show data when trouble for two different malfunctions in the order as the
malfunction is detected. Utilizing this function, it is possible to know the order of malfunctions that have been detected.
Its use is helpful when rechecking or diagnosing a trouble.
I705H1110010-01
Click “Show data when trouble” (1) to display the data. By clicking the drop down button (2), either “Failure #1” or
“Failure #2” can be selected.
I705H1110011-01

SDS Check
B705H11104036
Using SDS, take the sample of data from the new motorcycle and at the time of periodic maintenance at your
dealership.
Save the data in the computer or by printing and filing the hard copies. The saved of filed data are useful for
troubleshooting as they can be compared periodically with changes over time or failure conditions of the motorcycle.
For example, when a motorcycle is brought in for service but the troubleshooting is difficult, comparison with the
normal data that have been saved or filed can allow the specific engine failure to be determined.
• Remove the upper meter panel. Refer to “Upper Meter Panel Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-13)”.
• Set up the SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnostic Procedures (Page1A-14)”.
Special tool
: 09904–41010 (SDS set)
: 99565–01010–008 (CD-ROM Ver.8)
NOTE
• Before taking the sample of data, check and clear the Past DTC.
• A number of different data under a fixed condition as shown below should be saved or filed as
sample.
Sample
Data sampled from cold starting through warm-up
Check the fast idle time.

Approx. XX sec. Check the engine r/min.
XX r/min
Fast idle section
Check the manifold absolute pressure.

XX kPa
Check the secondary throttle

valve operation in according
with the engine r/min.
I705H1110126-03

Data at 3 000 r/min under no load
3 000 r/min

XX kPa
I705H1110127-02
Data at the time of racing
Throttle: Quick wide open
Throttle: Slowly open
Secondary throttle valve opens closes

in according with the engine r/min
I705H1110128-04

Data of intake negative pressure during idling (100 °C)

Approx. XX kPa
I705H1110129-03
Data of secondary throttle valve operation at the time of starting
Closes fully in approx. XX sec.
I705H1110130-02

Malfunction Code and Defective Condition Table

B705H11104014
Malfunction
Detected Item Detected Failure Condition Check For
Code
C00 NO FAULT — —
C12 CKP sensor wiring and
Althaugh the intake pressure is fluctuated, the mechanical parts
CKP sensor
P0335 signal does not reach ECM for 3 sec. or more. CKP sensor, lead wire/coupler
connection
The sensor should produce following voltage.
0.24 V ≤ sensor voltage < 4.10 V IAP sensor, lead wire/coupler
C13
In other than the above range, C13 (P0105) is connection
indicated.
IAP sensor IAP sensor circuit open or
H Sensor voltage is higher than specified value. shorted to Vcc or ground circuit
P0105 open
IAP sensor circuit shorted to
L Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.
ground or Vcc circuit open
0.35 V ≤ sensor voltage < 4.90 V TP sensor, lead wire/coupler
C14
indicated.
TP sensor TP sensor circuit shorted to
H Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.
Vcc or ground circuit open
P0120 TP sensor circuit open or
L Sensor voltage is lower than specified value. shorted to ground or Vcc circuit
open
The sensor voltage should be the following.
0.2 V ≤ sensor voltage < 4.9 V ECT sensor, lead wire/coupler
C15
indicated.
ECT sensor
ECT sensor circuit open or
ground circuit open
P0115
ECT sensor circuit shorted to
ground
C16 The speed sensor signal is not input for more
Speed sensor, wiring/coupler
Speed sensor than 3 sec. during the engine is running at 5
P0500 connection
000 r/min or more.
The sensor voltage should be the following.
0.2 V ≤ sensor voltage < 4.9 V IAT sensor, lead wire/coupler
C21
indicated.
IAT sensor
IAT sensor circuit open or
ground circuit open
P0110
IAT sensor circuit shorted to
ground
The sensor voltage should be the following for
2 sec. and more, after ignition switch is turned
ON. TO sensor, lead wire/coupler
C23
0.17 V ≤ sensor voltage < 4.70 V connection
In other than the above value, C23 (P1651) is
TO sensor indicated.
TO sensor circuit shorted to
P1651 TO sensor circuit open or
open
C24 No ignition signal is detected for 0.5 sec. Ignition coil, wiring/coupler
Ignition signal In this case, the code C24 (P0351) is connection, power supply from
P0351
indicated. the battery

Malfunction
Detected Item Detected Failure Condition Check For
Code
C28 When no actuator control signal is supplied
from the ECM, communication signal does not
Secondary throttle STVA motor, STVA lead wire/
reach ECM or operation voltage does not
P1655 valve actuator coupler
reach STVA motor, C28 (P1655) is indicated.
STVA can not operate.
0.35 V ≤ sensor voltage < 4.90 V STP sensor, lead wire/coupler
C29
indicated.
STP sensor STP sensor circuit shorted to
P1654 STP sensor circuit open or
open
C32 No injector signal is detected for 0.8 sec. Primary fuel injector, wiring/
Fuel injector In this case, the code C32 (P0201) is coupler connection, power
P0201
indicated. supply to the injector
No IAC valve voltage is supplied after starting IAC valve, wiring/coupler
C40 (P0505)
the engine. connection
Air passage clogged
Idle speed is lower than the desired idle ISC valve fixed
C40 (P0506)
ISC valve speed. ISC valve pre-set position is
incorrect
ISC valve is fixed
Idle speed is higher than the desired idle
C40 (P0507) ISC valve pre-set position is
speed.
incorrect
No voltage is applied to the fuel pump, Fuel pump relay, lead wire/
although fuel pump relay is turned ON, or coupler connection, power
C41
voltage is applied to fuel pump although fuel source to fuel pump relay and
pump relay is turned OFF. fuel injectors
Fuel pump relay switch circuit
Fuel pump relay Voltage is applied to fuel pump although fuel
H shorted to power source
pump relay is turned OFF.
Fuel pump relay (switch side)
P0230
Fuel pump relay circuit open or
No voltage is applied to the fuel pump,
L short
although fuel pump relay is turned ON.
Fuel pump relay (coil side)
C42 Ignition switch signal is not input to the ECM.
Ignition switch, lead wire/
* When the I.D. agreement is not verified.
Ignition switch coupler, etc.
P1650 * ECM does not receive communication signal
* Immobilizer/anti-theft system
from the immobilizer antenna.
C44 HO2 sensor output voltage is not input to ECM
HO2S lead wire/coupler
during engine operation and running
connection
condition.
P0130 Battery voltage supply to the
In other than the above value, C44 (P0130) is
HO2S
HO2 sensor (HO2S) indicated.
C44 HO2 sensor lead wire/coupler
The Heater can not operate so that heater
connection
operation voltage is not supply to the oxygen
P0135 Battery voltage supply to the
heater circuit, C44 (P0135) is indicated.
HO2 sensor
* : Immobilizer system is equipped model only.

DTC “C12” (P0335): CKP Sensor Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104016
Detected Condition and Possible Cause
Detected Condition Possible Cause
Although the intake pressure is fluctuated, the signal • Metal particles or foreign material being attached on the
does not reach for 3 sec. or more. CKP sensor and rotor tip.
• CKP sensor circuit open or short.
NOTE
• CKP sensor malfunction.
If SDS is used, P0355 is indicated.
• ECM malfunction.
Wiring Diagram
ECM
CKP sensor
G G/W (3) CKP
Bl BI (9) CKP
To regulator/rectifier
Generator
I705H1110012-02

Troubleshooting
NOTE
After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset
Procedures (Page1A-15)”.
Step Action Yes No

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the CKP
2) Check the CKP sensor coupler (1) for loose or poor sensor with a new one.
contacts.
If OK, then measure the CKP sensor resistance.
I705H1110033-02
3) Disconnect the CKP sensor coupler (1) and measure the

resistance.
CKP sensor resistance
190 – 290 Ω (Bl – G)
Special tool
Tester knob indication
Resistance (Ω)
(A)
I705H1110034-03
If OK, then check the continuity between each terminal
and ground.
CKP sensor continuity
∞ Ω (Infinity) (Bl – Ground, G – Ground)
Special tool
Continuity ( )
Are the resistance and continuity OK?

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Crank the engine a few seconds with the starter motor, • G/W or Bl wire open • Inspect that metal
and measure the CKP sensor peak voltage at the or shorted to ground. particles or foreign
coupler. • Loose or poor material stuck on the
contacts on the CKP CKP sensor and rotor
CKP sensor peak voltage
sensor coupler or tip.
4.5 V and more
(Positive terminal: G – Negative terminal: Bl) ECM coupler • If there are no metal
(terminal (2) or (9)). particles and foreign
Special tool Refer to “Terminal material, then replace
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Alignment of ECM the CKP sensor with
Tester knob indication Coupler (Harness a new one.
Voltage ( ) Side) (Page1A-5)”.
• If wire and
connection are OK,
(A)
intermittent trouble or
V Peak faulty ECM.
volt
adaptor • Recheck each
terminal and wire
harness for open
circuit and poor
connection.
• Replace the ECM
with a known good
I705H1110035-04 one, and inspect it
2) Repeat the above test procedures a few times and again.
measure the highest peak voltage.
Is the voltage OK?

DTC “C13” (P0105-H/L): IAP Sensor Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104017
IAP sensor voltage is not within the following range. • Clogged vacuum passage between throttle body and
0.24 V ≤ Sensor voltage < 4.10 V IAP sensor.
• Air being drawn from vacuum passage between throttle
NOTE
body and IAP sensor.
• Note that atmospheric pressure varies • IAP sensor circuit open or shorted to ground.
depending on weather conditions as well
• IAP sensor malfunction.
as altitude.
Take that into consideration when • ECM malfunction.
inspecting voltage. NOTE
• If SDS is used, P0105-H is indicated when
sensor voltage is higher than specified • When P0105-H is displayed, it is possible that
value. IAP sensor circuit is open or shorted to Vcc
or ground circuit is open.
• If SDS is used, P0105-L is indicated when
sensor voltage is lower than specified • When P0105-L is displayed, it is possible that
value. IAP sensor circuit is shorted to ground or
Vcc circuit is open.
Wiring Diagram
ECM
IAP sensor
B/Br (4) E2
G/B (6) IAP
R (14) Vcc
I705H1110013-03

Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a
needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.
NOTE
Step Action Yes No

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. • Loose or poor
2) Remove the helmet box front cover. (Refer to “Helmet contacts on the ECM
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D coupler (terminal (14)
(Page9D-16)”.) or (4)). Refer to
“Terminal Alignment
3) Check the IAP sensor coupler (1) for loose or poor
of ECM Coupler
contacts.
(Harness Side)
If OK, then measure the IAP sensor input voltage.
(Page1A-5)”.
• Open or short circuit
in the R wire or B/Br
wire.
I705H1110016-01
4) Disconnect the IAP sensor coupler.

5) Turn the ignition switch ON.

Step Action Yes No

1 6) Measure the voltage at the R wire and ground. Go to Step 2. • Loose or poor
If OK, then measure the voltage at the R wire and B/Br contacts on the ECM
wire. coupler (terminal (14)
or (4)). Refer to
IAP sensor input voltage
4.5 – 5.5 V
of ECM Coupler
(Positive terminal: R – Negative terminal: Ground,
(Harness Side)
Positive terminal: R – Negative terminal: B/Br)
(Page1A-5)”.
Special tool • Open or short circuit
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) in the R wire or B/Br
Tester knob indication wire.
Voltage ( )
(A)
I705H1110135-01
(A)
I705H1110136-01
Is the voltage OK?

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Connect the IAP sensor coupler. Go to Step 3. • Open or short circuit
2) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler. in the G/B wire.
3) Start the engine at idle speed. • If the wire is OK,
replace the IAP
4) Measure the IAP sensor output voltage at the wire side
sensor with a new
coupler (between G/B and B/Br wires).
one.
IAP sensor output voltage
Approx. 1.5 – 3.5 V at idle speed
(Positive terminal: G/B – Negative terminal: B/Br)
Special tool
(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)
Voltage ( )
(A)
(B)
I705H1110036-05
Is the voltage OK?

Step Action Yes No

3 1) Remove the IAP sensor. • R, G/B or B/Br wire If check result is not
2) Connect the vacuum pump gauge to the vacuum port “A” open or shorted to satisfactory, replace IAP
of the IAP sensor. ground, or poor (4), sensor with a new one.
(6) or (14)
connection. Refer to
“A” “Terminal Alignment
of ECM Coupler
(Harness Side)
(Page1A-5)”.
• If wire and
connection are OK,
faulty ECM.
• Recheck each
terminal and wire
I705H1110117-01
3) Arrange 3 new 1.5 V batteries in series (check that total harness for open
voltage is 4.5 – 5.0 V) and connect negative terminal to circuit and poor
ground terminal and positive terminal to Vcc terminal. connection.
4) Check the voltage between Vout and ground. • Replace the ECM
5) Also, check if voltage reduces when vacuum is applied with a known good
by the vacuum pump gauge. one, and inspect
again.
Special tool
(A): 09917–47010 (Vacuum pump gauge)
(B): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
Voltage ( )
Ground
(A)
Vout
Vcc V
(B)
I705H1110140-01
Negative pressure Output voltage
kPa kgf/cm2 psi V

Approx. 120.0 Approx. 1.20 Approx. 17.06 Approx. 4.2

I705H1110137-04
Is the voltage OK?

DTC “C14” (P0120/H/L): TP Sensor Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104018
Output voltage is not within the following range. • TP sensor maladjusted
Difference between actual throttle opening and opening • TP sensor circuit open or short
calculated by ECM is larger than specified value.
• TP sensor malfunction
0.35 V ≤ Sensor voltage < 4.90 V
• ECM malfunction
NOTE
NOTE
value. TP sensor circuit is shorted to Vcc or ground
circuit is open.
value. TP sensor circuit is open or shorted to
ground or Vcc circuit is open.
Wiring Diagram
ECM
TP sensor
R (14) Vcc
Y (5) TP
B/Br (4) E2
I705H1110017-02
Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE

Step Action Yes No

2) Remove the helmet box front cover. (Refer to “Helmet contacts on the ECM
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D coupler (terminal (14)
(Page9D-16)”.) and (4)). Refer to
3) Check the TP sensor (1) coupler for loose or poor
of ECM Coupler
contacts.
(Harness Side)
If OK, then measure the TP sensor input voltage.
(Page1A-5)”.
4) Disconnect the TP sensor coupler (1).
in the R wire or B/Br
wire.
1
I705H1110041-01

6) Measure the voltage at the R wire and ground.
If OK, then measure the voltage at the R wire and B/Br
wire.
TP sensor input voltage
4.5 – 5.5 V
Special tool
Voltage ( )
(A)
R
V
B/Br
I705H1110021-04
Is the voltage OK?

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Connect the TP sensor coupler. • R or B/Br wire open If check result is not
2) Insert the needle pointed probes to the coupler. or shorted to ground, satisfactory, replace TP
or poor (4), (5) or (14) sensor with a new one.
connection. Refer to
4) Measure the TP sensor output voltage (between positive “Terminal Alignment
terminal: Y and negative terminal: B/Br) by turning the of ECM Coupler
throttle grip. (Harness Side)
TP sensor output voltage (Page1A-5)”.
Throttle valve is closed: Approx. 0.6 V • If wire and
Throttle valve is opened: Approx. 3.8 V connection are OK,
Special tool
faulty ECM.
• Recheck each
Tester knob indication terminal and wire
Voltage ( ) harness for open
circuit and poor
connection.
• Replace the ECM
V 1
(A) with a known good
one, and inspect
again.
I705H1110018-04
Is the voltage OK?

DTC “C15” (P0115-H/L): ECT Sensor Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104019
Output voltage is not with in the following range. • ECT sensor circuit open or short
0.2 V ≤ Sensor voltage < 4.9 V • ECT sensor malfunction
NOTE • ECM malfunction
• If SDS is used, P0115-H is indicated when NOTE

sensor voltage is higher than specified
• When P0115-H is displayed, it is possible that
value.
ECT sensor circuit is open or ground circuit
• If SDS is used, P0115-L is indicated when is open.
sensor voltage is lower than specified
• When P0115-L is displayed, it is possible that
value.
ECT sensor circuit is shorted to ground.
Wiring Diagram
ECT sensor ECM
Dg (24) ECT
B/Br (4) E2
I705H1110023-02

Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE
• After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset
• Refer to “ECT Sensor Inspection in Section 1C (Page1C-3)”
Step Action Yes No

2) Remove the air cleaner box. Refer to “Air Cleaner Box contacts on the ECM
Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page1D-9)”. coupler (terminal (24)
or (4)). Refer to
3) Connect the couplers disconnected in the air cleaner
box removal.
of ECM Coupler
4) Check the ECT sensor coupler (1) for loose or poor (Harness Side)
contacts. If OK, then measure the ECT sensor voltage at (Page1A-5)”.
the wire side coupler.
in the Dg wire or B/Br
wire.
I705H1110038-01
5) Disconnect the ECT coupler and turn the ignition switch

ON.
6) Measure the voltage between Dg wire terminal and
ground.

Step Action Yes No

1 7) If OK, then measure the voltage between Dg wire Go to Step 2. • Loose or poor
terminal and B/Bl wire terminal. contacts on the ECM
coupler (terminal (24)
ECT sensor voltage
or (4)). Refer to
4.5 – 5.5 V
(Positive terminal: Dg – Negative terminal: Ground,
of ECM Coupler
Positive terminal: Dg – Negative terminal: B/Br)
(Harness Side)
Special tool (Page1A-5)”.
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) • Open or short circuit
Tester knob indication in the Dg wire or B/Br
Voltage ( ) wire.
B/Br
(A)
Dg
I705H1110039-02
Is the voltage OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Dg or B/Br wire open Replace the ECT
2) Measure the ECT sensor resistance. or shorted to ground, sensor with a new one.
or poor (24) or (4)
ECT sensor resistance connection. Refer to
Approx. 2.58 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F) (Terminal – Terminal) “Terminal Alignment
Special tool of ECM Coupler
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) (Harness Side)
(Page1A-5)”.
• If wire and
Resistance (Ω)
connection are OK,
faulty ECM.
(A)
• Recheck each
terminal and wire
harness for open
circuit and poor
connection.
• Replace the ECM
with a known good
one, and inspect
again.
I705H1110040-02
Is the resistance OK?
Engine coolant temp. Resistance

20 °C (68 °F) Approx. 2.58 kΩ
50 °C (122 °F) Approx. 0.77 kΩ
80 °C (176 °F) Approx. 0.28 kΩ
110 °C (230 °F) Approx. 0.12 kΩ

DTC “C16” (P0500): Speed Sensor

B705H11104020
The speed sensor signal is not input to ECM for more • Speed sensor circuit open or short.
than 3 sec. during the engine is running at 5 000 r/min • Metal particles or foreign material being attached on the
or more. speed sensor.
NOTE • Speed sensor malfunction.
If SDS is used, P0500 is indicated. • ECM malfunction.
Wiring Diagram
ECM
Speedometer
Speed sensor
O/R O/R (12 V)

(33)
P P Speed sensor
B/W B/W (GND)
I705H1110122-02
Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE
• Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset Procedures (Page1A-15)”

Step Action Yes No

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Remove the speed • Loose or poor
2) Remove the left foot board and clutch outer cover. (Refer sensor and Clean contacts on the
to “V-belt Type Continuously Variable Automatic away metal particles speedometer
Transmission Removal and Installation in Section 5A or foreign material. couplers.
(Page5A-3)”.) • If OK, go to Step 2. • Open or short circuit
3) Check the speed sensor lead wire couplers (1) and (2) in the O/R wire or B/
for loose or poor contacts. W wire.
If OK, then measure the speed sensor input voltage.
I705H1110052-01
4) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

6) Measure the speed sensor input voltage at the couplers
(between positive terminal: O/R and negative terminal:
B/W wire).
Speed sensor input voltage
Battery voltage (Positive terminal: O/R – Negative
terminal: B/W)
Special tool
Voltage ( )
(A)
V
B/W
O/R
(B)
I705H1110110-02
Is the voltage OK?

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler. • Recheck ECM • Short circuit in the
(between positive terminal: P and negative terminal: B/ coupler for loose or lead wire.
W) poor contacts. • Replace the speed
2) Turn the ignition switch ON. • Replace ECM with a sensor with a new
3) Check that the speed sensor output voltage varies when new one and inspect one.
a screwdriver is brought close to the pick-up face of the again.
speed sensor.
Special tool
Voltage ( )
I705H1110053-01
Is the voltage OK?

DTC “C21” (P0110-H/L): IAT Sensor Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104021
Output voltage is not with in the following range. • AT sensor circuit open or short
0.2 V ≤ Sensor voltage < 4.9 V • IAT sensor malfunction
NOTE • ECM malfunction
• If SDS is used, P0110-H is indicated when NOTE

value.
IAT sensor circuit is open or ground circuit is
• If SDS is used, P0110-L is indicated when open.
value.
IAT sensor circuit is shorted to ground.
Wiring Diagram
IAT sensor ECM
B/Bl (25) IAT
B/Br (4) E2
I705H1110024-01
Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE
• IAT sensor resistance measurement method is the same way as that of the ECT sensor. Refer to “IAT
Sensor Inspection in Section 1C (Page1C-4)” for details.

Step Action Yes No

2) Remove the front frame cover. (Refer to “Front Frame contacts on the ECM
Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- coupler (terminal (25)
17)”.) and (4)). Refer to
3) Check the IAT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.
of ECM Coupler
If OK, then measure the IAT sensor voltage at the wire
(Harness Side)
side coupler.
(Page1A-5)”.
4) Disconnect the coupler (1) and turn the ignition switch
ON. • Open or short circuit
in the B/Bl wire or B/
Br wire.
I705H1110025-02
5) Measure the voltage between B/Bl wire terminal and

ground.
6) If OK, then measure the voltage between B/Bl wire
terminal and B/Br wire terminal.
IAT sensor voltage
4.5 – 5.5 V
(Positive terminal: B/Bl – Negative terminal: Ground,
Positive terminal: B/Bl – Negative terminal: B/Br)
Special tool
Voltage ( )
(A)
V
B/Bl
B/Br
I705H1110026-03
Is the voltage OK?

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • B/Bl or B/Br wire Replace the IAT sensor
2) Measure the IAT sensor resistance. open or shorted to with a new one.
ground, or poor (25)
IAT sensor resistance or (4) connection.
Approx. 2.58 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F) (Terminal – Terminal) Refer to “Terminal
Special tool Alignment of ECM
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Coupler (Harness
Side) (Page1A-5)”.
• If wire and
Resistance (Ω)
connection are OK,
faulty ECM.
(A) • Recheck each
terminal and wire
harness for open
circuit and poor
connection.
• Replace the ECM
with a known good
one, and inspect
again.
I705H1110027-03
Intake Air Temp. Resistance

0 °C (32 °F) Approx. 6.54 kΩ
20 °C (68 °F) Approx. 2.58 kΩ
40 °C (104 °F) Approx. 1.14 kΩ
80 °C (140 °F) Approx. 0.54 kΩ

DTC “C23” (P1651-H/L): TO Sensor Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104023
The sensor voltage should be the following for 2 sec. and • TO sensor circuit open or short
more, after ignition switch is turned ON. • TO sensor malfunction
• ECM malfunction
NOTE
NOTE
TO sensor circuit is shorted to Vcc or ground
value.
circuit is open.
TO sensor circuit is open or shorted to
value.
Wiring Diagram
ECM
TO sensor
R (14) Vcc
Br/W (2) TOS
B/Br (4) E2
I705H1110028-03

Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE
Step Action Yes No

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the TO sensor
2) Remove the meter panel. (Refer to “Meter Panel with a new one.
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-14)”.)
3) Check the TO sensor coupler (1) for loose or poor
contacts.
If OK, then measure the TO sensor resistance.
I705H1110029-02
4) Disconnect the TO sensor coupler.

5) Measure the resistance between R and B/Br wire
terminals.
TO sensor resistance
16.5 – 22.3 kΩ (R terminal– B/Br terminal)
Special tool
Resistance (Ω)
(A)
I705H1110138-01

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Connect the TO sensor coupler. • R, Br/W or B/Br wire • Loose or poor
2) Remove the TO sensor horizontally open or shorted to contacts on the ECM
ground, or poor (28) coupler.
3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.
or (29) connection. • Open or short circuit.
4) Turn the ignition switch ON. Refer to “Terminal
5) Measure the voltage at the wire side coupler between Alignment of ECM • Replace the TO
Br/W and B/Br wires when holding the TO sensor Coupler (Harness sensor with a new
horizontally. Side) (Page1A-5)”. one.
TO sensor voltage (Normal) • If wire and

0.4 – 1.4 V connection are OK,
(Positive terminal: Br/W – Negative terminal: B/Br) intermittent trouble or
faulty ECM.
Special tool
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) • Recheck each
terminal and wire
Tester knob indication harness for open
Voltage ( ) circuit and poor
connection.
• Replace the ECM
(A) V with a known good
Br/W one, and inspect
again.
B/Br
I705H1110030-03
6) Measure the voltage when it is leaned 65° and more, left

and right, from the horizontal level.
TO sensor voltage (Leaning)
3.7 – 4.4 V
(Positive terminal: Br/W – Negative terminal: B/Br)
Special tool
Voltage ( )
Br/W
(A) V
B/Br
65˚
I705H1110031-04
Is the voltage OK?

DTC “C24” (P0351): Ignition System Malfunction

B705H11104024
Refer to “No Spark or Poor Spark in Section 1H (Page1H-4)” for details.
DTC “C28” (P1655): Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator (STVA) Malfunction

B705H11104034
The operation voltage does not reach the STVA.ECM • STVA malfunction
does not receive communication signal from the STVA. • STVA circuit open or short
NOTE • STVA motor malfunction

Wiring Diagram
ECM
STVA
B P/B (13) STVA. 1B
P B/O (12) STVA. 1A
G W/G (16) STVA. 2B
W/Bl G/R (17) STVA. 2A
I705H1110059-07

Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE
Step Action Yes No

1 1) Remove the helmet box front cover and frame front Go to Step 2. • Loose or poor
cover. (Refer to “Helmet Box Front Cover Removal and contacts on the STVA
Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-16)” and “Front coupler
Frame Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D • Open or short circuit
(Page9D-17)”.) in the B/O, P/B, G/R
2) Check the STVA lead wire coupler (1) for loose or poor or W/G wires
contacts.
• If wire and
connection are OK,
go to Step 2.
I705H1110061-01
3) Remove the air cleaner outlet tube (2).
I705H1110062-01
4) Turn the ignition switch ON to check the STV operation.

(STV operating order: Full open → 95% open)
I705H1110063-01
Is the operation OK?

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • B/O, P/B, G/R or W/G • Loose or poor
2) Disconnect the STVA lead wire coupler. wire open or shorted contacts on the ECM
to ground, or poor coupler.
3) Check the continuity between each terminal and ground.
(13), (12), (16) and • Replace the STVA
STVA continuity (17) connection. with a new one.
∞ Ω (Infinity) (Terminal – Ground) (Refer to “Terminal
Alignment of ECM
Special tool
Coupler (Harness
Side) (Page1A-5)”.)
Tester knob indication • If wire and
Continuity ( ) connection are OK,
faulty ECM.
(A)
• Recheck each
terminal and wire
harness for open
circuit and poor
connection.
• Replace the ECM
with a known good
one, and inspect it
again.
I705H1110119-07
4) If OK, then measure the STVA resistance B wire and P

wire between and between G wire and W/B wire.
STVA continuity
Approx. 6.5 Ω (Terminal “B” – Ground “P”) (Terminal
“G” – Ground “W/B”)
Special tool
Resistance (Ω)
(A)
B G
P W/B
I705H1110120-06

Active Control Inspection

1) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)
3) Click “Secondary throttle operating control”.
I705H1110064-02
4) Click each button (1).

At this time, if an operation sound is heard from the STVA, the function is normal.
I705H1110065-02

DTC “C29” (P1654-H/L): Secondary Throttle Position Sensor (STPS)

B705H11104035
Signal voltage is not within the following range. • STP sensor maladjusted
Difference between actual throttle opening and opening • STP sensor circuit open or short
calculated by ECM is larger than specified value.
• STP sensor malfunction
• ECM malfunction
NOTE
NOTE
value. STP sensor circuit is shorted to Vcc or
ground circuit is open.
value. STP sensor circuit is open or shorted to
Wiring Diagram
ECM
R (14) Vcc
Y/G (29) STP
B/Br (4) E2
STP sensor
I705H1110066-02

Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE
Step Action Yes No

2) Remove the helmet box front cover. contacts on the ECM
coupler (terminal (14)
3) Check the STP sensor coupler (1) for loose or poor
and (4)). Refer to
contacts.
If OK, then measure the STP sensor input voltage.
of ECM Coupler
4) Disconnect the STP sensor coupler. (Black) (Harness Side)
5) Turn the ignition switch ON. (Page1A-5)”.
6) Measure the voltage at the R wire and ground. • Open or short circuit
7) If OK, then measure the voltage at the R wire and B/Br in the R wire or B/Br
wire. wire.
STP sensor input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V
Special tool
Voltage ( )
I705H1110067-01
R (A)
B/Br
V
I705H1110121-01
Is the voltage OK?

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. • R, Y/G or B/Br wire If check result is not
2) Disconnect the STVA lead wire coupler. open or shorted to satisfactory, replace
ground, or poor (14), STP sensor with a new
3) Connect the STP sensor coupler to the test harness.
(29) or (4) one.
4) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connection. Refer to
5) Measure the STP sensor output voltage at the wire “Terminal Alignment
terminal (between positive terminal “A” and negative of ECM Coupler
terminal “B” by turning the secondary throttle valve (Harness Side)
(close and open) with a finger. (Page1A-5)”.
STP sensor output voltage • If wire and
Secondary Throttle valve is closed: Approx. 0.5 V connection are OK,
Secondary Throttle valve is opened: Approx. 3.9 V intermittent trouble or
faulty ECM.
Special tool
: 09900–28630 (TPS test wire harness) • Recheck each
terminal and wire
Tester knob indication harness for open
Voltage ( ) circuit and poor
connection.
• Replace the ECM
with a known good
one, and inspect it
again.
(A)
I705H1110073-02
(A)
A (‫)ޓ‬
Y/G
STP R ECM
B/Br
B (‫)ޓ‬
I705H1110074-02
I705H1110071-01
Is the voltage OK?

DTC “C32” (P0201): Fuel Injector Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104025
No injector signal is detected for 0.8 sec. • Injector circuit open or short.
• Injector malfunction.
NOTE
Wiring Diagram
ECM Fuel pump relay
Y/R
To engine
stop switch
(20) Fuel injector Gr/W
Fuel injector
I705H1110080-01

Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE
• Injector voltage can be detected only for 3 seconds after ignition switch ON.
Step Action Yes No

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the injector
2) Remove the helmet box front cover. (Refer to “Helmet with a new one. (Refer
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D to “Throttle Body
(Page9D-16)”.) Disassembly and
Assembly in Section 1D
3) Check the injector coupler (1) for loose or poor contacts.
(Page1D-13)”.)
If OK, then measure the injector resistance.
I705H1110081-01
4) Disconnect the coupler and measure the resistance

between terminals.
Injector resistance
Approx. 10.3 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F) (Terminal – Terminal)
Special tool
Resistance (Ω)
(A)
I705H1110082-01

Step Action Yes No

1 5) If OK, then check the continuity between each terminal Go to Step 2. Replace the injector
and ground. with a new one. (Refer
to “Throttle Body
Injector continuity
Disassembly and
∞ Ω (Infinity)
Assembly in Section 1D
Special tool (Page1D-13)”.)
Continuity ( )
(A)
I705H1110083-02
Are the resistance and continuity OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch ON. • Gr/W wire open or Open circuit in the Y/R
2) Measure the injector voltage between Y/R wire and shorted to ground, or wire.
ground. poor (20) connection.
Refer to “Terminal
Injector voltage Alignment of ECM
Battery voltage Coupler (Harness
(Positive terminal: Y/R – Negative terminal: Ground) Side) (Page1A-5)”.
Special tool • If wire and
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) connection are OK,
faulty ECM.
Voltage ( )
• Recheck each
terminal and wire
harness for open
(A) circuit and poor
V
Y/R
connection.
• Replace the ECM
with a known good
one, and inspect it
again.
I705H1110084-02
Is the voltage OK?

DTC “C40” (P0505, P0506 or P0507): ISC Valve Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104026
ISC valve motor current is higher than the specified • ISC valve circuit open or shorted to ground
value. • Power source circuit open
NOTE • Air passage clogged
If SDS is used, P0505 is indicated. • ISC valve is fixed
• ISC valve pre-set position is incorrect
Idle speed is lower than the desired idle speed.
NOTE
Idle speed is higher than the desired idle speed.
NOTE
Wiring Diagram
ISC valve ECM

B/Lg (35) IS1A
G (34) IS1B
P/W (15) IS2A
W/B (36) IS2B

I705H1110085-01

Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
• Be careful not to disconnect the ISC valve coupler at least 3 seconds after ignition switch is turned
to OFF.
If the ECM coupler is disconnected within 3 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF, there is a
possibility of an usual valve being written in ECM and causing an error of ISC valve operation.
• When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a
NOTE
Step Action Yes No

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. G, W/B, P/W or B/Lg
2) Remove the helmet box front cover. (Refer to “Helmet wire open.
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D
(Page9D-16)”.)
3) Check the ISC valve coupler (1) for loose or poor
contacts.
4) If OK, then check the ISC valve lead wire continuity.
5) Disconnect the ISC valve coupler and ECM coupler.
(Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C
(Page1C-1)”.)
I705H1110124-01

Step Action Yes No

1 6) Check the continuity between terminals G and (34), Go to Step 2. G, W/B, P/W or B/Lg
terminals W/B and (36), terminals P/W and (15), wire open.
terminals B/Lg and (35).
ISC valve wire continuity
Continuity ( )
Special tool
: 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)
Continuity test ( )
G W/B P/W B/Lg
I705H1110087-01
(15)
(36) (35) (34)

I705H1110088-01
Is the continuity OK?

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. If wire is OK, Replace the ISC valve
2) Measure the resistance (between terminal B/Lg and intermittent trouble or with a new one.
terminal G) and (between terminal P/W and terminal W/ faulty ECM.
B).
ISC valve resistance
Approx. 80 Ω at 68 °C (Terminal B/Lg – Terminal G)
(Terminal P/W – Terminal W/B)
Special tool
Resistance (Ω)
(A)
B/Lg P/W W/B
G
I705H1110090-02
Is the resistance up?
ACTIVE CONTROL INSPECTION (ISC RPM CONTROL)
Check 1
1) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)
2) Check that the engine is running.
3) Click the “Active control”.
4) Click the “ISC rpm control”.
I705H1110091-03

5) Check that the “Spec” (1) is idle speed 1 450 ± 100 rpm.
6) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (2) is within the specified idle rpm.
1
I705H1110092-03
I705H1110093-04
Check 2
1) Click the button (3) and decrease the “Spec” (1) to 1 200 rpm slowly.
2) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (2) is nearly equal to the “Spec” (1). At the same time, check that the number
of steps (4) in the ISC valve position decreases.
3) Click the button (5) and increase the “Spec” (1) slowly.
4) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (2) is nearly equal to the “Spec” (1). Also, check that the number of steps (4) in
the ISC valve position increases.
1 3
I705H1110095-03
2
4
I705H1110096-03

Check 3
1) Click the button (5) and increase the “Spec” (1) to 1 600 rpm slowly.
2) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (2) is nearly equal to the “Spec” (1). Also, check that the number of steps (4) in
the ISC valve position increases.
I705H1110097-03
2
4
I705H1110098-03
Check 4
1) Increase the “Spec” (1) to 1 795 rpm.
2) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (2) is approx. 1 795 rpm.
3) Check that the “Engine speed” (6) is close to 1 795 rpm.
NOTE
Be careful not to increase the “Spec” to 1 800 rpm, or the “Engine speed” may reach the upper limit.
I705H1110099-02
6
2
I705H1110100-03
If the ISC valve does not function properly, replace the ISC valve or inspect the ISC valve. (Refer to “Throttle Body
Disassembly and Assembly in Section 1D (Page1D-13)”).

DTC “C41” (P0230-H/L): FP Relay Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104027
No voltage is applied to fuel pump although fuel pump • Fuel pump relay circuit open or short
relay is turned ON, or voltage is applied to fuel pump, • Fuel pump relay malfunction
although fuel pump relay is turned OFF.
• ECM malfunction
NOTE
NOTE
Voltage is applied to fuel pump although
fuel pump relay switch circuit is shorted to
fuel pump relay is turned OFF.
power source or fuel pump (switch side) is
• If SDS is used, P0230-L is indicated when faulty.
No voltage is applied to fuel pump although
fuel pump relay is turned ON.
fuel pump relay coil circuit is open or short,
or fuel pump relay (coil side) is faulty.
Wiring Diagram
ECM
M Fuel pump
Engine stop
switch
To side-stand Ignition
(11) VM Y/R R/BI switch switch
Side-stand
(19) FP relay Y/Bl O/W relay
Fuel pump
relay
I705H1110101-05

Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE
Step Action Yes No

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • B or O/W wire open Replace the FP relay
2) Remove the front leg shield. (Refer to “Front Leg Shield or short or poor (19) with a new one.
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-14)”.) connection. Refer to
3) Check the FP relay coupler (1) for loose or poor
of ECM Coupler
contacts.
(Harness Side)
If OK, then check the FP relay. (Refer to “Fuel Pump
(Page1A-5)”.
Relay Inspection in Section 1G (Page1G-13)”.)
• Y/R or R/Bl wire
open, shorted or poor
(11) connection Refer
to “Terminal
Alignment of ECM
Coupler (Harness
1 Side) (Page1A-5)”.
• If wire and
connection are OK,
faulty ECM.
I705H1110102-03 • Recheck each
terminal and wire
Is the FP relay OK?
harness for open
circuit and poor
connection.
• Replace the ECM
with a known good
one, and inspect it
again.

DTC “42” (P1650): IG Switch Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104028
Ignition switch signal is not input in the ECM. • Ignition system circuit open or short.
NOTE
When the ID agreement is not verified. • Immobilizer system malfunction

ECM does not receive communication signal from the (For E-02, 19, 24, 54)
immobilizer antenna.
(For E-02, 19, 24, 54)
NOTE
Troubleshooting
Refer to “Ignition Switch Inspection in Section 9B (Page9B-11)” for details.

DTC “C44” (P0130, P0135): HO2 Sensor (HO2S) Circuit Malfunction

B705H11104029
HO2 sensor output voltage is not input to ECM during • HO2 sensor circuit open or shorted to ground.
engine operation and running condition. • Fuel system malfunction.
NOTE • ECM malfunction.
If SDS is used, P0130 is indicated. NOTE
The heater can not operate so that heater operation When P0135-H is displayed, it is possible that
voltage is not supplied to the oxygen heater circuit. no battery voltage is supplied to the HO2
sensor.
NOTE
Wiring Diagram
ECM
(4) E2 B/Br Engine stop Side-stand Ignition

switch relay switch
(7) OX B/Y
O/W
(21) OXH Y/W To Side-
stand switch
Gr
W
W
B
HO2 sensor
I705H1110103-03
Troubleshooting
! CAUTION
NOTE
• Battery voltage can be detected only during a few seconds after ignition switch is turned ON.
• Temperature of the sensor affects resistance value largely.
• Make sure that the sensor heater is at correct temperature.

Step Action Yes No

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the HO2
2) Check the HO2 sensor coupler (1) for loose or poor sensor with a new one.
contacts.
If OK, then measure the HO2 sensor output voltage.
I705H1110104-04
3) Insert the needle pointed probe to the HO2 sensor lead

wire coupler.
4) Warm up the engine enough.
5) Measure the HO2 sensor output voltage between B/Y
wire and B/Br wire, when idling condition.
6) Measure the HO2 sensor output voltage while holding
the engine speed at 3 000 r/min.
HO2 sensor output voltage at idle speed
0.3 V and less
(Positive terminal: B/Y – Negative terminal: B/Br)
HO2 sensor output voltage at 3 000 r/min
0.7 V and more
(Positive terminal: B/Y – Negative terminal: B/Br)
Special tool
Voltage ( )
B/Br
(A) V
(B)
B/Y
I705H1110107-04
Is the voltage OK?

Step Action Yes No

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to step 3. Replace the HO2
2) Insert the needle pointed to the HO2 sensor coupler. sensor with a new one.
3) Turn the ignition switch ON and measure the heater
voltage between O/W wire (ECM side) and ground.
If the tester voltage indicates the battery voltage for few
seconds, it is good condition.
Heater voltage
Battery voltage (Positive terminal: O/W – Negative
terminal: Ground)
Special tool
Voltage ( )
(A) V
O/W
(B)
I705H1110109-03
Is the voltage OK?

3 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Gr or W wire open or Replace the HO2
2) Disconnect the HO2 sensor coupler. shorted to ground, or sensor with a new one.
poor (7), (4), (21) or
3) Measure the resistance between the terminals (W – W)
(1).
of the HO2 sensor.
• If wire and
HO2 sensor resistance connection terminal
11.5 – 14.5 Ω at 23 °C (73 °F) (W – W) and wire harness for
Special tool open circuit and poor
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) connection.
Tester knob indication • Recheck each

Resistance (Ω) terminal and wire
harness for open
circuit and poor
connection.
• If the wires are OK,
replace the ECM with
(A)
a new one, and
inspect again
I705H1110125-03
Is the voltage OK?

Specifications
Service Data
B705H11107001
Injector
Injector resistance Approx. 10.3 Ω at 20 °C (68 F°) —
FI Sensors
CKP sensor resistance 190 – 290 Ω
(+) probe: G/W,
CKP sensor peak voltage 4.5 V and more (When cranking)
(–) probe: Bl
IAP sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
IAP sensor output voltage Approx. 1.5 – 3.5 V at idle speed
TP sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
TP sensor output voltage
ECT sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
IAT sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
TO sensor resistance 16.5 – 22.3 kΩ
Normal 0.4 – 1.4 V
TO sensor output voltage
Leaning 3.7 – 4.4 V
Injector voltage Battery voltage
(+) probe: W,
(–) probe: Ground
STP sensor input voltage 4.5 – 5.5 V
STP sensor output voltage
STP actuator resistance Approx. 6.5 Ω


Special Tool
B705H11108001
09900–25008 09900–25009
Multi-circuit tester set Needle pointed probe set
)(Page1A-23) / )(Page1A- )(Page1A-28) / )(Page1A-
23) / )(Page1A-24) / 37) / )(Page1A-38) /
28) / )(Page1A-29) / 65) / )(Page1A-66)
)(Page1A-31) / )(Page1A-
32) / )(Page1A-35) /
37) / )(Page1A-38) /
41) / )(Page1A-43) /
44) / )(Page1A-47) /
50) / )(Page1A-53) /
54) / )(Page1A-57) /
65) / )(Page1A-66) /
)(Page1A-66)
09900–28630 09904–41010
TPS test wire harness SDS set
)(Page1A-51) )(Page1A-14) / )(Page1A-
17)
09917–47010 09930–82720
Vacuum pump gauge Mode select switch
13) / )(Page1A-13)
99565–01010–008
CD-ROM Ver.8
17)

1B-1 Emission Control Devices:
Emission Control Devices

Precautions
Precautions for Emission Control Devices
B705H11200001
Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page00-1)”.
General Description
Fuel Injection System Description
B705H11201005
AN400 motorcycles are equipped with a fuel injection system for emission level control. This fuel injection system is
precision designed, manufactured and adjusted to comply with the applicable emission limits. With a view to reducing
CO, NOx and HC, all of the fuel injection volumes are stringently controlled with the programmed injection maps in the
ECM by varying engine conditions. Adjusting, interfering with, improper replacement, or resetting of any of the fuel
injection components may adversely affect injection performance and cause the motorcycle to exceed the exhaust
emission level limits. If unable to effect repairs, contact the distributor’s representative for further technical information
and assistance.
“A”
“B”
1
“C”
5 7
6
I705H1120004-01
1. Fuel injector 5. Fuel pump “B”: Before-pressurized fuel

2. Throttle body 6. Fuel mesh filter (For low pressure) “C”: Relived fuel
3. Fuel feed hose 7. Fuel pressure regulator
4. Fuel filter (For high pressure) “A”: Pressurized fuel

Emission Control Devices: 1B-2
Crankcase Emission Control System Description

B705H11201006
The engine is equipped with a PCV system. Blow-by gas in the engine is constantly drawn into the crankcase, which is
returned to the combustion chamber through the PCV (breather) hose, air cleaner and throttle body.
“A”
“B”
“C”
“D”
I705H1120005-01
“A”: Fresh air “B”: Fuel/Air mixture “C”: Exhaust gas “D”: Blow-by gas

Exhaust Emission Control System Description

B705H11201007
The exhaust emission control system is composed of the three-way catalyst system.
1
ECM
“A”
“B”
“C”
I705H1120006-02
1. Fuel injector 3. Three-way catalyst “B”: Fuel/Air mixture

2. HO2 sensor “A”: Fresh air “C”: Exhaust gas
Noise Emission Control System Description

B705H11201001
TAMPERING WITH THE NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM PROHIBITED: Local law or federal law prohibits the following
acts or the causing thereof:
• The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control
prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use.
• The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any
person.
Among Those Acts Presumed to Constitute Tampering Are the Acts Listed Below:
• Removing or puncturing the muffler, baffles, header pipes, screen type spark arrester (if equipped) or any other
component which conducts exhaust gases.
• Removing or puncturing the air cleaner case, air cleaner cover, baffles or any other component which conducts
intake air.
• Replacing the exhaust system or muffler with a system or muffler not marked with the same model specific code as
the code listed on the Motorcycle Noise Emission Control Information label.

Repair Instructions
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation
Installation
B705H11206004 ! CAUTION
Removal
Do not apply oil or other materials to the
! WARNING sensor air holes.
Do not remove the HO2 sensor while it is hot. Install the HO2 sensor in the reverse order of removal.
! CAUTION • Tighten the HO2 sensor to the specified torque.
• Be careful not to expose the HO2 sensor to Tightening torque
excessive shock. HO2 sensor: 48 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.5 lb-ft)
• Do not use an impact wrench when
removing or installing the HO2 sensor. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Inspection
B705H11206002
• Be careful not to twist or damage the Inspect the HO2 sensor in the following procedures:
sensor lead wires. 1) Inspect the HO2 sensor and its circuit referring to
flow table of the malfunction code (C44). Refer to
1) Disconnect the HO2 sensor coupler (1) and remove “DTC “C44” (P0130, P0135): HO2 Sensor (HO2S)
the clamp (2). Circuit Malfunction in Section 1A (Page1A-64)”.
2) Disconnect the HO2 sensor coupler (1).
1
I705H1120007-01
2) Remove the HO2 sensor (3).

I705H1110104-04
NOTE
• Temperature of the sensor affects
resistance value largely.
• Make sure that the sensor heater is at
correct temperature.
3
I705H1120001-02

3) Check the resistance between the terminals (W – W) PCV Hose Inspection

of the HO2 sensor. If the resistance is not within the B705H11206003
standard range, replace the HO2 sensor with a new Inspect the PCV hose (1) for wear and damage.
one. If it is worn or damaged, replace the PCV hose with a
new one.
Resistance Check that the PCV hose (1) is securely connected.
Approx. 11.5 – 14.5 Ω (at 23 °C)
Special tool
1
Resistance (Ω)
(A)
I705H1120002-01
PCV Hose Removal and Installation

B705H11206005
Removal
1) Remove the PCV hose (1).
I705H1120008-01
4) Connect the HO2 sensor coupler securely.
! CAUTION
Do not apply oil or other materials to the 1
sensor air hole.
I705H1120002-01
Installation
Install the PCV hose in the reverse order of removal.

Specifications
Service Data
B705H11207002
FI Sensors
Electrical
Unit: mm (in)
Type NGK: CR7E DENSO: U22ESR-N
Spark plug
Gap 0.7 – 0.8 (0.28 – 0.03)

B705H11207003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
HO2 sensor 48 4.8 34.5 )(Page1B-4)
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

Special Tool
B705H11208001
09900–25008
Multi-circuit tester set
)(Page1B-5)

1C-1 Engine Electrical Devices:
Engine Electrical Devices

Precautions
Precautions for Engine Electrical Device
B705H11300001
(Page00-2)”.
Repair Instructions
ECM Removal and Installation 3) Disconnect the CKP sensor coupler (1).
B705H11306023
Removal
1) Remove the battery (–) lead wire. Refer to “Battery 1
Removal and Installation in Section 1J (Page1J-10)”.
2) Remove the meter panel. Refer to “Meter Panel
14)”.
3) Pull out the ECM (1) from the front box and
disconnect the ECM coupler (2).
I705H1130021-02
4) Remove the generator cover (2).
2
2
I705H1130001-02
Installation
Install the ECM in the reverse order of removal.
I705H1130022-01
CKP Sensor Inspection 5) Remove the CKP sensor (3).
B705H11306003
Refer to “DTC “C12” (P0335): CKP Sensor Circuit
Malfunction in Section 1A (Page1A-22)”.
CKP Sensor Removal and Installation 3

B705H11306004
Removal
1) Drain engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter
Change in Section 0B (Page0B-9)”.
2) Remove the muffler. Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler
Removal and Installation in Section 1K (Page1K-2)”.
I705H1130002-02

Engine Electrical Devices: 1C-2
Installation 3) Remove the upper meter panel. Refer to “Upper

Install the CKP sensor in the reverse order of removal. Meter Panel Removal and Installation in Section 9D
Pay attention to the following points: (Page9D-13)”.
• Install the CKP sensor to the generator cover. Refer to 4) Connect the special tool to the dealer mode coupler.
“Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J Refer to “Self-Diagnostic Procedures in Section 1A
(Page1J-6)”. (Page1A-13)”.
• Install the muffler. Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Special tool
Removal and Installation in Section 1K (Page1K-2)”. (A): 09930–82720 (Mode select switch)
• Pour engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter
IAP Sensor Inspection

B705H11306005
Refer to “DTC “C13” (P0105-H/L): IAP Sensor Circuit
IAP Sensor Removal and Installation

B705H11306006
Removal (A)

Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section I705H1130023-03
9D (Page9D-16)”. 5) Turn the special tool’s switch ON.

2) Disconnect the coupler and screw. 6) If the TP sensor adjustment is necessary, loosen the
3) Remove the IAP sensor (1). TP sensor mounting screw.
7) Slide the TP sensor and bring the line to the middle.
8) Tighten the TP sensor mounting screw.
1
I705H1130006-03
Installation I705H1130007-01
Install the IAP sensor in the reverse order of removal.
TP Sensor Inspection
B705H11306007
Refer to “DTC “C14” (P0120/H/L): TP Sensor Circuit
TP Sensor Adjustment
B705H11306008 I705H1130025-01
Adjust the TP sensor in the following procedures:
“A”: Incorrect “B”: Correct position “C”: Incorrect
1) Warm up the engine.
2) Remove the helmet box front cover. Refer to “Helmet 9) Remove the special tool.
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section 10) Install the removed parts.
9D (Page9D-16)”.

TP Sensor Removal and Installation Temperature sensor specification

B705H11306009
Removal Temperature Standard resistance
20 °C (68 °F) Approx. 2.58 kΩ
1) Remove the helmet box front cover. Refer to “Helmet 50 °C (122 °F) Approx. 0.77 kΩ
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section 80 °C (176 °F) Approx. 0.28 kΩ
9D (Page9D-16)”. 110 °C (230 °F) Approx. 0.12 kΩ
2) Disconnect the coupler and remove the TP sensor
(1). ! CAUTION
• Take special care when handling the ECT

sensor. It may cause damage if it gets a
sharp impact.
• Do not contact the ECT sensor and the
column thermometer with a pan.
4) Install the ECT sensor. Refer to “ECT Sensor

Removal and Installation (Page1C-3)”.
1
ECT Sensor Removal and Installation

B705H11306011
I705H1130003-03
Removal
Installation 1) Remove the air cleaner box. Refer to “Air Cleaner
Install the TP sensor in the reverse order of removal. Box Removal and Installation in Section 1D
Pay attention to the following point: (Page1D-9)”.
• Adjust the position of the TP sensor. Refer to “TP 2) Disconnect the coupler and remove the ECT sensor
Sensor Adjustment (Page1C-2)”. (1).
ECT Sensor Inspection

B705H11306010
ECT sensor is installed on the cylinder head. Inspect the
ECT sensor in the following procedures:
1) Remove the ECT sensor. Refer to “ECT Sensor 1
2) Connect the ECT sensor (1) to a circuit tester and
place it in the oil (2) contained in a pan, which is
placed on a stove.
Special tool
I705H1130005-01
3) Heat the oil to raise its temperature slowly and read Installation
the column thermometer (3) and the ohmmeter. Install the ECT sensor in the reverse order of removal.
If the ECT sensor ohmic valve does not change in Pay attention to the following point:
the proportion indicated, replace it with a new one. • Tighten the ECT sensor to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
3 (A) ECT sensor: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.5 lb-ft)
Speed Sensor Inspection

B705H11306012
1 Inspect the speed sensor. Refer to “DTC “C16” (P0500):
Speed Sensor in Section 1A (Page1A-36)”.
I705H1130004-01

Speed Sensor Removal and Installation IAT Sensor Removal and Installation
B705H11306013 B705H11306015
Removal Removal
1) Remove the outer clutch cover. Refer to “V-belt Type 1) Remove the air cleaner box. Refer to “Air Cleaner
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission Box Removal and Installation in Section 1D
Removal and Installation in Section 5A (Page5A-3)”. (Page1D-9)”.
2) Disconnect the coupler and remove the speed 2) Remove the IAT sensor (1).
sensor (1).
I705H1130024-03
I705H1130008-02
Installation
Installation Install the IAT sensor in the reverse order of removal.
Install the speed sensor in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following point:
• Tighten the IAT sensor mounting screw to the
IAT Sensor Inspection specified torque.
B705H11306014
Inspect the IAT sensor in the following procedures: Tightening torque
1) Remove the IAT sensor. Refer to “IAT Sensor IAT sensor mounting screw: 3.5 N·m (0.35 kgf-m,
Removal and Installation (Page1C-4)”. 2.5 lb-ft)
2) Inspect the IAT sensor resistance. If the value dose
not change in the proportion indicated, replace the TO Sensor Inspection
B705H11306018
IAT sensor with a new one. Inspect the TO sensor. Refer to “DTC “C23” (P1651-H/
NOTE L): TO Sensor Circuit Malfunction in Section 1A
(Page1A-42)”.
IAT sensor resistance measurement method
is the same way as that of ECT sensor. Refer
to “ECT Sensor Inspection (Page1C-3)”.
3) Install the IAT sensor. Refer to “IAT Sensor Removal

and Installation (Page1C-4)”.

TO Sensor Removal and Installation STP Sensor Adjustment

B705H11306019 B705H11306025
Removal Adjust the STP sensor in the following procedures:
1) Remove the meter panel. Refer to “Meter Panel 1) Remove the helmet box front cover. Refer to “Helmet
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section
14)”. 9D (Page9D-16)”.
2) Disconnect the coupler and remove the TO sensor 2) Remove the air cleaner box outlet tube (1).
(1).
I705H1130011-01
I705H1130009-03 3) Disconnect the STVA lead wire coupler (2).

Installation
Install the TO sensor in the reverse order of removal. 5) Insert the needle pointed probes to the STP sensor
Pay attention to the following point: coupler.
• When installing the TO sensor, bring the “UPPER” STP sensor output voltage
letters and arrow mark “A” upward. ST valve is fully closed: 0.5 V
ST valve is fully open: 3.9 V
(Positive terminal: Y/G – Negative terminal: B/Br)
“A” Special tool
(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe
set)
Voltage ( )
(A)
I705H1130010-02 V
STP Sensor Inspection Y/G

B705H11306024
Inspect the STP sensor. Refer to “DTC “C29” (P1654-H/ (B)
L): Secondary Throttle Position Sensor (STPS) in

Section 1A (Page1A-49)”.
B/Br
2
I705H1130012-01

6) Close the STV by finger, and measure the STP ISC Valve Inspection
sensor output voltage. If the output voltage is out of B705H11306027
the value, loosen the STP sensor mounting screw. Inspect the ISC valve. Refer to “DTC “C40” (P0505,
P0506 or P0507): ISC Valve Circuit Malfunction in
ISC Valve Removal and Installation

B705H11306028
Removal
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section
9D (Page9D-16)”.
I705H1130013-01 2) Disconnect the coupler and screw.
7) Adjust the STP sensor (3) until the output voltage 3) Remove the ISC valve (1).
comes within the specified value and tighten the STP
sensor mounting screw.
Special tool
1
: 09930–11950 (Torx wrench)
I705H1130018-01
Installation
Install the ISC valve in the reverse order of removal.
I705H1130014-03
ISC valve pre-set
8) Install the removed parts. When removing or replacing the ISC valve, set the ISC
valve to the following procedures:
STP Sensor Removal and Installation
B705H11306026
Removal Procedure
1) Remove the helmet box front cover. Refer to “Helmet 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF position.
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section 2) Remove the upper meter panel. Refer to “Upper
9D (Page9D-16)”. Meter Panel Removal and Installation in Section 9D
2) Disconnect the coupler and remove the STP sensor (Page9D-13)”.
(1). 3) Connect the special tool to the dealer mode coupler
and turn its switch to ON position. Refer to “Self-
Diagnostic Procedures in Section 1A (Page1A-13)”.
Special tool
: 09930–82720 (Mode select switch)
4) Open the throttle valve fully and turn the ignition
switch to ON position.
5) Then, wait more than 10 seconds while holding the
4) condition.
1
6) Close the throttle valve and turn the ignition switch to
OFF position.
I705H1130016-01
NOTE
Installation The ISC valve is automatically set at PRE-
Install the STP sensor in the reverse order of removal. SET position.
• Adjust the position of STP sensor. Refer to “STP 7) Turn the special tool to OFF position and remove it
Sensor Adjustment (Page1C-5)”. from the dealer mode coupler.

8) Install the upper meter panel. Refer to “Upper Meter HO2 Sensor Inspection
Panel Removal and Installation in Section 9D B705H11306020
(Page9D-13)”. Inspect the HO2 sensor. Refer to “DTC “C44” (P0130,

P0135): HO2 Sensor (HO2S) Circuit Malfunction in
HO2 Sensor Removal and Installation

B705H11306021
Refer to “Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and
Installation in Section 1B (Page1B-4)”.
Specifications
Service Data
B705H11307002
FI Sensors

B705H11307003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
ECT sensor 12 1.2 8.5 )(Page1C-3)
IAT sensor mounting screw 3.5 0.35 2.5 )(Page1C-4)
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

Special Tool
B705H11308001
09900–25008 09900–25009
Multi-circuit tester set Needle pointed probe set
)(Page1C-3) / )(Page1C- )(Page1C-5)
5)
09930–11950 09930–82720
Torx wrench Mode select switch
)(Page1C-6) )(Page1C-2) / )(Page1C-
6)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-1
Engine Mechanical
Precautions
Precautions for Engine Mechanical
B705H11400001

Camshaft and Sprocket Assembly Diagram
B705H11402001
(a)
(b)
I705H1140174-02
: 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

1D-2 Engine Mechanical:
Throttle Cable Routing Diagram

B705H11402003
2
1
“D”
“C”
“A”
“B”
“E”
4 3
I705H1140175-02
1. Clamp “B”: Pass the throttle cables through under and inside of the frame.
Bind the brake-lock cable, starter motor lead wire and seat-lock cable together.
2. Wire harness “C”: Pass the throttle cables through inside of the frame.
Bind the parking brake cable starter motor lead wire and seat-lock cable together.
3. Throttle cable No. 1 “D”: Pass the throttle cables through inside of the frame.
4. Throttle cable No. 2 “E”: Pass the throttle cables through inside of the frames.
“A”: Pass the throttle cables through inside of the frame.


Compression Pressure Check 4) Keep the throttle grip in the fully-opened position.
B705H11404002
The compression pressure reading of the cylinder is a
good indicator of its internal condition.
The decision to overhaul the cylinder is often based on
the results of a compression test. Periodic maintenance
records kept at your dealership should include
compression readings for each maintenance service.
NOTE
• Before checking the engine for
compression pressure, make sure that the
cylinder head bolts are tightened to the
I705H1140177-01
specified torque and the valves are
properly adjusted. 5) Press the starter button and crank the engine for a
few seconds. Record the maximum gauge reading
• Make sure that the battery is in fully-
as the cylinder compression.
charged condition.
Compression pressure specification
1) Warm up the engine. Standard Limit
2) Remove the spark plug. Refer to “Spark Plug E-02, 1 060 – 1 140 kPa
Removal and Installation in Section 0B (Page0B-3)”. 660 kPa
19, 24, (10.6 – 11.4 kgf/cm2,
(6.6 kgf/cm2, 94 psi)
3) Install the compression gauge and adaptor in the 54 150 – 162 psi)
spark plug hole. Make sure that the connection is 1 000 – 1 080 kPa
E-03, 620 kPa
tight. (10.0 – 10.8 kgf/cm2,
28, 33 (6.2 kgf/cm2, 88 psi)
142 – 154 psi)
Special tool
(A): 09915–64512 (Compression gauge) Low compression pressure can indicate any of
(B): 09913–10750 (Compression gauge the following conditions:
adapter)
• Excessively worn cylinder wall
• Worn piston or piston rings
• Piston rings stuck in grooves
(A) • Poor valve seating
• Ruptured or otherwise defective cylinder head
(B)
gasket
6) After checking the compression pressure, reinstall
the removed parts.
I705H1140176-01

Repair Instructions
Engine Components Removable with the Engine in Place
B705H11406001
Engine components which can be removed while the engine is installed on the frame are as follows. For the installing
and removing procedures, refer to respective paragraphs describing each component.
Center of Engine
Item Removal Inspection Installation
Refer to “Starter Motor Refer to “Starter Motor Refer to “Starter Motor
Starter motor Removal and Installation in Inspection in Section 1I Removal and Installation in
Section 1I (Page1I-3)”. (Page1I-5)”. Section 1I (Page1I-3)”.
Refer to “Air Cleaner Refer to “Air Cleaner Refer to “Air Cleaner
Element Removal and Element Inspection in Element Removal and
Air cleaner
Installation in Section 0B Section 0B (Page0B-3)”. Installation in Section 0B
(Page0B-2)”. (Page0B-2)”.
Refer to “Throttle Body Refer to “Throttle Body Refer to “Throttle Body
Throttle body Removal and Installation Inspection and Cleaning Removal and Installation
(Page1D-13)”. (Page1D-15)”. (Page1D-13)”.
Refer to “Engine Top Side Refer to “Cylinder Head Refer to “Engine Top Side
Cylinder head Disassembly (Page1D- Related Parts Inspection Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
16)”. (Page1D-29)”.
Refer to “Engine Top Side Refer to “Cam Chain Refer to “Engine Top Side
Cam chain tension adjuster Disassembly (Page1D- Tension Adjuster Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
16)”. Inspection (Page1D-24)”.
Refer to “Spark Plug Refer to “Spark Plug Refer to “Spark Plug
Spark plug Removal and Installation in Inspection and Cleaning in Removal and Installation in
Section 0B (Page0B-3)”. Section 0B (Page0B-4)”. Section 0B (Page0B-3)”.
Refer to “Valve Clearance Refer to “Engine Top Side
Cylinder head cover Inspection and Adjustment — Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
in Section 0B (Page0B-4)”.
Refer to “Engine Top Side Refer to “Camshaft Refer to “Engine Top Side
Camshaft Disassembly (Page1D- Inspection (Page1D-22)”. Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
16)”.
Refer to “Cylinder Head Refer to “Cylinder Head Refer to “Cylinder Head
Disassembly and Related Parts Inspection Disassembly and
Valve
Reassembly (Page1D- (Page1D-29)”. Reassembly (Page1D-
25)”. 25)”.
Refer to “Engine Top Side Refer to “Cylinder Refer to “Engine Top Side
Cylinder Disassembly (Page1D- Inspection (Page1D-34)”. Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
16)”.
Refer to “Engine Top Side Refer to “Piston and Refer to “Engine Top Side
Piston Disassembly (Page1D- Related Parts Inspection Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
16)”. (Page1D-35)”.
Engine Left Side

Refer to “V-belt Type Refer to “V-belt Type
Continuously Variable Continuously Variable
Fixed drive face Automatic Transmission — Automatic Transmission
Removal and Installation in Removal and Installation in
Section 5A (Page5A-3)”. Section 5A (Page5A-3)”.
Refer to “V-belt Type Refer to “Movable Drive Refer to “V-belt Type
Continuously Variable Face Parts Inspection in Continuously Variable
Movable drive face Automatic Transmission Section 5A (Page5A-9)”. Automatic Transmission


Clutch housing Automatic Transmission Section 5A (Page5A-9)”. Automatic Transmission
Clutch shoe/movable driven face
Automatic Transmission Section 5A (Page5A-9)”. Automatic Transmission
assembly
Refer to “V-belt Type Refer to “Drive V-belt Refer to “V-belt Type
Continuously Variable Inspection in Section 5A Continuously Variable
Drive V-belt Automatic Transmission (Page5A-6)”. Automatic Transmission
Refer to “Final Gear Refer to “Final Drive Gear Refer to “Final Gear
Assembly Removal and Bearing Inspection in Assembly Removal and
Final reduction gear cover
Installation in Section 3A Section 3A (Page3A-8)”. Installation in Section 3A
(Page3A-3)”. (Page3A-3)”.
Refer to “Engine Oil and Refer to “Engine Oil and
Oil filter Filter Change in Section — Filter Change in Section
0B (Page0B-9)”. 0B (Page0B-9)”.
Refer to “Final Gear Refer to “Final Gear
Disassembly and Disassembly and
Rear axle shaft —
Assembly in Section 3A Assembly in Section 3A
Idle shaft —
Driveshaft —
Engine Right Side

Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Refer to “Exhaust System Refer to “Exhaust Pipe /
Muffler Removal and Inspection in Section 1K Muffler Removal and
Exhaust pipe/muffler
Installation in Section 1K (Page1K-4)”. Installation in Section 1K
(Page1K-2)”. (Page1K-2)”.
Refer to “Generator Refer to “Generator Coil Refer to “Generator
Removal and Installation in Resistance Inspection in Removal and Installation in
Section 1J (Page1J-6)”. Section 1J (Page1J-5)”, Section 1J (Page1J-6)”.
Generator
“Generator No-load
Performance Inspection in
Section 1J (Page1J-5)”.
Refer to “Engine Bottom Refer to “Engine Bottom
Starter idle gear Side Disassembly — Side Assembly (Page1D-
(Page1D-37)”. 44)”.
Refer to “Engine Bottom Refer to “Engine Bottom
Balancer driven gear Side Disassembly — Side Assembly (Page1D-
(Page1D-37)”. 44)”.
Refer to “Water Pump Refer to “Water Pump Refer to “Water Pump
Water pump Removal and Installation in Related Parts Inspection in Removal and Installation in
Section 1F (Page1F-14)”. Section 1F (Page1F-17)”. Section 1F (Page1F-14)”.

Engine Assembly Removal and Installation 9) Disconnect the ignition coil lead wires (3).
B705H11406002
Removal 10) Disconnect the ECT sensor coupler (4) and remove
Remove the engine from the frame in the following the wire harness (5) (for the ignition coil, ECT sensor
procedures: and IAT sensor).
2) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System 5
Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-11)”. 4
3) Drain final reduction gear oil. Refer to “Final
Reduction Gear Oil Replacement in Section 0B
(Page0B-10)”.
4) Remove the under cover. Refer to “Under Cover
16)”. 3
5) Remove the left and right footboards. Refer to I705H1140180-01
“Footboard Removal and Installation in Section 9D 11) Disconnect the starter motor lead wire (6) and
(Page9D-21)”. engine ground lead wire (7).
Box Removal and Installation (Page1D-9)”.
7) Remove the throttle body (1) from the intake pipe. 6
1
7
I705H1140181-01
12) Disconnect the generator coupler (8), CKP sensor

coupler (9) and HO2 sensor coupler (10).
I705H1140178-02
8) Disconnect the radiator hoses (1) and (2).

9
10
1
8
2 I705H1140182-01
13) Remove the speed sensor coupler (11).

I705H1140179-01
11
I705H1140183-01

14) Loosen the muffler connecting bolt (12) and remove 20) Remove the collar (17) and rear wheel.
the exhaust pipe bolts (13).
17
13
12
I705H1140188-02
I705H1140184-01 21) Support the engine using an engine jack.

15) Remove the exhaust pipe/muffler by removing the
muffler mounting bolts.
16) Remove the exhaust pipe gasket.
I705H1140189-01
22) Remove the cushion rod bolt/nut (18) and engine

mounting bolt/nut (19).
I705H1140185-02 23) Remove the engine from the frame.
17) Remove the brake hose clamps and rear brake
caliper from the swingarm.
18
19
I705H1140190-02
I705H1140186-01
18) Remove the rear axle nut (14) and collar (15).
19) Remove the swingarm (16).
14
15
16
I705H1140187-02

Installation
Install the engine in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:
2 1 2 3
4 (a)
LH RH
I705H1140191-05
1. Crankcase 3. Engine mounting bolt : 93 N⋅m (9.3 kgf-m, 67.0 lb-ft)

2. Collar 4. Engine mounting nut : Apply grease.
• Tighten the engine mounting nut (2) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque
Engine mounting nut (a): 93 N·m (9.3 kgf-m, 67.0 lb-ft)
• Tighten the cushion rod nut (3) to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Cushion rod nut (b): 85 N·m (8.5 kgf-m, 61.5 lb-ft)
3 (b)
2 (a)
I705H1140193-02
• Make sure that the thread of axle shaft is clean from any greasy matter.
I705H1140194-02
• Install the rear wheel. Refer to “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 2D (Page2D-9)”.
• Tighten the rear axle nut to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Rear axle nut: 120 N·m (12.0 kgf-m, 87.0 lb-ft)
• Install the exhaust pipe/muffler. Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and Installation in Section 1K (Page1K-
2)”.

Crankcase bracket Removal and Installation

B705H11406064
Refer to “Crankcase Bracket Removal and Installation in
Section 2C (Page2C-12)”.
7
Crankcase bracket Inspection
B705H11406065
Refer to “Crankcase Bracket Related Parts Inspection in
9
Air Cleaner Box Removal and Installation 8
B705H11406066
Removal I705H1140197-02
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section
9D (Page9D-16)”.
10
2) Remove the frame front cover. Refer to “Front Frame
(Page9D-17)”.
21)”.
4) Disconnect the PCV hose (1).
I705H1140198-01
7) Remove the air cleaner box cover (11) and air

cleaner element.
11
I705H1140195-01
5) Remove the wire harness clamp bolt (2).

6) Disconnect the following couplers.
• Injector coupler (3)
I705H1140199-01
• IAP sensor coupler (4)
8) Remove the air cleaner box outlet tube (12).
• ISC valve coupler (5)
• TP sensor coupler (6)
• STP sensor coupler (7) 12
• STVA coupler (8)
• ECTS-IATS-Ignition coil lead wire coupler (9)
• IAT sensor coupler (10)
4
2 5
I705H1140200-01
I705H1140196-01

9) Remove the air cleaner box. 4) Visually inspect the drain plugs (1) and (2).
I705H1140201-01 I705H1140238-01
5) Drain water if necessary by removing the plug.

6) Install the removed parts.
“A” Throttle Cable Removal and Installation

B705H11406069
Removal
1) Remove the handlebar covers. Refer to “Handlebar
(Page9D-13)”.
2) Remove the front box. Refer to “Front Box Removal
I705H1140202-02 and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-18)”.
“A”: Hooked point 3) Remove the front frame cover. Refer to “Front Frame
Installation (Page9D-17)”.
Install the air cleaner box in the reverse order of 4) Disengage the throttle cable ends from the throttle
removal. Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Removal and case on handlebars. Refer to “Handlebars Removal
Installation in Section 0B (Page0B-2)”, “Footboard and Installation in Section 6B (Page6B-2)”.
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-21)”,
5) Remove the throttle cables by disengaging the other
“Front Frame Cover Removal and Installation in Section
ends from the throttle body.
9D (Page9D-17)” and “Helmet Box Front Cover Removal
and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-16)”.
Air Cleaner Element Inspection

B705H11406067
Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Inspection in Section 0B
(Page0B-3)”.
Air Cleaner Drain Plug Inspection

B705H11406068
Inspect the air cleaner drain plugs in the following
procedures:
1) Remove the air cleaner element and inspect the I705H1140204-01
drain hole on the air cleaner box for clogging.
2) Remove the front frame cover. Refer to “Front Frame Installation
Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D Install the throttle cables in the reverse order of removal.
(Page9D-17)”. Pay attention to the following point.
3) Remove the left side leg shield. Refer to “Side Leg • Rout the throttle cables properly. Refer to “Throttle
Shield Removal and Installation in Section 9D Cable Routing Diagram (Page1D-2)”.
(Page9D-15)”.
Throttle Cable Adjustment
B705H11406071
Adjust the throttle cable play. Refer to “Throttle Cable
Play Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page0B-
11)”.

Throttle Body Components

B705H11406072
5 7
3
2
3
8
6
3
3
9
3
4
3
D
FW
I705H1140207-05
1. Throttle body 4. STP sensor 7. Insulator

2. TP sensor 5. ISC valve 8. Fuel injector
3. O-ring 6. IAP sensor 9. Cushion seal

Throttle Body Construction

B705H11406074
1 (a)
(c)
(b) UPSIDE
RH LH
4 5 UPSIDE
6 7 “A”
RH LH
FWD
“C”
8
LH RH
“B”
I705H1140237-03
1. ECT sensor 8. IAT sensor

2. IAP sensor “A”: Triangle mark must point downward.
3. ISC valve “B”: Tighten the bracket with the cylinder head bolt (L130).
4. Fuel injector “C”: Tighten each bolt in temporary and final stages in numerical order on bolt.
Refer to “Fuel Pump Disassembly and Assembly in Section 1G (Page1G-10)”.
5. TP sensor : 12 N⋅m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.5 lb-ft)
6. STP sensor : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)
7. STVA : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

Throttle Body Removal and Installation Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly
B705H11406070 B705H11406073
Removal Disassembly
1) Remove the air cleaner box. Refer to “Air Cleaner 1) Remove the throttle body. Refer to “Throttle Body
Box Removal and Installation (Page1D-9)”. Removal and Installation (Page1D-13)”.
2) Remove the throttle cables (1). 2) Remove the insulator (1) and fuel injector (2).
3) Remove the fuel hose (2).
4) Remove the throttle body assembly (3). 1
5) Remove the intake pipe (4).
2
I705H1140208-01
3) Remove the intake pipe (3) and O-ring (4).

4
I705H1140205-01
Installation
Install the throttle body assembly is in the reverse order
of removal. Pay attention to the following points:
• Install the intake pipe. Refer to “Cylinder Disassembly
and Assembly (Page1D-33)”.
• When installing the throttle body to the intake pipe, fit
4
the projection on the throttle body to the depression of 3
the intake pipe.
I705H1140209-02
4) Remove the IAP sensor (5) and O-ring (6).
6
5
I705H1140206-01
• Connect the throttle cables properly. Refer to “Throttle

I705H1140210-01
Cable Removal and Installation (Page1D-10)”.
5) Remove the ISC valve (7).
• Adjust the throttle cable play. Refer to “Throttle Cable
Play Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B
(Page0B-11)”.
I705H1140211-01

6) Remove the TP sensor (8) and STV sensor (9). Assembly

Assembly is the throttle body in the reverse order of
NOTE removal. Pay attention to the following points:
Prior to disassembly, mark each sensors • With the STV fully opened, install the STP sensor (1).
original position with a paint or scribe “A” for
accurate reinstallation. ! CAUTION
Apply thin coat of the engine oil to the O-ring.
8
“A” NOTE
• Align the secondary throttle shaft end “A”
with the groove “B” of STP sensor.
• Apply grease to the secondary throttle
shaft end “A”.
: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

9 GREASE A or equivalent)
“A”
I705H1140212-02
NOTE
Make sure the STP valve open or close
! CAUTION smoothly. If the STP sensor adjustment is
Never remove the STVA (10) from the throttle necessary, refer to “STP Sensor Adjustment
body. in Section 1C (Page1C-5)”.
10
“A” “B”
I705H1140213-01 I705H1140214-02
• With the throttle valve fully closed, install the TP

! CAUTION sensor (2).
Never remove the throttle valve (11) and
! CAUTION
secondary throttle valve (12).
Apply thin coat of the engine oil to the O-ring.
NOTE
• Align the throttle shaft end “C” with the
groove “D” of TP sensor.
• Apply grease to the secondary throttle
shaft end “C”.

GREASE A or equivalent)
11 12
I705H1140216-01

NOTE Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning

B705H11406075
Make sure the TP valve open or close Refer to “Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly
smoothly. If the TP sensor adjustment is (Page1D-13)”.
necessary, refer to “TP Sensor Adjustment in
Section 1C (Page1C-2)”. Cleaning
! WARNING
Some carburetor cleaning chemicals,
2 especially dip-type soaking solutions, are
very corrosive and must be handled carefully.
Always follow the chemical manufacturer’s
instructions on proper use, handling and
storage.
• Clean passageways with a spray-type carburetor

cleaner and blow dry with compressed air.
“D” “C”
I705H1140215-01 ! CAUTION
• Install the ISC valve. Refer to “ISC Valve Removal
Do not use wire to clean passageways. Wire
and Installation in Section 1C (Page1C-6)”.
can damage passageways. If the components
• Apply thin coat of the engine oil to the new O-ring (3) cannot be cleaned with a spray cleaner it may
and cushion seal (4). be necessary to use a dip-type cleaning
solution and allow them to soak. Always
! CAUTION
follow the chemical manufacturer’s
Replace the O-ring and cushion seal with the instructions for proper use and cleaning of
new ones. the throttle body components. Do not apply
carburetor cleaning chemicals to the rubber
and plastic materials.
Inspection
Check following items for any defects or clogging.
• Throttle shafts
• Throttle valve
• Secondary throttle valve
3 Replace the throttle body if necessary.
4
ISC Valve Inspection
I705H1140217-01 Inspect the ISC valve for any carbon deposition defects.
• Install the fuel injector (5) by pushing it straight to the Clean or replace the ISC valve if necessary.
throttle body.
! CAUTION
Never turn the fuel injector while pushing it.
5 I705H1140239-01
I705H1140218-01

Engine Top Side Disassembly 3) Remove the generator cover plug (3) and bring the
B705H11406004 piston to TDC on the compression stroke by turning
It is unnecessary to remove the engine assembly from the crankshaft until the line “A” on the generator rotor
the frame when servicing the engine top side. aligns with the slit “B” in the generator cover.
NOTE
Before servicing the engine top side with
engine inplace, remove the air cleaner box,
throttle body, fuel tank, exhaust pipe, muffler
3
and etc. Refer to “Engine Assembly Removal
and Installation (Page1D-6)”.
! CAUTION
“A” “B”
Identify the position of each removed part.
Organize the parts in their respective groups
(e.g., intake, exhaust) so that they can be I705H1140005-06
reinstalled in their original positions. 4) After removing the cam chain tension adjuster cap
bolt (4), gasket washer and spring, remove the cam
Cylinder Head Cover chain tension adjuster (5) and gasket.
1) Disconnect the spark plug cap (1).
2) Remove the bracket (2).
3) Remove the cylinder head cover (3).
2
4
5
1
I705H1140006-01
5) Remove the cam chain guide No. 2 (6) and camshaft

3
journal holder (7).
I705H1140134-02
! CAUTION
Camshaft Be sure to loosen the camshaft journal
1) Remove the spark plug. Refer to “Spark Plug holder bolts evenly by shifting the wrench
Removal and Installation in Section 0B (Page0B-3)”. diagonally.
2) Remove the cooling fan cover (1) and cooling fan
filter (2).
1 6
2
7
I705H1140007-03
I705H1140004-01

6) Remove the intake camshaft (8) and exhaust 3) Remove the cylinder head (3).
camshaft (9).
NOTE
7) Remove the dowel pins.
Be sure to loosen the cylinder head bolts
evenly and in a crisscross pattern.
8
I705H1140008-01
3
Cylinder Head and Cylinder
I705H1140011-02
1) Remove the water bypass hose (1).
4) Remove the dowel pins and gasket.
I705H1140009-01
I705H1140012-01
2) Remove the heat shield (2).
5) Remove the cam chain guide No. 1 (4).
6) Remove the cylinder (5).
2
5
I705H1140010-02
4
I705H1140013-02
I705H1140014-01

Piston Cylinder
1) Place a clean rag over the cylinder base so as not to • Install the dowel pins (1) and a new gasket (2) to the
drop the piston pin circlip into the crankcase. crankcase.
2) Remove the piston pin circlip (1). • Coat the cylinder wall and piston surface with engine
oil.
! CAUTION
Replace the gasket with a new one.
2
1
I705H1140015-01
3) Remove the piston pin and piston.
Engine Top Side Assembly

B705H11406037
Assemble the engine top side in the reverse order of I705H1140016-02
disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:
• Install the cylinder.
Piston
Cam Chain Guide
• Before installing the piston pin, apply molybdenum oil
• Install the cam chain guide No. 1 (1).
to its surface.
M/O: Molybdenum oil (Molybdenum oil solution) ! CAUTION
• When installing the piston, face the dent mark “A” on When installing the cam chain guide No. 1,
its head to the exhaust side of the cylinder. check that the chain is properly engaged with
the crankshaft sprocket.
NOTE
Place a clean rag over the cylinder base so as
not to drop the piston pin circlip into the
crankcase.
! CAUTION
Use new piston pin circlips.
1
I705H1140017-01
“A”
I705H1140135-03

Cylinder Head 3) Additionally tighten the bolts “A” to the specified

• Place the dowel pins and a new gasket (1) on the torque.
cylinder. Tightening torque
Cylinder head bolt (L190) (Final) (a): 42 N·m (4.2
! CAUTION
kgf-m, 30.5 lb-ft)
1 (a) 1 (a)
1
I705H1140018-02
• Install the cylinder head. 2 (b)
NOTE
When installing the cylinder head, keep the
cam chain taut.
Cylinder head bolt

Tighten the cylinder head bolts “A” (L190) and “B” (L130)
in the following procedures:
1) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and both sides of
washers.
2) Tighten the bolts 1 and 2 diagonally and evenly to
the specified torque.
Tightening torque I705H1140138-03
Cylinder head bolt (L190) (Initial) (a): 25 N·m (2.5
kgf-m, 18.0 lb-ft) Water hose
Cylinder head bolt (L130) (b): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, • Install the water by-pass hose (1).
18.0 lb-ft)
I705H1140019-01

Camshaft • The exhaust camshaft sprocket has an arrow marked

• Turn the crankshaft to bring the piston to the TDC. “1”. Turn the exhaust camshaft so that the arrow is
(Refer to “Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment aligned with the gasket surface of the cylinder head.
in Section 0B (Page0B-4)”.) • Engage the cam chain with the exhaust camshaft
sprocket.
! CAUTION
• The other arrow marked “2” should now be pointing
• Keep the cam chain taut when turning the upward. Starting from the roller pin that is directly
crankshaft, or the chain will be caught above the arrow marked “2”, count out 15 roller pins
between crankcase and cam drive (from the exhaust camshaft side going towards the
sprocket. intake camshaft side).
• To adjust the camshaft timing correctly, be • Engage the 15th roller pin on the cam chain with the
sure to align the line “A” with slit “B” and arrow marked “3” on the intake sprocket.
hold this position during installing the
NOTE
camshafts.
The cam chain should now be on all three
sprockets. Be careful not to move the
crankshaft until the camshaft journal holder
and cam chain tension adjuster are secured.
“B”
“A”
I705H1140020-07
• Coat the journals, cam surfaces and camshaft journal

holder with molybdenum oil.
M/O: Molybdenum oil (Molybdenum oil solution)
I705H1140139-02
• The exhaust camshaft and intake camshaft are • Install the dowel pins.
distinguished by the embossed letters “EX” or “IN”.
I705H1140022-02
I705H1140021-02

• Install the camshaft journal holder (1) and cam chain • Fit a new gasket (2) on the cylinder head.
guide No. 2 (2).
• Tighten the camshaft journal holder bolts in the
ascending order of numbers to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Camshaft journal holder bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,
0.7 lb-ft)
5 I705H1140027-01
8 • Position the cam chain tension adjuster so the UP
1 mark “A” points upward.
4 2
• Tighten the cam chain tension adjuster bolts to the
specified torque.
2 9
! CAUTION
3
1 Replace the gasket with a new one.
7
6 Tightening torque
Cam chain tension adjuster bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-
m, 7.0 lb-ft)
I705H1140219-03
Cam Chain Tension Adjuster

• With the spring holder bolt and spring removed from
the cam chain tension adjuster, release locking of the
ratchet mechanism (1) and push the push rod all the
“A”
way in.
I705H1140028-04
• Install the gasket washer (3), spring (4) and spring

holder bolt (5).
! CAUTION
1
Replace the gasket washer with a new one.
I705H1140026-01
5
3
4
I705H1140029-01

• Tighten the spring holder bolt to the specified torque. • Install the spark plug.
Tightening torque Tightening torque
Spring holder bolt: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) Spark plug: 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 lb-ft)
! CAUTION
Camshaft Inspection
B705H11406046
• When the cam chain tension adjuster has Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page1D-16)”.
been installed, check for cam chain Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
tension to determine if the tension adjuster
is functioning properly. Camshaft Identification
• Turn the crankshaft and check that all the The exhaust camshaft has embossed letters “EX” and
moving parts work properly. automatic decomp. (1).
The intake camshaft has embossed letters “IN”.
• Inspect the valve clearance. Refer to “Valve
Clearance Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B
(Page0B-4)”.
Cylinder Head Cover

• Install the gaskets (1) and (2) to the cylinder head
cover.
! CAUTION
Replace the gaskets with the new ones. 1
• Apply bond to the cam end cap. I705H1140037-01
: Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI Bond

Cam Wear
1207B or equivalent)
Check the camshaft for wear or damage.
Measure the cam height “a” with a micrometer.
Replace a camshaft if the cams are worn to the service
1 limit.
2 Special tool
: 09900–20202 (Micrometer (1/100 mm, 25 – 50
mm))
Cam height “a”
Service limit: (IN) 36.31 mm (1.430 in)
Service limit: (EX) 35.64 mm (1.403 in)
I705H1140030-02
• Replace the gaskets with new ones and apply engine

oil to both sides of them.
• Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. “a”
Tightening torque
Cylinder head cover bolt (a): 14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m,
10.0 lb-ft)
I649G1140199-01
(a)
I705H1140031-02

Camshaft Runout 3) Install the camshaft journal holder. Refer to “Engine

Measure the runout using the dial gauge. Replace the Top Side Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
camshaft if the runout exceeds the limit.
NOTE
Special tool
Do not rotate the camshafts with the
(A): 09900–20606 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm))
plastigauge in place.
(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)
(C): 09900–21303 (V-block (75 mm)) Tightening torque
Camshaft runout (IN & EX) Camshaft journal holder bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-
Service limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in) m, 7.0 lb-ft)
(A)
(B)
(C)
I705H1140038-03 I705H1140040-01
4) Remove the camshaft journal holder and measure

Camshaft Journal Wear the width of the compressed plastigauge using the
Inspect the camshaft journal wear in the following envelope scale. This measurement should be taken
procedures: at the widest part of the compressed plastigauge.
1) Determine whether or not each journal is worn down Camshaft journal oil clearance (IN & EX)
to the limit by measuring the oil clearance with the Service limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
camshaft installed in place.
2) Use the plastigauge to read the clearance at the
widest portion, which is specified as follows.
Special tool
(A): 09900–22301 (Plastigauge (0.025 –
0.076 mm))
I705H1140041-02
(A)
I705H1140039-02

5) If the camshaft journal oil clearance exceeds the Automatic Decomp.

limit, measure the inside diameter of the camshaft Check that automatic decomp. cam (1) moves smoothly
journal holder and the outside diameter of the and pin (2) rotates together. If any abnormal condition
camshaft journal. Replace the camshaft or the are found, replace the camshaft.
cylinder head depending upon which one exceeds
the specification.
Special tool
(B): 09900–20602 (Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1
mm))
(C): 09900–22403 (Small bore gauge (18 –
35 mm))
2
Camshaft journal holder I.D. (IN & EX)
Standard: 22.012 – 22.025 mm (0.8666 – 0.8671
1
in)
I705H1140043-01
Cam Chain Tension Adjuster Inspection

B705H11406047
(C)
The cam chain tension adjuster is maintained at the
(B)
proper tension by an automatically adjusted.
1) Remove the cam chain tension adjuster. Refer to
“Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page1D-16)”.
2) Unlock the ratchet mechanism (1) and move the
push rod (2) in place to see if it slides smoothly. If it
does not slide smoothly or the ratchet mechanism is
I705H1140042-04 worn or damaged, replace the cam chain tension
Special tool adjuster with a new one.
(D): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))
Camshaft journal O.D. (IN & EX)
Standard: 21.972 – 21.993 mm (0.8650 – 0.8659
in) 1
(D)
I705H1140044-01
3) Install the cam chain tension adjuster. Refer to

“Engine Top Side Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
I705H1140243-01

Cam Chain Guide Inspection 2) Install the protector (3) between the valve spring and
B705H11406049 cylinder head.
Inspect the cam chain guide in the following procedures:
3) Using the special tools, compress the valve spring
1) Remove the cam chain guides. Refer to “Engine Top and remove the two cotter halves from the valve
Side Assembly (Page1D-18)”. stem.
2) Check the contacting surface of the cam chain
guide. If it is worn or damaged, replace it with a new Special tool
one. (A): 09916–14510 (Valve spring
compressor)
(B): 09916–14530 (Valve spring compressor
attachment)
(C): 09919–28610 (Sleeve protector)
: 09916–84511 (Tweezers)
! CAUTION
To prevent damage of the tappet sliding
surface with the special tool, use the
protector.
I705H1140046-01
3) Install the cam chain guides. Refer to“Engine Top

3 (C)
Side Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
(B)
Cylinder Head Disassembly and Reassembly (A)
B705H11406013
Disassembly
! CAUTION
Identify the position of each removed part.
1) Remove the tappet (1) and shim (2) by fingers or I705H1140048-04
magnetic hand. 4) Remove the valve spring retainer (4) and valve
spring (5).
5) Pull out the valve (6) from the combustion chamber
side.
2
1
I705H1140236-01
5
! CAUTION 4 6
Identify the position of each removed part. I705H1140049-01

6) Remove the oil seal (7) and spring seat (8). 10) Remove the intake pipe (11).
11) Remove the ECT sensor (12).
12) Remove the oil jet (for cam chain tension adjuster)
(13).
11
7
8
I705H1140050-02
! CAUTION
13
12
Do not reuse the removed oil seal. I705H1140054-01
13) Remove the oil gallery plug (cylinder head) (14).

7) Remove the other valves in the same manner as
described previously.
8) Remove the thermostat case (9).
14
I705H1140055-01
Assembly
I705H1140051-02 Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay
9) Remove the thermostat (10). attention to the following points:
• Tighten the oil gallery plug (cylinder head) (1) to the
specified torque.
10
1
I705H1140053-01
I705H1140141-01
Tightening torque
Oil gallery plug (cylinder head): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-
m, 7.0 lb-ft)
! CAUTION

• Apply engine oil to O-ring and install the oil jet.

• Apply engine coolant to O-ring and install the ECT
sensor.
! CAUTION
Replace each O-ring with a new one.
Tightening torque
ECT sensor: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.5 lb-ft)
(a)
I705H1140222-01
• Install the thermostat. Refer to “Thermostat Removal

and Installation in Section 1F (Page1F-11)”.
• Install the valve spring seat.
• Apply MOLYBDENUM OIL SOLUTION to the oil seal
(2), and press-fit it into position.
M/O: Molybdenum oil (MOLYBDENUM OIL
SOLUTION)
I705H1140220-01 ! CAUTION
• Make sure that the scooped part “A” faces downward.
Do not reuse the removed oil seal.
• Apply grease to O-ring and thread lock to the intake
pipe bolts.
: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER 2
: Thread lock cement 99000–32050
(THREAD LOCK CEMENT 1342 or equivalent)
• Tighten the intake pipe bolts to the specified torque.
! CAUTION
Replace the O-ring with a new one. I705H1140223-01
• Insert the valve, with its stem coated with

Tightening torque MOLYBDENUM OIL SOLUTION all around and along
Intake pipe bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) the full stem length without any break.
! CAUTION
When inserting the valve, take care not to
damage the lip of the oil seal.
“A”
M/O: Molybdenum oil (MOLYBDENUM OIL
SOLUTION)
I705H1140221-02
I705H1140165-01

• Install the valve spring with the small-pitch portion “B” • Install the other valves and springs in the same
facing cylinder head. manner as described previously.
“E” ! CAUTION
• Be sure to restore each spring and valve to

“D” “C” their original positions.
• Be careful not to damage the valve and
“B” valve stem when handling it.
I705H1140166-02
• Install the tappet shims and the tappets to their
original positions.
“C”: Large-pitch portion “D”: UPWARD “E”: Paint
NOTE
• Put on the valve spring retainer (3), and using the
special tools, press down the spring, fit the cotter • Apply engine oil to the stem end, shim and
halves to the stem end, and release the lifter to allow tappet before fitting them.
the cotter halves to wedge in between retainer and • When seating the tappet shim, be sure the
stem. figure printed surface faces the tappet.
Special tool
(A): 09916–14510 (Valve spring compressor)
(B): 09916–14530 (Valve spring compressor
attachment)
(C): 09919–28610 (Sleeve protector)
: 09916–84511 (Tweezers)
3
(B)
(A)
I705H1140047-02
(C)
I705H1140167-03
• Be sure that the rounded lip “F” of the cotter fits snugly
into the groove “G” in the stem end.
“G” “F”
1
I705H1140168-02
1. Valve spring retainer 2. Cotter

Cylinder Head and Related Parts Inspection Valve Head Radial Runout
B705H11406014 Place the dial gauge at a right angle to the valve head
face and measure the valve head radial runout. If it
Cylinder Head Distortion measures more than the service limit, replace the valve.
1) Decarbonize the combustion chambers.
Special tool
2) Check the gasket surface of the cylinder head for
(A): 09900–20606 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm))
distortion. Use a straightedge and thickness gauge.
Take clearance readings at several places. If
(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))
readings exceed the service limit, replace the
cylinder head. Valve head radial runout
Service limit: 0.03 mm (0.001 in)
Special tool
: 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)
(A)
Cylinder head distortion
(B)
(C)
I649G1140232-02
Valve Face Wear

Visually inspect each valve face for wear. Replace any
valve with an abnormally worn face. The thickness of the
I705H1140056-02
valve face decreases as the face wears. Measure the
valve face “a”. If it is out of specification replace the
Valve Stem Runout
valve with a new one.
Support the valve using V-blocks, as shown, and check
its runout using the dial gauge. If the runout exceeds the Special tool
service limit, replace the valve. : 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers)
Special tool Valve face thickness “a”
(A): 09900–20606 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm)) Service limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 in)
(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))
Valve stem runout
(A)
“a”
I649G1140233-01
(B)
(C)
I649G1140231-02

Valve Stem Deflection Valve Springs

Lift the valve about 10 mm (0.39 in) “a” from the valve The force of the coil spring keeps the valve seat tight.
seat. Measure the valve stem deflection in two Weak-ened spring result in reduced engine power
directions, “X” and “Y”, perpendicular to each other. output, and often account for the chattering noise
Position the dial gauge as shown. If the deflection coming from the valve mechanism.
exceeds the service limit, then determine whether the Check the valve spring for proper strength by measuring
valve or the guide should be replaced with a new one. its free length and also by the force required to compress
it.
Special tool
If the spring length is less than the service limit, or if the
(A): 09900–20606 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm))
force required to compress the spring does not fall within
the range specified, replace the spring.
Valve stem deflection (IN & EX)
Special tool
(A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers)
Valve spring free length (IN & EX)
(A)
“X” Valve spring tension (IN & EX)
“Y” Standard: 137.3 N (14.0 kgf, 30.1 lbs) 33.35 mm
(1.313 in)
(B) (A)
I705H1140057-02
Valve Stem Diameter

Measure the valve stem O.D. using the micrometer. If it
is out of specification, replace the valve with a new one. I649G1140237-02
If the valve stem O.D. is within specification but the valve
stem deflection is not, replace the valve guide. After
“a”
replacing the valve or valve guide, recheck the
deflection.
Special tool “b”
(A): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))
Valve stem O.D.
Standard (IN): 4.475 – 4.490 mm (0.1762 – 0.1768 in)
Standard (EX): 4.455 – 4.470 mm (0.1754 – 0.1760 in)
NOTE I649G1140238-02
If valve guides have to be removed for Tension “a” Length “b”

replacement after inspecting related parts, 137.3 N 33.35 mm
carry out the steps shown in valve guide (14.0 kgf, 30.1 lbs) (1.313 in)
replacement. Refer to “Valve Guide
Replacement (Page1D-32)”.
I310G1140110-01

Valve Seat Width Valve Seat Sealing Condition

1) Visually check for valve seat width on each valve 1) Clean and assemble the cylinder head and valve
face. If the valve face has worn abnormally, replace components.
the valve. 2) Fill the intake and exhaust port with gasoline to
2) Coat the valve seat with a red lead (Prussian Blue) check for leaks. If any leaks occur, inspect the valve
and set the valve in place. seat and face for burrs or other things that could
3) Rotate the valve with light pressure. prevent the valve from sealing. Refer to “Valve Seat
Repair (Page1D-33)”.
Special tool
(A): 09916–10911 (Valve lapper set) ! WARNING
Always use extreme caution when handling
gasoline.
(A)
I705H1140058-01
4) Check that the transferred red lead (blue) on the

valve face is uniform all around and in center of the
valve face.
I705H1140059-01
If the seat width “a” measured exceeds the standard
value, or seat width is not uniform reface the seat NOTE
using the seat cutter. Refer to “Valve Seat Repair
After servicing the valve seats, be sure to
(Page1D-33)”.
check the valve clearance after the cylinder
Valve seat width “a” head has been reinstalled. Refer to “Valve
Standard: 0.9 – 1.1 mm (0.035 – 0.043 in) Clearance Inspection and Adjustment in
“a”
I649G1140246-01

Valve Guide Replacement 5) Cool down the new valve guides in a freezer for
B705H11406051 about one hour and heat the cylinder head to 100 –
1) Remove the cylinder head. Refer to “Engine Top 150 °C (212 – 302 °F) with a hot plate.
Side Disassembly (Page1D-16)”.
2) Remove the valves. Refer to “Cylinder Head ! CAUTION
Disassembly and Reassembly (Page1D-25)”. Do not use a burner to heat the valve guide
3) Using the valve guide remover, drive the valve guide hole to prevent cylinder head distortion.
out toward the intake or exhaust camshaft side.
6) Apply engine oil to each valve guide (1) and valve
Special tool guide hole.
(A): 09916–43210 (Valve guide remover/
installer) 7) Drive the guide into the guide hole using the valve
guide installer.
NOTE
! CAUTION
• Discard the removed valve guide sub
assemblies. Failure to oil the valve guide hole before
driving the new guide into place may result in
• Only oversized valve guides are available a damaged guide or head.
as replacement parts. (Part No. 11115-
32C71)
Special tool
(A): 09916–43210 (Valve guide remover/
installer)
(D): 09916–53330 (Attachment)
(A)
(A)
(D)
“a”
I705H1140060-02
4) Refinish the valve guide holes in the cylinder head “A”

using the reamer and handle. I705H1140023-04
“A”: Cylinder head “a”: 13.3 mm (0.52 in)

! CAUTION
When refinishing or removing the reamer
from the valve guide hole, always turn it
clockwise.
Special tool
(B): 09916–34561 (Valve guide reamer (11.3 (A)
mm))
(C): 09916–34542 (Reamer handle)
(C)
I705H1140062-02
8) After installing the valve guides, refinish their guiding

bores using the reamer. Be sure to clean and oil the
(B) guides after reaming.
Special tool
(C): 09916–34542 (Reamer handle)
(E): 09916–33210 (Valve guide reamer (4.5
mm))
I705H1140061-03

NOTE NOTE
• Be sure to cool down the cylinder head to After servicing the valve seats, be sure to
ambient air temperature. check the valve clearance after the cylinder
head has been reinstalled. Refer to “Valve
• Insert the reamer from the combustion
Clearance Inspection and Adjustment in
chamber side and always turn the reamer
handle clockwise.
Cylinder Disassembly and Assembly

B705H11406059
(C)
Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page1D-16)”
and “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
(E)
Disassembly
• Remove the water inlet connector (1).
(A)
I705H1140063-04
9) Reassemble the cylinder head. Refer to “Cylinder

Head Disassembly and Reassembly (Page1D-25)”.
10) Install the cylinder head assembly. Refer to “Engine 1
Top Side Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
Valve Seat Repair I705H1140142-01

B705H11406052
The valve seats (1) for both the intake and exhaust
valves are machined to three different angles. The seat Assembly
contact surface is cut at 45°. • Apply engine coolant to the O-ring.
! CAUTION
Replace the O-ring with a new one.
Tightening torque
1
Water inlet connector bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-
I705H1140224-01 ft)
Intake Exhaust
Seat angle 30°/45°/60°
Seat width 0.9 – 1.1 mm (0.035 – 0.043 in)
31 mm 27 mm
Valve diameter
(1.22 in) (1.06 in)
Valve guide I.D. 4.500 – 4.512 mm (0.1969 – 0.1973 in)
! CAUTION
• The valve seat contact area must be

inspected after each nut.
• Do not use lapping compound after the I705H1140143-01
final cut is made. The finished valve seat
should have a velvety smooth finish but
not a highly polished or shiny finish. This
will provide a soft surface for the final
seating of the valve which will occur
during the first few seconds of engine
operation.

Cylinder Inspection Piston-to-cylinder Clearance

B705H11406053 Refer to “Piston and Related Parts Inspection (Page1D-
Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page1D-16)”. 35)”.
Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
Cylinder Distortion Piston Ring Removal and Installation

B705H11406055
Check the gasket surface of the cylinder for distortion. Removal
Use a straightedge and thickness gauge. Take clearance 1) Draw out the piston pin and remove the piston. Refer
readings at several places. If any reading exceeds the to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page1D-16)”.
service limit, replace the cylinder.
2) Carefully spread the ring opening with your thumbs
Special tool and then push up the opposite side of the 1st ring (1)
: 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge) to remove it.
Cylinder distortion NOTE
Do not expand the piston ring excessively
since it is apt to be broken down.
I705H1140064-01
Cylinder Bore
I705H1140066-02
• Inspect the cylinder wall for any scratches, nicks or
3) Remove the 2nd ring and oil ring in the same
other damage.
procedures.
• Measure the cylinder bore diameter at six place.
Special tool Installation
(A): 09900–20508 (Cylinder gauge set)
NOTE
Cylinder bore
• When installing the piston ring, be careful
Standard: 81.000 – 81.015 mm (3.1890 – 3.1896 in)
not to damage the piston.
• Do not expand the piston ring excessively
since it is apt to be broken down.
(A) 1) Install the piston rings in the order of the oil ring,
second ring and top ring.
a) The first member to go into the of the oil ring
groove is a spacer (1).
After placing the spacer, fit the two side rails (2).
2
I705H1140065-01 1
2
I705H1140169-02
I705H1140025-01

! CAUTION 2) Position the gaps of the three rings and side rails as
shown. Before inserting piston into the cylinder,
When installing the spacer, be careful so that check that the gaps are so located.
the both edges are not overlapped.
“B”
“A”
A
“A” “C”
I705H1140172-03
“A”: 1st ring and upper side rail “C”: 2nd ring and lower side rail
“B”
B “B”: Spacer
I705H1140170-02
“A”: INCORRECT “B”: CORRECT 3) Install the piston and piston pin. Refer to “Engine Top
Side Assembly (Page1D-18)”.
b) Install the 2nd ring (3) and 1st ring (4) to piston.
Piston and Related Parts Inspection
NOTE B705H11406056
1st ring (4) and 2nd ring (3) differ in shape. Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page1D-16)”.
Piston Diameter
Measure the piston diameter using the micrometer at 15
4
mm (0.6 in) from the skirt end. If the piston diameter is
less than the service limit, replace the piston.
Special tool
(A): 09900–20204 (Micrometer (75 – 100 mm))
Piston diameter
3 Service limit: 80.880 mm (3.1842 in)
I705H1140164-01
NOTE
Face the side with the stamped mark “A”
upward when assembling.
15 mm (0.6 in)
4 I705H1140173-02
“A”
IT
“A” (A)
2T
I649G1140262-02
I705H1140133-04

Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance Piston Ring Free End Gap and Piston Ring End Gap
Subtract the piston diameter from the cylinder bore Measure the piston ring free end gap using vernier
diameter. If the piston-to-cylinder clearance exceeds the calipers. Next, fit the piston ring squarely into the
service limit, replace both the cylinder and the piston. cylinder and measure the piston ring end gap using the
thickness gauge. If any of the measurements exceed the
Piston-to-cylinder clearance
service limit, replace the piston ring with a new one.
Special tool
Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance (A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers)
Measure the side clearances of the 1st and 2nd piston
rings using the thickness gauge. If any of the clearances
Service limit: (1st): 6.0 mm (0.24 in)
exceed the limit, replace both the piston and piston
Service limit: (2nd): 9.2 mm (0.36 in)
rings.
Special tool
Special tool
(B): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)
(B): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm)) Piston ring end gap
Piston ring-to-groove clearance
Piston ring groove width
Standard: (1st): 1.21 – 1.23 mm (0.0476 – 0.0484 in)
Standard: (2nd): 1.01 – 1.03 mm (0.0398 – 0.0406 in)
Standard: (Oil): 2.01 – 2.03 mm (0.0791 – 0.0799 in)
(A)
Standard: (1st): 1.17 – 1.19 mm (0.0461 – 0.0469 in)
Standard: (2nd): 0.97 – 0.99 mm (0.0382 – 0.0396 in)
I649G1140265-02
(A)
(B)
I649G1140263-02
I705H1140067-01
(B)
I649G1140264-02

Piston Pin and Pin Bore Engine Bottom Side Disassembly

Measure the piston pin bore inside diameter using the B705H11406057
small bore gauge. If either is out of specification or the ! CAUTION

difference between these measurement is more than the Identify the position of each removed part.
limits, replace the piston. Organize the parts in their respective groups
Special tool (e.g., intake, exhaust) so that they can be
(A): 09900–20602 (Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1 reinstalled in their original positions.
mm))
(B): 09900–22403 (Small bore gauge (18 – 35 NOTE
mm)) The crankcase must be separated to service
Piston pin bore I.D. the crankshaft, oil pump.
1) Remove the engine assembly. Refer to “Engine
Assembly Removal and Installation (Page1D-6)”.
2) Remove the cylinder head, cylinder and piston.
(A)
(B) Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page1D-
16)”.
PCV hose
Remove the PCV hose (1).
I649G1140267-02
Measure the piston pin outside diameter at three 1

positions using the micrometer. If any of the
measurements are out of specification, replace the
piston pin.
Special tool
(C): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))
Piston pin O.D.
I705H1140225-01
Starter Motor
(C) Remove the starter motor (1).
I649G1140268-02
I705H1140068-01

Ignition Coil Outer Clutch Cover

Remove the ignition coil (1). Remove the outer clutch cover (1).
I705H1140069-01 I705H1140072-01
Water Pump Oil Filter

Remove the water pump assembly (1). 1) Remove the oil filter cap (1).
I705H1140073-03 I705H1140074-01
2) Remove the oil filter (2) and O-ring (3).

Generator Cover
1) Remove the generator cover (1).
1 3
2
I705H1140075-02
I705H1140070-04 Transmission Breather Hose

2) Remove the dowel pins and gasket (2). Remove the transmission breather hose (1).
1
2
I705H1140071-02 I705H1140076-04

Speed Sensor 5) With the clutch housing held immovable using the
Remove the speed sensor (1). special tool, remove the clutch housing nut and
concaved washer.
6) Remove the clutch housing (3).
Special tool
(A): 09930–40113 (Rotor holder)
I705H1140077-01
(A)
Drivetrain
1) Remove the inner clutch cover (1).
I705H1140081-01
1 7) Remove the drive V-belt (4) and clutch shoe/

movable driven face assembly (5).
I705H1140078-01
I705H1140082-01
8) Remove the movable drive face assembly (6) with

the spacer (7).
I705H1140079-01
3) With the crankshaft held immovable, remove the

fixed drive face nut and concaved washer. 6 7
4) Remove the fixed drive face (2).
I705H1140083-02
9) Remove the final gear assembly. Refer to “Final

Gear Assembly Removal and Installation in Section
3A (Page3A-3)”.
2
I705H1140080-01

Generator Rotor Cam Chain and Starter Idle Gear

1) With the generator rotor held immovable, loosen the 1) Remove the cam chain (1), starter idle gear shaft (2),
generator rotor nut. spacer (3) and starter idle gear (4).
3 2
1
I705H1140087-01 I705H1140090-02
2) Remove the generator rotor (1) using the special

tool. Cam Chain Tensioner
1) Remove the cam chain tensioner (1).
Special tool
(A): 09930–31921 (Rotor remover) 2) Remove the cam chain guide bolt (2).
1 1
(A)
2
I705H1140091-01
I705H1140088-02
Starter Drive Gear

Remove the key (1) and starter driven gear (2).
I705H1140089-02

Balancer Driven Gear Oil Pump Drive Gear

1) Insert a proper steel rod “A” into the crankcase hole 1) Remove the oil pump drive gear cover (1).
“B” and pass it through the crankshaft web holes in
order to prevent the crankshaft from turning.
“A”
“B”
“A” I705H1140096-01
2) Remove the oil pump drive gear nut (2).

I705H1140092-02
3) Remove the oil pump drive gear (3).
2) Remove the balancer driven gear nut (1) and
washer.
1 2
I705H1140097-01
4) Remove the pin (4) and spacer (5).

I705H1140093-01
3) Remove the balancer driven gear (2) along with the

scissors gear behind.
4 5
2 I705H1140098-02
I705H1140094-01
4) Remove the key (3).
I705H1140095-01

Crankcase
1) Remove the balancer drive gear nut.
Special tool
(A): 09922–21410 (Long socket (46 mm))
(A) I705H1140102-01
6) Separate the crankcase using the special tool.

Special tool
(B): 09920–13120 (Crankcase separating
I705H1140099-01 tool)
2) Remove the steel rod.
NOTE
3) Remove the washer (1) and balancer drive gear (2).
• Set the special tool so that the tool arms
4) Remove the pin (3).
are in parallel with the end face of
crankcase.
2 • The crankshaft should remain in the left
1
3 crankcase half.
(B)
I705H1140100-01
5) Remove the crankcase bolts (M6 and M8).
! CAUTION
Loosen the smaller diameter crankcase bolts I705H1140103-03
first and then larger ones diagonally and
7) Remove the O-rings (4) and dowel pins.
evenly.
I705H1140104-04
I705H1140101-01

Balancer Shaft 2) Remove the oil pump assembly (2).

Remove the balancer shaft (1).
I705H1140108-01
I705H1140105-01 3) Remove the oil pump drive shaft (3) and chain (4).
Oil Sump Filter

1) Remove the oil sump filter cover (1).
2) Remove the oil sump filter (2).
3
I705H1140109-01
2
Crankshaft
1 Remove the crankshaft using the spacial tool.
I705H1140106-03 Special tool
(A): 09920–13120 (Crankcase separating tool)
Oil Pump
1) Remove the oil pump drive chain case (1). NOTE
Set the special tool so that the tool arms are
in parallel with the end face of crankcase.
(A)
I705H1140107-04
I705H1140110-02

Engine Bottom Side Assembly Oil Pump

B705H11406058
Assemble the engine bottom side in the reverse of • Install the oil pump drive shaft (1) and oil pump drive
disassembly. Pay attention to the following points: chain (2) to the bearing.
Crankshaft
• Using the special tools, press in the crankshaft into
the left crankcase.
1
NOTE
When pressing in the crankshaft into the
crankcase, insert the inner driver
attachments “A” (φ25 mm) and “B” (φ30 mm)
of the bearing installer set between the 2
crankcase bearing inner lace and crankshaft
installer. I705H1140113-02
• Install the oil pump assembly (3) and tighten the oil
Special tool pump mounting bolt to the specified torque.
(A): 09910–32812 (Crankshaft installer)
(B): 09910–32870 (Crankshaft installer Tightening torque
attachment) Oil pump mounting bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0
(C): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) lb-ft)
! CAUTION
• Do not hit the crankshaft with a plastic

hammer or the like to install the crankshaft
into the crankcase.
• Make sure that the direction of conrod is
turned toward the cylinder hole.
“A” (C) “B” (C) I705H1140114-01
• Install the oil pump drive chain cover (4).
(A)
(B)
I705H1140226-01
4
“A” (C) “B” (C)
I705H1140115-04
(A)
(B)
I705H1140111-03

Oil Sump Filter • Clean and degrees the crankcase mating surfaces
Refer to “Oil Sump Filter Removal and Installation in (both surfaces) with a cleaning solvent.
Section 1E (Page1E-4)”. • Apply bond to the right crankcase.
Balancer Shaft : Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI BOND

No.1207B or equivalent)
• Install the balancer shaft (1).
NOTE
! CAUTION
Bring the straightened part of the crank web • Coat the sealant evenly without break.
toward the balancer shaft. • Application of sealant must be performed
within a short period of time.
• Take extreme care not to let sealant enter
into the oil passages or bearings.
1
I705H1140171-01
Crankcase
• Install the O-rings (1) and (2).
• Install the dowel pins.
! CAUTION
Replace the O-rings with the new ones.
I705H1140227-01
I705H1140118-04

• Tighten the crankcase bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque
2
Crankcase bolt (M6): 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 lb-ft) 3
1
Crankcase bolt (M8): 22 N·m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)
! CAUTION
Tighten the larger diameter crankcase bolts
first and then smaller ones diagonally and
evenly.
NOTE
I705H1140120-03
After crankcase bolts have been tightened, • Insert a proper steel rod “A” into the crankcase hole
check it crankshaft rotate smoothly. and pass it through the crankshaft wed holes in order
to prevent the crankshaft from turning.
(A) “A”
I705H1140102-01
I705H1140119-03
• Using the special tool, tighten the balancer drive gear

nut to the specified torque.
Special tool
: 09922–21410 (Long socket (46 mm))
Tightening torque
Balancer drive gear nut: 150 N·m (15 kgf-m, 11 lb-
ft)
! CAUTION
Pay attention to the direction of balancer
I705H1140101-01 drive gear nut.
Balancer Drive Gear (3) Balancer drive gear
• Insert the pin (1). (4) Wave washer
• Install the balancer drive gear (2) and washer (3). (5) Balancer drive gear nut
(6) Crankshaft
! CAUTION
• Make sure to align the slot of the balancer 3

5 (A)
drive gear with the pin.
• Set the washer with its convex side facing
outside.
4 6
I705H1140121-01

Oil Pump Drive Gear Balancer Driven Gear

• Install the spacer (1) and pin (2). • Install the key (1).
2
1 1
I705H1140125-02 I705H1140122-01
• Install the oil pump drive gear (3). • When installing the balancer driven gear No. 2 (8),
align the punch mark “C” on the balancer drive gear
! CAUTION with the punch mark “D” on the balancer driven gear
Make sure to align the slot of the oil pump No. 1.
drive gear with the pin. • Insert a steel rod through the driven gear holes and let
the balancer driven gear No. 1 teeth mesh with the
• With the crankshaft held immovable, tighten the oil balancer drive gear teeth.
pump drive gear nut (4) to the specified torque.
! CAUTION
Tightening torque
Oil pump drive gear nut: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 Make sure that the punch mark “C” on the
lb-ft) balancer drive gear is aligned with the punch
mark “D” on the balancer driven gear No. 1.
4 “D”
8 “C”
3
9
I705H1140126-02
• Install the oil pump drive gear cover (5).

I705H1140228-01
• Install the washer and tighten the balancer driven

gear nut to the specified torque.
5
Tightening torque
Balancer driven gear nut: 50 N·m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0
lb-ft)
I705H1140127-02
I705H1140229-01
• Remove the steel rod.

Cam Chain Tensioner Generator Rotor

• Install the cam chain tensioner (1) and tighten the cam • Degrease the tapered portion “A” of generator rotor
chain tensioner bolt (2) to the specified torque. and also the crankshaft “B”. Use nonflammable
cleaning solvent to wipe off oily or greasy matter and
Tightening torque
make these surfaces completely off oily or greasy
Cam chain tensioner bolt: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
matter and make these surfaces completely dry.
lb-ft)
• Tighten the cam chain guide bolt (3) to the specified
torque.
Tightening torque 1
Cam chain guide bolt: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-
ft)
“B”
• Set the cam chain (4) onto the crankshaft.
“A”
2
1
I705H1140240-01
• Install the generator rotor (1).
NOTE
Make sure to engage the starter clutch with
the starter driven gear.
4
3 • With the generator rotor locked, tighten the generator

I705H1140123-02 rotor nut to the specified torque.
Starter Idle Gear Tightening torque

Generator rotor nut: 160 N·m (16.0 kgf-m, 115.5
• Install the starter idle gear (1) onto the starter idle gear lb-ft)
shaft (2).
I705H1140129-01
I705H1140124-01
Starter Driven Gear

• Install the starter driven gear (1) and key (2).
• Apply engine oil to the starter clutch mating surface.
I705H1140128-02

Generator Cover Water Pump

• Install the dowel pins (1) and gasket (2). Refer to “Water Pump Removal and Installation in
Section 1F (Page1F-14)”.
! CAUTION
Speed Sensor
• Install the speed sensor (1).
Tightening torque
Speed Sensor: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)
I705H1140230-01
1
• Install the generator cover (3).
• Tighten the generator cover bolts to the specified I705H1140077-01
torque.
Final Reducation Gear Breather Hose
Tightening torque
• Install the final reducation gear breather hose (1).
Generator cover bolt: 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 lb-ft)
I705H1140076-04
I705H1140231-03
• Install the final gear assembly. Refer to “Final Gear

Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 3A
(Page3A-3)”.
• Install the clutch and movable driven face. Refer to “V-
belt Type Continuously Variable Automatic
(Page5A-3)”.

Oil Filter Outer Clutch Cover

• Install the O-ring (1). Refer to “V-belt Type Continuously Variable Automatic
! CAUTION (Page5A-3)”.
Ignition Coil
• Install the oil filter (2). • Install the ignition coil (1).
! CAUTION
Position the oil filter so that the valve “A”
comes outside.
1
I705H1140069-01
Starter Motor
1
2 “A” • Install the O-ring (1) to the starter motor.
! CAUTION
I705H1140232-03
• Install the O-ring (3). Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Install the spring (4).
• Apply grease to the O-ring (1).
• Tighten the oil filter cap bolts to the specified torque.
! CAUTION GREASE A or equivalent)
Tightening torque
Oil filter cap bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) 1
I705H1140235-02
4
3
I705H1140233-01

Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection Conrod Big End Side Clearance

B705H11406060 Inspect the conrod side clearance using the thickness
Inspect the cam chain tensioner in the following gauge.
procedures: If the clearance exceeds the limit, inspect the conrod big
1) Remove the cam chain tensioner. Refer to “Engine end width and crank pin width.
Bottom Side Disassembly (Page1D-37)”. If the width exceed the limit, replace conrod or
2) Inspect the contacting surface of the cam chain crankshaft.
tensioner. If it is worn or damaged, replace the cam
Conrod big end side clearance
chain tensioner with a new one.
Limit: 1.00 mm (0.04 in)
Special tool
Conrod big end width
Standard: 21.95 – 22.00 mm (0.864 – 0.866 in)
(A)
I705H1140144-01
3) Install the cam chain tensioner. Refer to “Engine

Bottom Side Assembly (Page1D-44)”.
Conrod and Crankshaft Inspection

B705H11406025
Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Disassembly (Page1D- I705H1140146-02
37)”.
Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Assembly (Page1D-44)”. Conrod Deflection
Move the small end sideways while holding the big end
Conrod Small End I.D. immovable in thrust direction.
Measure the conrod small end inside diameter using the Measure the amount of deflection.
small bore gauge. Turn the conrod and see if it moves smoothly without
If the conrod small end inside diameter exceeds the play and noise.
service limit, replace the conrod. This method can check the extent of wear on the parts of
the conrod’s big end.
Conrod small end I.D.
Service limit: 20.040 mm (0.789 in) Conrod deflection
Special tool
(A): 09900–20605 (Dial calipers (1/100 mm, 10 – Special tool
34 mm)) (A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10
mm))
(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))
(A)
(A)
(B)
I705H1140145-02
(C)
I705H1140147-02

Crankshaft Runout Bearing Inspection

B705H11406061
• With the right and left crank journals supported with V- Inspect the bearing in the following procedures:
block, turn the crankshaft slowly. At this time, measure
the crankshaft end runout using a dial gauge. If the 1) Separate the crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom
runout exceeds the service limit, replace the Side Assembly (Page1D-44)”
crankshaft. 2) Rotate the bearing inner race by finger to inspect for
abnormal play, noise and smooth rotation while the
Crankshaft runout bearings are in the crankcase, if there is anything
Service limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 in) unusual, replace the bearing. Refer to “Bearing
Special tool Removal and Installation (Page1D-52)”.
(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10
mm)) “A”
: 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)
: 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm)) “A”
(A) (A)
I705H1140150-03
“A”: Play
NOTE
I705H1140241-01 If abnormal noise does not occur, it is not
NOTE necessary to remove the bearing.
Set the V-block so that the crankshaft

becomes horizontal. Bearing Removal and Installation
B705H11406062
Removal
Width Between Crankshaft Webs Separate the crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom Side
B705H11406030 Assembly (Page1D-44)”
Measure the width between crankshaft webs “a”.
• Remove the bearing (1), (2) and (3) using the special
Width between crankshaft webs “a” tool.
Standard: 59.9 – 60.1 mm (2.358 – 2.366 in)
Special tool
: 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)
2 3
“a”
I705H1140149-04
I705H1140151-01

• Remove the oil seal using the special tool. • Remove the bearing (6) using the special tool.
Special tool Special tool
(A): 09913–50121 (Oil seal remover) (D): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)
(D)
(A)
I705H1140152-01 I705H1140155-02
• Remove the bearing (4) using the special tool.

Installation
Special tool
• Install the bearing (1), (2) and (3) using the special
(B): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)
tool.
Special tool
(B)
1
2
4
I705H1140153-02 3
• Remove the bearing (5) using the special tool.
Special tool I705H1140156-01
(C): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)
• Install the bearing (4), (5) and (6) using the special
tool.
Special tool
(C)
5
4
I705H1140154-02
I705H1140157-01

• Install the oil seal using the special tool. Installation

Special tool 1) Using an appropriate side steel tube and vise, press
(E): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) in the busing into the crankcase (LH and RH).
! CAUTION
Replace the removed oil seal with a new one.
(E)
I705H1140161-01
! CAUTION
Bushing end “A” must be flush with the
crankcase surface.
I705H1140158-02
Rear Suspension Mounting Bushing Removal

and Installation 2
B705H11406063
Removal
1) Separate the crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom
Side Disassembly (Page1D-37)” and “Engine
2) Using appropriate size steel tubes (1) and vise, 1 “A”
remove the rear suspension mounting bushing (2)
(LH and RH).
I705H1140162-05
1. Bushing 2. Crank case
2) Assemble the crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom

Side Disassembly (Page1D-37)” and “Engine
I705H1140159-01
1
I705H1140160-01
1. Steel tube 2. Bushing 3. Crank case

Specifications
Service Data
B705H11407002
Valve + Valve Guide
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
IN. 31.0 (1.22) —
Valve diam.
EX. 27.0 (1.06) —
IN. 0.10 – 0.20 (0.003 – 0.008) —
Tappet clearance (when cold)
EX. 0.20 – 0.30 (0.008 – 0.009) —
IN. 0.10 – 0.37 (0.004 – 0.015) —
Valve guide to valve stem clearance
EX. 0.30 – 0.57 (0.012 – 0.022) —
Valve guide I.D. IN. & EX. 4.500 – 4.512 (0.1772 – 0.1776) —
IN. 4.475 – 4.490 (0.1762 – 0.1768) —
Valve stem O.D.
EX. 4.455 – 4.470 (0.1754 – 0.1760) —
Valve stem deflection IN. & EX. — 0.35 (0.014)
Valve stem runout IN. & EX. — 0.05 (0.002)
Valve head thickness IN. & EX. — 0.5 (0.02)
Valve seat width (30°, 45°, 60°) IN. & EX. 0.9 – 1.1 (0.035 – 0.043) —
Valve head radial runout IN. & EX. — 0.03 (0.001)
Valve spring free length IN. & EX. — 38.6 (1.52)
137.3 N (14.0 kgf, 30.1 lbs) at length 33.35 mm
Valve spring tension IN. & EX. —
(1.313 in)
Camshaft + Cylinder Head

Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
IN. 36.61 – 36.66 (1.441 – 1.443) 36.31 (1.430)
Cam height
EX. 35.94 – 35.99 (1.415 – 1.417) 35.64 (1.403)
Camshaft journal oil clearance IN. & EX. 0.019 – 0.053 (0.0007 – 0.0021) 0.15 (0.006)
Camshaft journal holder I.D. IN. & EX. 22.012 – 22.025 (0.8666 – 0.8671) —
Camshaft journal O.D. IN. & EX. 21.972 – 21.993 (0.8650 – 0.8659) —
Camshaft runout IN. & EX. — 0.10 (0.004)
Cam chain pin (at arrow “3”) 15th pin —
Cylinder head distortion — 0.05 (0.002)

Cylinder + Piston + Piston Ring

Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
E-02, 19, 1 060 – 1 140 kPa 660 kPa
Compression pressure 24, 54 (10.6 – 11.4 kgf/cm2, 151 – 162 psi) (6.0 kgf/cm2, 94 psi)
(Automatic de-comp. actuated) E-03, 28, 1 000 – 1 080 kPa 620 kPa
33 (10.0 – 10.8 kgf/cm2, 142 – 154 psi) (6.2 kgf/cm2, 88 psi)
Piston to cylinder clearance 0.025 – 0.035 (0.0010 – 0.0014) 0.120 (0.005)
No nicks or
Cylinder bore 81.000 – 81.015 (3.1890 – 3.1896)
scraches
80.970 – 80.985 (3.1878 – 3.1884)
Piston diam. 80.880 (3.1842)
(Measure at 15 mm (0.6 in) from the skirt end.)
Cylinder distortion — 0.05 (0.002)
1st IT Approx. 7.5 (0.30) 6.0 (0.24)
2nd 2T Approx. 11.5 (0.45) 9.2 (0.36)
1st 0.06 – 0.21 (0.002 – 0.008) 0.5 (0.02)
Piston ring end gap
2nd 0.06 – 0.18 (0.002 – 0.007) 0.5 (0.02)
1st — 0.18 (0.007)
Piston ring to groove clearance
2nd — 0.15 (0.006)
1st 1.21 – 1.23 (0.0476 – 0.0484) —
Piston ring groove width 2nd 1.01 – 1.03 (0.0398 – 0.0406) —
Oil 2.01 – 2.03 (0.0791 – 0.0799) —
1st 1.17 – 1.19 (0.461 – 0.469) —
2nd 0.97 – 0.99 (0.0382 – 0.0390) —
Piston pin bore 20.002 – 20.008 (0.7874 – 0.7877) 20.030 (0.789)
Piston pin O.D. 19.996 – 20.000 (0.7872 – 0.7874) 19.980 (0.787)
Conrod + Crankshaft
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
Conrod small end I.D. 20.006 – 20.014 (0.7876 – 0.7880) 20.040 (0.789)
Conrod deflection — 3.0 (0.12)
Conrod big end side clearance 0.10 – 0.65 (0.004 – 0.026) 1.0 (0.04)
Conrod big end width 21.95 – 22.00 (0.864 – 0.866) —
Width between crankshaft webs 59.9 – 60.1 (2.358 – 2.366) —
Crankshaft runout — 0.08 (0.003)
Throttle Body
Specification
Item
E-02, 03, 19, 24, 28, 54 E-33
ID No. 05H0 05H1
Bore size 38 mm (1.5 in) ←
Fast idle r/min 1 500 – 2 000 r/min ←
Idle r/min 1 450 ± 100 r/min ←
Throttle cable play 2.0 – 4.0 mm (0.08 – 0.16 in) ←


B705H11407003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Engine mounting nut 93 9.3 67.0 )(Page1D-8)
Cushion rod nut 85 8.5 61.5 )(Page1D-8)
Rear axle nut 120 12.0 87.0 )(Page1D-8)
Cylinder head bolt (L190) (Initial) 25 2.5 18.0 )(Page1D-19)
Cylinder head bolt (L130) 25 2.5 18.0 )(Page1D-19)
Cylinder head bolt (L190) (Final) 42 4.2 30.5 )(Page1D-19)
Camshaft journal holder bolt 10 1.0 0.7 )(Page1D-21)
Cam chain tension adjuster bolt 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1D-21)
Spring holder bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page1D-22)
Cylinder head cover bolt 14 1.4 10.0 )(Page1D-22)
Spark plug 11 1.1 8.0 )(Page1D-22)
Camshaft journal holder bolt 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1D-23)
Oil gallery plug (cylinder head) 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1D-26)
ECT sensor 12 1.2 8.5 )(Page1D-27)
Intake pipe bolt 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1D-27)
Water inlet connector bolt 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1D-33)
Oil pump mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1D-44)
Crankcase bolt (M6) 11 1.1 8.0 )(Page1D-46)
Crankcase bolt (M8) 22 2.2 16.0 )(Page1D-46)
Balancer drive gear nut 150 15 11 )(Page1D-46)
Oil pump drive gear nut 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page1D-47)
Balancer driven gear nut 50 5.0 36.0 )(Page1D-47)
Cam chain tensioner bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page1D-48)
Cam chain guide bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page1D-48)
Generator rotor nut 160 16.0 115.5 )(Page1D-48)
Generator cover bolt 11 1.1 8.0 )(Page1D-49)
Speed Sensor 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1D-49)
Oil filter cap bolt 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1D-50)
NOTE
“Camshaft and Sprocket Assembly Diagram (Page1D-1)”
“Engine Assembly Removal and Installation (Page1D-6)”
“Throttle Body Construction (Page1D-12)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


B705H11408001
Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )(Page1D-14) / )(Page1D-
equivalent 14) / )(Page1D-27) /
)(Page1D-50)
Molybdenum oil Molybdenum oil solution — )(Page1D-18) / )(Page1D-
20) / )(Page1D-27) /
)(Page1D-27)
Sealant SUZUKI BOND No.1207B or P/No.: 99000–31140 )(Page1D-45)
equivalent
SUZUKI Bond 1207B or equivalent P/No.: 99000–31140 )(Page1D-22)
Thread lock cement THREAD LOCK CEMENT 1342 or P/No.: 99000–32050 )(Page1D-27)
equivalent
NOTE
“Engine Assembly Removal and Installation (Page1D-6)”
Special Tool
B705H11408002
09900–20102 09900–20202
Vernier calipers (1/20 mm, Micrometer (1/100 mm, 25 –
200 mm) 50 mm)
)(Page1D-29) / )(Page1D- )(Page1D-22)
30) / )(Page1D-36)
09900–20204 09900–20205
Micrometer (75 – 100 mm) Micrometer (0 – 25 mm)
)(Page1D-35) )(Page1D-24) / )(Page1D-
30) / )(Page1D-36) /
)(Page1D-37)
09900–20508 09900–20602
Cylinder gauge set Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1
mm)
37)
09900–20605 09900–20606
Dial calipers (1/100 mm, 10 Dial gauge (1/100 mm)
– 34 mm)
29) / )(Page1D-29) /
)(Page1D-30)
09900–20607 09900–20701
Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 Magnetic stand
mm)
)(Page1D-51) / )(Page1D- )(Page1D-23) / )(Page1D-
52) 29) / )(Page1D-29) /
)(Page1D-30) / )(Page1D-
51) / )(Page1D-52)

09900–20803 09900–21303
Thickness gauge V-block (75 mm)
34) / )(Page1D-36) /
51)
09900–21304 09900–22301
V-block (100 mm) Plastigauge (0.025 – 0.076
mm)
29) / )(Page1D-51) /
)(Page1D-52)
09900–22403 09910–32812
Small bore gauge (18 – 35 Crankshaft installer
mm)
37)
09910–32870 09913–10750
Crankshaft installer Compression gauge adapter
attachment
)(Page1D-44) )(Page1D-3)
09913–50121 09913–70210
Oil seal remover Bearing installer set
52) / )(Page1D-53) /
53) / )(Page1D-54)
09915–64512 09916–10911
Compression gauge Valve lapper set
09916–14510 09916–14530
Valve spring compressor Valve spring compressor
attachment
28) 28)
09916–33210 09916–34542
Valve guide reamer (4.5 Reamer handle
mm)
32)

09916–34561 09916–43210
Valve guide reamer (11.3 Valve guide remover/
mm) installer
32)
09916–53330 09916–84511
Attachment Tweezers
28)
09919–28610 09920–13120
Sleeve protector Crankcase separating tool
28) 43)
09921–20240 09922–21410
Bearing remover set Long socket (46 mm)
53) 46)
09930–31921 09930–40113
Rotor remover Rotor holder

Engine Lubrication System: 1E-1
Engine Lubrication System

Precautions
Precautions for Engine Oil
B705H11500001
Refer to “Fuel / Oil / Engine Coolant Recommendation in Section 0A (Page0A-3)”.

Engine Lubrication System Chart Diagram
B705H11502001
CAMCHAIN
TENSION
ADJUSTER CAM FACES & TAPPETS CAM FACES & TAPPETS CAM CHAIN
OIL JET INTAKE CAMSHAFT EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
INTAKE CAMSHAFT EXHAUST CAMSHAFT

JOURNAL JOURNAL
CRANK PIN CYLINDER HEAD

BEARING
PISTON
CYLINDER
PISTON COOLING NOZZLE
CRANKSHAFT GENERATOR COVER
STARTER CLUTCH MAIN GALLERY GENERATOR

ROTOR
BY PASS OIL FILTER
OIL PUMP
OIL SUMP FILTER
OIL PAN
I705H1150001-05

1E-2 Engine Lubrication System:
Engine Lubrication Circuit Diagram

B705H11502002
“A”
1
2
“B”
I705H1150012-01
1. Oil sump filter 3. Oil filter “B”: Returned oil

2. Oil pump “A”: Lubrication oil


Engine Lubrication Symptom Diagnosis
B705H11504001

Engine overheats. Not enough oil in the engine. Add oil.
(Defective engine internal Defective oil pump or clogged oil circuit. Replace or clean.
parts) Use of incorrect engine oil. Change.
Exhaust smoke is dirty or Too much engine oil in the engine. Check level and drain.
thick
Oil Pressure Check 2) Install the oil pressure gauge and attachment to the
B705H11504003 main oil gallery.
Check the engine oil pressure periodically. This will give
a good indication of the condition of the moving parts. Special tool
(A): 09915–74521 (Oil pressure gauge hose)
NOTE (B): 09915–74570 (Oil pressure gauge
Before checking the oil pressure, check the attachment)
following. (C): 09915–77331 (Meter (for high
• Oil level (Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter pressure))
Change in Section 0B (Page0B-9)”)
• Oil leaks (If leak is found, repair it.) (C)
• Oil quality (If oil is discolored or
deteriorated, replace it.)
Check the oil pressure in the following procedures:

1) Remove the main oil gallery plug (1).
(B)
(A)
I705H1150013-01
3) Warm up the engine as follows:

Summer: 10 min at 2 000 r/min
Winter: 20 min at 2 000 r/min
4) After warm up, increase the engine speed to 3 000 r/
1
min (Observe the tachometer), and read the oil
pressure gauge.
If the oil pressure is lower or higher than the
I705H1150002-01
specification, the following causes may be
considered.
Oil pressure specification
Above 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.27 psi) at 3 000 r/
min, oil temp. at 60 °C (86 °F)
Below 110 kPa (11.0 kgf/cm2, 15.64 psi) at 3 000 r/
min, oil temp. at 60 °C (86 °F)

High oil pressure Low oil pressure 6) Reinstall the main oil gallery plug and tighten it to the
• Engine oil viscosity is too • Clogged oil filter specified torque.
high • Oil leakage from the oil ! CAUTION
• Clogged oil passage passage
Use a new gasket to prevent oil leakage.
• Combination of the • Damaged O-ring
above items • Defective oil pump
Tightening torque
• Combination of the Main oil gallery plug: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-
above items ft)
5) Stop the engine and remove the oil pressure gauge 7) Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Oil and
and attachment. Filter Change in Section 0B (Page0B-9)”.
Repair Instructions
Engine Oil and Filter Replacement
B705H11506022
Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Change in Section 0B “B”
(Page0B-9)”.
“A” Downside
Oil Sump Filter Removal and Installation
B705H11506008
Removal
1) Dismount the engine. Refer to “Engine Assembly
Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page1D-6)”.
2) Separate the crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom I705H1150004-01
Side Disassembly in Section 1D (Page1D-37)”. “A”: Lip “B”: Shorter side
3) Remove the oil sump filter from the left crankcase.
Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Disassembly in Oil Sump Filter Cleaning
Section 1D (Page1D-37)”. B705H11506009
Clean the oil sump filter in the following procedures:
Installation 1) Remove the oil sump filter. Refer to “Oil Sump Filter
Install the oil sump filter in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Page1E-4)”.
Pay attention to the following points: 2) Clean the oil sump filter using compressed air.
• Install the oil sump filter (1).
! CAUTION
• The lip “A” of the oil sump filter should be

positioned downward.
• The shorter side “B” of the oil sump filter
should be positioned inside.
I705H1150005-01
“B” 1 3) Install the oil sump filter. Refer to “Oil Sump Filter
Removal and Installation (Page1E-4)”
“A”
I705H1150003-01

Oil Pump Removal and Installation Oil Pump Inspection

B705H11506015 B705H11506016
Removal Inspect the oil pump in the following procedures:
1) Dismount the engine. Refer to “Engine Assembly 1) Remove the oil pump. Refer to “Oil Pump Removal
Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page1D-6)”. and Installation (Page1E-5)”.
2) Separate the crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom 2) Rotate the oil pump shaft by hand and check that it
Side Disassembly in Section 1D (Page1D-37)”. moves smoothly. If it does not move smoothly,
3) Remove the oil pump assembly from the left replace the oil pump with a new one.
crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom Side
Disassembly in Section 1D (Page1D-37)”.
4) Remove the snap ring (1) and oil pump drain driven
gear (2).
I705H1150008-01
2 3) Install the oil pump in the reverse order of removal.

Refer to “Oil Pump Removal and Installation
(Page1E-5)”.
I705H1150006-01
5) Remove the pin (3) and washer (4). Piston Cooling Nozzle Removal and Installation
B705H11506017
Removal
1) Dismount the engine. Refer to “Engine Assembly
2) Separate the crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom
Side Disassembly in Section 1D (Page1D-37)”.
3) Remove the piston cooling nozzle (1) from the right
3
4 crankcase.
I705H1150007-01
1
! CAUTION
• Do not attempt to disassemble the oil

pump.
• The oil pump is available only as an
assembly.
I705H1150009-01
Installation
Install the oil pump in the reverse order of removal. Pay
attention to the following point:
• Tighten the oil pump mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
Tightening torque
Oil pump mounting bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0
lb-ft)

Installation Piston Cooling Nozzle Inspection

Install the piston cooling nozzle in the reverse order of B705H11506021
removal. Pay attention to the following point: Inspect the piston cooling nozzle in the following
procedures:
NOTE 1) Remove the piston cooling nozzle. Refer to “Piston
Before installing, replace the O-ring (1) with a Cooling Nozzle Removal and Installation (Page1E-
new one and coat the O-ring with engine oil. 5)”.
2) Inspect the piston cooling nozzle for clogging. If it is
clogged, clean its oil passage with a proper wire or
compressed air.
I705H1150010-01
I705H1150011-01
3) Install the piston cooling nozzle. Refer to “Piston

Cooling Nozzle Removal and Installation (Page1E-
5)”.
Specifications
Service Data
B705H11507002
Oil Pump
Item Standard Limit
Above 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.27 psi)
Oil pressure (at 60 °C, 140 °F) Below 110 kPa (1.1 kgf/cm2, 15.64 psi) —
at 3 000 r/min

B705H11507003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Main oil gallery plug 16 1.6 11.5 )(Page1E-4)
Oil pump mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1E-5)
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


Special Tool
B705H11508001
09915–74521 09915–74570
Oil pressure gauge hose Oil pressure gauge
attachment
)(Page1E-3) )(Page1E-3)
09915–77331
Meter (for high pressure)
)(Page1E-3)

1F-1 Engine Cooling System:
Engine Cooling System

Precautions
Engine Cooling System Warning
B705H11600001
! WARNING
• You can be injured by scalding fluid or steam if you open the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
After the engine cools, wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap by turning it a
quarter turn to allow pressure to escape and then turn the cap all the way off.
• The engine must be cool before servicing the cooling system.
• Coolant is harmful:
– If it comes in contact with skin or eyes, flush with water.
– If swallowed accidentally, induce vomiting and call physician immediately.
– Keep it away from children.
General Description
Cooling System Description Engine Coolant Description
B705H11601001 B705H11601002
The engine is cooled by the forced circulation of engine At the time of manufacture, the cooling system is filled
coolant, using a high-capacity, centrifugal water pump, with a 50:50 mixture of distilled water and ethylene
through water jackets formed in the cylinder and cylinder glycol anti-freeze. This 50:50 mixture will provide the
head, and through the radiator. The tube-and-fin type optimum corrosion protection and excellent heat
radiator is made of aluminum, which is characterized by protection, and will protect the cooling system from
lightness in weight and good heat dissipation. freezing at temperatures above –31 °C (–24 °F).
A wax-pellet type thermostat is used to regulate the flow If the vehicle is to be exposed to temperatures below –
of engine coolant through the radiator. As the coolant 31 °C (–24 °F), this mixing ratio should be increased up
temperature rises to about 88 °C (190 °F) the thermostat to 55% or 60% according to the figure.
valve unseats and a normal coolant flow is established.
Anti-freeze Proportioning Chart
At about 100 °C (212 °F) the thermostat becomes
completely open and, as a result, heat is released to the Anti-freeze density Freezing point
atmosphere through the radiator core. 50% –31 °C (–24 °F)
55% –40 °C (–40 °F)
60% –55 °C (–67 °F)
! CAUTION
• Use a high quality ethylene glycol base

anti-freeze, mixed with distilled water. Do
not mix an alcohol base anti-freeze and
different brands of anti-freeze.
• Do not put in more than 60% anti-freeze or
less than 50%. (Refer to Fig. 1 and 2.)
50% Engine coolant including reserve tank capacity

Engine Coolant Capacity
Anti-freeze 975 ml (2.1/1.7 US/lmp. pt)
Water 975 ml (2.1/1.7 US/lmp. pt)

Engine Cooling System: 1F-2
Fig. 1: Engine coolant density-freezing point curve Fig. 2: Engine coolant density-boiling point curve
I310G1160002-01
I310G1160001-01
Cooling Fan Thermo-Switch Description

B705H11601003
The cooling fan is secured behind the radiator by three bolts and is automatically controlled by the thermo-switch. The
thermo-switch remains open when the temperature of the engine coolant is low, but closes when the temperature
reaches approximately 98 °C (208 °F) setting the cooling fan in motion.
Ignition switch
Fuse
O/Y
Main fuse
Cooling fan
thermo-switch
R
Bl
Battery B/W
Cooling fan motor
I705H1160001-02
Bl: Blue R: Red O/Y: Orange with Yellow tracer

O: Orange B/W: Black with White tracer

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Description

B705H11601004
The following circuit diagram shows the electrical wiring for the thermometer. The major components are ECT sensor
in contact with coolant, and engine coolant temperature meter.
Speedometer ECM
Ignition O/W Dg B/Br B/G

switch O/G B/G
Fuse
R O O O/G
R
B/W
Main fuse
Fuse
R O O/B O/W
Battery
ECT
I705H1160060-03
Dg: Dark green B/Br: Black with Brown tracer O/G: Orange with Green tracer
O: Orange B/G: Black with Green tracer O/W: Orange with White tracer
R: Red O/B: Orange with Black tracer P/W: Pink with White tracer


Cooling Circuit Diagram
B705H11602001
RESERVOIR
TANK
BY-PASS
THERMOSTAT
RADIATOR
COOLING FAN
ECT SENSOR THERMO-SWITCH
CYLINDER
CRANKCASE CYLINDER
HEAD
OIL COOLER
WATER PUMP
I705H1160059-04
Oil cooler (1) is located inside the crankcase.
The engine oil is cooled by engine coolant, which is circulated through inside core of oil cooler.
I705H1160002-03

Radiator Hose Routing Diagram

B705H11602002
“F”
6
1
“B”
1 2
“C” 3 “D”
7
“B”
“G” 3 4
“A”
“E”
9
5
I705H1160056-02
1. Reservoir tank inlet hose 9. Cooling fan thermo-switch

2. Conduction hose “A”: Yellow making
3. Reservoir tank overflow hose “B”: White marking
4. Radiator inlet hose “C”: Pink marking
5. Radiator outlet hose “D”: The clamp end should face to engine side.
6. Thermostat “E”: The clamp end should face forward.
7. Water by-pass hose “F”: The clamp end should face downward.
8. Reservoir tank “G”: The clamp end should face to left side.
Component Location
Engine Cooling System Components Location
B705H11603001
Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page0A-7)”.


Engine Cooling Symptom Diagnosis
B705H11604001

Engine overheats Not enough engine coolant. Add engine coolant.
Radiator core clogged with dirt or scale. Clean.
Faulty cooling fan. Repair or replace.
Defective cooling fan thermo-switch. Replace.
Clogged water passage. Clean.
Air trapped in the cooling circuit. Bleed air.
Defective water pump. Replace.
Use of incorrect engine coolant. Replace.
Engine over cools Defective cooling fan thermo-switch. Replace.
Extremely cold weather. Put on radiator cover.
Defective ECM Replace.
Repair Instructions
Cooling Circuit Inspection 7) Install the handlebar covers. Refer to “Handlebar
B705H11606001 Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D
! WARNING (Page9D-13)”.
• Do not open the radiator cap when the

engine is hot, as you may be injured by
escaping hot liquid or vapor.
1
• When removing the radiator cap tester, put
a rag on the filler to prevent the engine
coolant from spraying out.
Inspect the cooling circuit in the following procedures:

1) Remove the handlebar covers. Refer to “Handlebar
(Page9D-13)”. I705H1160003-02
2) Remove the front panel. Refer to “Front Panel

14)”.
3) Remove the radiator cap (1) and connect the
radiator tester (2) to the filler.
4) Pressurize the cooling system with 120 kPa (1.2 kgf/
cm, 17 psi) of pressure, and then check if it holds the
pressure for 10 seconds.
5) If the cooling system does not hold the pressure for
I705H1160004-01
at least 10 seconds, check the entire cooling system
for leaks and replace the damaged part. ! CAUTION
6) Install the front panel. Refer to “Front Panel Removal Do not exceed the radiator cap release
and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-14)”. pressure, or the radiator cap and
subsequently the radiator, can be damaged.

Radiator Cap Inspection 5) Disconnect the cooling fan motor coupler (2) and
B705H11606002 radiator heat shields (3).
Inspect the radiator cap in the following procedures:
1) Remove the radiator cap. Refer to “Cooling Circuit
Inspection (Page1F-6)”.
2) Attach the radiator cap (1) to the radiator tester (2) 2
as shown.
I705H1160006-03
6) Disconnect the conduction hose (4) and remove the

radiator mounting bolts.
I705H1160032-01
4
3) Slowly apply pressure to the radiator cap.
4) If the radiator cap does not hold the pressure for at
least 10 seconds, replace it with a new one.
Radiator cap release pressure
93.3 – 122.7 kPa (0.93 – 1.23 kgf/cm2, 13.3 – 17.4 psi)
Radiator Removal and Installation

B705H11606027
Removal
1) Remove the lower leg shield. Refer to “Lower Leg I705H1160007-01
Shield Removal and Installation in Section 9D 7) Disconnect the radiator inlet hose (5) and remove
(Page9D-16)”. the radiator (6).
2) Remove the left and right footboards. Refer to
“Footboard Removal and Installation in Section 9D
(Page9D-21)”. 6 5
3) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System
Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-11)”.
4) Remove the radiator outlet hose (1).
I705H1160008-02
Installation
1 Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. Pay
attention to the following points:
• Pour engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System
I705H1160005-02
• Bleed air from the cooling circuit. Refer to “Cooling
System Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-11)”.

Radiator Cleaning 4) Inspect the radiator hoses for crack or flat and
B705H11606028 leakage of hose connection.
Clean the radiator in the following procedures:
If any radiator hose found in a cranked condition or
1) Remove the radiator. Refer to “Radiator Removal flattened must be replaced. Refer to “Radiator Hose
and Installation (Page1F-7)”. Removal and Installation (Page1F-9)”.
2) Remove the cooling fan. Refer to “Cooling Fan If any leakage from the connecting section should be
Removal and Installation (Page1F-10)”. corrected by proper tightening.
3) Inspect the radiator for dirt and other foreign
materials.
4) Clean the radiator using compressed air.
I705H1160011-03
I705H1160009-01
5) Repair any bent or dented fins using a small screw

driver.
I705H1160012-03
I705H1160010-01
6) Reinstall the radiator. Refer to “Radiator Removal

and Installation (Page1F-7)”.
Radiator Hose Inspection

B705H11606029
Inspect the radiator hoses in the following procedures:
1) Remove the left footboard. Refer to “Footboard I705H1160013-01

21)”.
Box Removal and Installation in Section 1D
(Page1D-9)”.
3) Remove the radiator mounting bolts. Refer to
“Radiator Removal and Installation (Page1F-7)”.
I705H1160014-04

Radiator Hose Removal and Installation Installation

B705H11606030 Install radiator reservoir tank in the reverse order of
Removal removal. Pay attention to the following point:
1) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System • Fill the reservoir tank to the upper level.
21)”.
(Page1D-9)”.
4) Remove the radiator mounting bolts. Refer to F
LLC
“Radiator Removal and Installation (Page1F-7)”. L
I705H1160018-05
5) Remove the required radiator hose.
Installation Cooling Fan Inspection

B705H11606008
Install the radiator hose in the reverse order of removal. Inspect the cooling fan in the following procedures:
• Rout the radiator hose properly. Refer to “Radiator Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-
Hose Routing Diagram (Page1F-5)”. 21)”.
Radiator Reservoir Tank Removal and Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-
Installation 16)”.
B705H11606007
Removal 3) Disconnect the cooling fan motor lead wire coupler
1) Remove the front leg shield. Refer to “Front Leg (1) and fan switch coupler (2).
Shield Removal and Installation in Section 9D
(Page9D-14)”.
2) Remove the reservoir tank bracket bolt.
3) Disconnect the hoses and remove the reservoir tank
(1). 1
1 2
I705H1160019-01
4) Test the cooling fan motor for load current with an

ammeter connected as shown in the figure.
I705H1160015-01
4) Remove the bracket (2).
I310G1160028-01
I705H1160016-01

NOTE 3) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System

The voltmeter is for making sure that the Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-11)”.
battery applies 12 V to the motor. With the 4) Disconnect the cooling fan thermo-switch lead wire
motor with electric motor fan running at full coupler (1).
speed, the ammeter should be indicating not 5) Remove the cooling fan thermo-switch (2).
more than 5 A.
5) If the fan motor does not turn, replace the cooling fan
assembly with a new one. Refer to “Cooling Fan
Removal and Installation (Page1F-10)”.
NOTE
When making this test, it is not necessary to
remove the cooling fan.
1
Cooling Fan Removal and Installation 2
B705H11606009
I705H1160021-01
Removal
1) Remove the radiator. Refer to “Radiator Removal Installation
and Installation (Page1F-7)”. Install the cooling fan thermo-switch in the reverse order
2) Disconnect the cooling fan switch coupler (1) and of removal. Pay attention to the following points:
remove the cooling fan (2).
! CAUTION
Replace the removed O-ring with a new one.
1
• Apply engine coolant to the O-ring.
I705H1160020-01
Installation
Install the cooling fan in the reverse order of removal.
Pay attention to the following point: I705H1160023-01
• Tighten the cooling fan mounting bolts to the specified • Tighten the cooling fan thermo-switch to the specified
torque. torque.
Tightening torque Tightening torque
Cooling fan mounting bolt: 7 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.0 Cooling fan thermo-switch: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m,
lb-ft) 12.5 lb-ft)
Cooling Fan Thermo-Switch Removal and
Installation
B705H11606011 • Bleed air from the cooling circuit. Refer to “Cooling
Removal System Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-11)”.
21)”.
16)”.

Cooling Fan Thermo-Switch Inspection ECT Sensor Removal and Installation

B705H11606012 B705H11606014
Inspect the cooling fan thermo-switch in the following Refer to “ECT Sensor Removal and Installation in
procedures: Section 1C (Page1C-3)”.
! CAUTION
ECT Sensor Inspection
B705H11606015
• Take special care when handling the Refer to “ECT Sensor Inspection in Section 1C
cooling fan thermo-switch. Do not subject (Page1C-3)”.
it to strong blows or allow it to be dropped.
• Do not contact the cooling fan thermo- Thermostat Removal and Installation
switch (1) and the column thermometer (2) B705H11606017
with a pan. Removal
1) Drain a small amount of engine coolant. Refer to
1) Remove the cooling fan thermo-switch. Refer to “Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-
“Cooling Fan Thermo-Switch Removal and 11)”.
Installation (Page1F-10)”. 2) Remove the air cleaner box. Refer to “Air Cleaner
2) Check the thermo-switch closing or opening Box Removal and Installation in Section 1D
temperatures by testing it at the bench as shown in (Page1D-9)”.
the figure. 3) Place a rag under the thermostat case (1).
3) Connect the thermo-switch (1) to a circuit tester and 4) Remove the thermostat case (1).
place it in the oil “A” contained in a pan, which is
placed on a stove.
4) Heat the oil to raise its temperature slowly and read
the column thermometer (2) when the switch closes
or opens.
1
I705H1160026-02
5) Remove the thermostat (2).
I705H1160033-03
Special tool
2
Continuity test ( )
Cooling fan thermo-switch operating
temperature
Standard (OFF – ON): Approx. 98 °C (208 °F)
Standard (ON – OFF): Approx. 92 °C (198 °F) I705H1160027-01

Installation 4) Immerse the thermostat (1) in the water contained in

Install the thermostat in the reverse order of removal. a beaker and note that the immersed thermostat is in
Pay attention to the following points: suspension.
• Apply engine coolant to the rubber seal around the 5) Heat the water by placing the beaker on a stove and
thermostat. observe the rising temperature on a thermometer
• Position the thermostat with one of the air bleeder (2).
hole “A” upside.
“A”
I705H1160030-03
“A”: String “B”: Water
I705H1160028-01
6) Read the thermometer just when opening the
thermostat. If this reading, which is the temperature
level at which the thermostat valve begins to open, is
• Bleed air from the cooling circuit. Refer to “Cooling out of the standard value, replace the thermostat
System Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-11)”. with a new one.
Thermostat Inspection Thermostat valve opening temperature

B705H11606018 Standard: Approx. 82 °C (180 °F)
Inspect the thermostat in the following procedures:
7) Keep on heating the water to raise its temperature.
1) Remove the thermostat. Refer to “Thermostat Just when the water temperature reaches specified
Removal and Installation (Page1F-11)”. value, the thermostat valve should have lifted by at
2) Inspect the thermostat pellet for signs of cracking. least 3 mm (0.12 in). A thermostat failing to satisfy
either of the two requirements (start-to-open
temperature and valve lift) must be replaced.
Thermostat valve lift “a”
Standard: 3 mm and over at 95 °C (0.12 in and
over at 203 °F)
I705H1160029-01
3) Test the thermostat at the bench for control action.
! CAUTION
• Do not contact the thermostat (1) and the I705H1160031-04

column thermometer (2) with a pan. 8) Install the thermostat. Refer to “Thermostat Removal
• As the thermostat operating response to and Installation (Page1F-11)”.
water temperature change is gradual, do
not raise water temperature too quickly.
• The thermostat with its valve open even
slightly under normal temperature must be
replaced.

Water Pump Components

B705H11606020
5
4 2
2 1
I705H1160057-02
1. Water pump cover 4. Mechanical seal : Apply grease.

2. O-ring 5. Oil seal : Apply engine coolant.
3. Impeller 6. Mechanical seal ring : Do not reuse.

Water Pump Construction

B705H11606031
4
2 1
5
I705H1160058-01
1. Impeller 3. Oil pump drive chain 5. Oil pump driven sprocket

2. Mechanical seal 4. Oil pump
Water Pump Removal and Installation • Apply grease to the O-ring (1).
B705H11606021
Removal : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER
1) Remove the under cover. Refer to “Under Cover GREASE A or equivalent)
• Apply engine coolant to the O-rings (2).
16)”.
2) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System
2
4) Remove the water pomp assembly (1).
1 2
I705H1160036-04
1 • Install the water pump assembly with the slot on the
pump shaft end “A” securely engaged with the flat “B”
on the oil pump shaft.
I705H1160035-02
“A”
Installation “B”
Install the water pump assembly in the reverse order of
! CAUTION
Replace the O-rings with the new ones.
I705H1160037-05

• Tighten the water pump mounting bolts to the 3) Remove the impeller (3) together with the water
specified torque. pump shaft.
Tightening torque
Water pump mounting bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0
lb-ft)
I705H1160038-03
4) Remove the mechanical seal ring (4) and the rubber

seal (5) from the impeller.
I705H1160052-02

• Bleed air from the cooling circuit. Refer to “Cooling 5
System Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-11)”. 4
Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly

B705H11606022
Refer to “Water Pump Removal and Installation
(Page1F-14)”. I705H1160039-03
5) Remove the mechanical seal using the special tool.

Disassembly
NOTE
1) Remove the water pump cover (1).
If there is no abnormal condition, the
mechanical seal removal is not necessary.
1 Special tool
(A): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)
(A)
I705H1160053-01
2) Remove the O-rings and E-ring (2).
2 I705H1160040-02
I705H1160054-01

6) Remove the oil seal using a suitable bar. • Apply a small quantity of the super grease to the oil
seal lip.
! CAUTION
The removed oil seal must be replaced with a GREASE A or equivalent)
new one.
NOTE
If there is no abnormal condition, the oil seal
removal is not necessary.
I705H1160043-02
• Install a new mechanical seal using a suitable size

socket wrench “A”.
! CAUTION
The removed mechanical seal must be
I705H1160041-02 replaced with a new one.
Assembly
Assemble the water pump in the reverse order of
• Install the oil seal using the special tool.
Special tool
(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)
“A”
NOTE
The stamped mark on the oil seal faces
mechanical seal side.
I705H1160044-03
NOTE
(A) On the new mechanical seal, the sealer “B”
has been applied.
I705H1160042-02
“B”
I705H1160045-03

• Install the rubber seal (1) into the impeller. Water Pump Related Parts Inspection
B705H11606023
• After wiping off the oily or greasy matter from the Refer to “Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly
mechanical seal ring, install it into the impeller. (Page1F-15)”.
NOTE
Mechanical Seal
The paint marked side “C” of mechanical seal Visually inspect the mechanical seal for damage, with
ring faces the rubber seal. particular attention given to the sealing face.
Replace the mechanical seal that shows indications of
leakage.
“C”
I705H1160046-03
• Install the new O-rings (2), (3). I705H1160048-02
! CAUTION
Oil Seal
Use the new O-rings to prevent engine Visually inspect the oil seal for damage, with particular
coolant leakage. attention given to the lip.
Replace the oil seal that shows indications of leakage.
NOTE
Apply engine coolant to the O-ring (2) and (3).

I705H1160049-04
3 2 Impeller Shaft Journal

Visually inspect the journal for damage or scratch.
Replace the water pump body if necessary.
I705H1160047-03
I705H1160050-02

Impeller
Visually inspect the impeller and its shaft for damage.
Replace the impeller if necessary.
I705H1160051-02
Specifications
Service Data
B705H11607002
Thermostat + Radiator + Fan + Coolant
Item Standard / Specification Limit
Thermostat valve opening
Approx. 82 °C (180 °F) —
temperature
Thermostat valve lift Over 3 mm (0.12 in) at 95 °C (203 °F) —
20 °C (68 °F) Approx. 2.58 kΩ —
Engine coolant temperature sensor 50 °C (122 °F) Approx. 0.77 kΩ —
resistance 80 °C (176 °F) Approx. 0.28 kΩ —
110 °C (230 °F) Approx. 0.12 kΩ —
Radiator cap valve opening
93.3 – 122.7 kPa (0.93 – 1.23 kgf/cm2, 13.3 – 17.4 psi) —
pressure
Cooling fan thermo-switch operating OFF → ON Approx. 98 °C (208 °F) —
temperature ON → OFF Approx. 92 °C (198 °F) —
Use an anti-freeze/coolant compatible with aluminum
Engine coolant type —
radiator, mixed with distilled water only, at the ratio of 50 : 50.
Reserve tank side Approx. 250 ml (0.3/0.2 US/Imp oz) —
Engine coolant including reserve
Engine side Approx. 1 700 ml (1.8/1.5 US/Imp oz) —

B705H11607003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Cooling fan mounting bolt 7 0.7 5.0 )(Page1F-10)
Cooling fan thermo-switch 17 1.7 12.5 )(Page1F-10)
Water pump mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1F-15)
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


B705H11608001
Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )(Page1F-14) / )(Page1F-
equivalent 16) / )(Page1F-17)
Special Tool
B705H11608002
09900–25008 09913–70210
Multi-circuit tester set Bearing installer set
)(Page1F-11) )(Page1F-16)
09921–20240
Bearing remover set
)(Page1F-15)

Fuel System: 1G-1
Fuel System
Precautions
Precautions for Fuel System
B705H11700001
! WARNING
• Keep away from fire or spark.

• During disassembling, use care to minimize spillage of gasoline.
• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off immediately.
• Work in a well-ventilated area.
! CAUTION
• To prevent the fuel system (fuel tank, fuel hose, etc.) from contamination with foreign particles, blind
all openings.
• After removing the throttle body, tape the cylinder intake section to prevent foreign particles from
entering.

1G-2 Fuel System:

Fuel Tank Hose Construction
B705H11702001
9
3
“A”
3
“B”
4
“C”
10
(a) 1
2
2 1
11 8
I705H1170039-02
1. Clamp 7. Cushion “A”: To fuel tank

2. Water drain hose 8. Clamp “B”: Black
3. Breather hose 9. Breather hose “C”: Orange
: Pass the breather hose through into the ring part of the tray.
4. Check valve 10. Molding
: Adhere both ends and center area for approx. 10 mm (1.4 in) using
adhesive.
5. Cushion 11. Water drain hose
: Pass the water drain hose through into the slit located on rear left side end
of under cover.
6. Clamp : 3.5 N⋅m (0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 lb-ft)
: Cut off the clamp after tightening.

Fuel System: 1G-3

Fuel System Diagnosis
B705H11704001

Engine will not start or Clogging, bending or improper routing of Clean, replace or adjust.
hard to start (Gasoline fuel filter or fuel hose.
does not reach the intake Fuel pump failure. Replace.
pipe) Fuel pressure regulator failure. Replace.
Fuel pump injector failure. Replace.
Fuel pump relay failure. Replace.
ECM failure. Replace.
Wiring connection failure. Inspect or repair.
Engine will not start or Throttle position sensor improperly Adjust.
hard to start adjusted.
Throttle position sensor failure. Replace.
Intake air pressure sensor failure. Replace.
ECM failure. Replace.
Engine temperature sensor failure. Replace.
Intake air pressure sensor failure. Replace.
Fuel pump failure. Replace.
Fuel hose improperly routed. Adjust.
Engine is likely to stop Fuel pump filter clogging. Clean or replace.
(Improper air/Fuel ratio) Fuel pump failure. Replace.
Fuel pressure regulator failure. Replace.
Engine is likely to stop ECM failure. Replace.
(Fuel injector function Injection signal not received from ECM. Repair or replace.
failure) Lead wire disconnection or shorted. Repair or replace.
Battery failure or voltage too low. Replace or recharge.
Engine is likely to stop ECM failure. Replace.
(Control circuit or sensor Fuel pressure regulator failure. Replace.
function failure) Throttle position sensor failure. Replace.
Fuel pump relay failure. Replace.
Engine is likely to stop Fuel hose clogging.
(Engine parts function Clean.
failure)
Engine operation failure ECM failure. Replace.
in high speed range Insufficient fuel supply to injector due to Clean and priming.
(Engine internal parts or fuel hose blockage.
electrical equipment Fuel pump failure. Replace.
failure) Throttle sensor failure. Replace.
Insufficient engine power Air leakage from throttle body joint. Repair or replace.
in high speed range
(Airflow system failure)
Insufficient engine power Fuel pressure too low. Repair or replace.
in high speed range Throttle position sensor failure. Replace.
(Control circuit or sensor ECM failure. Replace.
failure) Throttle position sensor synchronization Adjust.
failure.
Fuel tank pressure control valve failure. Replace.
Insufficient engine power Injector clogged. Clean.
(Engine internal parts or Throttle position sensor adjustment Replace.
electrical equipment failure.
failure) Air leakage from throttle or vacuum Retighten or replace.
hose.
Fuel pump or ECM failure. Replace.

1G-4 Fuel System:

Insufficient engine power Fuel pressure too low. Repair or replace.
(Control circuit or sensor Throttle position failure. Replace.
failure) ECM failure. Replace.
Throttle position sensor synchronization Adjust.
failure.
Engine overheats (Fuel Fuel injector failure. Replace.
mixture too lean)

Fuel System: 1G-5
Repair Instructions
Fuel System Components
B705H11706001
“a”
I705H1170040-01
1. Brake-lock cable 3. Check valve “a”: 5 mm (0.2 in)

2. Water drain hose 4. Breather hose

1G-6 Fuel System:
Fuel Tank Heat Shield Construction

B705H11706026
“A”
“B” 2
1
I705H1170041-01
1. Fuel tank “A”: Match the upper end of the fuel tank heat shield with the flange base.
2. Fuel tank heat shield “B”: Match the fuel tank heat shield with the R-edge.
Fuel Cut Valve Removal and Installation Installation

B705H11706002 Install the fuel cut valve in the reverse order of removal.
Pay attention the following points:
Removal
• Install the fuel cut valve with its protrusions “A”
engaged with cutaway “B” on the gasket.
2) Disconnect the hose (1) and remove the fuel cut ! CAUTION
valve (2). Replace the gasket with a new one.
“A”
I705H1170026-04
“B”
I705H1170001-02

Fuel System: 1G-7
• Install the fuel cut valve with its hose attaching section 5) Disconnect the fuel pump coupler.
“C” facing the vehicle body right side.
• Tighten the fuel cut valve bolt to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Fuel cut valve bolt (a): 3.5 N·m (0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 lb-
ft)
“C”
I705H1170003-01
6) Remove the fuel tank filler cap (1) and fuel drain tray
(2) from the fuel inlet.
(a)
! CAUTION
I705H1170027-06
After removing the fuel drain tray (2), refit the
fuel tank filler cap (1) to the fuel tank.
Fuel Tank Removal and Installation
B705H11706018
Removal
1) Remove the footboards. Refer to “Footboard
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- 1
21)”.
2) Remove the engine. Refer to “Engine Assembly
2
3) Remove the cushion lever mounting nut. Refer to
“Rear Shock Absorber and Rear Shock Absorber
Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 2C
(Page2C-4)”. I705H1170004-05
4) Remove the clamp. 7) Remove the fuel tank by removing the bolts and
bracket.
! CAUTION
Keep away from fire or sparks since gasoline
may leak.
I705H1170002-03
I705H1170028-01

1G-8 Fuel System:
Installation 4) Remove the fuel pump assembly (2).

Install the fuel tank in the reverse order of removal. Pay
attention the following points: ! CAUTION
• Tighten the fuel tank bolts. When removing the fuel pump assembly, take
• Remove the fuel filler cap (1) and install the fuel drain care not to cause damage to it. If such a
tray (2) on the fuel inlet. possibility is thought to exist, remove the
fuel tank from the body. Refer to “Fuel Tank
! CAUTION Removal and Installation (Page1G-7)”.
After the fuel drain tray (2) has been fitted on
the fuel tank, the fuel tank filler cap (1) should
be fitted to the fuel tank.
2 I705H1170006-01
! WARNING
I705H1170004-05 • Use caution to minimize spillage of

• Clamp the wiring harness surely. gasoline.
• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off
Fuel Pump Assembly Removal and Installation immediately.
B705H11706010
Removal • Work in a well-ventilated area.
and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-18)”. Installation
2) Loosen the fuel tank bolt and move the fuel tank Install the fuel tank assembly in the reverse order of
rearward. removal. Pay attention the following points:
3) Disconnect the fuel hose (1). • Apply engine oil to the O-ring (1) and install the fuel
tank.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
After the fuel hose (1) has been
disconnected, fit a blind plug to the opening. Replace the fuel pump O-ring and fuel hose
O-ring with the new ones.
I705H1170005-03
I705H1170007-01

Fuel System: 1G-9
• When installing the fuel pump assembly, first tighten 3) Disconnect the hose (3) from the fuel cut valve.
all the fuel pump mounting bolts lightly and then to the
specified torque, in the ascending order of numbers.
3
Tightening torque 1 2
Fuel pump mounting bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0
lb-ft)
I705H1170029-02
4) Remove the FTPC valve (4) from the fuel drain tray.
I705H1170008-01
• Tighten the fuel hose to the specified torque.

Tightening torque 4
Fuel hose mounting bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,
7.0 lb-ft)
(a)
I705H1170009-01
Installation
Install the fuel drain tray and FTPC valve in the reverse
order of removal. Pay attention the following points:
• The hose should be fitted on the black side “A” of the
FTPC valve.
! CAUTION
I705H1170038-04
When installing fuel drain, care should be
used not to cause tear or other damage.
Fuel Drain Tray and FTPC Valve Removal and
Installation
B705H11706019
Removal
2) Remove the fuel tank filler cap (1) fuel drain tray (2) “A”
from the fuel tank.
! CAUTION
After the fuel drain tray has been removed,
the fuel cap should be fitted to the fuel tank. I705H1170010-02

1G-10 Fuel System:
Fuel Cut Valve Inspection FTPC Valve Inspection

B705H11706004 B705H11706023
Inspect the fuel cut valve in the following procedures: Inspect the FTPC valve in the following procedures:
1) Remove the fuel cut valve. Refer to “Fuel Drain Tray 1) Remove the FTPC valve. Refer to “Fuel Drain Tray
and FTPC Valve Removal and Installation (Page1G- and FTPC Valve Removal and Installation (Page1G-
9)”. 9)”.
2) Check for the following points and replace if any 2) Check that air passes easily when blown from the
abnormal condition is found. orange paint side of the FTPC valve and that
• With the fuel cut valve being immersed in resistance exists when blown from the other side. If
kerosene (1), check that valve (2) operates any abnormal condition exists, replace the valve with
smoothly and valve seat (3) contacts correctly. a new one.
2 3
I705H1170011-01
• Using the special tool, apply vacuum to the fuel “A”

I705H1170014-02
cut valve (4) and check that the gauge pointer
moves correctly. “A”: Orange
Special tool 3) After finishing the FTPC valve inspection, reinstall

(A): 09917–47011 (Vacuum pump gauge) the FTPC valve. Refer to “Fuel Drain Tray and FTPC
Valve Removal and Installation (Page1G-9)”.
(A)
Fuel Pump Disassembly and Assembly
B705H11706011
Disassembly
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly.
4 Refer to “Fuel Pump Assembly Removal and
Installation (Page1G-8)”.
I705H1170012-01
• Check for resistance when the fuel cut valve is

blown.
I705H1170015-01
I705H1170013-01
3) After finishing the fuel cut valve inspection, reinstall

the fuel cut valve. Refer to “Fuel Drain Tray and
FTPC Valve Removal and Installation (Page1G-9)”.

Fuel System: 1G-11
2) After removing the clamp screw (1), ground wire (2) Assembly
and lead wire (Bl) (3), remove the fuel pump Refer to “Fuel Mesh Filter Inspection (Page1G-13)”.
assembly (4). Assemble the fuel pump assembly in the reverse order
of the disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:
3 ! CAUTION
4
• To prevent fuel leakage, each O-ring must
be replaced with a new one.
• Apply engine oil lightly to each of the O-
rings.
1
2 • Connect all wiring couplers securely so as not to

cause contact failure.
• With the engine oil lightly applied to the O-ring, install
I705H1170016-02
the fuel pump to the fuel tank.
3) Detach the fuel mesh filter (5) and remove the fuel
pump (6).
6 I705H1170021-02
• After the fuel pump mounting bolts have been

I705H1170017-02
tightened temporarily, tighten them to specification in
4) Disconnect the lead wire (gray) (7) and remove the the specified torque.
fuel level gauge assembly (8).
Tightening torque
Fuel pump mounting bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0
lb-ft)
7
8
I705H1170018-02
5) Remove the fuel guide (9) and fuel pressure

regulator (10).
I705H1170022-01
10
I705H1170019-02

1G-12 Fuel System:
Fuel Pressure Inspection 4) Turn the ignition ON and check for fuel pressure.
B705H11706005
Inspect the fuel pressure in the following procedures: Fuel pressure
1) Remove the fuel tank bolt and move the fuel tank for Approx. 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43.5 psi)
vehicle backward. If the fuel pressure is lower than the specification,
2) Place a rag under the fuel feed hose and disconnect check for the followings:
fuel feed hose (1) from the fuel tank. • Hose leakage
• Filter clogging
! WARNING
• Pressure regulator
• Use caution to minimize spillage of • Fuel pump
gasoline. If the fuel pressure is higher than the specification,
• Keep away from fire or spark. check for the followings:
• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off • Pump check valve
immediately. • Pressure regulator
• Work in a well-ventilated area.
! CAUTION
• Prior to removing the special tool, turn the

ignition switch to OFF position and
gradually release fuel pressure.
1
! WARNING
• Use caution to minimize spillage of

gasoline.
• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off
immediately.
I705H1170030-01
3) Install the special tools to the fuel tank. • Work in a well-ventilated area.
Special tool 5) After finishing the fuel pressure inspection, reinstall

(A): 09940–40211 (Fuel pressure gauge the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and
adapter) Installation (Page1G-7)”.
(B): 09940–40230 (Fuel pressure gauge
hose attachment)
(C): 09915–77331 (Meter (for high
pressure))
(D): 09915–74521 (Oil pressure gauge hose)
(A) (C)
(B)
(D)
I705H1170031-01

Fuel System: 1G-13
Fuel Pump Relay Inspection NOTE

B705H11706006
Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A When the fuel mesh filter is dirtied
(Page0A-7)”. excessively, replace the fuel filter cartridge
Inspect the fuel pump relay in the following procedures: with a new one.
1) Remove the front leg shield. Refer to “Front Leg
(Page9D-14)”.
2) Remove the fuel pump relay (1).
3) First, check for insulation with the tester between
terminals (2) and (3). Next, check for continuity
between (2) and (3) with 12 V voltage applied,
positive (+) to terminal (4) and negative (–) to
terminal (5). If continuity does not exist, replace the
relay with a new one.
I705H1170025-01
3) After finishing the fuel mesh filter inspection, reinstall

the fuel mesh filter. Refer to “Fuel Mesh Filter
Inspection (Page1G-13)”.
1
Fuel Level Gauge Inspection
B705H11706021
Inspect the fuel level gauge in the following procedures:
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. Refer to “Fuel
Pump Disassembly and Assembly (Page1G-10)”.
I705H1170023-03
2) Check for resistance between the terminals for each
of the following float position.
2 4 If the resistance measured is out of specification,
replace the fuel gauge with a new one.
Special tool
3 5
I705H1170024-02
86.4 mm
Fuel Mesh Filter Inspection
B705H11706020
Inspect the fuel mesh filter in the following procedures: F
1) Remove the fuel mesh filter. Refer to “Fuel Pump 186.3 mm
Disassembly and Assembly (Page1G-10)”.
2) If the fuel mesh filter is clogged with foreign particles,
it hinders smooth gasoline flow resulting in loss of
engine power. Such a filter should be cleaned by
blowing with compressed air. E
I705H1170033-06
Resistance between
Float position
terminals
F: 86.4 mm
Approx. 9 – 11 Ω
from tank mating face
E: 186.3 mm
Approx. 129 – 131 Ω
from tank mating face

1G-14 Fuel System:
3) Inspect the fuel meter. Refer to “Fuel Level Meter 5) Disconnect the ECM lead wire coupler.
Inspection in Section 9C (Page9C-2)”.
Fuel Pump Inspection

B705H11706022
Turn the ignition switch ON and check for operation of
the fuel pump for a few seconds. If the fuel pump is not
operating properly, replace the fuel pump or check the
fuel pump relay and fuel cut sensor.
Fuel Discharge Inspection

1
! WARNING
I705H1170042-02
• Use caution to minimize spillage of 6) With 12 V voltage applied to the power source lead
gasoline. wire (Y/R), measure the volume of gasoline
• Keep away from fire or spark. discharged within 10 seconds.
• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off 7) If the discharge amount is out of the specification,
immediately. the probable cause may be failure of the fuel pump
• Work in a well-ventilated area. or clogged fuel filter.
Fuel discharge amount
1) Remove the front frame cover. Refer to “Front Frame At least approx. 35 ml/10 seconds
(Page9D-17)”. NOTE
2) Disconnect the fuel feed hose from the injector. The battery should be in fully charged
3) Insert the end of fuel feed hose into a measuring condition.
cylinder.
8) After finishing the fuel discharge inspection, reinstall
the fuel feed hose, meter panel and front frame
cover. Refer to “Front Frame Cover Removal and
Fuel Injector Inspection

B705H11706024
Refer to “DTC “C32” (P0201): Fuel Injector Circuit
Fuel Injector Removal and Installation

B705H11706025
I705H1170034-01
Refer to “Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly in
Section 1D (Page1D-13)”.
14)”.

Fuel System: 1G-15
Specifications
Service Data
B705H11707002
Injector + Fuel Pump + Fuel Pressure Regulator
Injector resistance Approx. 10.3 Ω at 20 °C (68 F°) —
35 ml and more
Fuel pump discharge amount —
For 10 sec., at 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi)
Fuel pressure regulator operating
Approx. 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi) —
set pressure
Fuel
Use only unleaded gasoline of at least 87 pump octane or 91
octane (R/2 + M/2) or higher rated by the research method.
Gasoline containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether), less E-03, 28, 33
Fuel type than 10% ethanol, or less than 5% methanol with
appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitor is permissible.
Gasoline used should be graded 91 octane or higher. An The others
unleaded gasoline type is recommended. countries
Fuel tank capacity Including reserve 13.5 L (3.6/3.0 US/lmp gal)
Reserve 4.0 L (3.17/2.64 US/lmp gal)

B705H11707003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Fuel cut valve bolt 3.5 0.35 2.5 )(Page1G-7)
Fuel pump mounting bolt )(Page1G-9) /
10 1.0 7.0
)(Page1G-11)
Fuel hose mounting bolt 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page1G-9)
NOTE
“Fuel Tank Hose Construction (Page1G-2)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

1G-16 Fuel System:

Special Tool
B705H11708001
09900–25008 09915–74521
Multi-circuit tester set Oil pressure gauge hose
)(Page1G-13) )(Page1G-12)
09915–77331 09917–47011
Meter (for high pressure) Vacuum pump gauge
09940–40211 09940–40230
Fuel pressure gauge Fuel pressure gauge hose
adapter attachment

Ignition System: 1H-1
Ignition System
General Description
Immobilizer Description (For E-02, 19, 24, 54) Operation
B705H11801001 When the ignition switch is turned ON with the engine
The immobilizer, an anti-theft system, is installed as a stop switch in ON, the immobi-antenna and ECM are
standard equipment. powered ON.
The immobilizer verifies that the key ID agrees with ECM The ECM transmits a signal to the transponder through
ID by means of radio communication through the the immobi-antenna in order to make comparison
immobilizer antenna. When the ID agreement is verified, between the key ID and ECM ID.
the system makes the engine ready to start. With the signal received, the transponder transmits the
key ID signal to ECM so that ECM can make comparison
with its own ID, and if it matches, the engine is made
ready to start.
1
3
1
I705H1180001-02
1. Immobilizer antenna
I705H1180004-01
1. Immobilizer antenna 3. Ignition switch

2. Transponder 4. ECM
Also, when the ignition switch is turned ON, the indicator

light flashes as many as the number of IDs registered in
2 ECM. Thereafter, if the IDs are in agreement, the
indicator light turns on for two seconds to notify of
I705H1180002-01 completion in successful communication.
If the indicator light (LED) flashes fast, it notifies of
2. Indicator light
communication error or disagreement of ID.
Flashing Lighting
2
2 registered Normal
3 1 3 registered Normal
4 registered Normal
Abnormal
Fast flashing
Approx. 1.6 sec. Approx. 2.0 sec.
ECM I705H1180006-01
4
I705H1180003-01
1. Immobilizer antenna 3. Transponder

2. Indicator light 4. ID

1H-2 Ignition System:
NOTE
If the indicator light flashes fast, turn the
ignition switch OFF then ON to make
judgment again as there is possible
misjudgment due to environmental radio
interference.
! CAUTION
When the battery performance is lowered in 1
winter (low temperature), the system may at
times makes a re-judgment at the time of
I705H1180007-01
beginning the starter motor operation. In this
case, the indicator light operation starts NOTE
immediately after the starter operation.
In the case that the LED flashes fast, remains
lit or unlit, the probable cause of such a
failure may be due to abnormal condition in
the key, key cylinder, wiring harness or ECM.
(If such a failure exists, contact your
distributor or dealer.)

Ignition System Diagram
B705H11802001
Engine Turn signal/

stop switch Side-stand relay
ECM
lgnition coil
lgnition fuse
CKP
sensor
lgnition switch
Main fuse
Battery
TP ECT
sensor sensor
I705H1180008-04


Ignition System Symptom Diagnosis
B705H11804005

Spark plug not sparking Damaged spark plug. Replace.
Damaged spark plug cap. Replace.
Fouled spark plug. Clean or replace.
Wet spark plug. Clean and dry or replace.
Open or short in high-tension cord. Replace.
Engine stalls easily (No Fouled spark plug. Clean or replace.
spark) Defective CKP sensor. Replace.
Spark plug is wet or Excessively rich air/fuel mixture. Consult FI system.
quickly becomes fouled Incorrect gasoline. Change.
with carbon Dirty air cleaner element. Replace.
Incorrect spark plug (Cold type). Change to hot type spark plug.
Spark plug quickly Worn piston ring. Replace.
becomes fouled with oil Worn piston. Replace.
or carbon Worn cylinder. Replace.
Excessive valve-stem to valve-guide Replace.
clearance.
Worn valve stem oil seal. Replace.
Spark plug electrodes Incorrect spark plug (Hot type). Change to cold type spark plug.
overheat or burn Overheated engine. Tune-up.
Loose spark plug. Tighten.
Excessively lean air/fuel mixture. Consult FI system.

No Spark or Poor Spark

B705H11804001
Troubleshooting
NOTE
Make sure the engine stop switch is in the “RUN” position and side-stand is in up-right position.
Grasp the front or rear brake lever. Make sue the fuse is not blown and the battery is fully-charged
before diagnosing.
Step Action Yes No

1 Check the ignition system couplers for poor connections. Go to step 2. Poor connection of
couplers.
Is there connection in the ignition system couplers?
2 Measure the battery voltage between input lead wires (O/W Go to Step 3. • Faulty ignition switch.
and W) at the ECM with the ignition switch in the “ON” • Faulty turn signal/
position. side-stand relay.
Is the voltage OK? • Faulty engine stop
switch.
• Broken wire harness
or poor connection of
related circuit
couplers.
3 Measure the ignition coil primary peak voltage. Refer to Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
“Ignition Coil Inspection (Page1H-5)”.
NOTE
This ignition coil primary peak voltage
inspection method is applicable only with the
multi-circuit tester and the peak volt adaptor.
Is the peak voltage OK?

4 Inspect the spark plug. Refer to “Spark Plug Inspection and Go to Step 5. Faulty spark plug.
Cleaning in Section 0B (Page0B-4)”.
Is the spark plug OK?

5 Inspect the ignition coil. Refer to “Ignition Coil Inspection Go to step 6. Faulty ignition coil(-s).
(Page1H-5)”.
Is the ignition coil(-s) OK?

6 Measure the CKP sensor peak voltage and its resistance. • Faulty ECM. • Faulty CKP sensor.
Refer to “CKP Sensor Inspection (Page1H-6)”. • Poor connection of • Metal particles or
NOTE ignition couplers. foreign material being
stuck on the CKP
The CKP sensor peak voltage inspection is sensor and rotor tip.
applicable only with the multi-circuit tester and
peak volt adaptor.
Is the peak voltage and resistance OK?

Repair Instructions
Spark Plug Removal and Installation 4) Connect the multi-circuit tester with the peak voltage
B705H11806007 adaptor as follows.
Refer to “Spark Plug Removal and Installation in Section
0B (Page0B-3)”. ! WARNING
Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning Do not touch the tester probes and spark
B705H11806008 plug to prevent an electric shock while
Refer to “Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning in Section testing.
0B (Page0B-4)”.
NOTE
Ignition Coil Inspection
B705H11806009 Do not disconnect the ignition coil lead
Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A wires.
(Page0A-7)”.
Special tool
Ignition Coil Primary Peak Voltage (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
1) Remove the left footboard. Refer to “Footboard Tester knob indication
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- Voltage ( )
21)”. (+) probe (–) probe
2) Disconnect the spark plug cap. Ignition coil: W lead wire
Ground
3) Connect new spark plug (1) to the spark plug cap connector
and ground it on the cylinder.
NOTE (A)
Be sure that the spark plug is connected

properly and the battery used is in fully-
charged condition. 2
1 1
3
I705H1180009-03
1. ECM 3. Ignition coil

2. Peak voltage adapter
5) Press the starter button and allow the engine to

crank for a few seconds, and then measure the
I705H1180014-02
ignition coil primary peak voltage.
I705H1180015-01

6) Repeat above procedures a few times and measure Ignition Coil Assembly Removal and Installation
the highest ignition coil primary peak voltage. B705H11806010
If the voltages are lower than standard values, Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A
inspect the ignition coil and the CKP sensor. (Page0A-7)”.
Ignition coil primary peak voltage Removal

150 V and more 1) Remove the front frame cover and left footboard.
7) After measuring the ignition coil primary peak Refer to “Footboard Removal and Installation in
voltage, reinstall the removed parts. Section 9D (Page9D-21)”.
2) Disconnect the spark plug cap.
Ignition Coil Resistance 3) Disconnect the lead wires and remove the ignition
1) Remove the left footboard. Refer to “Footboard coil assembly.
21)”.
2) Disconnect the spark plug cap.
3) Disconnect the ignition coil lead wires.
4) Measure the ignition coil resistance in both the
primary and secondary windings.
Special tool
Primary: Approx. 1.2 – 3.5 Ω ((+) terminal – (–)
terminal) I705H1180021-01
Secondary: Approx. 15 – 30 kΩ ((+) terminal –

Spark plug cap) Installation
Install the ignition coil assembly in the reverse order of
Tester knob indication removal.
Resistance (Ω)
Spark Plug Removal and Installation
B705H11806011
Refer to “Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning in Section
0B (Page0B-4)”.
Spark Plug Inspection

B705H11806012
Refer to “Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning in Section
0B (Page0B-4)”.
CKP Sensor Inspection

B705H11806013
I705H1180020-01
Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A
5) After measure the ignition coil resistance, reinstall (Page0A-7)”.
the removed parts.
CKP Sensor Peak Voltage
14)”.

2) Disconnect the ECM coupler (1). 6) If the peak voltage measured on the ECM coupler is
lower than the standard value, measure the peak
NOTE voltage on the CKP sensor coupler as follows.
Make sure that all of the couplers are a) Disconnect the CKP sensor coupler (2).
connected properly and the battery is fully-
charged.
I705H1180011-03
1
b) Connect the multi-circuit tester with the peak
voltage adaptor.
I705H1180017-01
3) Connect the multi-circuit tester with the peak volt Special tool
adaptor as follows. (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester
set)
Special tool
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Tester knob indication
Voltage ( )
Tester knob indication: Voltage ( )
(+) probe (–) probe
(+) probe (–) probe CKP sensor coupler
ECM coupler G Bl
G/W Bl
2
1 V
(A)
Bl
G/W
4 (A)
V
3
4
(A)
I705H1180022-03
1. ECM coupler 3. CKP sensor

2. CKP sensor coupler 4. Peak voltage adaptor I705H1180012-04
4) Measure the CKP sensor peak voltage in the 2

following procedures:
Bl
• Press the starter button and allow the engine to
crank for a few seconds, and then measure the G
CKP sensor peak voltage. V 4 (A)
5
5) Repeat the above procedures a few times and
measure the highest CKP sensor peak voltage.
(A)
I705H1180023-04
4.5 V and more (G/W – Bl) 2. CKP sensor coupler
4. Peak volt adaptor
5. CKP sensor

c) Measure the CKP sensor peak voltage in the CKP Sensor Removal and Installation
same manner as on the ECM coupler. B705H11806014
If the peak voltage on the CKP sensor lead wire Refer to “CKP Sensor Removal and Installation in
couplers is within specification, but on the ECM Section 1C (Page1C-1)”.
coupler is out of specification, the wire harness
must be replaced. If both peak voltages are out Engine Stop Switch Inspection
B705H11806015
of specification, the CKP sensor must be Refer to “Engine Stop Switch Inspection in Section 9B
replaced and rechecked. (Page9B-10)”.
4.5 V and more (G – Bl) Ignition Switch Inspection
B705H11806016
7) After measuring the CKP sensor peak voltage, Refer to “Ignition Switch Inspection in Section 9B
reinstall the removed parts. (Page9B-11)”.
CKP Sensor Resistance Ignition Switch Removal and Installation

1) Disconnect the CKP sensor coupler (1). B705H11806017
Removal
1) Disconnect the battery (–) cable.
Shield Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D
(Page9D-13)”.
3) Remove the right front box inner cover (1).
I705H1180025-01
2) Measure the resistance between the lead wires and

ground. If the resistance is not within the specified
value, the CKP sensor must be replaced. Refer to
“CKP Sensor Removal and Installation (Page1H-8)”.
I705H1180026-01
Resistance (Ω)
CKP sensor resistance
Approx. 190 – 290 Ω (G – Bl)
1
∞ Ω (G – Ground)
Bl 1
G
2
I705H1180027-01
I705H1180024-02
4) Disconnect the immobilizer coupler. (Only for E-02,
19, 24, 54)
1. CKP sensor coupler 2. CKP sensor
5) Disconnect the ignition switch coupler (2).
3) After measuring the CKP sensor resistance, reinstall 6) Remove the ignition switch.
the removed parts.

7) Disconnect the seat-lock cable (3). Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
3
2
I705H1180028-01
Specifications
Service Data
B705H11807001
Electrical
Unit: mm (in)
Spark performance Over 8.0 (0.3) at 1 atm.
CKP sensor resistance 190 – 290 Ω G – Bl
(+) probe: G/W,
CKP sensor peak voltage 4.5 V and more
(–) probe: Bl
Primary 1.2 – 3.5 Ω
Secondary 15 – 30 kΩ
(+) probe: W,
(–) probe: Ground

Special Tool
B705H11808001
09900–25008
)(Page1H-5) / )(Page1H-
6) / )(Page1H-7) /
)(Page1H-7)

1I-1 Starting System:
Starting System
Starting System Diagram
B705H11902001
Starter button Front brake switch
Signal fuse
Starter
relay
Safety
relay lgnition switch
Rear brake switch Main fuse
To ignition coil Engine stop

Starter switch
motor
Turn signal/
side-stand relay
Battery
lgnition fuse
Side-stand switch
I705H1190026-01
Component Location
Starting System Components Location
B705H11903001

Starting System: 1I-2

Starter Motor will not Run
B705H11904001
NOTE
Make sure the fuses are not blown and the battery is fully-charged before diagnosing.
Troubleshooting
Step Action Yes No
1 1) Grasp the front or rear brake lever, turn on the ignition Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
switch with the engine stop switch in the “RUN” position
and side-stand switch in the “ON” position.
2) Listen for a click from the starter relay when the starter
button is pushed.
Is a click sound head?

2 1) Check if the starter motor runs when its terminal is • Faulty starter relay. Faulty starter motor.
connected to positive: battery terminal (Do not use a thin • Loose or
wire because a large amount of current flows.) disconnected starter
Does the starter motor run? motor lead wire.
3 1) Measure the starter relay voltage at the starter relay Go to step 4. • Faulty ignition switch.
connectors (between positive terminal: Y/G and negative • Faulty engine stop
terminal: B/W) when the starter button is pushed. switch.
Is the voltage OK? • Faulty side-stand
relay.
• Faulty front brake
switch.
• Faulty rear brake
switch.
• Faulty starter button.
• Improper coupler
contact.
• Open circuit in wire
harness.
4 1) Check the starter relay. (Refer to “Starter Relay Removal Improper starter relay Faulty starter relay.
and Installation (Page1I-6)”.) contact.
Is the starter relay OK?
Engine does not turn though the starter motor runs.

• Faulty starter clutch.

Repair Instructions
Starter Motor Components
B705H11906002
10 (a)
8
9 2
6
3
5
2
4
1
11 (b)
12 (c)
I705H1190016-02
1. Housing end (Outside) 8. Washer : 7 N⋅m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.0 lb-ft)

2. O-ring 9. Shim : Apply grease to sliding surface.
3. Starter motor case 10. Starter motor housing bolt : Apply moly paste to sliding surface.
4. Armature 11. Starter motor lead wire bolt : Apply thread lock to thread part.
5. Housing end (Inside) 12. Starter motor mounting bolt : Do not reuse.
6. O-ring : 4 N⋅m (0.4 kgf-m, 3.0 lb-ft)
7. Oil seal : 3 N⋅m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.0 lb-ft)
Starter Motor Removal and Installation

B705H11906001
Removal
1
(Page1D-9)”.
2) Remove the starter motor (1).
I705H1190001-01

Installation • Apply grease to the lip of the oil seal.

Install the starter motor in the reverse order of removal.
Pay attention to the following points. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER
• Apply grease to the O-ring.
I705H1190019-01
• Fit the washer (1) to the housing end with the tab
aligned with the housing end cutaway, position the
I705H1190002-02 shim (2) and assemble the starter motor.
• Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Starter motor mounting bolt (a): 7 N·m (0.7 kgf-
m, 5.0 lb-ft)
Starter motor lead wire bolt (b): 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m,
2.0 lb-ft)
2
I705H1190020-01
• Apply a small quantity of moly paste to the armature

shaft.
(b)
(a) : Moly paste 99000–25140 (SUZUKI Moly
paste or equivalent)
I705H1190025-01
Starter Motor Disassembly and Assembly

B705H11906013
Refer to “Starter Motor Removal and Installation
(Page1I-3)”.
Disassembly
Disassemble the starter. Refer to “Starter Motor
Components (Page1I-3)”.
Assembly I649G1190013-02
Reassemble the starter motor in the reverse order of

! CAUTION
Replace the O-rings with the new ones to
prevent oil leakage and moisture.

• Align the match mark on the starter motor case with Commutator
the match mark on the housing end. Inspect the commutator for discoloration, abnormal wear
• Apply a small quantity of thread lock to the starter or undercut “A”.
motor housing bolts and tighten them to the specified If the commutator is abnormally worn, replace the
torque. armature.
If the commutator surface is discolored, polish it with
: Thread lock cement 99000–32050 (Thread #400 sandpaper and wipe it using a clean dry cloth.
Lock Cement 1342 or equivalent) If there is no undercut, scrape out the insulator (1) with a
Tightening torque saw blade.
Starter motor housing bolt (a): 4 N·m (0.4 kgf-m,
3.0 lb-ft) “A”
(a) 1
I649G1190016-01
Armature Coil
Measure for continuity between each segment. Measure
for continuity between each segment and the armature
shaft.
If there is no continuity between the segments or there is
continuity between the segments and shaft, replace the
I705H1190021-01
armature with a new one.
Special tool
Starter Motor Inspection (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
B705H11906003
Refer to “Starter Motor Disassembly and Assembly Tester knob indication
(Page1I-4)”. Continuity set ( )
(A)
Carbon Brush
Inspect the carbon brushes for abnormal wear, cracks or
smoothness in the brush holder.
If either carbon brush is defective, replace the brush
holder set with a new one.
Measure the length “a” of the carbon brushes using a
vernier calipers. If the measurement is less then the
service limit, replace the brush holder set with a new
one.
I649G1190017-02
Brush length “a”
Service limit: 3.5 mm (0.14 in) Bearing
Special tool Check the bearing of housing end for damage.
: 09900–20102 (Vernire calipers) If any damage is found, replace the housing end.
“a”
I649G1190050-01
I705H1190022-01

Oil Seal Installation

Check the seal lip for damage. Install the starter relay in the reverse order of removal.
If any damage is found, replace the housing end
(Inside). Starter Relay Inspection
B705H11906005
Inspect the starter relay in the following procedures:
1) Remove the starter relay. Refer to “Starter Relay
Removal and Installation (Page1I-6)”.
2) Apply 12 V to “A” and “B” terminals and check for
continuity between the (+) and (–) terminals using
the multi-circuit tester. If the starter relay clicks and
continuity is found, the relay is ok.
! CAUTION
Do not apply battery voltage to the starter
I705H1190023-01 relay for five seconds and more, since the
relay coil may overheat and get damaged.
Starter Relay Removal and Installation
B705H11906004
Special tool
(Page0A-7)”.
Removal Continuity test ( )
1) Remove the upper meter panel. Refer to “Meter
Panel Removal and Installation in Section 9D
(Page9D-14)”.
2) Disconnect the battery (–) lead wire from the battery.
Refer to “Battery Removal and Installation in Section
1J (Page1J-10)”. “A” “B”
3) Disconnect the starter relay coupler (1) and remove (A)

the starter relay cover (2).
I705H1190005-03
To starter motor - + To battery

1
2 “A”
I705H1190003-03
4) Disconnect the starter motor lead wire (3), battery (+) “B”
lead wire (4).
5) Remove the starter relay (5). I649G1190022-01
4
5
I705H1190004-02

3) Measure the relay coil resistance between the Side-stand / Ignition Interlock System Parts
terminals using the multi-circuit tester. If the Inspection
resistance is not within the specified value, replace B705H11906007
the starter relay with a new one. Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A
(Page0A-7)”.
Special tool Check the interlock system for proper operation. If the
(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) interlock system does not operate properly, check each
Starter relay resistance component for damage or abnormalities. If any
3–6Ω abnormality is found, replace the component with a new
one.
Side-stand Switch
21)”.
2) Disconnect the side-stand switch coupler (1).
(A)
I705H1190006-01
4) Install the starter relay. Refer to “Starter Relay

Removal and Installation (Page1I-6)”.
Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and

Installation
B705H11906006
1
(Page0A-7)”.
Removal
I705H1190008-01
1) Remove the meter panel. Refer to “Meter Panel 3) Measure the voltage between G and B/W lead wires.
14)”. Special tool
2) Remove the turn signal/side-stand relay (1).
Diode test ( )
G B/W
((+) probe) ((–) probe)
ON
0.4 – 0.6 V
1 (Side-stand up)
OFF 1.4 V and more
(Side-stand down) (Tester’s battery voltage)
NOTE
If the tester reads 1.4 V and below when the
I705H1190007-01 tester probes are not connected, replace its
battery.
Installation
Install the turn signal/side-stand relay in the reverse
order of removal.
I705H1190009-01

4) Connect the side-stand switch coupler. 4) Install the turn signal/side-stand relay. Refer to “Turn
5) Install the left footboard. Refer to “Footboard Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- (Page1I-7)”.
21)”.
Diode inspection
Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay 1) Remove the turn signal/side-stand relay. Refer to
The turn signal/side-stand relay is composed of the turn “Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and
signal relay, side-stand relay and diode. Installation (Page1I-7)”.
2) Measure the voltage between the terminals using the
multi-circuit tester.
Special tool
Diode test ( )
“A”
I649G1190027-01
Side-stand relay “B”
1) Remove the turn signal/side-stand relay. Refer to

“C”
“Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and
“C” “A” “B”
Installation (Page1I-7)”.
2) Check the insulation between “D” and “E” terminals
using the multi-circuit tester.
3) Apply 12 V to terminals “D” and “C” ((+) to “D” and (– I649G1190029-01
) to “C”) and check the continuity between “D” and
“E”. If there is no continuity, replace the turn signal/
side-stand relay with a new one. Refer to “Turn + Probe of tester to:
Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and Installation “B”, “C” “A”
- Probe of
(Page1I-7)”. 1.4 V and more

tester to:
“B”, “C”
Special tool (Tester's battery voltage)
: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) “A” 0.4 – 0.6 V
Tester knob indication I649G1190046-03
Continuity test ( ) NOTE

“D” “C” “B” “A” If the multi circuit tester reads 1.4 V and
below when the tester probes are not
connected, replace its battery.
3) Install the turn signal/side-stand relay. Refer to “Turn

Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and Installation
(Page1I-7)”.
“E” “F” “G”
SIDE-STAND RELAY
DIODE TURN
SIGNAL
RELAY
“A” “B” “C” “D” “E” “F” “G”

I649G1190028-01

Starter Clutch Component

B705H11906008
2
(a)
D
FW
3
I705H1190017-01
1. One-way clutch 3. Starter idle gear : 26 N⋅m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)
2. Starter driven gear : Apply thread lock to thread part.
Starter Clutch Removal and Installation 4) Remove the generator rotor and starter driven gear.
B705H11906009 Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Disassembly in
Removal
Change in Section 0B (Page0B-9)”. Installation
2) Remove the muffler. Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Install the starter clutch in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation in Section 1K (Page1K-2)”. Pay attention to the following points:
3) Remove the generator cover (1). • Install the generator rotor. Refer to “Engine Bottom
Side Assembly in Section 1D (Page1D-44)”.
• Replace the generator cover gasket with a new one.
• Install the muffler. Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler
1
I705H1190018-02

Starter Clutch Inspection Starter Clutch Disassembly and Assembly

B705H11906010 B705H11906011
Inspect the starter clutch in the following procedures. Disassembly
1) Install the starter driven gear onto the starter clutch 1) With the rotor held with a wrench, loosen the starter
and turn the starter driven gear by hand to inspect clutch bolts.
the starter clutch for a smooth movement. The gear
turns one direction only. If a large resistance is felt to
rotation, inspect the starter clutch for damage or
inspect the starter clutch contacting surface of the
starter driven gear for wear or damage.
If they are found to be damaged, replace them with
the new ones.
I705H1190012-02
2) Remove the one-way clutch guide (1) and one-way

clutch (2) from the rotor.
I705H1190010-01
2) Inspect the starter driven gear bearing for any 2

damages.
I705H1190013-01
Reassembly
Reassemble the starter clutch in the reverse order of
• When inserting the one-way clutch (1) into the one-
way clutch guide (2), the flange side “A” must be
I705H1190011-01 positioned on the rotor side “B”.
“B”
“A”
2 1
I705H1190014-02
1. One-way clutch “A”: Flange

2. One-way guide “B”: Rotor side

• Apply thread lock on the starter clutch bolts and

tighten them to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Starter clutch bolt: 26 N·m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)
! CAUTION
After installing the starter driven gear, check
that the clutch functions properly.
I705H1190027-01
Starter Button Inspection

B705H11906012
Refer to “Starter Button Inspection in Section 9B
(Page9B-10)”.
Specifications
Service Data
B705H11907002
Electrical
Unit: mm (in)
Starter relay resistance 3–6Ω
Standard 7 (0.28)
Starter motor brush length
Limit 3.5 (0.14)

B705H11907003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Starter motor mounting bolt 7 0.7 5.0 )(Page1I-4)
Starter motor lead wire bolt 3 0.3 2.0 )(Page1I-4)
Starter motor housing bolt 4 0.4 3.0 )(Page1I-5)
Starter clutch bolt 26 2.6 19.0 )(Page1I-11)
NOTE
“Starter Motor Components (Page1I-3)”
“Starter Clutch Component (Page1I-9)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


B705H11908001
Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )(Page1I-4) / )(Page1I-4)
equivalent
Moly paste SUZUKI Moly paste or equivalent P/No.: 99000–25140 )(Page1I-4)
Thread lock cement Thread Lock Cement 1342 or P/No.: 99000–32050 )(Page1I-5) / )(Page1I-11)
equivalent
NOTE
“Starter Motor Components (Page1I-3)”
“Starter Clutch Component (Page1I-9)”
Special Tool
B705H11908002
09900–20102 09900–25008
Vernier calipers (1/20 mm, Multi-circuit tester set
200 mm)
)(Page1I-5) )(Page1I-5) / )(Page1I-6) /
)(Page1I-7) / )(Page1I-7) /
)(Page1I-8) / )(Page1I-8)

1J-1 Charging System:
Charging System
Charging System Diagram
B705H11A02001
lgnition switch
Main fuse
Battery
Load
Generator
Regulator/Rectifier
I705H11A0001-02
Component Location
Charging System Components Location
B705H11A03001

Charging System: 1J-2

Charging System Symptom Diagnosis
B705H11A04009

Generator does not Open- or short-circuited lead wires, or Repair or replace or retighten.
charge loose lead connections.
Short-circuited, grounded or open Replace.
generator coils.
Short-circuited or punctured regulator/ Replace.
rectifiers.
Generator does charge, Lead wires tend to get short- or open- Repair or retighten.
but charging rate is below circuited or loosely connected at
the specification terminals.
Grounded or open-circuited stator coils Replace.
or generator.
Defective regulator/rectifier. Replace.
Defective cell plates in the battery. Replace the battery.
Generator overcharges Internal short-circuit in the battery. Replace the battery.
Damaged or defective resistor element Replace.
in the regulator/rectifier.
Poorly grounded regulator/rectifier. Clean and tighten ground connection.
Unstable charging Lead wire insulation frayed due to Repair or replace.
vibration, resulting in intermittent short-
circuiting.
Internally short-circuited generator. Replace.
Defective regulator/rectifier. Replace.
“Sulfation”, acidic white Cracked battery case. Replace the battery.
powdery substance or Battery has been left in a run-down Replace the battery.
spots on surfaces of cell condition for a long time.
plates
Battery runs down quickly Trouble in charging system. Check the generator, regulator/rectifier and
circuit connections and make necessary
adjustments to obtain specified charging
operation.
Cell plates have lost much of their active Replace the battery, and correct the charging
material as a result of overcharging. system.
Internal short-circuit in the battery. Replace the battery.
Too low battery voltage. Recharge the battery fully.
Too old battery. Replace the battery.
Battery “sulfation” Incorrect charging rate. (When not in Replace the battery.
use battery should be checked at least
once a month to avoid sulfation.)
The battery was left unused in a cold Replace the battery if badly sulfated.
climate for too long.

Battery Runs Down Quickly

B705H11A04001
Troubleshooting
Step Action Yes No
1 1) Check accessories which use excessive amounts of Remove accessories. Go to step 2.
electricity.
Are accessories being installed?

2 1) Check the battery for current leaks. (Refer to “Battery Go to step 3. • Short circuit of wire
Current Leakage Inspection (Page1J-4)”.) harness.
Is the battery for current leaks OK? • Faulty electrical

equipment.
3 1) Measure the charging voltage between the battery • Faulty battery. Go to step 4.
terminals. (Refer to “Regulated Voltage Inspection • Abnormal driving
(Page1J-4)”.) condition.
Is the battery charging of voltage OK?
4 1) Measure the resistance of the generator coil. (Refer to Go to step 5. Faulty generator coil or
“Generator Coil Resistance Inspection (Page1J-5)”.) disconnected lead
wires.
Is the resistance of generator coil OK?
5 1) Measure the generator no-load voltage. (Refer to Go to step 6. Faulty generator.
“Generator No-load Performance Inspection (Page1J-
5)”.)
Is the generator no-load performance OK?

6 1) Inspect the regulator/rectifier. Refer to “Regulator/ Go to step 7. Faulty regulator/rectifier.
Rectifier Inspection (Page1J-5)”.
Is the regulator/rectifier OK?

7 1) Inspect the wires. Faulty battery. • Short circuit of wire
harness.
Is the wire harness OK?
• Poor contact of
coupler.
Battery overcharges
• Faulty regulator/rectifier.
• Faulty battery.
• Poor contact of generator lead wire coupler.

Repair Instructions
Battery Current Leakage Inspection Regulated Voltage Inspection
B705H11A06001 B705H11A06002
Inspect the battery current leakage in the following Inspect the regulated voltage in the following
procedures: procedures:
1) Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 1) Remove the battery cover (1).
2) Remove the battery cover (1). 2) Start the engine and keep it running at 5 000 r/min
3) Disconnect the (–) battery lead wire. with the dimmer switch turned HI position.
3) Measure the DC voltage between the (+) and (–)
1 battery terminals using the multi-circuit tester. If the
voltage is not within the specified value, inspect the
generator and regulator/rectifier.
NOTE
BATTERY
When making this test, be sure that the

battery is in fully charged condition.
Special tool
I705H11A0002-01
4) Measure the current between (–) battery terminal Tester knob indication
and the (–) battery lead wire using the multi-circuit Voltage ( )
tester. If the reading exceeds the specified value, Regulated voltage
leakage is evident. 14.0 – 15.5 V at 5 000 r/min
Special tool
: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) 1 (‫)ޓ‬ (‫)ޓ‬
Battery current (leak)
Under 3 mA
Tester knob indication BATTERY
Current ( , 20 mA)
! CAUTION
• In case of a large current leak, turn the

tester to high range first to avoid tester I705H11A0004-01
damage.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to the “ON” Battery
(‫)ޓ‬ (‫)ޓ‬
position when measuring current.
DCV
A
I705H11A0005-01
I705H11A0003-01

Generator Coil Resistance Inspection Generator No-load Performance Inspection

B705H11A06004 B705H11A06005
Inspect the generator coil resistance in the following Inspect the generator no-load performance in the
procedures: following procedures:
1) Disconnect the generator coupler (1). 1) Disconnect the generator coupler (1).
1 1
I705H11A0006-02 I705H11A0006-02
2) Measure the resistance between the three lead 2) Start the engine and run it at 5 000 r/min.
wires. 3) Using the multi-circuit tester, measure the voltage
If the resistance is out of specified value, replace the between three lead wires.
stator with a new one. Also, check that the generator If the tester reads under the specified value, replace
core is insulated properly. the generator with a new one.
: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
Tester knob indication Tester knob indication
Resistance (Ω) Voltage (~)
Generator coil resistance Generator no-load performance (When engine is
0.1 – 1.0 Ω (Y – Y) cold)
∞Ω (Y – Ground) More than 55 V (AC) at 5 000 r/min
NOTE
When making this test, be sure that the Y
battery is in fully charged condition.
Y
Y
Y
I705H11A0007-02
Y
Regulator/Rectifier Inspection
Y B705H11A06010
Inspect the regulator/rectifier in the following procedures:
I705H11A0008-02
(Page9D-14)”.
2) Remove the regulator/rectifier (1).
I705H11A0028-01

3) Measure the voltage between the terminals using the 4) Remove the generator stator (1), CKP sensor (2)
multi circuit tester as indicated in the following table. and lead wire guide (3).
If the voltage is not within the specified value,
replace the regulator/rectifier with a new one. 3
Special tool
: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) 2

Diode test ( )
A E 1
I705H11A0010-03
5) Remove the snap ring (4).
D C B
I705H11A0009-02
Unit: V
(+) tester probe 4
A B C D E
A — 0.4 – 0.7 0.4 – 0.7 0.4 – 0.7 0.5 – 1.2
(–) B * — * * 0.4 – 0.7
tester C * * — * 0.4 – 0.7
probe D * * * — 0.4 – 0.7
E * * * * —
*1.4 V and more (tester’s battery voltage)
I705H11A0011-03
NOTE 6) Remove the bearing (5) using the special tool.

If the tester reads 1.4 V and below when the Special tool
tester probes are not connected, replace its (A): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)
battery.
4) Install the regulator/rectifier. (A)

5) Install the front leg shield. Refer to “Front Leg Shield
14)”.
Generator Removal and Installation

B705H11A06003
Removal
1) Drain engine oil. 5
2) Remove the side leg shield. Refer to “Side Leg I705H11A0013-03

Shield Removal and Installation in Section 9D 7) Remove the oil seal (6).
(Page9D-15)”.
3) Remove the generator cover. Refer to “CKP Sensor
Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page1C-1)”.
I705H11A0014-03

Installation • Install the snap ring.

Install the generator in the reverse order of removal. Pay • Install the generator stator into the generator cover.
• Install the oil seal (1) using the special tool. ! CAUTION
Special tool Engage the convex part “A” on the starter

(A): 09913–75821 (Bearing installer) into the notch “B” on the generator cover.
! CAUTION
• Install the oil seal with the marked code

toward outside. “A”
• Replace the oil seal with a new one.
(A)
“B”
I705H11A0018-02
• Tighten the generator stator bolts (3) to the specified

torque.
1
Tightening torque
Generator stator bolt (a): 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.0
I705H11A0015-01
lb-ft)
• Install the bearing (2) using the special tool. • Tighten the CKP sensor bolts (4) to the specified
torque.
Special tool
(B): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) Tightening torque
CKP sensor bolt (b): 6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)
! CAUTION
Replace the bearing with a new one.
4 (b)
(B)
3 (a)
2
I705H11A0019-05
• Install the generator cover.
I705H11A0016-01
! CAUTION
• Install the muffler. Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler

• Install the side leg shield. Refer to “Side Leg Shield

Battery Components 3) Insert the nozzles of the electrolyte container (5) into
B705H11A06011 the electrolyte filler holes of the battery.
4
4) Hold the electrolyte container firmly so that it does
3 not fall.
1
5) Do not allow any of the electrolyte to spill.
5
2
6 5
7
8
I705H11A0020-01
1. Upper cover breather 5. Terminal

2. Cathode plates 6. Safety valve I705H11A0023-01
3. Stopper 7. Anode plates
6) Make sure the air bubbles (6) rise to the top of each
4. Filter 8. Separator (Fiberglass)
electrolyte container and leave the electrolyte
container in this position for more than 20 minutes.
Battery Initial Charging
B705H11A06007
Filling Electrolyte
1) Remove the aluminum tape (1) which seals the
battery filler holes (2).
6
I705H11A0024-04
2
NOTE
If air bubbles do not rise from any one of the
I705H11A0021-01 filler ports, tap the bottom of the electrolyte
2) Remove the caps (3) from the electrolyte container. container two or three times.
Never remove the electrolyte container from
NOTE the battery while there is still electrolyte in
the container.
• Do not remove or pierce the sealed areas
(4) of the electrolyte container.
• After completely filling the battery with
electrolyte, use the caps (3) from the
electrolyte container to seal the battery
filler holes.
4
I310G11A0024-01
I705H11A0022-01

7) After the electrolyte container is completely empty, Initial Changing

remove it from the battery and wait about 20 1) Measure the battery voltage using multi circuit tester.
minutes.
2) The tester should indicate more than 12.5 – 12.6 V
8) Insert the caps (3) firmly into the filler holes, so that (DC) as shown in the figure.
the top of the caps do not protrude above the upper
3) If the battery voltage is lower than the specification,
surface of the top cover of the battery.
charge the battery with a battery charger. Refer to
! CAUTION “Battery Recharging (Page1J-10)”.
• Never use anything except the specified

battery.
• Once install the caps to the battery, do not
remove the caps.
• Do not tap the caps with a hammer when
installing them.
I310G11A0028-01
3 ! CAUTION
Do not remove the caps on the battery top
while charging.
NOTE
Initial charging for a new battery is
I705H11A0025-03 recommended if two years have elapsed
since the date of manufacture.
CORRECT
Battery Visual Inspection
B705H11A06008
Inspect the battery visual in the following procedures:
1) Visually inspect the surface of the battery container.
2) If any signs of cracking or electrolyte leakage from
the sides of the battery have occurred, replace the
battery with a new one.
3) If the battery terminals are found to be coated with
rust or an acidic white powdery substance, clean the
I310G11A0026-01 battery terminals with sandpaper.
INCORRECT
I310G11A0027-01

Battery Recharging
B705H11A06009
! CAUTION
When recharging the battery, remove the
battery from the motorcycle.
NOTE
While recharging, do not remove the caps on
the top of the battery.
1) Measure the battery voltage using the multi circuit

tester. I705H11A0029-02
2) If the voltage reading is less than the 12 V (DC),

recharge the battery with a battery charger. Battery Removal and Installation
B705H11A06012
Recharging time Removal

0.9 A for 5 to 10 hours or 4 A for 1 hour 1) Open the front box and remove the battery cover (1).
! CAUTION
Be careful not to permit the charging current
to exceed 6 A at any time. 1
3) After recharging, wait at least 30 minutes and then BATTERY
measure the battery voltage using the multi circuit

tester.
4) If the battery voltage is less than 12.5 V, recharge I705H11A0026-01
the battery again.
2) Disconnect the (–) cable first, then (+) cable.
5) If the battery voltage is still less than 12.5 V after
3) Take out the battery by pulling the slider (2).
recharging, replace the battery with a new one.
6) When a battery is left unused for a long time, its
voltage needs to be regularly measured.
7) When the motorcycle is not used for more than one 2
month (especially during the winter season),
measure the battery voltage at least once a month.
“A”
“B”
I705H11A0027-01
Installation
Install the battery in the reverse order of removal. Pay
attention to the following point:
• Connect the (+) cable first, then (–) cable.
! CAUTION
I649G11A0045-01
Never use anything except the specified
battery.
“A”: Charging period “B”: Stop charging

Specifications
Service Data
B705H11A07003
Electrical
Unit: mm (in)
Generator coil resistance Charging 0.1 – 1.0 Ω Y–Y
Generator no-load voltage (When
55 V and more at 5 000 r/min
engine is cold)
Generator Max. output Approx. 400 W at 5 000 r/min
Starter motor brush length 7 (0.28) 3.5 (0.14)
Regulated voltage 14.0 – 15.5 V at 5 000 r/min
Type designation FTZ9-BS
Battery
Capacity 12 V 32.4 kC (9 Ah)/10 HR

B705H11A07004
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Generator stator bolt 11 1.1 8.0 )(Page1J-7)
CKP sensor bolt 6 0.6 4.5 )(Page1J-7)
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

Special Tool
B705H11A08001
09900–25008 09913–70210
Multi-circuit tester set Bearing installer set
)(Page1J-4) / )(Page1J-4) )(Page1J-7)
/ )(Page1J-5) / )(Page1J-
5) / )(Page1J-6)
09913–75821 09921–20240
Bearing installer Bearing remover set
)(Page1J-7) )(Page1J-6)

Exhaust System: 1K-1
Exhaust System
Precautions
Precautions for Exhaust System
B705H11B00001
! WARNING
• To avoid the danger of being burned, do not touch the exhaust system when the system is hot. Any
service on the exhaust system should be performed when the system is cool.
• Make sure that the exhaust pipe and muffler have enough clearance from the rubber parts and
plastic parts to avoid melting.
• After installing the exhaust pipe and muffler, check the exhaust pipe connection and muffler
connection for exhaust gas leakage.
Repair Instructions
Exhaust System Components
B705H11B06001
6 (d)
6 (d)
3 (a)
2
4 (b) 5 (c)
I705H11B0012-04
1. Exhaust pipe gasket 5. Exhaust pipe connecting bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
2. Muffler connector 6. Muffler mounting bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
3. HO2 sensor : 48 N⋅m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.5 lb-ft) : Apply thread lock.
4. Exhaust pipe bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) : Do not reuse.

1K-2 Exhaust System:
Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and Installation 4) Remove the HO2 sensor (5).
B705H11B06002
Removal
1) Remove the HO2 sensor lead wire coupler (1).
I705H11B0004-01
1 5) Remove the exhaust pipe (6).
I705H11B0001-01
2) Loosen the exhaust pipe connecting bolt (2).
2 6
I705H11B0005-01
6) Remove the exhaust pipe gasket (7).
I705H11B0002-01
3) Remove the muffler mounting bolts (3) and remove

the muffler (4).
7
3
I705H11B0006-01
4
I705H11B0003-01

Installation • Tighten the HO2 sensor (4) to the specified torque.

Install the exhaust pipe/muffler in the reverse order of
Tightening torque
HO2 sensor (b): 48 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.5 lb-ft)
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
Replace the exhaust pipe gasket (1) and
exhaust pipe connector (2) with the new • Be careful not to expose it to excessive
ones. shock.
• Do not use an impact wrench while
• Install the exhaust pipe gasket (1) and exhaust pipe installing the HO2 sensor.
connector (2). • Be careful not to twist or damage the
sensor lead wires.
• Do not apply oil or other materials to the
sensor air hole.
1
4 (b)
I705H11B0007-03
I705H11B0010-02
• Apply thread lock to the exhaust pipe joint bolt and

muffler mounting bolts.
2 • Tighten the exhaust pipe connecting bolt (5) and

muffler mounting bolts (6) to the specified torque.
I705H11B0008-02
Tightening torque
• Tighten the exhaust pipe bolts (3) to the specified Exhaust pipe connecting bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-
torque. m, 16.5 lb-ft)
Tightening torque Muffler mounting bolt (d): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
Exhaust pipe bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb- lb-ft)
ft)
5 (c)
6 (d)
3 (a)
I705H11B0011-02
I705H11B0009-02

Exhaust System Inspection HO2 Sensor Inspection

B705H11B06005 B705H11B06006
Inspect the exhaust pipe connection and muffler Refer to “HO2 Sensor Inspection in Section 1C
connection for exhaust gas leakage and mounting (Page1C-6)”.
condition. If any defect is found, replace the exhaust
pipe or muffler with a new one.
Check the exhaust pipe bolts, exhaust pipe connecting
bolt and muffler mounting bolts are tightened to their
specified torque.
Tightening torque
Exhaust pipe bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
Exhaust pipe connecting bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-
m, 16.5 lb-ft)
Muffler mounting bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-
ft)
3 (a)
I705H11B0009-02
5 (c)
6 (d)
I705H11B0011-02

Specifications
B705H11B07001
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Exhaust pipe bolt )(Page1K-3) /
23 2.3 16.5
)(Page1K-4)
HO2 sensor 48 4.8 34.5 )(Page1K-3)
Exhaust pipe connecting bolt )(Page1K-3) /
23 2.3 16.5
)(Page1K-4)
Muffler mounting bolt )(Page1K-3) /
23 2.3 16.5
)(Page1K-4)
NOTE
“Exhaust System Components (Page1K-1)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

B705H11B08001
Thread lock cement THREAD LOCK CEMENT 1342 or P/No.: 99000–32050 )(Page1K-3)
equivalent
NOTE
“Exhaust System Components (Page1K-1)”


Section 2
Suspension
CONTENTS
Precautions .................................................2-1 Cushion Lever Bearing Removal and

2
Precautions............................................................. 2-1 Installation .......................................................2C-10
Precautions for Suspension .................................. 2-1 Crankcase Bracket Construction.......................2C-11
Crankcase Bracket Removal and Installation ...2C-12
Suspension General Diagnosis.............. 2A-1 Crankcase Bracket Related Parts Inspection....2C-12
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............2A-1 Crankcase Bracket Bearing Removal and
Suspension and Wheel Symptom Diagnosis ...... 2A-1 Installation .......................................................2C-13
Specifications .....................................................2C-14
Front Suspension .................................... 2B-1 Service Data......................................................2C-14
Repair Instructions ..............................................2B-1 Tightening Torque Specifications......................2C-14
Front Fork Components ...................................... 2B-1 Special Tools and Equipment ...........................2C-15
Front Fork Removal and Installation ................... 2B-2 Recommended Service Material .......................2C-15
Front Fork Disassembly and Assembly............... 2B-3 Special Tool ......................................................2C-15
Front Fork Inspection .......................................... 2B-8
Front Fork Parts Inspection................................. 2B-8 Wheels and Tires ..................................... 2D-1
Specifications.......................................................2B-9 Precautions...........................................................2D-1
Service Data ....................................................... 2B-9 Precautions for Wheel and Tire...........................2D-1
Tightening Torque Specifications........................ 2B-9 Repair Instructions ..............................................2D-2
Special Tools and Equipment ...........................2B-10 Front Wheel Components ...................................2D-2
Recommended Service Material ....................... 2B-10 Front Wheel Assembly Construction...................2D-3
Special Tool ...................................................... 2B-10 Front Wheel Assembly Removal and
Installation .........................................................2D-4
Rear Suspension ..................................... 2C-1 Front Wheel Related Parts Inspection ................2D-5
Repair Instructions ..............................................2C-1 Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal
Rear Suspension Components ...........................2C-1 and Installation ..................................................2D-6
Rear Suspension Assembly Construction...........2C-2 Rear Wheel Components....................................2D-8
Rear Swingarm Components ..............................2C-3 Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and
Rear Shock Absorber and Rear Shock Installation .........................................................2D-9
Absorber Assembly Removal and Rear Wheel Related Parts Inspection ...............2D-11
Installation .........................................................2C-4 Tire Removal and Installation............................2D-11
Rear Suspension Inspection ...............................2C-5 Wheel/Tire/Air Valve Inspection and Cleaning ..2D-13
Rear Shock Absorber Inspection ........................2C-5 Air Valve Removal and Installation ...................2D-14
Rear Shock Absorber Gas Pressure Release.....2C-5 Wheel Balance Check and Adjustment.............2D-14
Rear Suspension Adjustment .............................2C-6 Specifications .....................................................2D-15
Rear Swingarm Removal and Installation ...........2C-6 Service Data......................................................2D-15
Rear Swingarm Related Parts Inspection ...........2C-7 Tightening Torque Specifications......................2D-15
Rear Swingarm Dust Seal / Bearing Removal Special Tools and Equipment ...........................2D-16
and Installation ..................................................2C-8 Recommended Service Material .......................2D-16
Cushion Lever and Cushion Rod Inspection.......2C-9 Special Tool ......................................................2D-16

2-1 Precautions:
Precautions
Precautions
Precautions for Suspension
B705H12000001
! WARNING
All suspensions, bolts and nuts are an important part in that it could affect the performance of vital
parts. They must be tightened to the specified torque periodically and if the suspension effect is lost,
replace it with a new one.
! CAUTION
Never attempt to heat, quench or straighten any suspension part. Replace it with a new one, or
damage to the part may result.

Suspension General Diagnosis: 2A-1
Suspension General Diagnosis

Suspension and Wheel Symptom Diagnosis
B705H12104001

Wobbly front wheel Distorted wheel rim. Replace.
Worn front wheel bearings. Replace.
Defective or incorrect tire. Replace.
Loose axle or axle pinch bolt. Retighten.
Incorrect front fork oil level. Adjust.
Front suspension too soft Weakened springs. Replace.
Not enough fork oil. Replenish.
Wrong viscous fork oil. Replace.
Front suspension too stiff Too viscous fork oil. Replace.
Too much fork oil. Drain excess oil.
Bent front axle. Replace.
Noisy front suspension Not enough fork oil. Replenish.
Loose bolts on suspension. Retighten.
Wobbly rear wheel Distorted wheel rim. Replace.
Worn rear swingarm bearing. Replace.
Worn rear suspension bushing. Replace.
Loose bolts on rear suspension and rear Retighten.
swingarm.
Loose rear axle nut. Retighten.
Rear suspension too soft Weakened spring of shock absorber. Replace.
Leakage of oil from shock absorber. Replace.
Improperly set rear spring unit adjuster. Adjust.
Rear suspension too stiff Bent shock absorber shaft. Replace.
Over tightened cushion lever mounting Adjust.
nut, rear cushion rod nut.
Worn swingarm and suspension Replace.
bearings.
Improperly set rear suspension adjuster. Adjust.
Rear suspension too Loose nuts or bolts on rear suspension. Retighten.
noisy Worn swingarm bearings. Replace.

2B-1 Front Suspension:
Front Suspension
Repair Instructions
Front Fork Components
B705H12206001
6
10
12
7
11
1 (a)
14 2
13
3
15
16
19
8 4
17
D
FW 18 (b)
I705H1220035-06
1. Front fork top cap 7. Rebound spring 13. Oil seal retainer 19. Front axle pinch bolt
2. O-ring 8. Inner tube 14. Guide metal : 45 N⋅m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 lb-ft)
3. Washer 9. Inner tube slide metal 15. Oil lock piece : 30 N⋅m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.5 lb-ft)
4. Front fork spring 10. Dust seal 16. Outer tube : Apply thread lock to thread part.
5. Cylinder ring 11. Oil seal stopper ring 17. Gasket : Apply fork oil.
6. Cylinder 12. Oil seal 18. Cylinder bolt : Do not reuse.

Front Suspension: 2B-2
Front Fork Removal and Installation 7) Loose the front fork clamp bolts (5) and remove the
B705H12206007 front fork (6).
Removal
1) Remove the front leg shield. Refer to “Front Leg NOTE
Shield Removal and Installation in Section 9D Hold the front fork by the hand to prevent
(Page9D-14)”. sliding out of the steering stem.
2) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front
Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section
2D (Page2D-4)”.
! CAUTION
• Make sure that the motorcycle is (A)

supported securely.
• Do not operate the front brake lever with 4
the front wheel removed. 5
3) Disconnect the brake hose clamp (1) from the front 6

fender.
I705H1220002-02
4) Remove the brake hose clamp bolt (2).
5) Remove the front fender by removing the bolts (3) (L Installation
& R). 1) Insert the front fork inner tube top end into the
steering stem all the way until the step of mounting
hole has been contacted and tighten the clamp bolts
3 temporarily.
1
I705H1220001-01
6) Remove the front fork cap bolt (4) and washer using
the special tool.
I705H1220003-01
! CAUTION
2) Replace the O-ring of the front fork cap bolt and
Use caution when removing the front fork apply fork oil.
cap bolt since the spring force is applied to
the cap bolt. ! CAUTION
Use a new O-ring to prevent oil leakage.
Special tool
(A): 09940–30230 (Socket hexagon (17 : Fork Oil 99000–99044–10G (FORK OIL or
mm)) equivalent)
I705H1220004-01

3) Install the washer and temporarily tighten the front 8) Install the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front
fork cap bolt and tighten the front fork clamp bolts (1) Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section
to the specified torque. 2D (Page2D-4)”.
Tightening torque ! WARNING
Front fork clamp bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
lb-ft) After remounting the brake caliper, pump the
brake lever until the pistons push the pads
4) Tighten the front fork cap bolt (2) to the specified
correctly.
torque using the special tool.
Special tool NOTE
(A): 09940–30230 (Socket hexagon (17
Before tightening the front axle and front axle
mm))
pinch bolts, move the front fork up and down
Tightening torque four or five times.
Front fork cap bolt (b): 45 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5
lb-ft)
2 (b)
(A)
1 (a)
I705H1240027-01
I705H1220005-01
5) Install the front fender. Front Fork Disassembly and Assembly

B705H12206008
6) Tighten the brake hose clamp bolt. Refer to “Front Fork Removal and Installation (Page2B-
7) Connect the brake hose clamp to the front fender. 2)”.
Disassembly
1) Remove the front fork spring (1).
I705H1220006-03 1
I705H1220007-01

2) Invert the fork and stroke it several times to drain out 6) Remove the dust seal (6) and oil seal stopper ring
fork oil. (7).
3) Hold the fork inverted for a few minutes to drain oil.
6 7
I705H1220011-02
I649G1220012-01 7) Pull the outer tube out of the inner tube.

4) Remove the cylinder bolt (2) using the special tools.
NOTE
Special tool Be careful not to damage the inner tube.
(A): 09940–34520 (T handle)
(B): 09940–34531 (Attachment A)
I310G1220012-01
8) Remove the following parts.

(B)
• Oil seal (8)
(A)
• Oil seal retainer (9)
• Guide metal (10)
I705H1220008-01
• Slide metal (11)
• Oil lock piece (12)
2 8
9
10
11
I705H1220009-01 12
5) Remove the cylinder (3), rebound spring (4) and
I705H1220012-02
cylinder ring (5).
3
5
I705H1220010-02

9) Remove the spring (13) from the oil lock piece (14). Inner tube
• Apply fork oil to the guide metal and oil seal lip.
13 : Fork Oil 99000–99044–10G (FORK OIL or

equivalent)
• Install the following parts onto the inner tube.
14
– Oil seal (1)
– Oil seal retainer (2)
– Guide metal (3)
! CAUTION
I705H1220032-02
When installing the oil seal to inner tube, be
careful not to damage the oil seal lip.
Assembly
Assemble the front fork in the reverse order of
! CAUTION
• Thoroughly wash all the component parts

being assembled.
Insufficient washing can result in oil
leakage or premature wear of the parts.
• When reassembling the front fork, use new 1
fork oil. 2
3
• Use the specified fork oil for the front fork. I705H1220014-02
• When reassembling, replace the slide • Hold the inner tube vertically, clean the metal groove
metal, guide metal, oil seal, dust seal and and install the slide metal by hand.
cylinder bolt gasket with the new ones.
• Use care not to cause damage to the slide ! CAUTION
metal surfaces since the surfaces are Do not damage the Teflon coated surface of
teflon coated. the inner tube’s slide metal when mounting it.
Oil lock piece • Apply fork oil to the slide metal.

• Install the spring (1) into the oil lock piece (2) securely. : Fork Oil 99000–99044–10G (FORK OIL or
equivalent)
I705H1220013-01
I649G1220021-01

• Install the oil lock piece into the inner tube.
5 4 1 2 3
I705H1220034-02
I705H1220036-01
– Dust seal (5)
• Install the inner tube into the outer tube with care not
– Oil seal stopper ring (4)
to drop the oil lock piece out.
– Oil seal (1)
NOTE – Oil seal retainer (2)
After installing the inner tube into the outer – Guide metal (3)
tube, keep the oil lock piece into the inner
tube by compressing the front fork fully. Cylinder / Rebound spring / Cylinder ring
• Install the rebound spring and the cylinder ring to the
• Install the oil seal (1) into the outer tube using the
cylinder and install them together to the inner tube.
special tool.
Special tool
(A): 09940–52861 (Front fork oil seal
installer)
(A)
I705H1220019-01
1
NOTE
The cylinder ring should be installed onto the
I705H1220016-03
cylinder with its oil passage notches “A”
facing downward.
• Install the oil seal stopper ring (4) and the dust seal
(5).
“A”
5
I705H1220025-02
I705H1220017-03

• Apply thread lock to the cylinder bolt and tighten it to Front fork oil
the specified torque using the special tools. • Place the front fork vertically without spring.
! CAUTION • Compress the front fork fully.
• Pour the specified front fork oil into the front fork.
Use a new cylinder bolt gasket to prevent oil
leakage. : Fork Oil 99000–99044–10G (FORK OIL or
equivalent)
NOTE Front fork oil capacity (each leg)
Check the front fork for smoothness by 301 ml (10.17/10.60 US/Imp oz)
stroking it after installing the cylinder.
: Thread lock cement 99000–32050 (Thread

Lock Cement 1342 or equivalent)
Special tool
(A): 09940–34520 (T handle)
(B): 09940–34531 (Attachment A)
Tightening torque
Cylinder bolt: 30 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.5 lb-ft)
I649G1220026-01
• Move the inner tube up and down slowly several

strokes until no more bubbles come out from the oil.
• Keep the front fork vertically and leave it during 5 – 6
minutes.
I649G1220025-01
NOTE
Take extreme attention to pump out air
completely.
(B)
(A)
I705H1220008-01
I705H1220020-01

• Hold the front fork vertically and adjust the fork oil Inner / Outer Tubes
level using the special tool. Inspect the inner tube sliding surface and outer tube
sliding surface for scuffing. If any defects are found,
NOTE replace them with the new ones.
When adjusting the fork oil level, remove the
fork spring and compress the inner tube fully.
Special tool
(A): 09943–74111 (Fork oil level gauge)
Fork oil level “a”
87 mm (3.43 in)
(A)
I649G1220035-02
Fork Spring
“a”
Measure the fork spring free length. If it is shorter than
the service limit, replace it with a new one.
Front fork spring free length “a”
I705H1220021-01 347.6 mm (13.39 in)
Front fork spring
• Install the fork spring into the front fork.
“a”
I705H1220023-01
Cylinder / Cylinder Ring

I705H1220022-01 Inspect the cylinder (1) and cylinder ring (2) for wear or
damage. If any defects are found, replace the cylinder or
Front Fork Inspection cylinder ring with a new one.
B705H12206004
Refer to “Front Fork Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-
16)”.
Front Fork Parts Inspection

B705H12206009
Refer to “Front Fork Disassembly and Assembly
(Page2B-3)”.
Inspect the following parts.
2 1
I705H1220024-01

Specifications
Service Data
B705H12207002
Suspension
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Item
Front fork stroke 110 (4.33) —
Front fork spring free length 347.6 (13.69) 340
Front fork oil type G-10 —
Front fork oil capacity (each leg) 301 ml (10.17/10.60 US/lmp oz) —
87 (3.43)
Front fork oil level —
(without spring, inner/outer tube fully pressed)
Front fork inner tube O.D. 41 (1.61)

B705H12207003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Front fork clamp bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page2B-3)
Front fork cap bolt 45 4.5 32.5 )(Page2B-3)
Cylinder bolt 30 3.0 21.5 )(Page2B-7)
NOTE
“Front Fork Components (Page2B-1)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


B705H12208001
Fork Oil FORK OIL or equivalent P/No.: 99000–99044– )(Page2B-2) / )(Page2B-
10G 5) / )(Page2B-5) /
)(Page2B-7)
Thread lock cement Thread Lock Cement 1342 or P/No.: 99000–32050 )(Page2B-7)
equivalent
NOTE
“Front Fork Components (Page2B-1)”
Special Tool
B705H12208002
09940–30230 09940–34520
Socket hexagon (17 mm) T handle
)(Page2B-2) / )(Page2B- )(Page2B-4) / )(Page2B-
3) 7)
09940–34531 09940–52861
Attachment A Front fork oil seal installer
7)
09943–74111
Fork oil level gauge
)(Page2B-8)

2C-1 Rear Suspension:
Rear Suspension
Repair Instructions
Rear Suspension Components
B705H12306012
13
10
12
14 (e)
11 (d)
5
6
7
8
9 (c)
3 7
4 (b)
D
FW
1 (a)
I705H1230034-01
1. Rear shock absorber bolt 8. Cushion lever : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)
2. Rear shock absorber 9. Cushion lever nut : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)
3. Cushion lever bolt 10. Cushion lever rod bolt : 80 N⋅m (8.0 kgf-m, 58.0 lb-ft)
4. Cushion lever nut 11. Cushion lever rod nut : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)
5. Cushion lever bolt 12. Cushion lever rod : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)
6. Spacer 13. Cushion lever rod bolt
7. Bearing 14. Cushion lever rod nut

Rear Suspension: 2C-2
Rear Suspension Assembly Construction

B705H12306013
5 (a)
1 (a)
“a”
“a”
“a”
“a”
“a”
“a”
FWD 4 (a)
2 (a)
3 (b)
4
3
1 “A”
5
2
I705H1230041-04
1. Rear shock absorber mounting bolt 5. Cushion rod mounting nut : 80 N⋅m (8.0 kgf-m, 58.0 lb-ft)
2. Cushion lever nut “A”: Assemble the rear shock absorber with dent side up. : Apply grease.
3. Cushion lever mounting nut “a”: 1 mm (0.04 in)
4. Cushion rod nut : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

Rear Swingarm Components

B705H12306027
D
FW
4
2 (a)
I705H1230035-01
1. Rear swingarm 3. Dust seal 5. Dust seal : Do not reuse.

2. Rear swingarm mounting bolt 4. Bearing : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

Rear Shock Absorber and Rear Shock Absorber Installation

Assembly Removal and Installation Install the rear shock absorber assembly in the reverse
B705H12306014 order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:
• Tighten the cushion lever nuts (1) and cushion rod nut
Removal
(2) to the specified torque.
1) Place the motorcycle on the center stand and
support the motorcycle with a jack to be no load for Tightening torque
the rear shock absorber. Cushion lever nut (a): 50 N·m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-
2) Remove the right and left footboards. Refer to ft)
“Footboard Removal and Installation in Section 9D Cushion rod nut (b): 50 N·m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)
(Page9D-21)”.
3) Disconnect the clamps.
2 (b)
4) Remove the rear shock absorber bolt (1), cushion
lever mounting nut (2) and rear cushion rod nut (3).
1 (a)
I705H1230002-02
• Install the rear shock absorber assembly and tighten

1 the rear shock absorber bolt (3), rear cushion rod nut
2 3 (4) and cushion lever mounting nut (5) to the specified
torque.
I705H1230001-03
5) Remove the rear shock absorber assembly. Tightening torque

Rear shock absorber bolt (c): 50 N·m (5.0 kgf-m,
6) Remove the cushion lever nuts (4) and cushion rod 36.0 lb-ft)
nut (5) to remove the rear suspension linkage. Rear cushion rod nut (d): 50 N·m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0
lb-ft)
Cushion lever mounting nut (e): 80 N·m (8.0 kgf-
5 m, 58.0 lb-ft)
NOTE
Pass the cushion lever mounting bolt after all
other bolts have been inserted.
4
I705H1230003-03
3 (c)
5 (e) 4 (d)
I705H1230004-02

Rear Suspension Inspection Rear Shock Absorber Gas Pressure Release

B705H12306015 B705H12306017
Refer to “Rear Suspension Inspection in Section 0B Refer to “Rear Shock Absorber and Rear Shock
(Page0B-16)”. Absorber Assembly Removal and Installation (Page2C-
4)”.
Rear Shock Absorber Inspection
B705H12306016 ! WARNING
Inspect the rear shock absorber in the following
procedures: The rear shock absorber unit contains high-
pressure nitrogen gas. Mishandling can
1) Remove the rear shock absorber. Refer to “Rear
cause explosion.
Shock Absorber and Rear Shock Absorber
Assembly Removal and Installation (Page2C-4)”. • Keep away from fire and heat. High gas
pressure caused by heat can cause an
2) Inspect the rear shock absorber for oil leakage.
explosion.
3) Inspect the bushing for play and damage.
• Release gas pressure before disposing.
4) Inspect the rear shock absorber spring for crack or
other damage. If any defects are found, replace the Gas Pressure Release
shock absorber with a new one. Make sure to observe the following precautions.
! CAUTION ! WARNING
Do not attempt to disassemble the rear shock
absorber. It is unserviceable. • Never apply heat or disassemble the
damper unit since it can explode or oil can
splash hazardously.
• When discarding the rear shock absorber,
be sure to release gas pressure from the
rear shock absorber following the
procedures.
1) Mark the drill hole at position “a” shown in the

illustration, with a center punch.
Length “a”
15 mm
I705H1230005-01
“a”
I705H1230007-02
2) Wrap rear shock absorber (1) with a vinyl bag (2)

I705H1230006-01 and fix it on a vise as shown.
5) Install the rear shock absorber. Refer to “Rear Shock 3) Drill a 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in) hole at the marked
Absorber and Rear Shock Absorber Assembly drill center using a drilling machine and let out gas
Removal and Installation (Page2C-4)”. while taking care not to get the vinyl bag entangled
with the drill bit.

! WARNING Rear Swingarm Removal and Installation

B705H12306024
Removal
• Be sure to wear protective glasses since
drilling chips and oil may fly off with 1) Raise the rear wheel resting center-stand and using
blowing gas when the drill bit has jack.
penetrated through the body. ! CAUTION
• Make sure to drill at the specified position.
Otherwise, pressurized oil many spout out Fix the frame to be stabilized.
forcefully.
2) Remove the muffler. Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler
3) Loosen the rear axle nut (1) while depressing the
rear brake pedal.
4) Remove the rear brake hose clamps (2) and rear
brake caliper (3).
2
1 2
I649G1230009-02
3 1
I705H1230023-04
Rear Suspension Adjustment
B705H12306005 5) Remove the rear swingarm (4) by removing the rear
After installing the rear suspension, adjust the spring swingarm mounting bolts (5) and rear axle nut.
pre-load as follows.
Spring Pre-load Adjustment

1) Keep the motorcycle upright with the center stand.
2) Remove the adjuster cover. 5
3) Turn the spring tension ring to the desired position.
1
2
4
I705H1230024-03
! CAUTION
Do not operating the rear brake lever and
brake-lock lever with the rear brake caliper
removed.
I705H1230036-01
6) Remove the collar from the swingarm.
1. Cover 2. Adjuster
! CAUTION
Position “1” provides the softest spring
tension and position “7” provides the stiffest.
STD position
Position “3”

Installation • Tighten the exhaust pipe joint bolt and muffler

Install the rear swingarm in the reverse order of removal. mounting bolt. to the specified torque.
Pay attention to the following points:
! CAUTION
• Install the collar to swingarm.
Replace the exhaust pipe connector with a
! CAUTION new one.
When installing the swingarm to the frame,
pay attention to the difference of the collar. Tightening torque
Exhaust pipe connecting bolt: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m,
16.5 lb-ft)
Muffler mounting bolt: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-
“A” ft)
! WARNING
After remounting the rear wheel, pump the
rear brake lever several times to check for
proper brake operation.
“B”
Rear Swingarm Related Parts Inspection
B705H12306025
I705H1230033-02 Refer to “Rear Swingarm Removal and Installation
“A”: Rear axle nut side “B”: Wheel side (Page2C-6)”.
• After install the rear swingarm temporarily, tighten the
rear brake caliper bolts (1) to the specified torque. Rear Swingarm
Inspect the rear swingarm for crack or other damage. If
Tightening torque
any defects are found, replace the swingarm with a new
Rear brake caliper bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m,
one.
16.5 lb-ft)
• Tighten the rear swingarm bolts (2), rear axle nut (3)
to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Rear swingarm bolt (b): 50 N·m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0
lb-ft)
Rear axle nut (c): 120 N·m (12.0 kgf-m, 87.0 lb-ft)
I705H1230026-01
1 (a) 2 (b)
Dust Seal
Inspect dust seal lip for wear or damage. If any defects
are found, replace the dust seal with a new one.
3 (c)
I705H1230025-01
I705H1230027-01

Bearing Rear Swingarm Dust Seal / Bearing Removal

Inspect the play of the bearings by finger while they are and Installation
in the rear swingarm. Rotate the inner race by finger to B705H12306026
inspect for abnormal noise and smooth rotation. Replace Refer to “Rear Suspension Assembly Construction
the bearing in the following procedures if there is (Page2C-2)”.
anything unusual. Refer to “Rear Swingarm Dust Seal /
Bearing Removal and Installation (Page2C-8)”. Removal
1) Remove the rear swingarm. Refer to “Rear
Swingarm Removal and Installation (Page2C-6)”.
2) Remove the dust seals (1) and (2) using the special
tool.
Special tool
(A): 09913–50121 (Oil seal remover)
I649G1240015-01
Collar (A) (A)
Inspect the collar for wear or damage. If any defects are

found, replace it with a new one.
1 2
I705H1230029-02
3) Remove the bearing using the special tool.

Special tool
(B): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)
I705H1230028-01
(B)
I705H1230030-02

Installation • Install the oil seal using the special tool.

Install the dust seal and bearing in the reverse order of
Special tool
! CAUTION • Apply grease to the oil seal lip.
The removed dust seal and bearings must be : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER
replaced with the new ones. GREASE A or equivalent)
• Apply grease to the bearing.

I705H1230037-01
Cushion Lever and Cushion Rod Inspection

I649G1240019-01 B705H12306018
Refer to “Rear Shock Absorber and Rear Shock
• Install the bearing to the rear swingarm using an
Absorber Assembly Removal and Installation (Page2C-
appropriate tool.
4)”.
! CAUTION Inspect the following parts.
When installing the bearing, stamped mark Cushion Lever

on the bearing must face outside. Inspect the cushion lever for crack or other damage. If
any defects are found, replace the cushion lever with a
new one.
I705H1230031-01
I705H1230008-01

Spacer Cushion Rod

1) Remove the spacers from the cushion lever. Inspect the cushion rod for damage and bend. If any
defects are found, replace the cushion rod with a new
2) Inspect the spacers for any flaws or other damage. If
one.
any defects are found, replace the spacers with the
new ones.
I705H1230011-01
I705H1230009-01
Cushion Lever Bearing Removal and
Cushion Lever Bearing Installation
B705H12306019
1) Insert the spacers into bearings.
2) Check the play by moving the spacers up and down. Removal
If excessive play is noted, replace the bearing with a 1) Remove the cushion lever. Refer to “Rear Shock
new one. Refer to “Cushion Lever Bearing Removal Absorber and Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
and Installation (Page2C-10)”. Removal and Installation (Page2C-4)”.
2) Remove the cushion lever bearings using the special
tools.
Special tool
(A): 09923–73210 (Bearing remover)
(B): 09930–30104 (Sliding shaft)
(A)
I705H1230010-01
(B)
I705H1230012-01

Installation • Apply grease to the bearings.

Install the cushion lever bearing in the reverse order of
! CAUTION
The removed bearings must be replaced with
the new ones.
• Press the bearings into the cushion lever using the

special tool.
NOTE
When installing the bearing, stamped mark
on the bearing must face outside.
(A): 09941–34513 (Steering race installer) • Install the cushion lever. Refer to “Rear Shock
Absorber and Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
(A)
I705H1230013-01
Crankcase Bracket Construction

B705H12306020
4 3 2 2 2 3 4
1
5 (a)
6 (b)
3 2 2 3
I705H1230042-01
1. Crankcase bracket 4. Bushing : 85 N⋅m (8.5 kgf-m, 61.5 lb-ft)

2. Spacer 5. Crankcase bracket nut : 93 N⋅m (9.3 kgf-m, 67.0 lb-ft)
3. Bearing 6. Engine mounting nut : Apply grease.

Crankcase Bracket Removal and Installation 5) Remove the rubber damper bolts (2) (L & R) after
B705H12306021 tightening the crankcase bracket nut (1).
Removal 6) Install the rubber dampers (3) (L & R) and tighten the
rubber damper bolts (2) (L & R) to the specified
1) Remove the engine.
torque.
Refer to “Engine Assembly Removal and Installation
in Section 1D (Page1D-6)”. Tightening torque
2) Remove the crankcase bracket nut (1) and rubber Rubber damper bolt (b): 85 N·m (8.5 kgf-m, 61.5
damper bolts (2) (L & R). lb-ft)
3) Remove the rubber dampers (3) (L & R).
3
4) Pull out the crankcase bracket bolt (4) and remove
the crankcase bracket.
1 2 2 (b)
I705H1230040-03
I705H1230015-04 7) Install the engine.

Refer to “Engine Assembly Removal and Installation
1) Install the crankcase bracket with the bolt and
tighten the crankcase bracket nut (1) temporarily. Crankcase Bracket Related Parts Inspection
B705H12306022
2) Install the rubber damper bolts (2) temporarily Refer to “Crankcase Bracket Removal and Installation
without installing the rubber dampers. (Page2C-12)”.
3) Move the crankcase bracket backwards “A” to
provide the clearance “a” as shown in the figure. Spacer
Clearance “a” 1) Remove the spacers from the crankcase bracket.
14 mm (0.55 in) 2) Inspect the spacers for any flaws or other damage. If
any defects are is found, replace the spacers with
4) With the crankcase bracket held immovable, tighten
the new ones.
the crankcase bracket nut (1) to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Crankcase bracket nut (a): 85 N·m (8.5 kgf-m,
61.5 lb-ft)
1 (a)
“a”
2
“A” I705H1230018-01
“a”
I705H1230039-04

Bearing 2) Remove the bearing (1) using the special tools.

1) Insert the spacers into the bearings. Special tool
2) Check the play by moving the spacers up and down. (A): 09923–74511 (Bearing puller)
If excessive play is noted, replace the bearing with a (B): 09930–30104 (Sliding shaft)
new one. Refer to “Crankcase Bracket Bearing
1
(A)
(B)
I705H1230021-01
I705H1230019-01 Installation
Rubber Parts ! CAUTION

Inspect the rubber damper and bushing for crack or The removed bearings must be replaced with
other damage. If any defects are is found, replace them the new ones.
with the new ones.
1) Install the bearing using the special tool.
Special tool
NOTE
I705H1230020-01
(A)
Crankcase Bracket Bearing Removal and

Installation
B705H12306023
Removal
1) Remove the crankcase bracket. Refer to “Crankcase
Bracket Removal and Installation (Page2C-12)”.
I705H1230022-03
2) Install the crankcase bracket. Refer to “Crankcase

Bracket Removal and Installation (Page2C-12)”.

Specifications
Service Data
B705H12307002
Suspension
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Item
Rear wheel travel 100 (3.94) —
Rear shock absorber spring adjuster 3rd position —

B705H12307003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Cushion lever nut 50 5.0 36.0 )(Page2C-4)
Cushion rod nut 50 5.0 36.0 )(Page2C-4)
Rear shock absorber bolt 50 5.0 36.0 )(Page2C-4)
Rear cushion rod nut 50 5.0 36.0 )(Page2C-4)
Cushion lever mounting nut 80 8.0 58.0 )(Page2C-4)
Rear brake caliper bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page2C-7)
Rear swingarm bolt 50 5.0 36.0 )(Page2C-7)
Rear axle nut 120 12.0 87.0 )(Page2C-7)
Exhaust pipe connecting bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page2C-7)
Muffler mounting bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page2C-7)
Crankcase bracket nut 85 8.5 61.5 )(Page2C-12)
Rubber damper bolt 85 8.5 61.5 )(Page2C-12)
NOTE
“Rear Suspension Components (Page2C-1)”
“Rear Suspension Assembly Construction (Page2C-2)”
“Rear Swingarm Components (Page2C-3)”
“Crankcase Bracket Construction (Page2C-11)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


B705H12308001
Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )(Page2C-9) / )(Page2C-
equivalent 9) / )(Page2C-11)
NOTE
“Rear Suspension Assembly Construction (Page2C-2)”
“Crankcase Bracket Construction (Page2C-11)”
Special Tool
B705H12308002
09913–50121 09913–70210
9)
09923–73210 09923–74511
Bearing remover Bearing puller
)(Page2C-10) )(Page2C-13)
09924–84521 09930–30104
Bearing installer set Rotor remover slide shaft
13)
09941–34513
Steering race installer
)(Page2C-11)

Wheels and Tires: 2D-1
Wheels and Tires

Precautions
Precautions for Wheel and Tire
B705H12400001
! WARNING
• Proper tire pressure and proper tire loading are important factors. Over loading tire can lead to tire
failure and loss of motorcycle control.
• Under-inflated tires make smooth cornering difficult, and can result in rapid tire wear.
• Over-inflated tires have a smaller amount of tire in contact with the road, which can contribute to
skidding and loss of control.
• Replace the wheel when wheel runout exceed the service limit or if find damage such as distortion,
crack, nick or scratch.
• When tire replacement is necessary, the original equipment type tire should be used.
• Do not mix different types of tires on the same vehicle such as radial and bias-belted tires except in
emergencies, because handling may be seriously affected and may result in loss of control.
• Replacement wheel must be equivalent to the original equivalent wheel.

2D-2 Wheels and Tires:
Repair Instructions
Front Wheel Components
B705H12406003
5 (a)
7 9
11
8 (b) 8 (b)
D
FW
4
1 10 6
7
I705H1240028-05
1. Front wheel 7. Brake disc : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

2. Spacer 8. Brake disc bolt : Apply grease.
3. Bearing 9. Tire : Apply thread lock to thread part.
4. Dust seal 10. Air valve : Do not reuse.
5. Front axle 11. Wheel balancer
6. Collar : 65 N⋅m (6.5 kgf-m, 47.0 lb-ft)

Front Wheel Assembly Construction

B705H12406019
Left Right
3 (c)
3 (c)
2 (b) 2 (b)
1 (a)
“a”
I705H1240030-02
1. Front axle “a”: Clearance : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

2. Front brake caliper mounting bolt : 65 N⋅m (6.5 kgf-m, 47.0 lb-ft) : Apply grease.
3. Front brake disc bolt : 35 N⋅m (3.5 kgf-m, 25.5 lb-ft) : Apply thread lock to thread part.

Front Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation 6) Draw out the front axle and remove the front wheel.
B705H12406020
NOTE
Removal
After removing the front wheel, install the
1) Support the motorcycle with a jack or a wooden calipers temporarily to the original positions.
block.
2) Remove the brake calipers. Refer to “Front Brake 7) Remove the collar (3).
Caliper Removal and Installation in Section 4B
(Page4B-3)”.
! CAUTION 3
Do not operate the brake lever while

removing the caliper.
I705H1240003-01
Installation
1) Install the collar (1) into the left side of the wheel.
I705H1240001-03
3) Loosen the axle pinch bolt (1) on the right front fork
leg.
4) Loosen the front axle (2).
I705H1240014-01
2) Install the front wheel with the front axle.

1
! WARNING
2
The directional arrow on the tire should point
to the wheel rotation, when remounting the
wheel.
I705H1240002-02
5) Raise the front wheel off the ground and support the
motorcycle with a jack or a wooden block.
! CAUTION
Do not carry out the work with the
motorcycle resting on the side-stand. Do not
support the motorcycle with the fuel tank and
the radiator. Make sure that the motorcycle is
supported securely.
I705H1240004-01

3) Tighten the front axle (2) to the specified torque 6) Tighten the axle pinch bolt (4) on the right front fork
using the special tool. leg to the specified torque.
Special tool Tightening torque
(A): 09900–18710 (Hexagon socket (12 Front axle pinch bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
mm)) lb-ft)
Tightening torque
Front axle (a): 65 N·m (6.5 kgf-m, 47.0 lb-ft)
(A)
4 (c)
2 (a)
I705H1240007-04
I705H1240005-04
Front Wheel Related Parts Inspection
B705H12406021
4) Tighten the brake caliper mounting bolts (3) to the Refer to “Front Wheel Assembly Removal and
specified torque. Installation (Page2D-4)”
Tightening torque
Front brake caliper mounting bolt (b): 35 N·m (
Tire
3.5 kgf-m, 25.5 lb-ft)
Refer to “Tire Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-15)”.
! WARNING
Front Brake Disc
After remounting the brake calipers, pump Refer to “Front Brake Disc Inspection in Section 4B
the brake lever until the pistons push the pad (Page4B-6)”.
correctly.
Dust Seal
Inspect the dust seal lips for wear or damage. If any
defects are found, replace the dust seal with the new
ones. Refer to “Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing
Removal and Installation (Page2D-6)”.
3 (b)
3 (b)
I705H1240006-04
5) Move the front fork up and down 4 or 5 times.
I705H1240008-01
I705H1240027-01

Axle Shaft Wheel Bearing

Using a dial gauge, check the axle shaft for runout. If the Inspect the play of the wheel bearings by finger while
runout exceeds the limit, replace the axle shaft. they are in the wheel. Rotate the inner race by finger to
inspect for abnormal noise and smooth rotation. Replace
Special tool
the bearing in the following procedures if there is
(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10
anything unusual. Refer to “Front Wheel Dust Seal /
mm))
Bearing Removal and Installation (Page2D-6)”.
(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))
Axle shaft runout
(A) I649G1240015-01
(B)
Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and

Installation
B705H12406023
Removal
(C) 1) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front
I649G1240054-01
Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation (Page2D-
4)”.
Wheel
Make sure that the wheel runout checked as shown 2) Remove the dust seals (1) using the special tool (LH
does not exceed the service limit. An excessive runout is & RH).
usually due to worn or loosened wheel bearings and can Special tool
be reduced by replacing the bearings. If bearing (A): 09913–50121 (Oil seal remover)
replacement fails to reduce the runout, replace the
wheel.
Wheel runout
Service limit (Axial and Radial): 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
(A)
I705H1240009-01
I649G1240014-01

3) Remove the bearings (2) using the special tool. 2) First install the right wheel bearing, then install the
spacer (1) and left wheel bearing.
Special tool
(B): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set) Special tool
(A): 09941–34513 (Steering race installer)
! CAUTION
(B)
The sealed cover of the bearing must face
outside.
(A)
2
I705H1240010-01
4) Remove the spacer (3).
I649G1240020-02
3
Left Right
(A)
I705H1240011-01
Installation
! CAUTION
The removed dust seals and bearings must
be replaced with the new ones. Left Right
1) Apply grease to the wheel bearings.

GREASE A or equivalent) (A)
1 “a”
I705H1240031-01
1. Spacer “a”: Clearance
I649G1240019-01

3) Install the dust seals using the special tool. 4) Apply grease to the lip of dust seals.
Special tool : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER
(B): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) GREASE A or equivalent)
(B)
I705H1240012-01 I705H1240013-01
5) Install the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front

4)”.
Rear Wheel Components

B705H12406024
10
D
FW
4
5
6
9
7 (b)
3 (a)
I705H1240029-02
1. Rear wheel 6. Collar : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

2. Brake disc 7. Rear axle nut : 120 N⋅m (12.0 kgf-m, 87.0 lb-ft)
3. Brake disc bolt 8. Tire : Apply grease.
4. O-ring 9. Air valve : Apply thread lock to thread part.
5. Collar 10. Wheel balancer : Do not reuse.

Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation 5) Remove the rear brake hose clamps (4) and rear
B705H12406025 brake caliper (5).
Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and Installation
in Section 1K (Page1K-2)”.
Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation in 4
Removal
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation in Section 5
9D (Page9D-16)”.
2) Disconnect the HO2 sensor lead wire coupler (1).
I705H1240019-02
6) Remove the rear swingarm mounting bolts (6), rear

axle nut (7) and remove the rear swing arm (8).
7
1
6
I705H1240016-02
3) Remove the exhaust pipe connecting bolt (2).

8
I705H1240021-01
7) Remove the inner color (9) and the rear wheel (10).
2
I705H1240017-01
4) Remove the muffler (3). 9
10
I705H1240020-01
3 ! CAUTION
Do not operate the brake lever while
removing the rear wheel.
I705H1240018-01

Installation ! CAUTION
Refer to “Rear Wheel Related Parts Inspection
(Page2D-11)” and “Wheel/Tire/Air Valve Inspection and Replace the exhaust pipe connector (4) with a
Cleaning (Page2D-13)” new one.
Install the rear wheel in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the rear swingarm mounting bolts and rear
wheel nut temporarily.
• Tighten the rear swingarm mounting bolts (1) to the 4
specified torque.
Tightening torque
Rear swingarm mounting bolt (a): 50 N·m (5.0
kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)
• Tighten the rear wheel nut (2) to the specified torque.
Tightening torque I705H1240025-01
Rear wheel nut (b): 120 N·m (12.0 kgf-m, 87.0 lb- 4. Exhaust pipe connector
ft)
• Insert the exhaust pipe connecting bolt and the
muffler mounting bolt temporarily.
• Tighten the exhaust pipe connecting bolts (5) to the
specified torque.
1 (a) Tightening torque

Exhaust pipe connecting bolt (d): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-
m, 16.5 lb-ft)
• Tighten the muffler mounting bolts (6) to the specified
2 (b) torque.
I705H1240022-01
Tightening torque
Muffler mounting bolt (e): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
• Tighten the rear brake caliper mounting bolts (3) to the
lb-ft)
specified torque.
Tightening torque
Rear brake caliper mounting bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3
kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
6 (e)
6 (e)
3 (c)
5 (d)
I705H1240024-03
I705H1240023-03

Rear Wheel Related Parts Inspection Wheel

B705H12406026 Make sure that the wheel runout checked as shown
Refer to “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and does not exceed the service limit. An excessive runout is
Installation (Page2D-9)”. usually due to worn or loosened wheel bearings and can
Refer to “Rear Wheel Components (Page2D-8)”. be reduced by replacing the bearings. If bearing
Inspect the rear wheel related parts. replacement fails to reduce the runout, replace the
wheel.
Tire
Refer to “Tire Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-15)”. Wheel runout
Service limit (Axial and Radial): 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Rear Brake Disc
Wheel clean and check. Refer to “Wheel/Tire/Air Valve
Refer to “Rear Brake Disc Removal and Installation in
Inspection and Cleaning (Page2D-13)”.
Collar
Inspect the collars for wear or damage. If any defects are
I649G1240014-01
2
Tire Removal and Installation
B705H12406027
Removal
The most critical factor of a tubeless tire is the seal
I705H1240026-01
between the wheel rim and the tire bead. For this
1. Collar for lock-nut (Outer side) reason, it is recommended to use a tire changer that can
2. Collar for wheel (Inner side) satisfy this sealing requirement and can make the
operation efficient as well as functional.
Rear Swingarm
1) Removal the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel
Refer to “Rear Suspension Components in Section 2C
Assembly Removal and Installation (Page2D-4)” and
(Page2C-1)”.
“Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation
(Page2D-9)”.
2) Remove the valve core.
3) Remove the tire using the tire changer.
! CAUTION
For operating procedures, refer to the
instructions supplied by the tire changer
manufacturer.

NOTE 2) Install the tire onto the wheel.

When removing the tire in case of repair or ! CAUTION
inspection, mark the tire with a chalk to
indicate the tire position relative to the valve For installation procedures of tire onto the
position. Even though the tire is refitted to wheel, follow the instructions given by the
the original position after repairing puncture, tire changer manufacturer.
the tire may have to be balanced again since
such a repair can cause imbalance. NOTE
• When installing the tire, the arrow “A” on
the side wall should point to the direction
of wheel rotation.
• Align the chalk mark put on the tire at the
time of removal with the valve position.
I649G1240037-01
Installation
! CAUTION “A”
I649G1240039-01
Do not reuse the air valve which has been
once removed. 3) Bounce the tire several times while rotating. This
makes the tire bead expand outward to contact the
wheel, thereby facilitating air inflation.
NOTE
4) Install the valve core and inflate the tire.
It is recommended to replace the air valve
with a new one together with a tire ! WARNING
replacement.
• Do not inflate the tire to more than 400 kPa
1) Apply tire lubricant to the tire bead. (4.0 kgf/cm2). If inflated beyond this limit,
the tire can burst and possibly cause
! CAUTION
injury. Do not stand directly over the tire
Never use oil, grease or gasoline on the tire while inflating.
bead in place of tire lubricant. • In the case of preset pressure air inflator,
pay special care for the set pressure
adjustment.
5) In this condition, check the “grim line” “B” cast on the

tire side walls. The line must be equidistant from the
wheel rim all around.
6) If the distance between the rim line and wheel rim
varies, this indicates that the bead is not properly
seated. If this is the case, deflate the tire completely
and unseat the bead for both sides. Coat the bead
with lubricant and fit the tire again.
I649G1240038-01
“B”
I649G1240040-01

7) When the bead has been fitted properly, adjust the Tire
pressure to specification. Tire must be checked for the following points:
8) As necessary, adjust the tire balance. Refer to • Nick and rupture on side wall
“Wheel Balance Check and Adjustment (Page2D- • Tire tread depth (Refer to “Tire Inspection in Section
14)”. 0B (Page0B-15)”.)
Cold inflation tire pressure • Tread separation
Front Rear • Abnormal, uneven wear on tread
175 kPa 200 kPa • Surface damage on bead
Solo riding
(1.75 kgf/cm2) (2.00 kgf/cm2)
• Localized tread wear due to skidding (Flat spot)
175 kPa 250 kPa
Dual riding • Abnormal condition of inner liner
(1.75 kgf/cm2) (2.50 kgf/cm2)
9) Install the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation (Page2D-4)” and
“Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation
(Page2D-9)”.
Wheel/Tire/Air Valve Inspection and Cleaning

B705H12406028
Refer to “Tire Removal and Installation (Page2D-11)”.
I649G1240042-01
Wheel
Wipe the wheel clean and check for the following points:
• Distortion and crack
• Any flaws and scratches at the bead seating area.
• Wheel rim runout. Refer to “Front Wheel Assembly
Removal and Installation (Page2D-4)” and “Rear
9)”.
I649G1240043-01
Air Valve
Inspect the air valve for peeling and damage. If any
defect is found, replace the air valve with a new one.
Refer to “Air Valve Removal and Installation (Page2D-
14)”.
I649G1240041-01
I649G1240044-01

Inspect the valve core seal (1) for wear and damage. If NOTE
any defect is found, replace the valve core with a new To properly install the valve into the valve
one. Refer to “Air Valve Removal and Installation hole, apply a special tire lubricant or neutral
(Page2D-14)”. soapy liquid to the valve.
1
2
I649G1240045-01
1. Seal 3
4
Air Valve Removal and Installation

B705H12406029
I705H1240033-01
Removal 2. Wheel 3. Valve 4. Valve lip
1) Remove the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation (Page2D-4)” and Wheel Balance Check and Adjustment
B705H12406030
“Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation Check and adjust the wheel balance in the following
(Page2D-9)”. procedures:
2) Remove the tire. Refer to “Tire Removal and 1) Removal the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel
Installation (Page2D-11)”. Assembly Removal and Installation (Page2D-4)” and
3) Remove the air valve (1) from the wheel. “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation
(Page2D-9)”.
2) Check the wheel balance using the balancer and
1 adjust the wheel balance if necessary.
! CAUTION
For operating procedures, refer to the
instructions supplied by the wheel balancer
manufacturer.
I649G1240046-01 3) When installing the balancer weights (1) to the wheel

(2), set the two balancer weights on both sides of
Installation wheel rim.
Install the air valve in the reverse order of removal. Pay
attention to the following points: ! CAUTION
• Any dust or rust around the valve hole (1) must be Weight difference between the two balancer
cleaned off. weights must be less than 10 g.
1
I705H1240032-01
2
• Install the air valve in the wheel. I649G1240049-01
4) Recheck the wheel balance.

! CAUTION
5) Install the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel
• Be careful not to damage the lip of valve. Assembly Removal and Installation (Page2D-4)” and
• Replace the air valve with a new one. “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation
(Page2D-9)”.

Specifications
Service Data
B705H12407002
Wheel
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
Axial — 2.0 (0.08)
Wheel rim runout
Radial — 2.0 (0.08)
Front — 0.25 (0.01)
Wheel axle runout
Rear — 0.25 (0.01)
Front 14 M/C x MT3.00 —
Wheel rim size
Rear 13 M/C x MT4.00 —
Tire
Item Standard Limit
Front 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm2, 25 psi) —
Solo riding
Cold inflation tire Rear 200 kPa (2.00 kgf/cm2, 29 psi) —
pressure Front 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm2, 25 psi) —
Dual riding
Rear 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) —
Front 120/80-14M/C 58S —
Tire size
Rear 150/70-13M/C 64S —
Front BRIDGESTONE HOOP B03G —
Tire type
Rear BRIDGESTONE HOOP B02G —
Tire tread depth (Recommended Front — 1.6 mm (0.06 in)
depth) Rear — 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

B705H12407003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Front axle 65 6.5 47.0 )(Page2D-5)
Front brake caliper mounting bolt 35 3.5 25.5 )(Page2D-5)
Front axle pinch bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page2D-5)
Rear swingarm mounting bolt 50 5.0 36.0 )(Page2D-10)
Rear wheel nut 120 12.0 87.0 )(Page2D-10)
Rear brake caliper mounting bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page2D-10)
Exhaust pipe connecting bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page2D-10)
Muffler mounting bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page2D-10)
NOTE
“Front Wheel Components (Page2D-2)”
“Front Wheel Assembly Construction (Page2D-3)”
“Rear Wheel Components (Page2D-8)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


B705H12408001
Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )(Page2D-7) / )(Page2D-
equivalent 8)
NOTE
“Front Wheel Components (Page2D-2)”
“Front Wheel Assembly Construction (Page2D-3)”
“Rear Wheel Components (Page2D-8)”
Special Tool
B705H12408002
09900–18710 09900–20607
Hexagon socket (12 mm) Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10
mm)
09900–20701 09900–21304
Magnetic stand V-block (100 mm)
09913–50121 09913–70210
09921–20240 09941–34513
Bearing remover set Steering race installer

Section 3
Driveline / Axle
CONTENTS
Precautions .................................................3-1 Final Gear Assembly Removal and

Precautions............................................................. 3-1 Installation .........................................................3A-3
Precautions for Driveline/Axle ............................... 3-1 Final Gear Disassembly and Assembly ..............3A-4
Final Drive Gear Bearing Inspection ...................3A-8
Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft... 3A-1 Specifications .......................................................3A-9
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............3A-1 Tightening Torque Specifications........................3A-9 3
Drive Chain and Sprocket Symptom Special Tools and Equipment .............................3A-9
Diagnosis .......................................................... 3A-1 Recommended Service Material .........................3A-9
Repair Instructions ..............................................3A-2 Special Tool ........................................................3A-9
Final Gear Components ...................................... 3A-2

3-1 Precautions:
Precautions
Precautions
Precautions for Driveline/Axle
B705H13000001

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-1
Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft

Drive Chain and Sprocket Symptom Diagnosis
B705H13104001

Noisy drive chain (Noise Worn or rubbing gears. Replace.
seems to come from final Worn splines. Replace.
gear case) Worn bearing. Replace.

3A-2 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft:
Repair Instructions
Final Gear Components
B705H13106001
1
2
4
5
16
15
17
18
18
19 (a)
7
21 (c) 8
9
8 16
10
11 18
(d)
14
12 20 (b)
13
I705H1310001-05
1. Bearing retainer 11. Bearing 21. Oil drain bolt.

2. Bearing 12. Drive shaft : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
3. Oil seal 13. Bearing : 16 N⋅m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft)
4. Rear axle shaft 14. Oil seal : 12 N⋅m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.5 lb-ft)
5. Bearing 15. O-ring : 22 N⋅m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)
6. Bearing 16. Dowel pin : Apply oil.
7. Snap ring 17. Final gear cover : Apply grease.

8. Washer 18. Gasket : Do not reuse.
9. Idle shaft 19. Oil filler bolt
10. Bearing 20. Oil level bolt

Final Gear Assembly Removal and Installation 9) Remove the idle shaft (9).
B705H13106002
Removal
1) Remove the drive V-belt. Refer to “Drive V-belt
Removal and Installation in Section 0B (Page0B-
11)”.
2) Remove the oil level bolt (1).
3) Remove the oil drain bolt (2) and drain oil.
4) Remove the final gear cover bolts.
I705H1310007-01
10) Remove the washer (10).
2
I705H1310003-04
10
5) Remove the rear wheel. Refer to “Rear Wheel
Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 2D
(Page2D-9)”.
6) Remove the final gear cover (3) along with the drive
shaft (4). I705H1310008-01
Installation
Install the final gear assembly in the reverse order of
! CAUTION
Apply engine oil to each gears and shaft part.
• Install the dowel pin to the case side.

4 • Install the final gear cover and drive shaft.
3 ! CAUTION
I705H1310004-02
7) Remove the dowel pins (5) and washer (6). • Replace the O-ring with a new one.
8) Remove the final driven gear (7) and rear axle shaft • Care should be used not to allow the O-
(8). ring to be come off when installing the
transmission cover.
7
6
I705H1310005-01
I705H1310009-01

• Tighten the final gear cover bolt (1) to the specified Final Gear Disassembly and Assembly
torque. B705H13106003
Refer to “Final Gear Assembly Removal and Installation
! CAUTION (Page3A-3)”.
Tighten the final gear cover bolts diagonally Disassembly
and evenly.
Final gear cover
Tightening torque
1) Remove the drive shaft (1) and O-ring (2) from the
Final gear cover bolt (a): 22 N·m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0
final gear cover (3).
lb-ft)
1
1 (a)
3
I705H1310011-02
I705H1310033-01
2) Remove the oil seal (4) using the special tool.
• Tighten the oil drain plug (2) to the specified torque
and after filling oil through the level hole, also tighten Special tool
the level bolt (3) to the specified torque. (A): 09913–50121 (Oil seal remover)
! CAUTION
Replace the gasket washer with a new one.
(A)
Tightening torque
Oil drain plug (b): 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.5 lb-ft)
Oil level bolt (c): 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft)
Final gear capacity (when replacing)
4
190 ml
I705H1310012-01
3) Remove the bearing (5) and (6) using the special

tool.
Special tool
(B): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)
(B)
3 (c)
2 (b)
I705H1310010-01
(B)
5
6
I705H1310013-01

4) Remove the bearing (7) using the special tool. 2) Remove the snap ring (4) and idle shaft (5).
Special tool
(C): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)
(C) 5
I705H1310019-02
Final driven gear / Rear axle shaft

I705H1310014-05
1) Remove the snap ring (1) and final driven gear (2).
5) Remove the magnet (8).
2
8
I705H1310016-01
I705H1310015-01
2) Remove the snap ring (3) from the rear axle shaft
Idle gear / Idle shaft (4).
1) Remove the washers (1), snap ring (2) and idle gear
(3).
1
4
2
3
I705H1310034-04
3
I705H1310018-01

Final gear case 4) Remove the bearings (4) and (5) using the special
1) Remove the bearing retainer (1). tool.
Special tool
: 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)
1
4
I705H1310035-02
2) Remove the bearing (2) using the special tool.

I705H1310022-01
Special tool
(A): 09913–75830 (Bearing installer)
Assembly
Assemble the final gear assembly in the reverse order of
(A) Final gear case

• Install the bearings (1) and (2) using the special tool.
! CAUTION
2 • Replace the bearings with the new ones.

• Install the bearing so that its stamped mark
faces outside.
I705H1310020-01
3) Remove the oil seal (3) using the special tool. Special tool
Special tool
(B): 09913–50121 (Oil seal remover)
(B)
3
1
2
I705H1310023-01
I705H1310021-01

• Install the oil seal (3) and bearings (4) using the Final gear cover
special tool. • Install the bearings (1), (2) and (3) using the special
tool.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Replace the bearings with the new ones. • Replace the bearing with a new one.
• Install the bearing so that its stamped mark • Install the bearing so that its stamped mark
faces outside. faces outside.

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) (A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)
• Apply the grease to the oil seal lip.
(A)
(A) (A) 1
3 4
2
3
I705H1310027-01
• Install the oil seal (4) using the special tool.
! CAUTION
I705H1310024-01
Replace the oil seal with a new one.
• Install the bearing retainer (5).
Special tool
5
• Apply the supper grease to the oil seal lip.
(A)
I705H1310025-02
I705H1310028-02

• Tighten the oil level bolt (5), oil filler bolt (6) and final Final gear case side
gear cover bolts (7) to the specified torque. Inspect the play of the bearings by hand while they are in
the case. Rotate the inner race by hand to inspect for
! CAUTION abnormal noise and smooth rotation. Replace the
bearing if there is anything unusual. Refer to “Final Gear
• Replace the gasket washer with a new one.
Assembly Removal and Installation (Page3A-3)”.
• Apply engine oil to each gear and bearing.
• Tighten the final gear cover bolts
diagonally.
Tightening torque
Oil level bolt (a): 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft)
Oil filler bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
Final gear cover bolt (c): 22 N·m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0
lb-ft)
I705H1310030-01
“A”
6 (b)
5 (a)
“A”
7 (c)
I705H1310029-02
Final Drive Gear Bearing Inspection

B705H13106004
I705H1310036-01
Refer to “Final Gear Disassembly and Assembly
“A”: Play
(Page3A-4)”.
Inspect the following items.
Final gear cover side
Inspect the play of the bearings by hand while they are in
the cover. Rotate the inner race by hand to inspect for
abnormal noise and smooth rotation. Replace the
bearing if there is anything unusual. Refer to “Final Gear
Assembly Removal and Installation (Page3A-3)”.
I705H1310032-01

Specifications
B705H13107001
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Final gear cover bolt )(Page3A-4) /
22 2.2 16.0
)(Page3A-8)
Oil drain plug 12 1.2 8.5 )(Page3A-4)
Oil level bolt )(Page3A-4) /
16 1.6 11.5
)(Page3A-8)
Oil filler bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page3A-8)
NOTE
“Final Gear Components (Page3A-2)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

B705H13108001
Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )(Page3A-7) / )(Page3A-
equivalent 7)
NOTE
“Final Gear Components (Page3A-2)”
Special Tool
B705H13108002
09913–50121 09913–70210
6) 6) / )(Page3A-7) /
7)
09913–75830 09921–20240
Bearing installer Bearing remover set
6)


Section 4
Brake
CONTENTS
Precautions .................................................4-1 Front Brake Caliper Disassembly and

Precautions............................................................. 4-1 Assembly...........................................................4B-4
Precautions for Brake System .............................. 4-1 Front Brake Caliper Parts Inspection ..................4B-5
Brake Fluid Information ......................................... 4-1 Front Brake Disc Removal and Installation .........4B-6
Front Brake Disc Inspection ................................4B-6
Brake Control System and Diagnosis ... 4A-1 Specifications .......................................................4B-7
Schematic and Routing Diagram........................4A-1 Service Data........................................................4B-7
Front Brake Hose Routing Diagram .................... 4A-1 Tightening Torque Specifications........................4B-7
Rear Brake Hose Routing Diagram..................... 4A-2 Special Tools and Equipment .............................4B-8
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............4A-3 Recommended Service Material .........................4B-8 4
Brake Symptom Diagnosis.................................. 4A-3 Special Tool ........................................................4B-8
Repair Instructions ..............................................4A-3
Brake Light Switch Inspection ............................. 4A-3
Rear Brakes.............................................. 4C-1
Brake Fluid Level Check ..................................... 4A-4 Repair Instructions ..............................................4C-1
Brake Hose Inspection ........................................ 4A-4 Rear Brake Components.....................................4C-1
Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit .................. 4A-4 Rear Brake Pad Inspection .................................4C-2
Brake Fluid Replacement.................................... 4A-5 Rear Brake Pad Replacement ............................4C-2
Front Brake Hose Removal and Installation........ 4A-6 Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation .....4C-3
Rear Brake Hose Removal and Installation ........ 4A-6 Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly and
Front Brake Master Cylinder Components.......... 4A-7 Assembly...........................................................4C-4
Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Brake Caliper Piston Disassembly and
Removal and Installation................................... 4A-8 Assembly...........................................................4C-7
Front Master Cylinder / Brake Lever Rear Brake Caliper Parts Inspection...................4C-8
Disassembly and Assembly .............................. 4A-9 Rear Brake Disc Removal and Installation..........4C-9
Front Master Cylinder Parts Inspection............. 4A-10 Rear Brake Disc Inspection.................................4C-9
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components ........ 4A-11 Specifications .....................................................4C-10
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Tightening Torque Specifications......................4C-10
Removal and Installation................................. 4A-12 Special Tools and Equipment ...........................4C-10
Rear Master Cylinder / Brake Lever Recommended Service Material .......................4C-10
Disassembly and Assembly ............................ 4A-12 Special Tool ......................................................4C-10
Rear Master Cylinder Parts Inspection ............. 4A-12
Specifications.....................................................4A-13 Parking Brake .......................................... 4D-1
Service Data ..................................................... 4A-13 General Description .............................................4D-1
Tightening Torque Specifications...................... 4A-13 Parking Brake System (Brake-lock System)
Special Tools and Equipment ...........................4A-14 Description ........................................................4D-1
Recommended Service Material ....................... 4A-14 Schematic and Routing Diagram ........................4D-6
Special Tool ...................................................... 4A-14 Parking Brake Cable (Brake-lock Cable)
Routing Diagram ...............................................4D-6
Front Brakes ............................................ 4B-1 Repair Instructions ..............................................4D-7
Repair Instructions ..............................................4B-1 Parking Brake System (Brake-lock System)
Front Brake Components .................................... 4B-1 Inspection..........................................................4D-7
Front Brake Pad Inspection ................................ 4B-2 Parking Brake System (Brake-lock System)
Front Brake Pad Replacement............................ 4B-2 Removal and Installation...................................4D-7
Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation..... 4B-3

Parking Brake System (Brake-lock System) Specifications .......................................................4D-8

Disassembly and Assembly ..............................4D-7 Tightening Torque Specifications........................4D-8
Parking Brake Cable (Brake-lock Cable)
Removal and Installation...................................4D-7

Precautions: 4-1
Precautions
Precautions
Precautions for Brake System
B705H14000001
Brake Fluid Information

B705H14000002
! WARNING
• This brake system is filled with an ethylene glycol-based DOT 4 brake fluid. Do not use or mix
different types of fluid, such as silicone-based or petroleum-based.
• Do not use any brake fluid taken from old, used or unsealed containers. Never reuse brake fluid left
over from the last servicing or which has been stored for long periods of time.
• When storing brake fluid, seal the container completely and keep it away from children.
• When replenishing brake fluid, take care not to get dust into the fluid.
• When washing brake components, use new brake fluid. Never use cleaning solvent.
• A contaminated brake disc or brake pad reduces braking performance. Discard contaminated pads
and clean the disc with high quality brake cleaner or neutral detergent.
! CAUTION
Immediately and completely wipe off any brake fluid contacting any part of the motorcycle. The brake
fluid reacts chemically with paint, plastics and rubber materials, etc., and will damage them severely.

4A-1 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:
Brake Control System and Diagnosis

Front Brake Hose Routing Diagram
B705H14102003
2
1
1
2
“A”
“A” “B” “C”
“E”
“B” “B”
“D”
“a” “a”
“b”
5 5
I705H1410028-02
1. Rear brake hose “B”: After touching the clamp to the stopper, tighten the clamp bolt.
2. Front brake hose “C”: Insert the clamp to the hole of the front fender fully.
3. Brake hose guide “D”: After touching the brake hose union to the stopper, tighten the union bolt to the
specified torque.
4. Rear brake pipe “E”: Do not bend the brake hose to frame head pipe side.
5. Front brake caliper “a”: 28°
“A”: Fix the brake hose grommet to its hose clamp. “b”: 14°

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-2
Rear Brake Hose Routing Diagram

B705H14102004
2
1
3
4
2
1
1 “A”
1 “A”
5
“a”
“B”
“b”
“B”
“D”
“C”
I705H1410029-03
1. Rear brake pipe “B”: After positioning the clamp with the stopper on the swingarm, tighten the clamp bolt.
2. Rear brake hose “C”: After touching the brake hose union to the stopper, tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.
3. Front cowling plate “D”: Clamp the brake hose firmly.
4. E-ring “a”: 28°
5. Rear brake caliper “b”: 14°
“A”: Clamp the rear brake pipe at white mark
position.


Brake Symptom Diagnosis
B705H14104001

Insufficient brake power Leakage of brake fluid from hydraulic Repair or replace.
system.
Worn pads. Replace.
Oil adhesion on friction surface of pads. Clean disc and pads.
Worn disc. Replace.
Air in hydraulic system. Bleed air.
Not enough brake fluid in the reservoir. Replenish.
Brake squeaking Carbon adhesion on pad surface. Repair surface with sandpaper.
Tilted pad. Correct pad fitting or replace.
Damaged wheel bearing. Replace.
Loose front-wheel axle or rear-wheel Tighten to specified torque.
axle.
Worn pads or disc. Replace.
Foreign material in brake fluid. Replace brake fluid.
Clogged return port of master cylinder. Disassemble and clean master cylinder.
Excessive brake lever Air in hydraulic system. Bleed air.
stroke Insufficient brake fluid. Replenish fluid to specified level; bleed air.
Improper quality of brake fluid. Replace with correct fluid.
Leakage of brake fluid Insufficient tightening of connection Tighten to specified torque.
joints.
Cracked hose. Replace.
Worn piston and/or cup. Replace piston and/or cup.
Brake drags Rusty part. Clean and lubricate.
Insufficient brake lever or brake pedal Lubricate.
pivot lubrication.
Malfunction of brake-lock. Adjust or replace.
Repair Instructions
Brake Light Switch Inspection 3) Inspect the switch for continuity with a tester.
B705H14106008 If any defects are found, replace the front brake light
Front Brake Light Switch
switch with a new one. Refer to “Front Master
Inspect the front brake light switch in the following
Cylinder / Brake Lever Disassembly and Assembly
procedures:
(Page4A-9)”.
1) Remove the handlebar cover. Refer to “Handlebar
Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D Special tool
(Page9D-13)”. : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
2) Disconnect the front brake light switch lead wire Tester knob indication
couplers (1). Continuity ( )
Front brake light switch
Color
Terminal (B/Bl) Terminal (B/R)
Position
OFF
ON
I705H1410020-03
4) Connect the front brake light switch lead wire

1 couplers.
I705H1410001-01

Rear Brake Light Switch Front Brake

Inspect the rear brake light switch in the same manner 1) Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the top of the
as the front brake light switch. Refer to “Brake Light inspection window. Place the reservoir cap to
Switch Inspection (Page4A-3)”. prevent dirt from entering.
Rear brake light switch
2) Attach a hose to the air bleeder valve, and insert the
Color
free end of the hose into a receptacle.
Terminal (B/Y) Terminal (B/Y)
Position
ON
OFF
I705H1410021-01
Brake Fluid Level Check

B705H14106017
Refer to “Brake System Inspection in Section 0B
(Page0B-13)”.
Brake Hose Inspection

B705H14106018 I705H1410002-03
Refer to “Brake System Inspection in Section 0B 3) Squeeze and release the brake lever several times
(Page0B-13)”. in rapid succession and squeeze the lever fully
without releasing it.
Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit
B705H14106019
Air trapped in the brake fluid circuit acts like a cushion to
absorb a large proportion of the pressure developed by
the master cylinder and thus interferes with the full
braking performance of the brake caliper. The presence
of air is indicated by “sponginess” of the brake lever and
also by lack of braking force. Considering the danger to
which such trapped air exposes the machine and rider, it
is essential that after remounting the brake and restoring
the brake system to the normal condition, the brake fluid
circuit be purged of air in the following manner:
I705H1410022-01
! CAUTION 4) Loosen the air bleeder valve by turning it a quarter of
Handle brake fluid with care: the fluid reacts a turn so that the brake fluid runs into the receptacle,
chemically with paint, plastic, rubber this will remove the tension of the brake lever
materials, etc. causing it to touch the handlebar grip.
5) Close the air bleeder valve, pump and squeeze the
lever, and open the valve.
6) Repeat this process until the fluid flowing into the
receptacle no longer contains air bubbles.
NOTE
While bleeding the brake system, replenish
the brake fluid in the reservoir as necessary.
Make sure that there is always some fluid
visible in the reservoir.

7) Close the air bleeder valve and disconnect the hose. Brake Fluid Replacement
B705H14106020
8) Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the top of the
inspection window.
! CAUTION
Handle brake fluid with care: the fluid reacts
Tightening torque
chemically with paint, plastic, rubber
Air bleeder valve (Front brake): 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf-
materials, etc.
m, 4.5 lb-ft)
9) Install the reservoir cap. Front Brake
1) Place the motorcycle on a level surface and keep the
Rear Brake handlebars straight.
Bleed air from the rear brake in the same manner as the
2) Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap and
front brake.
diaphragm.
Tightening torque 3) Suck up the old brake fluid as much as possible.
Air bleeder valve (Rear brake): 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf-m,
4.5 lb-ft)
I705H1410003-01
4) Fill the reservoir with new brake fluid.

I705H1410023-01
BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)
5) Connect a clear hose to the air bleeder valve and
insert the other end of the hose into a receptacle.
I705H1410024-01
I705H1410002-03
6) Loosen the air bleeder valve and pump the brake

lever until the old brake fluid flows out of the brake
system.
I705H1410022-01

7) Close the air bleeder valve (1) and disconnect the Front Brake Hose Removal and Installation
clear hose. B705H14106021
Removal
Tightening torque 1) Remove the front leg shield. Refer to “Front Leg
Air bleeder valve (Front brake) (a): 6.0 N·m (0.6 Shield Removal and Installation in Section 9D
kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft) (Page9D-14)”.
2) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement
(Page4A-5)”.
3) Remove the front brake hoses. Refer to “Front Brake
Hose Routing Diagram (Page4A-1)”.
Installation
! CAUTION
1 (a) 1 (a)
The seal washers should be replaced with the
new ones to prevent fluid leakage.
I705H1410004-02
1) Install the front brake hose. Refer to “Front Brake
8) Fill the reservoir with new brake fluid to the upper
line of the reservoir.
2) Bleed air from the front brake system. Refer to “Air
Rear brake Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit (Page4A-4)”.
Brake fluid replacement in the same manner as the front 3) Reinstalled remove the parts.
brake.
Tightening torque Rear Brake Hose Removal and Installation
B705H14106022
Air bleeder valve (Rear brake) (a): 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf- Removal
m, 4.5 lb-ft) 1) Remove the right foot board. Refer to “Footboard
21)”.
(a)
(Page4A-5)”.
3) Remove the rear brake hose. Refer to “Rear Brake
Installation
! CAUTION
I705H1410025-01
1) Install the rear brake hose. Refer to “Rear Brake

2) Bleed air from the rear brake system. Refer to “Air
Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit (Page4A-4)”.
3) Reinstalled remove the parts.

Front Brake Master Cylinder Components

B705H14106023
(a)
D
FW
6 (b)
I705H1410026-06
1. Reservoir cap 4. Master cylinder : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) : Do not reuse.
2. Plate 5. Piston/Cup set : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
3. Diaphragm 6. Brake hose union bolt : Apply brake fluid.

Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal Installation

and Installation Install the front brake master cylinder in the reverse
B705H14106002 order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:
Removal
• When installing the master cylinder (1) onto the
1) Remove the handlebar cover. Refer to “Handlebar handlebars (2), align the master cylinder holder’s
Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D mating surface “A” with the punch mark “B” on the
(Page9D-13)”. handlebars (2) and tighten the upper holder bolt first
2) Remove the rear view mirror. temporarily to provide clearance on the lower side and
3) Drain the brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid then tighten both of the bolts to the specified torque.
Replacement (Page4A-5)”. Tightening torque
4) Disconnect the front brake light switch lead wire Master cylinder holder bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-
couplers (1). m, 7.0 lb-ft)
5) Place a rag underneath the union bolt (2) on the
master cylinder to catch any split brake fluid. 1
Remove the brake hose union bolt and disconnect
the brake hose.
6) Remove the master cylinder assembly.
(a)
“B”
2
2
“A”
I705H1410007-02
1
1 “A”
2
I705H1410005-01
“C” (a)
“B”
“a”
I705H1410018-02
“C”: “Up” mark “a”: Clearance
I705H1410006-01

• After setting the brake hose union to the stopper, 2) Remove the reservoir cap (4), plate (5) and
tighten the union bolt to the specified torque. diaphragm (6).
! CAUTION
The seal washers should be replaced with the 6
new ones to prevent fluid leakage. 5
Tightening torque 4
Brake hose union bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
lb-ft)
I705H1410010-02
(b) 3) Pull out the dust boot (7) and remove the snap ring
(8) using the special tool.
Special tool
: 09900–06108 (Snap ring pliers)
I705H1410008-01
• Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to “Air

Front Master Cylinder / Brake Lever

Disassembly and Assembly
B705H14106024
Refer to “Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly 7 8
Removal and Installation (Page4A-8)”.
I705H1410011-01
Disassembly 4) Remove the following parts from the master cylinder.

1) Remove the dust cover (1), brake lever (2) and • Piston/Cup set (9)
brake light switch (3). • Spring (10)
1
3
2
10 9
I705H1410009-01 I705H1410012-01

Assembly • Apply grease to the contact point between piston and

Assemble the master cylinder in the reverse order of brake lever.
: Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone
! CAUTION Grease or equivalent)
• Wash the master cylinder components with

new brake fluid before reassembly.
• Do not wipe the brake fluid off after
washing the components.
• When washing the components, use the
specified brake fluid. Never use different
types of fluid or cleaning solvents such as
gasoline, kerosine, etc.
• Apply brake fluid to the master cylinder
bore and all of the master cylinder
component to be inserted into the bore. I705H1410014-01
Tightening torque
BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4) Brake lever pivot bolt: 1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.72 lb-ft)
Brake lever pivot bolt lock-nut: 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf-m,
4.5 lb-ft)
Front Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

B705H14106025
Refer to “Front Master Cylinder / Brake Lever
Disassembly and Assembly (Page4A-9)”.
Master Cylinder
Inspect the master cylinder bore for any scratches,
corrosion or other damage. If any defects are found,
I649G1410024-01
replace it with the new ones.
• When installing the brake light switch, align the
projection on the switch with the hole in the master
cylinder.
I649G1410027-01
Inner Parts
Inspect the piston/cup set, spring, snap ring and dust
I705H1410013-01
boot surface for any scratches or other damage. If any
• Apply grease to the brake lever pivot bolt. defects are found, replace it with the new ones.
I705H1410015-01

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components

B705H14106026
(a)
6 (b)
D
FW
I705H1410027-04
1. Reservoir cap 4. Master cylinder : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) : Do not reuse.
2. Plate 5. Piston/Cup set : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
3. Diaphragm 6. Brake hose union bolt : Apply brake fluid.

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal • After setting the brake hose union to the stopper,
and Installation tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.
B705H14106027
Refer to “Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly ! CAUTION
Removal
Remove the rear brake master cylinder in the same
manner as the front brake master cylinder. Refer to Tightening torque
“Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and Brake hose union bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
Installation (Page4A-8)”. lb-ft)
Installation
Install the rear brake master cylinder in the same
manner as the front brake master cylinder. Refer to
“Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and
Installation (Page4A-8)”.
• When installing the master cylinder (1) onto the
handlebars (2), align the master cylinder holder’s
mating surface “A” with the punch mark “B” on the (b)
handlebars (2) and tighten the upper holder bolt first
temporarily to provide clearance on the lower side and
then tighten both to the bolts to the specified torque. I705H1410017-01
• Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to “Air

Tightening torque
Master cylinder holder bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-
m, 7.0 lb-ft)
Rear Master Cylinder / Brake Lever
1 2 B705H14106028
(a) Refer to “Rear Brake Master Cylinder Assembly
Refer to “Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components
(Page4A-11)”.
“B”
“A” Disassembly
Disassemble the rear brake master cylinder/brake lever
in the same manner as the front brake master cylinder/
brake lever. Refer to “Front Master Cylinder / Brake
I705H1410016-02 Lever Disassembly and Assembly (Page4A-9)”.
1 Assembly
“A”
Assemble the rear brake master cylinder/brake lever in
2
the same manner as the front brake master cylinder/
brake lever. Refer to “Front Master Cylinder / Brake
Lever Disassembly and Assembly (Page4A-9)”.
(a) “C”
Rear Master Cylinder Parts Inspection
B705H14106012
Inspect the rear master cylinder parts in the same
“B”
manner as the front brake master cylinder. (Refer to
“a” “Front Master Cylinder Parts Inspection (Page4A-10)”.)
I705H1410019-02
“C”: “UP” mark “a”: Clearance

Specifications
Service Data
B705H14107002
Brake + Wheel
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
Front &
Master cylinder bore 12.700 – 12.743 (0.500 – 0.502) —
Rear
Front &
Master cylinder piston diameter 12.657 – 12.684 (0.498 – 0.499) —
Rear
Brake fluid type DOT 4 —

B705H14107003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Air bleeder valve (Front brake) )(Page4A-5) /
6.0 0.6 4.5
)(Page4A-6)
Air bleeder valve (Rear brake) )(Page4A-5) /
6.0 0.6 4.5
)(Page4A-6)
Master cylinder holder bolt )(Page4A-8) /
10 1.0 7.0
)(Page4A-12)
Brake hose union bolt )(Page4A-9) /
23 2.3 16.5
)(Page4A-12)
Brake lever pivot bolt 1.0 0.1 0.72 )(Page4A-10)
Brake lever pivot bolt lock-nut 6.0 0.6 4.5 )(Page4A-10)
NOTE
“Front Brake Master Cylinder Components (Page4A-7)”
“Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components (Page4A-11)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


B705H14108001
Brake fluid DOT 4 — )(Page4A-5) / )(Page4A-
10)
Grease SUZUKI Silicone Grease or P/No.: 99000–25100 )(Page4A-10)
equivalent
NOTE
“Front Brake Master Cylinder Components (Page4A-7)”
“Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components (Page4A-11)”
Special Tool
B705H14108002
09900–06108 09900–25008
Snap ring pliers Multi-circuit tester set
)(Page4A-9) )(Page4A-3)

4B-1 Front Brakes:
Front Brakes
Repair Instructions
Front Brake Components
B705H14206011
1 (a)
2 (b)
7
6
10
4
3
8 (c)
9
(d)
12
11
(e)
D
FW
I705H1420026-02
1. Air bleeder valve 8. Pin bolt : 18 N⋅m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)
2. Pad mounting pin 9. Washer : 35 N⋅m (3.5 kgf-m, 25.5 lb-ft)
3. Brake pad spring 10. Bracket : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
4. Piston seal 11. Front brake pad set : Apply thread lock to thread part.
5. Dust seal 12. Front brake disc : Apply brake fluid.
6. Piston : 6 N⋅m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft) : Do not reuse.

7. Boot : 18 N⋅m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

Front Brakes: 4B-2
Front Brake Pad Inspection 4) Remove the front brake pad mounting pins.
B705H14206004
The extent of brake pad wear can be checked by 5) Remove the front brake pads.
observing the grooved limit line “A” on the pad. When the
wear exceeds the grooved limit line, replace the pads
with the new ones. Refer to “Front Brake Pad
Replacement (Page4B-2)”.
! CAUTION
affected.
I705H1420003-02
6) Disassemble the shims from the front brake pads.

“A”
I705H1420001-02
Front Brake Pad Replacement

B705H14206005
Replace the front brake pads in the following
procedures:
I705H1420004-01
! CAUTION 7) Clean up the caliper especially around the caliper
Do not operate the brake lever while piston and the shim.
removing the caliper. 8) Assemble the new front brake pads and shims.
1) Loosen the front brake pad mounting pins (1). ! CAUTION

2) Remove the front brake caliper mounting bolts (2). Replace the brake pads as a set, otherwise
3) Remove the front brake caliper. braking performance will be adversely
affected.
I705H1420002-01
I705H1420005-01

4B-3 Front Brakes:
9) Install the front brake pads. 3) Remove the brake caliper by removing the caliper
10) Install the front brake pad mounting pins temporarily. mounting bolts (3).
11) Install the front brake caliper.
12) Tighten the front brake caliper mounting bolts (1) to
the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Front brake caliper mounting bolt (a): 35 N·m (
3.5 kgf-m, 25.5 lb-ft) 3
1 2
13) Tighten the front brake pad mounting pin (2) to the
specified torque.
Tightening torque
Front brake pad mounting pin (b): 18 N·m (1.8 I705H1420007-01
kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft) 4) Remove the front brake pads. Refer to “Front Brake
Pad Replacement (Page4B-2)”.
5) Remove the front brake caliper bracket.
1 (a)
2 (b)
I705H1420006-02
NOTE
After replacing the brake pads, pump the I705H1420008-01
brake lever several times in order to operate

the brake correctly and then check the brake Installation
fluid level. Install the front brake caliper in the reverse order of
Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation ! CAUTION

B705H14206012
Removal new ones to prevent fluid leakage.
• Tighten each bolt to the specified torque.
in Section 4A (Page4A-5)”.
2) Remove the brake hose from the caliper by Tightening torque
removing the union bolt (1) and catch the brake fluid Front brake caliper mounting bolt (a): 35 N·m (3.5
in a suitable receptacle. kgf-m, 25.5 lb-ft)
Front brake pad mounting pin (b): 18 N·m (1.8
NOTE kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)
• Place a rag underneath the union bolt on
the brake caliper to catch any spilt brake
fluid.
• Slightly loosen the brake pad mounting
pins (2) to facilitate later disassembly, if
necessary.

Front Brakes: 4B-4
• After setting the brake hose union to the stopper, 3) Place a rag over the pistons to prevent it from
tighten the union bolt to the specified torque. popping out and then force out the pistons using
compressed air.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
new ones to prevent fluid leakage. Do not use high pressure air to prevent
piston damage.
Tightening torque
Front brake hose union bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-
m, 16.5 lb-ft)
(a)
(b)
(c)
I705H1420011-01
4) Remove the dust seals (1) and piston seals (2).

I705H1420009-03
• Bleed air from the brake system after installing the

caliper. Refer to “Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit
in Section 4A (Page4A-4)”.
• Check the brake fluid leakage and brake operation.
! WARNING
Brake fluid, if it leaks, will interfere with safe
2
running and discolor painted surfaces.
Check the brake hose and hose joints for 1
cracks and fluid leakage.
I705H1420012-03
5) Remove the rubber boots (3) and the front brake

Front Brake Caliper Disassembly and Assembly caliper air bleeder valve (4).
B705H14206013
Refer to “Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation
(Page4B-3)” 3
4
Disassembly
1) Remove the front brake pads. Refer to “Front Brake
Caliper Removal and Installation (Page4B-3)”.
2) Remove the front brake pad spring.
I705H1420013-02
I705H1420010-01

4B-5 Front Brakes:
6) Remove the pin bolt from the front brake caliper • Apply the brake fluid to piston seals (1) and dust seals
bracket. (2).
! CAUTION
Replace the piston seals (1) and dust seals
(2) with the new ones.

• Install the piston seals as shown in the figure.
I705H1420014-01
2
Assembly
Assemble the front brake caliper in the reverse order of
• Wash the caliper bores and pistons with specified 1
brake fluid. Particularly wash the dust seal grooves
and piston seal grooves.
I649G1420013-01
Tightening torque
! CAUTION Pin bolt (a): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)
• Wash the caliper components with fresh

brake fluid before reassembly. Never use
cleaning solvent or gasoline to wash them.
(a)
types of fluid or cleaning solvent such as
gasoline, kerosine or the others.
I705H1420015-01
Front Brake Caliper Parts Inspection

B705H14206014
Refer to “Front Brake Caliper Disassembly and
Assembly (Page4B-4)”
Brake Caliper Cylinder

Inspect the brake caliper cylinder wall for nicks,
scratches or other damage. If any damage is found,
replace the caliper with a new one.
I649G1420012-01
I705H1420016-01

Front Brakes: 4B-6
Brake Caliper Piston • Apply thread lock to the brake disc bolts and tighten
Inspect the brake caliper piston surface for any them to the specified torque.
replace the piston with a new one.
Lock Cement Super 1360 or equivalent)
Tightening torque
Brake disc bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
(a)
I705H1420017-01
Front Brake Disc Removal and Installation

B705H14206015 I705H1420024-01
Removal
Front Brake Disc Inspection
1) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front B705H14206002
Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section Brake Disc Thickness
2D (Page2D-4)”. Check the brake disc for damage or cracks and measure
the thickness using the micrometer.
2) Remove the front brake disc.
Replace the brake disc if the thickness is less than the
service limit or if defect is found.
Special tool
(A): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))
Service limit (Front): 4.0 mm (0.16 in)
(A)
I705H1420025-01
Installation
Install the front brake disc in the reverse order of
• Make sure that the brake discs are clean and free of I649G1420019-02
any grease.

4B-7 Front Brakes:
Brake Disc Runout Brake disc runout

1) Remove the front brake caliper. Refer to “Front Service limit: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Brake Caliper Removal and Installation (Page4B-3)”.
2) Measure the runout using the dial gauge.
Replace the disc if the runout exceeds the service
limit. (A)
Special tool
(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10
mm))
I649G1420020-02
3) Install the front brake caliper. Refer to “Front Brake

Caliper Removal and Installation (Page4B-3)”.
Specifications
Service Data
B705H14207017
Brake + Wheel
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
Front 4.5 ± 0.2 (0.18 ± 0.008) 4.0 (0.16)
Rear 5.0 ± 0.2 (0.20 ± 0.008) 4.5 (0.18)
Brake disc runout — 0.30 (0.01)
Front 25.400 – 25.450 (1.000 – 1.002) —
Brake caliper cylinder bore
Rear 27.00 – 27.05 (1.063 – 1.065) —
Front 25.318 – 25.368 (0.997 – 0.999) —
Brake caliper piston diameter
Rear 26.918 – 26.968 (1.060 – 1.062) —

B705H14207018
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Front brake caliper mounting bolt )(Page4B-3) /
35 3.5 25.5
)(Page4B-3)
Front brake pad mounting pin )(Page4B-3) /
18 1.8 13.0
)(Page4B-3)
Front brake hose union bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page4B-4)
Pin bolt 18 1.8 13.0 )(Page4B-5)
Brake disc bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page4B-6)
NOTE
“Front Brake Components (Page4B-1)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

Front Brakes: 4B-8

B705H14208001
Brake fluid DOT 4 — )(Page4B-5) / )(Page4B-
5)
Thread lock cement Thread Lock Cement Super 1360 or P/No.: 99000–32130 )(Page4B-6)
equivalent
NOTE
“Front Brake Components (Page4B-1)”
Special Tool
B705H14208002
09900–20205 09900–20607
Micrometer (0 – 25 mm) Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10
mm)
09900–20701
Magnetic stand
)(Page4B-7)

4C-1 Rear Brakes:
Rear Brakes
Repair Instructions
Rear Brake Components
B705H14306011
D
7 FW
5
12
(b) 4
3
11 6 (a)
1
13 (c)
11
10
14
15 9
16
19
8
20
17
18
23
(d)
22
21
I705H1430001-02
1. Lock-nut 12. Bracket 23. Brake pad

2. Arm 13. Pad mounting pin : 22 N⋅m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)
3. Adjuster 14. Piston (Upper side) : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
4. Brake-lock shaft 15. Dust seal : 18 N⋅m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)
5. O-ring 16. Piston seal : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
6. Brake-lock housing bolt 17. Piston (Lower side) : Apply silicone grease to sliding surface.

Rear Brakes: 4C-2
7. Brake-lock housing 18. Piston set : Apply thread lock to thread part.
8. Gasket 19. Dust seal : Apply brake fluid.
9. Pad spring 20. Piston seal : Do not reuse.

10. Air bleeder valve 21. Back plate
11. Boot 22. Shim
Rear Brake Pad Inspection 2) Remove the pad pins (2) and brake pads (3).
B705H14306004
The extent of brake pad wear can be checked by
observing the grooved limit line “A” on the pad. When the
wear exceeds the grooved limit line, replace the pads
with the new ones. Refer to “Rear Brake Pad 3
Replacement (Page4C-2)”.
! CAUTION
affected. 2
I705H1430005-01
3) Clean up the caliper especially around the pistons.

4) With the caliper piston (front side) pushed back into
the caliper, force the other caliper piston (rear side)
“A” also into the caliper by turning it clockwise.
! CAUTION
When pushing on the caliper piston (rear
side), keep holding the caliper piston (front
side) securely to prevent it from coming out.
I705H1430003-03
Rear Brake Pad Replacement

B705H14306005
Replace the rear brake pad in the following procedures:
! CAUTION
Do not operate the brake lever and brake-lock
lever while dismounting the caliper.
Refer to “Rear Brake Components (Page4C-1)”.

1) Remove the caliper mounting bolts (1). I705H1430006-01
I705H1430004-01

4C-3 Rear Brakes:
5) Assemble the new pads (4), shims (5) and back 8) Tighten the caliper mounting bolts (8) to the specified
plates (6). torque.
! CAUTION Tightening torque

Caliper mounting bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m,
Replace the brake pad as a set, otherwise 16.5 lb-ft)
affected.
8 (b)
4
5
I705H1430008-02
6
NOTE
I705H1430038-01 After replacing the brake pads, pump the
6) Locate the projection “A” of the brake pad to the brake lever several times in order to operate
center of caliper piston groove. the brake correctly and then check the brake
fluid level.
NOTE
Make sure that the projection of the pad is
seated onto the retainer on the caliper Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation
B705H14306006
bracket. Removal
1) Drain the brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid
Replacement in Section 4A (Page4A-5)”.
2) Remove the brake hose from the caliper by
removing the union bolt (1) and catch the brake fluid
in a suitable receptacle.
! CAUTION
Place a rag underneath the union bolt on the
brake caliper to catch any split brake fluid.
“A” NOTE
I705H1430034-03 Slightly loosen the brake pad mounting pins
7) Tighten the pad mounting pins (7) to the specified to facilitate later disassembly, if necessary.
torque.
3) Remove the brake-lock cable (2), caliper mounting
Tightening torque bolts (3) and brake caliper (4).
Pad mounting pin (a): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-
ft)
4 1
I705H1430009-02
7 (a)
I705H1430007-02

Rear Brakes: 4C-4
Installation Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly and Assembly

Install the brake caliper in the reverse order of removal. B705H14306007
Pay attention to the following points: Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation
(Page4C-3)”.
! CAUTION 1) Remove the caliper bracket (1) and pad spring (2).
• Tighten the caliper mounting bolts (1) to the specified 1

torque.
Tightening torque
Caliper mounting bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
lb-ft)
2
• After setting the brake hose union to the stopper,
tighten the union bolt (2) to the specified torque.
I705H1430035-01
Tightening torque
Brake hose union bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 2) Place a rag over the piston to prevent it from popping
lb-ft) out and then force out the piston (upper side) using
compressed air.
! CAUTION
! WARNING
new ones to prevent fluid leakage. • Use caution that brake fluid can splash
out.
• Do not put your hand under the piston as it
may pop out dangerously.
1 (a)
• When blowing compressed air in, hold the
caliper securely.
! CAUTION
Do not use high pressure air to prevent
piston damage.
2 (b)
I705H1430010-02
• Bleed air from the brake system after installing the

caliper. Refer to “Brake System Inspection in Section
0B (Page0B-13)”.
• Check the brake fluid leakage and brake operation.
! WARNING
Brake fluid, if it leaks, will interfere with safe
running and discolor painted surfaces.
Check the brake hose and hose joints for
I705H1430036-01
cracks and fluid leakage.

4C-5 Rear Brakes:
3) Remove the piston (back side) with turning 6) Remove the lock-nut (6), adjuster (7), arm (8) and
counterclockwise. brake-lock shaft (9).
9
8
7
6
I705H1430011-01 I705H1430014-01
4) Remove the dust seals (3) and piston seals (4) from
the cylinder. Assembly
Assemble the caliper in the reverse order of
! CAUTION disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:
• Assemble the gasket (1).
• Use care not to cause scratch on the
cylinder bore. ! CAUTION
• Do not reuse the piston seal and dust seal
that have been removed.
3
1
I705H1430015-01
I705H1430012-02
• Apply thread lock to the brake-lock housing bolts (2)
5) Remove the brake-lock housing bolt and brake-lock
and tighten them to the specified torque.
housing (5).
(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1360 or
equivalent)
Tightening torque
Brake-lock housing bolt (a): 22 N·m (2.2 kgf-m,
16.0 lb-ft)
I705H1430013-02
2 (a)
I705H1430017-04

Rear Brakes: 4C-6
• Apply silicone grease to the brake-lock shaft (3) and • Apply silicone grease to the tip and thread of brake-
O-ring (4). lock adjuster, assemble the lock-nut and spring
temporarily.
Grease or equivalent) : Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone
Grease or equivalent)
! CAUTION
4
I705H1430020-01
I705H1430016-01
• Install the brake-lock shaft (5) so as the punch mark

“A” may position between “B” of housing when
tightening (turning clockwise) the brake-lock shaft.
5
I705H1430021-02
• Wash the bore and piston of the caliper with specified

brake fluid. Particularly wash the dust seal groove and
“A” “B” piston seal groove.
“B” ! CAUTION
I705H1430018-01
• Wash the caliper components with fresh
• Align the punch mark “C” on the brake-lock shaft with
brake fluid before reassembly. Never use
the punch mark “D” on the brake-lock arm.
cleaning solvent or gasoline to wash them.
“C”
types of fluid or cleaning solvent such as
gasoline, kerosine or the others.
“D”
I705H1430019-01
I649G1420012-01

4C-7 Rear Brakes:
• Apply the brake fluid to piston seal (6) and dust seal Brake Caliper Piston Disassembly and
(7). Assembly
B705H14306012
! CAUTION Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly and
Assembly (Page4C-4)”.
Replace the piston seal (6) and dust seal (7)
with the new ones.
Disassembly
1) Remove the snap ring (1).
• Install the piston seals as shown in the figure. ! CAUTION
Use caution when removing the snap ring as
the parts inside may fly out of position.
2) Remove the spring (2) and adjust nut (3).

7
6
1
I705H1430039-01
• Set back the rear caliper piston (8) (back side) into the
caliper with turning clockwise.
I705H1430024-01
3
2
I705H1430022-01
• Apply silicone grease to inside of the boot and caliper

bracket pins and install them. I705H1430025-02

Grease or equivalent)
I705H1430023-01

Rear Brakes: 4C-8
Assembly Brake Caliper Piston

Assemble the brake caliper piston (bottom side) in the Inspect the brake caliper piston sliding face for any
reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the scratches or other damage. If any damage is found,
following point: replace the piston with a new one.
• When assembling, position the adjust nut so as to fit
to the seat inside the piston.
I705H1430028-01
I705H1430026-01
Brake Caliper Piston
Inspect the brake caliper piston sliding face and oil seal
! CAUTION groove of the seal for wear or damage. If any damage is
found, replace the piston with a new one.
When installing the snap ring, use the utmost
Inspect the adjust nut, spring or snap ring for any
care not to allow the internal parts to pop out.
replace the piston with a new one.
Rear Brake Caliper Parts Inspection
B705H14306008
Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation
(Page4C-3)”.
Brake Caliper Cylinder

Inspect the brake caliper cylinder sliding face and oil
seal groove for wear or other damage. If any damage is
found, replace the caliper with a new one.
I705H1430029-01
I705H1430027-01

4C-9 Rear Brakes:
Rear Brake Disc Removal and Installation Rear Brake Disc Inspection
B705H14306001 B705H14306002
Removal Brake Disc Thickness
1) Remove the rear wheel. Refer to “Rear Wheel Check the brake disc for damage or cracks and measure
Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 2D the thickness using the micrometer.
(Page2D-9)”. Replace the brake disc if the thickness is less than the
service limit or if defect is found.
2) Remove the rear brake disc.
Special tool
(A): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))
Service limit (Rear): 4.5 mm (0.18 in)
(A)
I705H1430037-01
Installation
Refer to “Rear Brake Disc Inspection (Page4C-9)”. I649G1430027-02
Install the rear brake disc in the reverse order of
removal. Pay attention to the following points: Brake Disc Runout
• Make sure that the brake discs are clean and free of 1) Remove the rear brake caliper. Refer to “Rear Brake
any grease. Caliper Removal and Installation (Page4C-3)”.
• Apply thread lock to the brake disc bolts and tighten 2) Measure the runout using the dial gauge. Replace
them to the specified torque. the disc if the runout exceeds the service limit.
: Thread lock cement 99000–32130 (Thread Special tool
Lock Cement Super 1360 or equivalent) (A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10
mm))
Tightening torque
Brake disc bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
Brake disc runout
(a)
(a)
(A)
I705H1430033-01
I649G1430028-02
3) Install the rear brake caliper. Refer to “Rear Brake

Caliper Removal and Installation (Page4C-3)”.

Rear Brakes: 4C-10
Specifications
B705H14307001
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Pad mounting pin 18 1.8 13.0 )(Page4C-3)
Caliper mounting bolt )(Page4C-3) /
23 2.3 16.5
)(Page4C-4)
Brake hose union bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page4C-4)
Brake-lock housing bolt 22 2.2 16.0 )(Page4C-5)
Brake disc bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page4C-9)
NOTE
“Rear Brake Components (Page4C-1)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

B705H14308001
Brake fluid DOT 4 — )(Page4C-6) / )(Page4C-
7)
Grease SUZUKI Silicone Grease or P/No.: 99000–25100 )(Page4C-6) / )(Page4C-
equivalent 6) / )(Page4C-7)
Thread lock cement THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER P/No.: 99000–32130 )(Page4C-5) / )(Page4C-
1360 or equivalent 9)
NOTE
“Rear Brake Components (Page4C-1)”
Special Tool
B705H14308002
09900–20205 09900–20607
Micrometer (0 – 25 mm) Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10
mm)
)(Page4C-9) )(Page4C-9)
09900–20701
Magnetic stand
)(Page4C-9)

4D-1 Parking Brake:
Parking Brake
General Description
Parking Brake System (Brake-lock System) Description
B705H14401001
Parking Brake (Brake-lock) Operation
The brake-lock arm turns through the brake-lock cable as soon as pulling the brake-lock lever. The turning movement
is converted to axial movement by the brake-lock adjuster connected to the body with the thread “A”.
The axial movement transmits automatically from sleeve piston to adjust-bolt. The adjust-bolt presses brake pad to
brake disk through the adjust-nut/caliper piston. In this bout, the adjust-bolt and adjust-nut move together with the
relation as shown in the figure.
When releasing the brake-lock lever, each part return to home position, the caliper piston will be returned by an
elasticity transform of piston seal, the adjust-bolt will be returned by the adjust-bolt spring, the brake-lock adjuster will
be returned by the return-spring.
2
I705H1440010-02
1. Brake-lock arm 2. Brake-lock adjuster
I705H1440009-02
3. Brake-lock lever

Parking Brake: 4D-2
7
8 “A”
11
10
4 6
“B”
I705H1440011-04
4. Brake pad 9. Sleeve piston

5. Caliper piston 10. Brake-lock adjuster
6. Adjust nut 11. Brake-lock arm
7. Adjust bolt “A”: Thread
8. Adjust bolt spring “B”: The adjust bolt presses the adjust nut.

4D-3 Parking Brake:
Automatic Parking Brake Adjuster System (Automatic Brake-lock Adjuster System)

The automatic brake-lock adjuster system is equipped on the brake-lock. If the brake pad worn, the adjust-bolt/nut
adjust the position of caliper piston so as to keep the certain clearance between brake pad and brake disk.
Operation (Normal Condition → Braking)

The hydraulic pressure by brake lever operation acts on the adjust-nut/caliper piston. The adjust-bolt threads and
adjust-nut threads have a clearance. The piston stroke when braking is shorter than clearance, thus, the braking
operation will finish without automatic brake-lock adjuster system operation.
2
3
“A”
“B”
I705H1440012-03
1. Adjust nut 3. Hydraulic pressure “B”: Clearance

2. Adjust bolt “A”: Caliper piston stroke

Parking Brake: 4D-4
Operation (Brake Pads are Worn → Braking → Automatic Adjuster Operate)

If braking when the brake pad being worn, the caliper piston/adjust nut move “A” until the clearance depended on
abrasion is done away.
The axial movement “B” is converted to rotary movement and acts on the adjust bolt and adjust-nut. Only the adjust-
bolt turns “C” because the caliper piston/adjust-nut is fixed to the brake pad with caliper piston groove and pad boss at
“D”. Thus, the adjust-bolt keeps original position with rotating as well as the caliper piston/adjust-nut moves outside.
The adjust-bolt stops rotating once the brake pad-to-disc clearance become zero, so the automatic adjuster operation
is completed.
“D” 2
3
“B” “A”
“C”
I705H1440013-04
1. Adjust bolt 2. Adjust nut 3. Adjust nut spring

4D-5 Parking Brake:
Over-adjust Prevention Mechanism

When rapid braking “A”, the automatic brake-lock adjuster operation works too fast “B”.
The caliper piston/adjust nut is forced to stop “C” as soon as the brake pad contacts with brake disk, but the adjust bolt
turns by inertia force “D” after that. The adjust bolt stops after the adjust-bolt/nut clearance becomes zero. On this
account, the caliper piston/adjust nut can not return back “E” using the elasticity transform of piston seal when
releasing the brake lever. It is the over-adjust condition.
1
2
“E” “C” “A”
“D”
5 “B”
I705H1440014-02
1. Caliper piston “A”: Rapid braking

2. Piston seal “B”: Rapid rotation
3. Hydraulic pressure “C”: Sudden stop
4. Adjust nut “D”: Turn by inertia
5. Adjust bolt “E”: Impossible to return

Parking Brake: 4D-6
The spring is equipped between the caliper piston and the adjust-nut for preventing the over-adjust, serves damper in
term of rapid caliper piston movement.
The spring compress “A” as soon as the caliper piston moves exponentially “B”, the adjust-nut moves “C”, “D” behind
time. Here with, it is possible to make correct clearance of the adjust bolt/nut because the inertia force with rapid
movement does not work the adjust-bolt.
“I”
“F” “H”
“G”
I705H1440015-02
6. Spring “G”: Spring compresses “I”: Rotate

“F”: Rapid braking “H”: Spring tensions/adjuster nut moves

Parking Brake Cable (Brake-lock Cable) Routing Diagram
B705H14402001
2
1
“D”
“C”
“A”
“B”
I705H1440007-03
1. Clamp “B”: Pass the throttle cables through under and inside of the frame.
Bind the brake-lock cable, starter motor lead wire and seat-lock cable together.
2. Wire harness “C”: Pass the throttle cables through inside of the frame.
Bind the brake-lock cable starter motor lead wire and seat-lock cable together.
“A”: Pass the throttle cables through inside of the frame. “D”: Pass the throttle cables through inside of the frame.

4D-7 Parking Brake:
Repair Instructions
Parking Brake System (Brake-lock System) 4) Remove the lock-nut (3) and remove the brake-lock
Inspection arm (4).
B705H14406001
Refer to “Parking Brake (Brake-lock) Inspection in
Parking Brake System (Brake-lock System)

Removal and Installation
B705H14406002
Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation in 2
Section 4C (Page4C-3)”. 4
3
Parking Brake System (Brake-lock System)
B705H14406003 I705H1440003-01
Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly and 5) Remove the brake-lock cable. Refer to “Parking
Assembly in Section 4C (Page4C-4)”. Brake Cable (Brake-lock Cable) Routing Diagram
(Page4D-6)”.
Parking Brake Cable (Brake-lock Cable)
Removal and Installation Installation
B705H14406004
Refer to “Parking Brake Cable (Brake-lock Cable) 1) Install the brake-lock cable. Refer to “Parking Brake
Routing Diagram (Page4D-6)”. Cable (Brake-lock Cable) Routing Diagram
(Page4D-6)”.
Removal 2) Assembly the brake-lock cable (1) to brake-lock arm
1) Remove the front box. Refer to “Front Box Removal (2), install the lock-nut (3). Refer to “Rear Brake
and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-18)”. Caliper Removal and Installation in Section 4C
(Page4C-3)”
2) Loosen the brake-lock nut (1), remove the brake-
lock cable (2).
1
2
1 3
I705H1440004-01
2
I705H1440001-02
3) Remove the brake hose clamp.
I705H1440002-05

Parking Brake: 4D-8
3) Pull the brake-lock lever (4) one notch. 6) Install the brake hose clamp.
4) Tighten the brake-lock cable adjust bolt (5) by hand
until it contacts the holder (6).
5) Tighten the brake-lock cable lock-nut (7) to the
specified torque.
Tightening torque
Brake-lock cable lock-nut (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-
m, 7.0 lb-ft)
4
I705H1440002-05
7) Install the front box. Refer to “Front Box Removal

7 (a) and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-18)”.
8) After installing, adjust the brake-lock. Refer to “Brake
6
5 System Inspection in Section 0B (Page0B-13)”.
I705H1440005-03
Specifications
B705H14407001
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Brake-lock cable lock-nut 10 1.0 7.0 )(Page4D-8)
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

4D-9 Parking Brake:

Section 5
Tranmission / Transaxle
CONTENTS
Precautions .................................................5-1 Movable Drive Face Component.........................5A-8

Precautions............................................................. 5-1 Movable Drive Face Disassembly and
Precautions for Transmission/Transaxle............... 5-1 Assembly...........................................................5A-8
Movable Drive Face Parts Inspection .................5A-9
Automatic Transmission......................... 5A-1 Oil Seal Removal and Installation .....................5A-10
Schematic and Routing Diagram........................5A-1 Clutch Shoe / Movable Driven Face
Drive Train System ............................................. 5A-1 Components....................................................5A-11
Clutch Shoe / Movable Driven Face
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............5A-2
Disassembly and Assembly ............................5A-12
Automatic Transmission Symptom Diagnosis..... 5A-2
Clutch Shoe and Movable Driven Face Parts
Repair Instructions ..............................................5A-2
Inspection........................................................5A-16
Outer Clutch Cover Cushion Construction .......... 5A-2
Specifications .....................................................5A-17
Clutch In / Stall Speed Inspection ....................... 5A-3
Service Data......................................................5A-17
V-belt Type Continuously Variable Automatic
Tightening Torque Specifications......................5A-17
Transmission Removal and Installation ............ 5A-3 5
Drive V-belt Inspection ........................................ 5A-6 Special Tools and Equipment ...........................5A-18
Cooling Fan Filter Inspection .............................. 5A-6 Recommended Service Material .......................5A-18
Inner Clutch Cover Bearing Inspection ............... 5A-7 Special Tool ......................................................5A-18
Inner Clutch Cover Bering Removal and
Installation ......................................................... 5A-7

5-1 Precautions:
Precautions
Precautions
Precautions for Transmission/Transaxle
B705H15000001

Automatic Transmission: 5A-1
Automatic Transmission
Drive Train System
B705H15102001
3 2
“A”
10
12
11
I705H1510001-07
1. Crankshaft 6. Fixed driven face 11. Final gear

2. Movable drive face 7. Driveshaft 12. Rear axle shaft
3. Fixed drive face 8. Clutch shoe “A”: Drive Train route
4. V-belt 9. Clutch housing
5. Movable driven face 10. Idle gear

5A-2 Automatic Transmission:

Automatic Transmission Symptom Diagnosis
B705H15104001

Excessive engine noise Gear worn or abnormal contact. Replace.
Spline worn. Replace.
Bearing worn or burned. Replace.
V-belt slipping V-belt slipping. Replace.
Pulley face worn. Replace.
Clutch slipping Clutch shoe worn. Replace.
Centrifugal weight operation failure. Repair or replace.
V-belt worn. Replace.
Clutch dragging Clutch shoe spring fatigued. Replace.
Movable driven face distorted. Replace.
Repair Instructions
Outer Clutch Cover Cushion Construction
B705H15106012
“a” “a”
“a” “a”
I705H1510068-02
1. Cushion “a”: 5 – 10 mm (0.2 – 0.4 in)

: Stick top of cushion 0 – 5 mm (0 – 0.2 in) inside of the clutch outer cover.

Clutch In / Stall Speed Inspection Movable drive face

B705H15106001
Refer to “Automatic Clutch Inspection in Section 0B 1) Hold the fixed drive face using the special tools and
(Page0B-19)”. remove the fixed drive face nut and washer.
! WARNING
V-belt Type Continuously Variable Automatic
Transmission Removal and Installation • To prevent the fin from breakage or injury
B705H15106002
from occurring due to inadvertent slipping,
Removal
engage the tool end with the side of pulley
securely and make sure the contact is on a
Clutch cover
center area of the fin.
1) Remove the side leg shield. Refer to “Side Leg
• Remove the drive face nut with pressing
the special tool to the drive face.
(Page9D-15)”.
2) Remove the belt cooling duct (1) and outer clutch
Special tool
cover (2).
(A): 09920–53740 (Clutch sleeve hub
holder)
(B): 09920–31020 (Extension handle)
2) Remove the fixed drive face (1).
1 (A)
2
I705H1510002-01
3) Unfasten the clamp and remove the inner clutch (B)

cover (3).
I705H1510004-02
3) Remove the V-belt (2) and remove the movable drive

face assembly (3) together with the spacer (4).
2
3
I705H1510003-01
3
4
I705H1510005-01

Clutch and movable driven face Installation

1) Hold the clutch housing using the special tool and Refer to “Drive V-belt Inspection (Page5A-6)”.
remove the clutch housing nut (1) and remove the Install the V-belt type continuously variable automatic
clutch housing (2). transmission in the reverse order of the removal. Pay
Special tool
(A): 09930–40113 (Rotor holder) Clutch and movable driven face
1) Assemble the clutch shoe, movable driven face
assembly and V-belt.
2
! CAUTION
• Position the V-belt so that its arrow points

1 to the engine rotational direction.
• Degrees the V-belt contact surface (pulley
face).
(A)
I705H1510006-02
2) Remove the clutch shoe and movable driven face

assembly (3).
3
I705H1510066-01
2) Fit the V-belt by compressing it and pushing open

the driven face assembly.
! CAUTION
I705H1510007-02
Keep compressing the center of V-belt so as
not to open apart.
I705H1510008-03

3) Apply grease to the O-ring. ! CAUTION

• Check for dirt or grease on the fixed drive
face and if any, clean and degrees
4) Hold the clutch housing using the special tool and thoroughly. Also check that the parts are
tighten the clutch housing nut (1) to the specified properly fitted with the spline.
torque. • When installing the fixed drive face, check
that the V-belt has a play and the fixed
! CAUTION
drive face contacts the end of the spacer.
• Degrees the clutch housing surface. • When installing the fixed drive face nut,
• Replace the O-ring with a new one. check that the V-belt is not caught in the
movable drive face assembly.
Special tool
(A): 09930–40113 (Rotor holder)
Tightening torque
Clutch housing nut (a): 85 N·m (8.5 kgf-m, 61.5
lb-ft) 3
4
1 (a)
I705H1510011-01
4) Hold the fixed drive face using the special tools and
tighten the fixed drive face nut (4) to the specified
torque.
(A)
I705H1510009-05 ! WARNING
Movable drive face assembly • To prevent the fin from breakage or injury
1) Install the movable drive face assembly (1). from occurring due to inadvertent slipping,
engage the tool end with the side of pulley
! CAUTION securely and make sure the contact is on a
center area of the fin.
Degrees the V-belt contact face (pulley
surface). • Tighten the drive face nut with pressing
the special tool to the drive face.
Special tool
(A): 09920–53740 (Clutch sleeve hub
holder)
Tightening torque
Fixed drive face nut (a): 105 N·m (10.5 kgf-m,
76.0 lb-ft)
1
I705H1510010-01
2) Install the fixed drive face (2). 4 (a)
3) Install the washer (3) and fixed drive face nut (4).
(A)
(B)
I705H1510012-02

5) Continue to turn the fixed drive face until it moves Cooling Fan Filter Inspection
simultaneously with the movable driven face in order B705H15106004
to have the V-belt broken in. Perform the inspection in the following procedures:
1) Remove the cooling fan duct (1).
I705H1510013-01
I705H1510014-01
Drive V-belt Inspection 2) Remove the cooling fan filter (2).

B705H15106003
Perform the inspection in the following procedures:
1) Remove the drive V-belt. Refer to “V-belt Type
2) Inspect the following items and if any defects are
found, replace the drive V-belt with a new one.
• Check for grease or oil sticking on the drive V-belt.
• Check for crack or other damage on the surface 2
contacted by the face.
• Measure drive V-belt width using the vernier
I705H1510015-01
calipers.
3) Check for dirt, clogging and damage on belt cooling
Special tool filter (2) and if any, replace the filter with a new one.
(A): 09900–20101 (Vernier calipers (1/15
mm, 150 mm))
Drive V-belt width
Standard: 25.1 mm (0.99 in)
2
I705H1510067-01
4) After inspection, install the belt cooling filter and belt

(A) cooling duct.
I705H1510062-01
3) After inspection, install the drive V-belt. Refer to “V-

belt Type Continuously Variable Automatic
Transmission Removal and Installation (Page5A-3)”.

Inner Clutch Cover Bearing Inspection Installation

B705H15106013 Install the bearing in the reverse order of removal. Pay
Inspect the play of the inner clutch cover bearings by
finger while they are in the inner clutch cover. Rotate the
inner race by finger to inspect for abnormal noise and ! CAUTION
smooth rotation. Replace the bearing in the following
procedures if there is anything unusual. Refer to “Inner The removed bearing must be replaced with
Clutch Cover Bering Removal and Installation (Page5A- the new ones.
7)”.
• Apply grease to the bearing and inner clutch cover
side.
I649G1240015-01
Inner Clutch Cover Bering Removal and

Installation
B705H15106014
Removal
1) Remove the inner clutch cover. Refer to “V-belt Type
I649G1240019-01
• Install the bearing to the inner clutch cover using the
2) Remove the bearing retainers (1).
special tool.
! CAUTION
Special tool
1
I705H1510069-01
3) Remove the bearing (2) using the special tool. (A)
Special tool
(A): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)
I705H1510071-01
(A)
I705H1510070-02

Movable Drive Face Component 2) Remove the movable drive face cover (2).
B705H15106005
2
5
4
1
I705H1510018-04
3) Remove the movable drive plate (3) and dampers

6 (4).
3
3
D
FW
1
2
I705H1510016-03
1. Oil seal 6. Damper

2. Movable drive face 7. Movable drive face cover
4
3. Roller : Apply grease.
4. Spacer : Do not reuse.
5. Movable drive plate
I705H1510019-03
Movable Drive Face Disassembly and Assembly
B705H15106006 4) Remove the rollers (5).
Transmission Removal and Installation (Page5A-3)” and
“Movable Drive Face Component (Page5A-8)”.
Disassembly
1) Remove the spacer (1). 5 5
I705H1510020-02
I705H1510017-01

Assembly 5) Assemble the movable drive plate (4) to movable

Refer to “Movable Drive Face Parts Inspection (Page5A- drive face (2).
9)”. 6) Assemble the movable drive face cover (5).
1) Assemble the rollers (1) to the movable drive face
(2).
5
NOTE
Check that the roller inside the movable drive
face is not running off the groove.
4
2) Assemble the damper (3) to the movable drive plate
(4).
2
3 1
I705H1510023-04
4
7) Assemble the spacer (6).
2
3 1
I705H1510021-06
3) Fill the grease into the sliding face of movable drive

face.
4) Apply the grease lightly on the oil seal lip.
: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER I705H1510024-01
Movable Drive Face Parts Inspection
! CAUTION B705H15106007
Refer to “Movable Drive Face Disassembly and
Excess grease should be wiped off. Assembly (Page5A-8)”.
Movable Face
Inspect the movable face for any stepped wear on the
drive face. If any defects are found, replace the drive
face with a new one.
I705H1510022-06
I705H1510026-01

Roller Inspection ! CAUTION

Inspect the roller for abnormal wear or other damage. If
any defects are found, replace the roller with a new one. Care should be used when removing the
drive face so as not to cause scratch or other
damage on its surface.
1 2
I705H1510027-02
Oil Seal
Inspect the oil seal for wear or other damage. If any I705H1510032-02
defects are found, replace the oil seal with a new one.
Installation
1) Install the oil seal using the special tool.
Special tool
! CAUTION
Care should be used when installing the
drive face so as not to cause scratch or other
damage on its surface.
2) Apply the grease lightly on the oil seal lip.

I705H1510031-02
Oil Seal Removal and Installation GREASE A or equivalent)
B705H15106008
Refer to “V-belt Type Continuously Variable Automatic ! CAUTION
Transmission Removal and Installation (Page5A-3)” and Excess grease should be wiped off.
“Movable Drive Face Disassembly and Assembly
(Page5A-8)”.
Removal
1) Remove the movable drive face.
2) Remove the roller.
3) Remove the oil seals (1) and (2) using the special
tool.
Special tool
: 09913–50121 (Oil seal remover)
I705H1510033-02
3) Install the roller.

4) Install the movable drive face.

Clutch Shoe / Movable Driven Face Components

B705H15106011
1
5 7
2
8
9
10
11
14 (a)
12
13 16 (b)
D
FW
15
17
I705H1510063-05
1. Needle bearing 8. Movable driven face 15. Clutch housing

2. Snap ring 9. Oil seal 16. Clutch housing nut
3. Bearing 10. O-ring 17. Inner clutch cover bearing
4. Fixed driven face 11. Movable driven face seat : 105 N⋅m (10.5 kgf-m, 76.0 lb-ft)
5. Oil seal 12. Movable driven face spring : 85 N⋅m (8.5 kgf-m, 61.5 lb-ft)
6. Movable driven pin 13. Clutch shoe assembly : Apply grease.
7. Movable driven pin spacer 14. Clutch shoe nut : Do not reuse.

Clutch Shoe / Movable Driven Face 4) Remove the movable driven face seat (4) using a
Disassembly and Assembly sharp point such as flat screwdriver.
B705H15106009
Transmission Removal and Installation (Page5A-3)” and
“Movable Drive Face Component (Page5A-8)”.
4
Disassembly
1) Engage the “A” of the special tool with five holes on
the clutch shoe and fix the clutch shoe/movable
driven face assembly by turning in the special tool
handle.
2) Remove the clutch shoe nut (1).
(A): 09922–31440 (Clutch spring 5) Remove the movable driven pins (5) (3 pcs).
compressor)
! CAUTION
Since a high spring force applies to the
clutch shoe assembly, care must be used so 5
as not to cause the clutch shoe assembly
and movable driven face to come off
abruptly.
I705H1510038-01
“A”
6) Remove the movable driven pin spacers (6).
1
6
(A)
(B)
“A”
I705H1510034-08
3) Remove the clutch shoe plate (2) and spring (3) by

loosening the special tool handle slowly.
I705H1510039-01
! CAUTION
7) Remove the movable driven face (7).
The clutch shoe cannot be disassembled.
3 I705H1510040-01
2
I705H1510035-03

8) Remove the O-ring (8) and oil seal (9). 12) Remove the bearing using the special tool.
Special tool
(D): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)
9
(D)
8
I705H1510041-01
9) Remove the oil seal (10).

I705H1510064-02
10 Assembly
Refer to “Clutch Shoe and Movable Driven Face Parts
Inspection (Page5A-16)”.
1) Install the bearing (1) to the fixed driven face (2)
using a spacer, the size being appropriate for outside
diameter of the bearing.
! CAUTION
Use a new bearing.
I705H1510042-01
10) Remove the needle bearing (11) using the special

tool.
2
Special tool
(C): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)
1
(C)
I705H1510045-02
2) Install the snap ring.

11 ! CAUTION
Use a new snap ring.
I705H1510043-03
11) Remove the snap ring.
I705H1510046-01
I705H1510044-01

3) Install needle bearing (3) using a spacer, the size 5) Install the oil seal (4) and O-ring (5) to the movable
being appropriate for the outside diameter of the driven face.
bearing.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
Use a new oil seal and O-ring.
• Use a new bearing.
6) Apply the grease both to the lip of oil seal and O-
• The stamp mark on the needle bearing
ring.
should face outside when installed.
3
I705H1510047-01
4) Apply the grease both to the bearing and needle

bearing. I705H1510049-01
7) Apply the grease in the grease groove of movable

! CAUTION
driven face (6) and sliding face.
Fill sufficient grease in the grease groove
inside the fixed driven face and also on the
needle bearing.

I705H1510050-01
8) Assemble the movable driven face (6) to the fixed

driven face (2).
I705H1510048-01
I705H1510051-05

9) Install the movable driven pin (7) to the pin hole with 14) While the special tool handle is being turned in
the grease lightly coated. slowly, engage two flats “D” on the end of movable
driven face with the same shaped hole “E” on the
clutch shoe plate.
10) Check that the movable driven face can move
smoothly.
“D”
D
7
“E”
I705H1510055-04
15) Check that the pawl on the special tool is securely

fitted into the hole on the clutch shoe plate and
I705H1510052-01 tighten the clutch shoe nut (11) to the specified
11) Install the movable driven face seat (8). torque.
Special tool
8
Tightening torque
Clutch shoe nut (a): 105 N·m (10.5 kgf-m, 76.0
lb-ft)
I705H1510053-04
(B)
12) Install the spring (9) and clutch shoe assembly (10) 11 (a)
to the movable driven face (6) and attach the special
tool.
13) Engage the pawl of special tool to the hole of the
clutch shoe plate.
I705H1510056-04
Special tool
(A): 09922–31440 (Clutch spring
compressor)
(A)
10 9
I705H1510054-04

Clutch Shoe and Movable Driven Face Parts • Measure the thickness of clutch shoe center area by
Inspection using vernier calipers.
B705H15106010
Refer to “Clutch Shoe / Movable Driven Face Special tool
Disassembly and Assembly (Page5A-12)”. : 09900–20101 (Vernier calipers (1/15 mm,
Inspect the following parts. 150 mm))
Thickness of clutch shoe “a”
Clutch Housing Inspection Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Check for the following items and if any defects are
• Existence of abnormal scratch.
• Measurement of clutch housing inside diameter. “a ”
Special tool
: 09900–20101 (Vernier calipers (1/15 mm,
150 mm))
Clutch housing inside “a”
Service limit: 160.5 mm (6.32 in) I705H1510058-03
Movable Driven Face Spring Inspection

Measure the free length of movable driven face spring
by using vernier calipers. If the measurement is below
the service limit, replace the spring with a new one.
Special tool
: 09900–20101 (Vernier calipers (1/15 mm, 150
mm))
Free length of movable driven face spring “a”
“a”
I705H1510065-03
“a”
Clutch Shoe Inspection
Check for the following items and if any abnormal
condition is found, replace the part with a new one.
• Play, damage, operation, etc. for the center area and
the centrifugal weight fulcrum.
• Existence of damage or oil sticking on the clutch shoe.
I705H1510059-02
I705H1510057-02

Driven Face Inspection Movable Driven Pin Inspection

Inspect the driven face surface for stepped wear. If any Inspect the movable driven pin for abnormal wear or
defects are found, replace if with a new one. damage. If any defects are noted, replace the pin with a
new one.
I705H1510060-01
I705H1510061-01
Specifications
Service Data
B705H15107002
Clutch
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard Limit
Clutch wheel I.D. 160.0 – 160.2 (6.30 – 6.31) 160.5 (6.32)
Clutch shoe thickness 3.0 (0.12) 2.0 (0.08)
Transmission
Unit: mm (in) Except ratio
Primary reduction ratio 1.000 —
Reduction ratio 2.200 – 0.839
Secondary reduction ratio 2.214 —
Final reduction ratio 2.666 —
Drive V-belt width 25.1 (0.99) 24.1 (0.95)
Movable driven face spring free
150.0 (5.90) 142.5 (5.61)
length
Movable drive face roller O.D. 26.00 – 26.16 (1.024 – 1.030) —
Drive/driven face ware — 0.4 (0.02)

B705H15107003
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Clutch housing nut 85 8.5 61.5 )(Page5A-5)
Fixed drive face nut 105 10.5 76.0 )(Page5A-5)
Clutch shoe nut 105 10.5 76.0 )(Page5A-15)
NOTE
“Clutch Shoe / Movable Driven Face Components (Page5A-11)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


B705H15108001
Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )(Page5A-5) / )(Page5A-
equivalent 7) / )(Page5A-9) /
14) / )(Page5A-14) /
15)
NOTE
“Movable Drive Face Component (Page5A-8)”
“Clutch Shoe / Movable Driven Face Components (Page5A-11)”
Special Tool
B705H15108002
09900–20101 09913–50121
Vernier calipers (1/15 mm, Oil seal remover
150 mm)
)(Page5A-6) / )(Page5A- )(Page5A-10)
16) / )(Page5A-16) /
)(Page5A-16)
09913–70210 09920–31020
Bearing installer set Extension handle
10) / )(Page5A-13) 5) / )(Page5A-12) /
)(Page5A-15)
09920–53740 09921–20240
Clutch sleeve hub holder Bearing remover set
5) 13)
09922–31440 09930–40113
Clutch spring compressor Rotor holder
15) 5)

Section 6
Steering
CONTENTS
Precautions .................................................6-1 Steering Components .........................................6B-5

Precautions............................................................. 6-1 Steering Removal and Installation ......................6B-6
Precautions for Steering ....................................... 6-1 Steering Related Parts Inspection.......................6B-9
Steering System Inspection ................................6B-9
Steering General Diagnosis.................... 6A-1 Steering Stem Bearing Removal and
Diagnostic Information and Procedures............6A-1 Installation .........................................................6B-9
Steering Symptom Diagnosis.............................. 6A-1 Steering Tension Adjustment ............................6B-10
Specifications .....................................................6B-11
Steering / Handlebar................................ 6B-1 Tightening Torque Specifications......................6B-11
Repair Instructions ..............................................6B-1 Special Tools and Equipment ...........................6B-12
Handlebars Components .................................... 6B-1 Recommended Service Material .......................6B-12
Handlebars Removal and Installation ................. 6B-2 Special Tool ......................................................6B-12
Handlebars Inspection ........................................ 6B-4

6-1 Precautions:
Precautions
Precautions
Precautions for Steering
B705H16000001

Steering General Diagnosis: 6A-1
Steering General Diagnosis

Steering Symptom Diagnosis
B705H16104001

Heavy Steering Over tightened steering stem nut. Adjust.
Broken bearing in steering stem. Replace.
Distorted steering stem. Replace.
Not enough pressure in tires. Adjust.
Wobbly Handlebars Loss of balance between right and left Replace fork or adjust fork oil level or replace
front forks. spring.
Distorted front fork. Repair or replace.
Distorted front axle or crooked tire. Replace.
Loose steering stem nut. Adjust.
Worn or incorrect tire or wrong tire Adjust or replace.
pressure.
Worn bearing/race in steering stem. Replace.
Wobbly front wheel Distorted wheel rim. Replace.
Worn front wheel bearings. Replace.
Loose front axle or pinch bolt. Retighten.
Incorrect front fork oil level. Adjust.

6B-1 Steering / Handlebar:
Steering / Handlebar
Repair Instructions
Handlebars Components
B705H16206008
D
FW
5
6
(b)
(b)
(a)
7
“A”
2
9
10
D
FW 8
I705H1620033-05
1. Throttle grip 6. Handle cover “A”: Apply handle grip bond.

2. Rubber grip 7. Handlebar holder : Apply thread lock to thread part.
3. Handlebar switch box (RH) 8. Handlebar : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)
4. Handlebar switch box (LH) 9. Handle expander : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)
5. Rear view mirror 10. Handle balancer expander

Steering / Handlebar: 6B-2
Handlebars Removal and Installation 4) Remove the right handlebar switch box (4).
B705H16206016
Removal 5) Remove the handlebar balancer (5).
Remove the handlebar cover. Refer to “Handlebar Cover 6) Remove the throttle grip (6).
1
Left side 3
1) Remove the rear view mirror (1).
2) Disconnect the rear brake light switch lead wire
couplers (2).
6
3) Remove the rear brake master cylinder (3).
5
! CAUTION
2
Do not turn the rear brake master cylinder 4
upside down.
I705H1620002-01
4) Remove the left handlebar switch box (4). Handlebar holder

5) Remove the handlebar balancer (5). 1) Remove the handlebar clamp bolts (1).
6) Remove the grip rubber (6). 2) Remove the handlebar holder (2).
3) Remove the handlebars (3).
1
3
! CAUTION
4
Hold the handlebar by the hand to prevent
throw or drop out of the steering stem.
5
6
2 1 1
I705H1620001-01
2 2
Right side
1) Remove the rear view mirror (1).
2) Disconnect the front brake light switch lead wire 3
couplers (2).
3) Remove the front brake master cylinder (3). I705H1620003-03
! CAUTION
Do not turn the front brake master cylinder
upside down.

Installation Right side

Install the handlebars in the reverse order of removal. • Install the right handlebar switch box (1) to the
Pay attention to the following points: handlebars by engaging the stopper “A” with the hole
• Set the handlebars so that its punch mark “A” aligns “B” on the handlebars.
with the mating surface of the left handlebar holder. • Adjust the throttle cable play. Refer to “Throttle Cable
Play Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B
(Page0B-11)”.
1
“A”
“A”
“B”
I705H1620004-02
• Apply thread lock to the handlebar clamp bolts.

• Tighten the forward handlebar clamp bolts first I705H1620006-02
temporarily to provide clearance on the rear side and • Install the brake master cylinder onto the handlebars,
then tighten both the bolts to the specified torque. align the master cylinder holder’s mating surface with
punch mark “C” on the handlebars.
Lock Cement Super 1303 or equivalent) • Tighten the upper bolt first temporarily to provide
clearance on the lower side and then tighten both the
Tightening torque bolts to the specified torque.
Handlebar clamp bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5
lb-ft) Tightening torque
Master cylinder bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-
NOTE ft)
First tighten the handlebar clamp bolts (front
ones) to the specified torque.
(a)
(a) (a) “C”
“a”
I705H1620007-02
• Connect the front brake light switch lead wire

I705H1620005-04
couplers.
“a”: Clearance
• After installing the steering, the following adjustments

are required before driving.
– Cable routing (Refer to “Throttle Cable Routing
Diagram in Section 1D (Page1D-2)”.)
– Throttle cable play (Refer to “Throttle Cable Play
Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page0B-
11)”.)

Left side • Connect the rear brake light switch lead wire couplers.
• Install the left handlebar switch box (1) to the • Apply a handle grip bond “D” onto the left handlebar
handlebars by engaging the stopper “A” with the hole before installing the handlebar grip.
“B” on the handlebars.
: Handle grip bond (Handle grip bond
(commercial available))
“A”
“D”
“B”
I705H1620031-01
1
Handlebars Inspection
I705H1620008-03 B705H16206009
• Install the brake master cylinder onto the handlebars, Refer to “Handlebars Removal and Installation (Page6B-
align the master cylinder holder’s mating surface with 2)”.
punch mark “C” on the handlebars. Inspect the handlebars for distortion and damage.
• Tighten the upper bolt first temporarily to provide If any defect are found, replace the handlebars with a
clearance on the lower side and then tighten both the new one.
bolts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Master cylinder bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-
ft)
(a)
“C” I705H1620034-01
I705H1620009-02

Steering Components
B705H16206010
3 (b) 1
11
2 (a)
4 (c)
11
5 (d)
9
8
10
D
FW
I705H1620035-06
1. Handlebar holder 7. Upper bearing : 55 N⋅m (5.5 kgf-m, 40.0 lb-ft)

2. Handlebar holder set bolt 8. Lower bearing : 30 N⋅m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.5 lb-ft)
3. Handlebar holder clamp bolt 9. Steering stem : 30 N⋅m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.5 lb-ft)
4. Steering stem lock nut 10. Lower inner race : Apply grease.
5. Steering stem nut 11. Front brake hose cramp : Do not reuse.
6. Dust seal : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

Steering Removal and Installation 6) Remove the front brake hose clamp (4) from the
B705H16206011 steering stem.
Removal
1) Support the motorcycle with a jack or wooden block. ! CAUTION
2) Remove the front box. Refer to “Front Box Removal • Take care not to make air come in to the
and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-18)”. front brake system.
3) Remove the front forks. Refer to “Front Fork • Be careful not to drop the front brake
Removal and Installation in Section 2B (Page2B-2)”. caliper components.
NOTE
The front fork removal is not necessary
unless the steering stem replacement or
front fork disassembly work is required.
Refer to “Front Fork Removal and Installation
in Section 2B (Page2B-2)”.
4
4) Remove the front brake hose clamp bolts (1) and
remove the cable guide (2).
I705H1620013-01
7) Loosen the handlebar holder clamp bolts (5) and

remove the clamp (6).
5
1
I705H1620011-01
5) Remove the front brake hose clamp (3).

6
I705H1620014-01
8) Remove the handlebar holder set bolt (7).

9) Remove the handlebar holder with handlebars.
3
! CAUTION
This operation must be performed without
causing undue stress to the brake hoses,
I705H1620012-01 lead wires and throttle cables.
I705H1620015-01

10) Remove the lock-nut (8) and washer (9) using the Installation
special tools. Install the steering in the reverse order of removal.
Special tool
(A): 09940–14911 (Steering stem nut • Clean the steering related parts before installing.
wrench)
(B): 09940–11420 (Steering stem nut Bearing
socket) • Apply grease to the bearings, races and dust seals
before remounting the steering stem.
8
(A)
(B)
9
I705H1620016-01
11) Remove the steering stem nut (10) using the special
tools and remove the steering stem.
I705H1620019-04
NOTE
Hold the steering stem by hand to prevent it Steering stem nut / Washer / Lock-nut
from falling.
• Tighten the steering stem nut (1) to the specified
torque using the special tools.
Special tool
(A): 09940–14911 (Steering stem nut Special tool
wrench) (A): 09940–14911 (Steering stem nut wrench)
(C): 09940–11430 (Steering stem nut (B): 09940–11430 (Steering stem nut socket)
socket)
Tightening torque
Steering stem nut (a): 30 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.5 lb-
ft)
(A)
(C)
1 (a) (A)
10
I705H1620017-03
(B)
12) Remove the dust seal (11) and upper bearing (12).
I705H1620020-02
• Turn the steering stem right and left 5 – 6 times to

break-in the bearing.
• Loosen the steering stem nut 1/4 – 1/2 turn “a”.
• In this condition, check that the steering stem can turn
smoothly with no rattle and stiffness.
If there is a rattle or heavy movement, adjust the
tightness by the stem nut.
11 12
I705H1620018-02

NOTE Handlebar holder

This adjustment will vary from motorcycle to • Install the handlebar holder with the handlebars and
motorcycle. tighten the handlebar holder set bolt (1) to the
specified torque.
! CAUTION
This operation must be performed without
causing undue stress to the brake hoses,
lead wires and throttle cables.
Tightening torque
Handlebar holder set bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m,
16.5 lb-ft)
I705H1620021-02
• Install the washer with its tab “A” engaged with the
steering stem groove.
1 (a)
I705H1620024-01
• Install the clamp and tighten the handlebar holder

“A”
clamp bolts (2) to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Handlebar holder clamp bolt (b): 55 N·m (5.5 kgf-
I705H1620022-02
m, 40.0 lb-ft)
• Tighten the lock-nut (2) to the specified torque using
the special tools.
NOTE
2 (b)
Tightening the lock-nut can affect the
steering stem nut adjustment. Therefore after
tightening the lock-nut, check the steering
movement again and adjust if necessary.
Special tool
(A): 09940–14911 (Steering stem nut wrench)
(C): 09940–11420 (Steering stem nut socket)
I705H1620025-01
Tightening torque
• Install the front brake hose clamp (3) to the steering
Lock-nut (b): 30 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.5 lb-ft)
stem.
(A)
(C)
3
2 (b)
I705H1620023-03
I705H1620026-01

• Install the front brake hose clamp (4). Steering System Inspection
B705H16206013
Refer to “Steering System Inspection in Section 0B
(Page0B-15)”.
Steering Stem Bearing Removal and Installation

B705H16206014
Refer to “Steering Components (Page6B-5)”.
4 Removal
1) Remove the steering stem. Refer to “Steering
Removal and Installation (Page6B-6)”.
2) Remove the dust seal (1) and steering stem upper
I705H1620027-01
bearing (2).
! CAUTION
Take care not to make air come in to the front
brake system.
• Perform the steering inspection after assembly has

been completed.
Steering Related Parts Inspection

B705H16206012
Refer to “Steering Removal and Installation (Page6B-6)”. 1 2
Inspect the removed parts for the following
abnormalities. I705H1620030-02
• Distortion of the steering stem 3) Remove the steering stem lower bearing and inner
• Bearing wear or damage race using a chisel.
• Abnormal bearing noise
• Race wear or damage
If any abnormal points are found, replace defective parts
with the new ones.
I649G1620033-01
4) Remove the steering stem upper and lower bearing

races using the special tools.
Special tool
(A): 09941–54911 (Bearing outer race
I705H1620028-02
remover)
(B): 09941–74911 (Steering bearing
installer)
(B)
(A)
I705H1620029-01
I649G1620034-02

Installation Bearing
Install the steering stem bearings in the reverse order of • Apply grease to the bearings, races and dust seals
removal. Pay attention to the following points: before remounting the steering stem.
! CAUTION : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER
The removed bearings and races should be
replaced with the new ones.
Outer race
• Press in the upper and lower outer races using the
special tool.
Special tool
(A): 09941–34513 (Steering race installer)
(A)
I705H1620019-04
• Instal the steering. Refer to “Steering Removal and

Installation (Page6B-6)”.
Steering Tension Adjustment

B705H16206015
Check the steering movement in the following
procedures:
I649G1620035-02 1) By supporting the motorcycle with a jack, lift the front
wheel unit is off the floor 20 – 30 mm (0.8 – 1.2 in).
Inner race
2) Check to make sure that the cables and wire
• Press in the lower inner race and bearing using the harnesses are properly routed.
special tool.
3) With the front wheel in the straight ahead state, hitch
Special tool the spring scale (special tool) on one handlebar grip
(A): 09941–74911 (Steering bearing installer) end as shown in the figure and read the graduation
when the handlebar starts moving.
Initial force
200 – 500 g
Special tool
(A): 09940–92720 (Spring scale)
(A)
I649G1620036-02 (A)
I649G1620040-01

4) Do the same on the other grip end. NOTE

5) If the initial force read on the scale when the Hold the front fork legs, move them back and
handlebar starts turning is either to heavy or too forth and make sure that the steering is not
light, adjust it till it satisfies the specification. loose.
a) First, loosen the front fork clamp bolts, lock-nut
and steering stem nut, and then adjust the
steering stem nut by loosening or tightening it.
b) Tighten the steering stem nut, lock-nut and front
fork clamp bolts to the specified torque and
recheck the initial force with the spring scale
according to the previously described
procedures.
c) If the initial force is found within the specified
range, adjustment has been completed.
I705H1620032-01
Specifications
B705H16207001
Tightening torque
Fastening part Note
N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft
Handlebar clamp bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page6B-3)
Master cylinder bolt )(Page6B-3) /
10 1.0 7.0
)(Page6B-4)
Steering stem nut 30 3.0 21.5 )(Page6B-7)
Lock-nut 30 3.0 21.5 )(Page6B-8)
Handlebar holder set bolt 23 2.3 16.5 )(Page6B-8)
Handlebar holder clamp bolt 55 5.5 40.0 )(Page6B-8)
NOTE
“Handlebars Components (Page6B-1)”
“Steering Components (Page6B-5)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.


B705H16208001
Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )(Page6B-7) / )(Page6B-
equivalent 10)
Handle grip bond Handle grip bond (commercial — )(Page6B-4)
available)
Thread lock cement Thread Lock Cement Super 1303 or P/No.: 99000–32030 )(Page6B-3)
equivalent
NOTE
“Handlebars Components (Page6B-1)”
“Steering Components (Page6B-5)”
Special Tool
B705H16208002
09940–11420 09940–11430
Steering stem nut socket Steering stem nut socket
)(Page6B-7) / )(Page6B- )(Page6B-7) / )(Page6B-
8) 7)
09940–14911 09940–92720
Steering stem nut wrench Spring scale
7) / )(Page6B-7) /
)(Page6B-8)
09941–34513 09941–54911
Steering race installer Bearing outer race remover
09941–74911
Steering bearing installer
)(Page6B-9) / )(Page6B-
10)


Section 9
Body and Accessories

CONTENTS
Precautions .................................................9-1 Specifications .....................................................9B-12

Precautions............................................................. 9-1 Service Data......................................................9B-12
Precautions for Electrical System ......................... 9-1 Special Tools and Equipment ...........................9B-12
Component Location ............................................. 9-1 Special Tool ......................................................9B-12
Electrical Components Location ........................... 9-1
Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn.. 9C-1
Wiring Systems........................................ 9A-1 Repair Instructions ..............................................9C-1
Schematic and Routing Diagram........................9A-1 Combination Meter Components ........................9C-1
Wiring Diagram ................................................... 9A-1 Combination Meter Removal and Installation .....9C-1
Wiring Harness Routing Diagram........................ 9A-4 Combination Meter Disassembly and
Assembly...........................................................9C-1
Specifications.......................................................9A-8
Combination Meter Inspection ............................9C-2
Service Data ....................................................... 9A-8
Fuel Level Meter Inspection ................................9C-2
Tightening Torque Specifications........................ 9A-8
Fuel Level Gauge Inspection ..............................9C-3
Lighting Systems..................................... 9B-1 Speedometer Inspection .....................................9C-3
Speed Sensor Removal and Installation .............9C-3
Repair Instructions ..............................................9B-1
Speed Sensor Inspection ....................................9C-3
Front Combination Light Components ................ 9B-1
Ignition Switch Inspection....................................9C-3
Front Combination Light Removal and
Ignition Switch Removal and Installation.............9C-3
Installation ......................................................... 9B-2
Horn Inspection ...................................................9C-3
Headlight Bulb / Turn Signal Light Bulb /
Horn Removal and Installation ............................9C-3
Position Light Bulb Replacement ...................... 9B-2
Headlight Beam Adjustment ............................... 9B-4 Specifications .......................................................9C-4
Rear Reflector / Rear Combination Light / Service Data........................................................9C-4
License Light Components ............................... 9B-4
Rear Reflector / Rear Combination Light /
Exterior Parts ........................................... 9D-1
License Light Removal and Installation ............ 9B-5 Schematic and Routing Diagram ........................9D-1
Rear Combination Light Bulb / License Light Seat Lock Cable Routing Diagram......................9D-1
Bulb Replacement............................................. 9B-6 Component Location ...........................................9D-2
Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Inspection .......... 9B-7 Exterior Components Location............................9D-2
Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and Removal Procedures Flow Chart ........................9D-3
Installation ......................................................... 9B-7 Repair Instructions ..............................................9D-4 9
Dimmer Switch Inspection................................... 9B-7 Exterior Parts Components .................................9D-4
Turn Signal Switch Inspection............................. 9B-8 Inner Cover Construction ..................................9D-12
Passing Light Switch Inspection ......................... 9B-8 Seat Lock Cable Removal and Installation .......9D-13
Horn Button Inspection ....................................... 9B-9 Handlebar Cover Removal and Installation.......9D-13
Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection .................... 9B-9 Upper Meter Panel Removal and Installation....9D-13
Front Brake Light Switch Inspection ................... 9B-9 Front Leg Shield Cover Removal and
Hazard Switch Inspection ................................... 9B-9 Installation .......................................................9D-13
Engine Stop Switch Inspection ......................... 9B-10 Wind Screen Removal and Installation .............9D-14
Starter Button Inspection .................................. 9B-10 Front Panel Removal and Installation ...............9D-14
Ignition Switch Inspection ................................. 9B-11 Meter Panel Removal and Installation ..............9D-14
Parking Brake Switch (Brake-lock Switch) Front Leg Shield Removal and Installation .......9D-14
Inspection........................................................ 9B-11 Side Leg Shield Removal and Installation.........9D-15
Trunk Box Switch Inspection............................. 9B-11 Under Cover Removal and Installation .............9D-16
Lower Leg Shield Removal and Installation ......9D-16

Helmet Box Front Cover Removal and Body Structure......................................... 9E-1

Installation .......................................................9D-16 Repair Instructions ..............................................9E-1
Front Frame Cover Removal and Installation ...9D-17 Body Frame Construction ...................................9E-1
Seat Removal and Installation ..........................9D-17 Engine Mounting Bracket Bushing
Center Leg Cover Removal and Installation .....9D-17 Replacement .....................................................9E-2
Front Box Removal and Installation ..................9D-18 Engine Mounting Bushing Replacement .............9E-2
Pillion Rider Handle Cover Removal and Side-stand Construction......................................9E-2
Installation .......................................................9D-19 Side-stand Removal and Installation...................9E-3
Pillion Rider Handle Removal and Installation ..9D-19 Center Stand Construction..................................9E-3
Center Frame Cover Removal and Installation ..9D-19 Center Stand Removal and Installation...............9E-4
Lower Frame Cover Removal and Installation ..9D-19
Specifications .......................................................9E-4
Frame Cover Removal and Installation.............9D-20
Tightening Torque Specifications........................9E-4
Helmet Box Removal and Installation ...............9D-21
Special Tools and Equipment .............................9E-4
Footboard Removal and Installation .................9D-21
Recommended Service Material .........................9E-4
Special Tools and Equipment ...........................9D-22
Recommended Service Material .......................9D-22

Precautions: 9-1
Precautions
Precautions
Precautions for Electrical System
B705H19000001
(Page00-2)”.
Component Location
Electrical Components Location
B705H19003001

9A-1 Wiring Systems:
Wiring Systems
Wiring Diagram
B705H19102002
Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page0A-5)”.

E-02, 19, 24, 54
ECT IAT
SENSOR SENSOR
IGNITION
COIL
ENGINE STOP TP HELMET BOX

POWER SWITCH SENSOR SEAT SWITCH
SOURCE FRONT
W
Dg
HELMET BOX
B/Bl
B/Br
B/Br
O/W
HAZARD STARTER BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
SWITCH BUTTON SWITCH
SIDE-STAND
SPEED SENSOR HELMET BOX
SPEEDOMETER SWITCH
LIGHT
FUEL PUMP
FUEL
SAFETY PUMP ISC VALVE
P
W
B
P
Dg
Lg
Gr
Lbl
B/Bl
RELAY
B/Br
O/W
O/R
B/R
B/W
O/B
Y/G
O/R
B/W
B/Bl
O/Bl
Y/W
RELAY
O/W
B
R
ECM
B/W
B/W
IGNITION SWITCH
G
B/W
Y/R
B/W

B/Lg
P
P
B
Y
B
B
Y
B
P
V
Y
B
R
R
O
G
G
Bl
Bl
W
G
W
R
Lg
Gr
Lg
Dg
Lbl
Dg
Gr
Y/B
Y/B
Y/B
B/Y
P/B
Y/B
Y/R
Y/R
Y/R
B/R
O/R
O/B
Y/G
Y/G
G/B
B/O
Y/G
B/G
G/Y
O/R
B/G
G/R
O/G
B/W
O/G
Bl/Y
B/Bl
Bl/B
Y/Bl
R/Bl
Y/W
W/B
B/W
W/B
B/W
R/Bl
B/W
R/Bl
B/W
P/W
Y/W
R/Bl
W/B
B/W
B/W
B/Bl
B/W
B/W
B/Br
B/Br
Bl/G
W/R
B/Br
O/Bl
Br/B
O/Bl
Br/B
O/W
O/W
O/W
G/W
W/G
B/Br
B/Lg
P/W
W/B
O/W
Bl/W
Bl/B
Bl/Y
Br/W
B/Lg
B/W
B/Br
Bl/G
W/R
Gr/W
O/W
Bl/W
R
O
Br
O/G
AT SENSOR
Bl
B/W
BRAKE-LOCK V REAR TURN

SWITCH O/G SIGNAL LIGHT(R)
O/G Lg
FRONT TURN B/W B/W
SIGNAL LIGHT (R)
Lg
B/W Gr
B/W
W/B
HEADLIGHT (R)
Y BRAKE LIGHT/
B/W TAILLIGHT
Lg
Br Gr
B/W B/W
Br W/B W/B
B/W B
HEADLIGHT (L) LICENCE
W PLATE LIGHT
B/W Gr
B/W
B/W
B B
B/W REAR TURN
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT(L)
SIGNAL LIGHT (L)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
R
R
R
R
Bl
P/B
B/R
Y/G
Y/G
B/O
Y/G
B/Y
G/R
G/B
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/Br
G/W
W/G
Y/W
B/Br
B/Br
O/W
Y
B
B
B
B
B
O
G
B
R
R
Lg
Lbl
BR
Lbl
O/Y
G/Y
O/Y
O/Y
O/B
O/Y
Y/R
B/W
Y/Bl
O/G
B/W
O/G
B/Bl
O/G
O/G
Y/W
Y/W
R/Bl
B/W
W/B
O/Bl
B/Bl
B/W
Y/W
B/Br
Br/W
Gr/W
B
W
W
Gr
DIODE
B
P
G
OPTION
B/W
W/Bl
P
B
Y
W
Lg
Dg
Lbl
Dbr
B/Y
B/Y
O/R
B/Bl
B/W
HORN
Y
B
R
G
HO2 REGULATOR/
IAT
SENSOR RECTIFIER
TO SENSOR
COOLING
FAN INJECTOR SENSOR STVA STP
GENERATOR STARTER MAIN FUSE (30 A)
1. HEAD HI 10 A SWITCH BATTERY SENSOR
MOTOR
DIMMER REAR FUSE BOX 2. HEAD LO 10 A STARTER RELALY
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH BRAKE 3. METER 15 A
LIGHT SWITCH SWITCH 4. IGNITION 10 A IMMOBILIZER
HORN PASSING 5. SIGNAL 15 A COOLING
BUTTON LIGHT 6. P-SOURCE 10 A FAN
SWITCH
HANDLEBAR SWITCH (L)

Wiring Systems:
I705H1910902-07
9A-2
E-03, 28, 33
ECT IAP
SENSOR SENSOR
IGNITION
COIL
ENGINE STOP TP HELMET BOX

POWER SWITCH
SENSOR SEAT SWITCH

SOURCE FRONT
W
Dg
B/Bl
B/Br
B/Br
O/W
HAZARD STARTER BRAKE HELMET BOX
SWITCH BUTTON SWITCH LIGHT SWITCH
SIDE STAND HELMET
SPEED SENSOR SWITCH
SPEEDOMETER BOX LIGHT
FUEL PUMP
FUEL
SAFETY PUMP ISC VALVE
P
W
B
P
Dg
Lg
Gr
Lbl
B/Bl
RELAY
B/Br
O/W
O/R
B/R
B/W
O/B
Y/G
O/R
B/W
B/Bl
O/Bl
Y/W
RELAY
O/W
B
R
ECM
B/W
B/W
IGNITION SWITCH
G
B/W
Y/R
B/W
B/Lg
P
P
B
Y
B
B
Y
P
R
R
O
G
V
Y
B
G
Bl
W
R
Bl
W
Lg
Gr
Lg
Dg
Lbl
Gr
Dg
Y/B
Y/B
Y/B
B/Y
P/B
Y/R
Y/R
Y/R
B/R
O/R
O/B
Y/G
G/B
B/O
Y/G
B/G
O/R
Y/B
G/R
O/G
B/W
O/G
Y/Bl
Bl/Y
Y/Bl
B/Bl
Bl/B
R/Bl
B/G
Y/W
W/B
B/W
W/B
B/W
R/Bl
B/W
R/Bl
B/W
P/W
Y/W
R/Bl
W/B
O/Y
B/Bl
B/W
B/W
B/Br
B/Br
Bl/G
W/R
B/Br
O/W
O/W
O/W
G/W
W/G
B/Br
B/Lg
Bl/B
Bl/Y
B/W
B/W
P/W
W/B
Br/B
O/W
Bl/W
B/W
Br/B
B/Br
Bl/G
W/R
Br/W
O/W
B/Lg
Gr/W
Bl/W
R
O
Br

O/Y
O/G
B/W
AT SENSOR
Bl
B/W
BRAKE-LOCK V
O/G
SWITCH REAR TURN
Br
SIGNAL LIGHT(R)
FRONT TURN B/W Lg
SIGNAL LIGHT (R) B/W
Lg
B/W
Gr
HEADLIGHT (R) B/W
W/B
Y
B/W BRAKE LIGHT/
Lg TAILLIGHT
Br Gr
B/W B/W
Br W/B W/B
B/W B
HEADLIGHT (L) LICENCE PLATE
W LIGHT
B/W Gr
B/W
B/W
B B
REAR TURN
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT(L)
SIGNAL LIGHT (L)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
R
R
R
R
Bl
P/B
B/R
Y/G
Y/G
B/O
Y/G
B/Y
G/R
G/B
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/Br
G/W
W/G
Y/W
B/Br
B/Br
O/W
B
O
G
R
R
W
Br
Lg
Lbl
Lbl
O/Y
O/B
O/Y
O/Y
Y/R
B/W
O/G
B/Bl
O/G
O/G
O/G
B/W
W/B
Y/W
Y/W
R/Bl
B/Bl
O/Bl
B/W
Y/W
B/Br
Br/W
Gr/W
B
W
W
Gr
DIODE
B
P
G
OPTION
B/W
W/Bl
P
B
Y
W
Lg
Dg
Lbl
Dbr
B/Y
B/Y
O/R
B/Bl
B/W
HORN REGULATOR/
HO2 IAP
RECTIFIER
TO SENSOR SENSOR
SENSOR STVA STP
COOLING INJECTOR GENERATOR STARTER MAIN FUSE (30 A)
1. HEAD HI 10 A MOTOR BATTERY SENSOR
FUSE BOX FAN
DIMMER REAR 2. HEAD LO 10 A STARTER RELALY
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH BRAKE 3. METER 15 A SWITCH
LIGHT SWITCH SWITCH 4. IGNITION 10 A
HORN PASSING 5. SIGNAL 15 A
COOLING
BUTTON LIGHT 6. P-SOURCE 10 A FAN
SWITCH
HANDLEBAR SWITCH (L)
I705H1910903-05
Wiring Systems: 9A-4
Wiring Harness Routing Diagram

B705H19102001
13 14
15
19
17
1 16
18
19
2
8
9 8
3
10
6
4
12
11
7
“D”
“E”
20
24
26
“C” 22 25
21
“B”
“A”
I705H1910905-04
1. Clamp 12. Clamp 23. Clamp

: Clamp the handlebar switch lead : Clamp the regulator/rectifier lead wire, : Clamp the wiring harness, battery (–) lead wire
wires (LH and RH), Brake hoses (Front battery (+) and (–) lead wires. and generator lead wires.
and Rear) and throttle cables.
2. Clamp 13. STVA 24. Ignition coil
: Clamp with marking.
3. Fuse box 14. STP sensor 25. Speed sensor
4. Key-less control unit (For 000 only) 15. TP sensor 26. Clamp
: Clamp the generator lead wires and HO2 sensor
lead wire with no slack.
5. ECM 16. ISC valve “A”: Cut the surplus of clamp.
6. White tape 17. Fuel injector “B”: Pass the lead wires through inside the cable guide.
7. Regulator/rectifier read wire 18. IAP sensor “C”: Pass the lead wires through outside the hoses.
8. Clamp 19. IAT sensor “D”: To IAT sensor.
: Clamp the wiring harness and battery
(+) lead wire.
9. Clamp 20. Clamp “E”: Pass the ignition coil lead wire through inside the
: Clamp the left and right handlebar : Clamp the wiring harness and battery water by-pass hose
switch lead wires. (–) lead wire.
10. Clamp 21. Side-stand switch
: Clamp the wiring harness, battery (+)
lead wire and starter relay lead wire.
11. Clamp 22. Clamp
: Clamp the wiring harness and battery : Clamp the wiring harness, battery (–)
(–) lead wire. and side-stand switch lead wire.

“A”
3
1 “a”
2
4
7
“B”
6 “C”
FWD
“D”
I705H1910906-06
1. Wiring harness 5. High tension code “B”: To IAT sensor

2. Clamp 6. Ignition coil “C”: To main harness
: Clamp the starter motor lead wire and wiring harness.
3. Clamp 7. Air cleaner “D”: To license light
: Clamp the starter motor lead wire and brake-lock cable.
4. Clamp “A”: Pass the wiring harness through front of “a”: 2.3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in)
: Clamp the rear brake hose, brake-lock cable and starter seat lock cable.
motor lead wire.

(a)
1
(c)
(b)
45
(d)
(e)
5 6
I705H1910901-04
1. CKP sensor 5. Outer clutch cover : 11 N⋅m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 lb-ft)
2. Generator cover 6. Speed sensor : 160 N⋅m (16.0 kgf-m, 111.5 lb-ft)
3. Battery (–) lead wire : Tighten the rear side bolt first. : 3 N⋅m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.0 lb-ft)
4. Starter motor lead wire : 6 N⋅m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft) : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

I705H1910904-01
1. Ambient air temperature sensor 3. Coupler

: Do not attempt to disconnect the coupler from the sensor.
2. Clamp

Specifications
Service Data
B705H19107002
Electrical
Unit: mm (in)
HI 10 A
Headlight
LO 10 A
Meter 15 A
Fuse size Ignition 10 A
Signal 15 A
Fan motor 10 A
Main 30 A

B705H19107003
NOTE
“Wiring Harness Routing Diagram (Page9A-4)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

9B-1 Lighting Systems:
Lighting Systems
Repair Instructions
Front Combination Light Components
B705H19206001
9
6
7
10 4
3 10 7
2
1
9
8
D
FW
I705H1920011-03
1. Front combination light (RH) 5. Headlight high beam bulb 9. Socket

2. Front combination light (LH) 6. Position light bulb 10. Cover
3. Headlight low beam bulb 7. Socket
4. Adapter 8. Front turn signal light bulb

Lighting Systems: 9B-2
Front Combination Light Removal and Headlight Bulb / Turn Signal Light Bulb /
Installation Position Light Bulb Replacement
B705H19206014 B705H19206015
Removal Refer to “Front Combination Light Components
1) Remove the front leg shield. Refer to “Front Leg (Page9B-1)”.
! CAUTION
(Page9D-14)”.
2) Remove the front combination light. • A fouled glass can cause damage to the
bulb when lit. If the bulb is contacted with
NOTE bare a hand, wipe clean with a cloth
To facilitate the work, remove the left front damped with alcohol or detergent.
combination light first and then the right • Do not use the bulb of a wattage other than
combination light. specification.
• As the headlight bulb operates at a high
temperature, handle the bulb after
sufficiently cooled.
Headlight Bulb
Replace the headlight bulb in the following procedures:
(Page9D-14)”.
2) Remove the covers (1).
I705H1920012-01
Installation
Install the front combination light in the reverse order of
• When installing, match three hooks position of the left
front combination light to each slit position of the right
front combination light.
1
I705H1920001-01
3) Remove the springs (2) and headlight bulbs (3).
I705H1920013-01
• After installing, be sure to inspect the headlight beam.

Refer to “Headlight Beam Adjustment (Page9B-4)”. 3
I705H1920014-01

4) Remove the left headlight bulb from the socket. 3) Replace the front turn signal light bulb (2).
I705H1920015-01 I705H1920003-02
5) Install the new left headlight bulb paying attention to 4) After finishing the front turn signal light bulb
the direction of the socket. replacement, reinstall the removed parts.
Position Light Bulb

Replace the position light bulb in the following
procedures:
NOTE
To replace the positioning light bulb, the
same procedures is applicable to both the
right and left lights.

I705H1920016-01
(Page9D-14)”.
6) After finishing the headlight bulb replacement,
2) Remove the socket (1) by turning it counter
reinstall the removed parts.
clockwise.
Front Turn Signal Light Bulb
Refer to “Front Combination Light Components
(Page9B-1)”.
Replace the front turn signal light bulb in the following
1
procedures:
! CAUTION
To replace the front turn signal light bulb, the
same procedures is applicable to both the
right and left lights.
1) Remove the front leg shield. Refer to “Front Leg I705H1920004-02
Shield Removal and Installation in Section 9D 3) Replace the position light bulb (2).
(Page9D-14)”.
clockwise.
I705H1920006-01
1 4) After finishing the position light bulb inspection,

I705H1920002-03

Headlight Beam Adjustment

B705H19206034
Adjust the head light beam.
1
! CAUTION
Do not bend the brake hose to frame head
2
pipe side.
NOTE
• Use a (+) screw driver for adjuster (1) and
(2).
I705H1920043-01
• To adjust the headlight beam, adjust the
beam horizontally first, then adjust 1. Horizontal adjuster 2. Vertical adjuster
vertically.
Rear Reflector / Rear Combination Light / License Light Components

B705H19206016
3 D
FW
6
5
4
I705H1920017-01
1. Rear combination light 3. Rear turn signal light bulb 5. License light bulb
2. Brake light/taillight bulb 4. License light lens 6. Socket

Rear Reflector / Rear Combination Light / License Light

License Light Removal and Installation
B705H19206017 Removal
Rear Reflector
1) Remove the lower frame cover. Refer to “Lower
Frame Cover Removal and Installation in Section 9D
Removal
(Page9D-19)”.
1) Remove the mat of the helmet box.
2) Remove the license plate light cover (1).
2) Remove the reflector nuts (1) and reflector (2).
I705H1920020-01
I705H1920018-02
3) Remove the license plate light (2) from the license
plate light cover (3).
Installation
Install the rear reflector in the reverse order of removal.
3
Rear Combination Light
Removal
1) Remove the left and right frame covers. Refer to
“Frame Cover Removal and Installation in Section
9D (Page9D-20)”.
2) Remove the rear combination light.
2
NOTE
I705H1920021-02
Care should be used not to cause scratch or
damage to the frame cover and rear
Installation
combination light.
Install the license plate light in the reverse order of
removal.
I705H1920019-01
Installation
Install the rear combination light in the reverse order of
removal.

Rear Combination Light Bulb / License Light Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb
Bulb Replacement Replace the rear turn signal light bulb in the following
B705H19206018 procedures:
Refer to “Rear Reflector / Rear Combination Light /
1) Remove the center frame cover. Refer to “Center
License Light Components (Page9B-4)”.
! CAUTION (Page9D-19)”.
• A fouled glass can cause damage to the clockwise.
bulb when lit. If the bulb is contacted with
bare a hand, wipe clean with a cloth
damped with alcohol or detergent.
• Do not use the bulb of a wattage other than
specification.
NOTE
To replace the brake light/taillight bulb or rear
turn signal light bulb, the same procedures is
applicable to both the right and left lights. 1
Brake Light / Taillight Bulb I705H1920009-02

Replace the brake light/taillight bulb in the following 3) Replace the rear turn signal light bulb.
procedures:
1) Remove the lower frame cover. Refer to “Lower
(Page9D-19)”.
clockwise.
1
I705H1920023-01
4) After finishing the rear turn signal light bulb

replacement, reinstall the removed parts.
I705H1920007-02
3) Replace the brake light/taillight bulb.
I705H1920022-01
4) After finishing the brake light and taillight bulb

replacement, reinstall the removed parts.

License Light Bulb Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and

Replace the license light bulb in the following Installation
procedures: B705H19206020
Removal
1) Remove the lens by turning it counter clockwise.
14)”.
2) Remove the turn signal/side-stand relay (1).
I705H1920010-01
2) Replace the license light bulb.
I705H1920042-01
Installation
Install the turn signal/side-stand relay in the reverse
order of removal.
Dimmer Switch Inspection

B705H19206022
Inspect the dimmer switch in the following procedures:
I705H1920024-01 Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-
3) After finishing the license light bulb replacement, 14)”.
reinstall the removed parts. 2) Disconnect the left handlebar switch coupler (1).
Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Inspection

B705H19206019
(Page0A-7)”.
NOTE 1
Make sure that the battery is fully charged.
Before removing the turn signal/side-stand relay, check

the operation of the turn signal light.
If the turn signal light does not illuminate, inspect the
bulb, turn signal switch and circuit connection. I705H1920025-01
If the bulb, turn signal switch and circuit connection are
OK, the turn signal relay may be faulty; therefore,
replace the turn signal/side-stand relay with a new one.
Refer to “Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and
Installation (Page9B-7)”.

3) Inspect the dimmer switch for continuity with the Passing Light Switch Inspection
tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the left B705H19206024
Inspect the passing light switch in the following
handlebar switch assembly with a new one. Refer to
procedures:
“Handlebars Removal and Installation in Section 6B
(Page6B-2)”. 1) Remove the meter panel. Refer to “Meter Panel
Special tool 14)”.
2) Disconnect the left handlebar switch coupler (1).
Continuity ( )
Color
O/R Y W
Position
HI 1
LO
I705H1920026-01
4) After finishing the dimmer switch inspection, reinstall

the removed parts.
Turn Signal Switch Inspection I705H1920025-01

B705H19206023 3) Inspect the passing light switch for continuity with the
Inspect the turn signal switch in the following tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the left
procedures: handlebar switch assembly with a new one. Refer to
1) Remove the meter panel. Refer to “Meter Panel “Handlebars Removal and Installation in Section 6B
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- (Page6B-2)”.
14)”.
Special tool
2) Disconnect the left handlebar switch coupler (1). : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
Continuity ( )
Color
O/R Y
1 Position
PUSH
I705H1920028-01
4) After finishing the passing light switch inspection,

I705H1920025-01
3) Inspect the turn signal switch for continuity with the

tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the left
(Page6B-2)”.
Special tool
Continuity ( )
Color
Dg P Ch Lg Sb B
Position
L
PUSH
R
I705H1920027-02
4) After finishing the turn signal switch inspection,


Horn Button Inspection Front Brake Light Switch Inspection

B705H19206028 B705H19206029
Inspect the horn button switch in the following Refer to “Brake Light Switch Inspection in Section 4A
procedures: (Page4A-3)”.
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- Color
B/Bl B/R
14)”. Position
2) Disconnect the left handlebar switch coupler (1). OFF
ON
I705H1920030-01
Hazard Switch Inspection

B705H19206031
Inspect the hazard switch in the following procedures:
1
14)”.
2) Disconnect the right handlebar switch coupler (1)
and (2).
I705H1920025-01
3) Inspect the horn button for continuity with the tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the left
handlebar switch assembly with a new one. Refer to 1
“Handlebars Removal and Installation in Section 6B 2
(Page6B-2)”.
Special tool
Continuity ( )
I705H1920032-01
Color 3) Inspect the hazard switch for continuity with the

Position
B/Bl B/W tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the right
PUSH
I705H1920040-01
(Page6B-2)”.
4) After finishing the horn button switch inspection, Special tool
reinstall the removed parts. : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection Continuity ( )
B705H19206030
Refer to “Brake Light Switch Inspection in Section 4A
(Page4A-3)”. Color
B Lg Sb Gr P
Position
Color OFF
B/Y B/Y
Position ON
OFF I705H1920041-02
ON 4) After finishing the hazard switch inspection, reinstall

I705H1920029-02 the removed parts.

Engine Stop Switch Inspection Starter Button Inspection

B705H19206025 B705H19206026
Inspect the engine stop switch in the following Inspect the starter button in the following procedures:
procedures: 1) Remove the meter panel. Refer to “Meter Panel
1) Remove the meter panel. Refer to “Meter Panel Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-
Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D- 14)”.
14)”. 2) Disconnect the right handlebar switch coupler (1)
2) Disconnect the right handlebar switch coupler (1) and (2).
and (2).
1
1 2
2
I705H1920032-01
I705H1920032-01 3) Inspect the starter button for continuity with the
3) Inspect the engine stop switch for continuity with the tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the right
tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the right handlebar switch assembly with a new one. Refer to
handlebar switch assembly with a new one. Refer to “Handlebars Removal and Installation in Section 6B
“Handlebars Removal and Installation in Section 6B (Page6B-2)”.
(Page6B-2)”.
Special tool
Special tool : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
Tester knob indication Continuity ( )
Continuity ( )
Color
O/W Y/G O/R Y/W
Color Position
O/B O/W
Position
OFF PUSH
RUN I705H1920033-01
I705H1920031-01 4) After finishing the starter button inspection, reinstall
4) After finishing the engine stop switch inspection, the removed parts.

Ignition Switch Inspection 3) Inspect the brake-lock switch for continuity with the
B705H19206033 tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the brake-
Inspect the ignition switch in the following procedures: lock switch assembly with a new one.
Shield Removal and Installation in Section 9D Special tool
(Page9D-14)”. : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
2) Disconnect the ignition switch coupler (1). Tester knob indication
Continuity ( )
Color
G B/W
Position
OFF
1
ON
I705H1920037-02
4) After finishing the brake-lock switch inspection,

Trunk Box Switch Inspection

I705H1920034-01 B705H19206027
3) Inspect the ignition switch for continuity with the Inspect the trunk box switch in the following procedures:
tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the 1) Remove the left footboard. Refer to “Footboard
ignition switch assembly with a new one. Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-
21)”.
Special tool
: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) 2) Disconnect the trunk box switch coupler (1).

Continuity ( )
1
Color
R O
Position
OFF
ON
I705H1920035-01
4) After finishing the ignition switch inspection, reinstall

the removed parts.
I705H1920038-01
Parking Brake Switch (Brake-lock Switch) 3) Inspect the trunk box switch for continuity with the
Inspection tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the trunk
B705H19206032 box switch assembly with a new one.
Inspect the brake-lock switch in the following
procedures: Special tool
1) Remove the front box. Refer to “Front Box Removal : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)
and Installation in Section 9D (Page9D-18)”. Tester knob indication
2) Disconnect the brake-lock switch lead wire couplers Continuity ( )
(1).
Color
B B/W
Position
PUSH
I705H1920039-01
4) After finishing the trunk box switch inspection,

I705H1920036-01

Specifications
Service Data
B705H19207001
Wattage
Unit: W
Item
E-02, 19, 24, 54 E-03, 28, 33
HI 60/55 ←
Headlight
LO 55 ←
Parking/position light 5x2 ←
Brake light/Taillight 21/5 x 2 ←
Turn signal light 21 x 2 (Front), 21 x 2 (Rear) 27/8 x 2 (Front), 21 x 2 (Rear)
License plate light 5 ←
Trunk light 5 ←

Special Tool
B705H19208001
09900–25008
8) / )(Page9B-8) /
9) / )(Page9B-10) /
11) / )(Page9B-11) /
)(Page9B-11)

9C-1 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn:
Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn

Repair Instructions
Combination Meter Components
B705H19306001
1
D
FW
I705H1930009-01
1. Lower case 2. Combination meter 3. Wind plate 4. Upper case
Combination Meter Removal and Installation Combination Meter Disassembly and Assembly
B705H19306014 B705H19306002
Removal Refer to “Combination Meter Removal and Installation
1) Remove the meter panel. (Page9C-1)”.
Refer to “Meter Panel Removal and Installation in
Section 9D (Page9D-14)”. Disassembly
Disassemble the combination meter. Refer to
2) Remove the combination meter assembly (1).
“Combination Meter Components (Page9C-1)”.
Assembly
1 Assemble the combination meter. Refer to “Combination
Meter Components (Page9C-1)”.
I705H1930001-01
Installation
Install the combination meter in the reverse order of the
removal.

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-2
Combination Meter Inspection 2) Check that the fuel level meter operates properly
B705H19306015 when a resistor is connected between the terminals
Check that the illumination LED on the meter panel lights of fuel pump wiring coupler (Y/B and B/W) on the
up and the indicating needle each on fuel meter, wiring harness side. If any abnormal condition is
speedometer, tachometer and coolant temperature noted, replace the combination meter.
sensor once moves to the maximum and then returns to
the home position immediately after the ignition switch NOTE
has been turned on.
• Prior to the inspection, check that the fuel
gauge is functioning properly.
• When reading the meter indication, wait at
least 20 seconds after the resistor has
been connected.
I705H1930002-01
At the same time, check that the FI lamp and each of the
clock and multi-information meter segments turn on and
thereafter go off to resume the normal display.
I705H1930004-01
Resister Meter indication

130 Ω (1)
10 Ω (2)
I705H1930008-01
Check that the other LEDs (turn signal indicator, high

beam indicator and brake-lock indictor) turn on with the
respective switches operated. If the LED does not light
up, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. If no
abnormal condition is found, replace the combination
meter.
1
Fuel Level Meter Inspection I705H1930005-05

B705H19306016
Inspect the fuel level meter in the following procedures:
1) Remove the foot board and fuel pump coupler (1).
Refer to “Footboard Removal and Installation in
I705H1930003-01

9C-3 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn:
Fuel Level Gauge Inspection Horn Inspection

B705H19306017 Inspect the horn in the following procedures:
Refer to “Fuel Level Gauge Inspection in Section 1G
(Page1G-13)”. 1) Remove the horn mounting bolt (1) and disconnect
the horn couplers (2).
Speedometer Inspection
B705H19306018
If the speedometer, odometer or trip meter does not
1
function properly, inspect the speedometer sensor and
connection of coupler. If the speedometer sensor and 2
connection are all right, replace the meter with a new
one.
Refer to “Combination Meter Disassembly and Assembly
(Page9C-1)”.
Speed Sensor Removal and Installation

B705H19306019
I705H1930006-01
Refer to “Speed Sensor Removal and Installation in
Section 1C (Page1C-4)”. 2) Connect a 12 V battery to terminal “A” and terminal
“B”. If the sound heard from the horn, replace the
horn with a new one.
Speed Sensor Inspection
B705H19306020
Refer to “Speed Sensor Inspection in Section 1C
(Page1C-3)”.
Ignition Switch Inspection

B705H19306021 “A”
Refer to “Ignition Switch Inspection in Section 9B
(Page9B-11)”.
Ignition Switch Removal and Installation

B705H19306022
Refer to “Ignition Switch Removal and Installation in “B”
Section 1H (Page1H-8)”. I705H1930007-01
3) After finishing the horn inspection, reinstall the horn

Horn Inspection coupler and horn mounting bolt.
B705H19306023
Horn Button Inspection
Horn Removal and Installation
B705H19306024
NOTE Removal
If the horn sound condition is normal, it is not 1) Remove the horn mounting bolt (1).
necessary to inspect the horn button
2) Disconnect the horn couplers (2).
continuity.
Refer to “Horn Button Inspection in Section 9B (Page9B-

9)”. 1
2
I705H1930006-01
Installation
Install the horn in the reverse order of removal.

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-4
Specifications
Service Data
B705H19307001
Wattage
Unit: W
Item
E-02, 19, 24, 54 E-03, 28, 33
Speedometer/tachometer light LED ←
Engine coolant temp. gauge light LED ←
Fuel level gauge light LED ←
Immobilizer indicator light LED ←
Oil change indicator LCD ←
FI indicator light LED ←
Brake-lock indicator light LED ←
High beam indicator light LED ←
Turn signal indicator light LED x 2 ←

9D-1 Exterior Parts:
Exterior Parts
Seat Lock Cable Routing Diagram
B705H19402001
“E”
UPPER
INNER
3
6
“F”
4
5 1
“B” “A”
2
3
“C”
4
“D”
5
I705H1940050-04
1. Seat lock cable No. 1 “A”: Pass the seat lock cable No. 2 through front of the seat lock cable No. 1.
2. Seat lock cable No. 2 “B”: Pass the seat lock cable No. 1 through inside of the frame.
3. Brake-lock cable “C”: Pass the cables through inner side of the frame.
4. Starter motor lead wire “D”: Pass the cables through bottom and inner side of the frame.
5. Clamp “E”: Seat lock cable set position
: Clamp the brake-lock cable, starter motor lead wire and seat
lock cable.
6. Seat lock cable “F”: Change set position only when seat locking or releasing is impossible.

Exterior Parts: 9D-2
Component Location
Exterior Components Location
B705H19403001
1 16
18
5 6 12
2
17
19
13
7
20
3
14
21
8
22
10
4 11
15
I705H1940051-02
1. Wind screen 7. Helmet box front cover 13. Center frame cover 19. Rear handlebar cover
2. Front leg shield cover 8. Front frame cover 14. Lower frame cover 20. Front panel
3. Front leg shield 9. Center leg cover 15. Frame cover 21. Front box
4. Lower leg shield 10. Footboard 16. Meter panel 22. Side leg shield
5. Helmet box 11. Under cover 17. Upper meter panel
6. Pillion rider handle 12. Pillion rider handle cover 18. Front handlebar cover

(18) Rear handlebar (17) Upper meter

cover panel
(7) Front helmet
box cover
Removal Procedures Flow Chart
(19) Front handlebar (2) Front leg sheild

cover cover (8) Front frame (12) Pillion rider
cover handle cover
(1) Wind screen

(20) Front panel (9) Center leg (6) Pillion rider (13) Center frame (14) Lower frame
cover handle cover cover
(16) Meter panel assembly Speedometer
(3) Front leg shield

(15) Frame cover Rear combination light
(22) Side leg shield

(21) Front box assembly
(11) Under cover (10) Footboard (5) Helmet box assembly
(4) Lower leg shield
I705H1940049-05
B705H19403002
Repair Instructions
Exterior Parts Components
B705H19406002
2
1
I705H1940053-02
1. Wind screen 3. Meter panel assembly 5. Front leg shield cover 7. Front box assembly
2. Upper meter panel 4. Front panel 6. Front leg shield 8. Lower leg shield

4
6
7
8
10
11
12
I705H1940052-01
1. Frame cover (RH) 4. Side leg shield (RH) 7. Frame cover (LH) 10. Footboard (LH)
2. Footboard (RH) 5. Center frame cover 8. Lower frame cover 11. Side leg shield (LH)
3. Center leg cover (RH) 6. Front frame cover 9. Center leg cover 12. Under cover

“B”
“A”
“C”
I705H1940054-02
1. Front reflex reflector (For E-03, 28, 33) “B”: Set the reflector to the edge of front leg shield.
“A”: Adhere the front reflex reflector on to the front leg shield. “C”: Align the projection of reflector with the joint part of meter panel and front box.

10
5 8 9
6
“a”
“b” “c”
I705H1940055-04
1. Fuel lid 6. Cushion “a”: 0 mm

2. Front box inner cover (LH) 7. Fuel lid “b”: 0 – 3 mm (0 – 0.12 in)
3. Battery cover 8. Inner cushion “c”: 4 mm (0.16 in)
4. Front box inner cover (RH) 9. Cushion
5. Front box 10. Front box lid

1 2
2 “A”
“a”
3
I705H1940060-01
1. Front panel box lid “a”: 2 mm (0.08 in)

2. Cushion “A”: Do not exchange the right one and left one.
3. Front panel box : Apply silicone grease.

“A”
I705H1940056-03
1. Pillion rider handle 2. Pillion rider handle cover “A”: To frame

3
“a”
“A”
7 8
10
“A”
12
7
11
I705H1940061-02
1. Seat molding 6. Mat 11. Lower helmet box

2. Helmet box front cover 7. Frame 12. License plate light cover
3. Helmet box lid (LH) 8. Seat “a”: 0 – 1 mm (0 – 0.04 in)
4. Helmet box lid (RH) 9. Tool band “A”: Outside
5. Upper helmet box 10. Seat damper

“A”
1 2
“B”
“C”
FWD 1 FWD
1
1
I705H1940063-02
1. Fuel tray mudguard sheet “B”: Face the clamp locking part inside and clamp end backward.
2. Frame “C”: Clamp the seat with the wiring harness.
“A”: The seat must be assembled behind the horn.

Inner Cover Construction

B705H19406025
2 2
2
2
I705H1940062-01
1. Inner cover 2. Clamp

: Clamp ends should face inside. The clamps are not fastened too much.

Seat Lock Cable Removal and Installation Installation

B705H19406001 Push in the upper meter panel (1).
Refer to “Seat Lock Cable Routing Diagram (Page9D-
1)”.
1
Handlebar Cover Removal and Installation
B705H19406003
Removal
1) Remove the rear handlebar cover (1).
“A”
I705H1940003-03
“A”: Hooked point
1
Front Leg Shield Cover Removal and
1 Installation
B705H19406005
Removal
I705H1940001-04
2) Remove the front handlebar cover (2). 1) Remove the upper meter panel. Refer to “Upper
Meter Panel Removal and Installation (Page9D-13)”.
2) Remove the screws.
I705H1940002-03
Installation I705H1940004-02
Install the handlebar covers in the reverse order of 3) Remove the front leg shield cover (1).
removal.
Upper Meter Panel Removal and Installation

B705H19406004 1
Removal
Pull out the upper meter panel (1).
I705H1940005-01
“A” Installation
Install the front leg shield cover in the reverse order of
removal.
I705H1940003-03

Wind Screen Removal and Installation Meter Panel Removal and Installation
B705H19406006 B705H19406008
Removal Removal
1) Remove the front leg shield cover. Refer to “Front 1) Remove the wind screen. Refer to “Wind Screen
Leg Shield Cover Removal and Installation Removal and Installation (Page9D-14)”.
(Page9D-13)”. 2) Remove the screws and detach the meter panel
2) Remove the wind screen (1). assembly (1) forward.
I705H1940006-01 I705H1940011-02
3) Disconnect the meter coupler (2) and remove the

Installation meter panel.
Install the wind screen in the reverse order of removal.
Front Panel Removal and Installation

B705H19406007
Removal
1) Open the front box and remove the fastener (1).
1
2
I705H1940012-01
Installation
1 Install the meter panel in the reverse order of removal.
Front Leg Shield Removal and Installation

I705H1940007-01 B705H19406009
2) Remove the brake-lock lever (2). Removal
3) Remove the front panel (3). 1) Remove the meter panel assembly. Refer to “Meter
Panel Removal and Installation (Page9D-14)”.
2) Remove the left and right front floor mats (1) and
screws (2).
I705H1940009-03
2
1
Installation
Install the front panel in the reverse order of removal. I705H1940013-01

3) Remove the screws and fasteners. Side Leg Shield Removal and Installation
B705H19406010
Removal
1) Remove the left and right rear floor mats (1),
fasteners and screws.
I705H1940014-01
I705H1940017-01
I705H1940015-01
4) Remove the front leg shield (3) by disconnecting the

turn signal light coupler (4), position light couplers (5)
and headlight couplers (6).
I705H1940018-01
2) Remove the left and right side leg shields (2).

3
4
5
5 6
4 2
I705H1940016-02
I705H1940019-04
I705H1940020-04
Installation
Install each of the side leg shield in the reverse order of
removal.

Under Cover Removal and Installation Lower Leg Shield Removal and Installation
B705H19406011 B705H19406012
Removal Removal
1) Remove the side leg shields. Refer to “Side Leg 1) Remove the front leg shield. Refer to “Front Leg
Shield Removal and Installation (Page9D-15)”. Shield Removal and Installation (Page9D-14)”.
2) Remove the fasteners. 2) Remove the fasteners.
I705H1940021-01 I705H1940023-01
3) Remove the under cover (1). 3) Remove the lower leg shield (1).
1
1
I705H1940022-03 I705H1940024-01
Installation Helmet Box Front Cover Removal and

Install the under cover in the reverse order of removal. Installation
B705H19406013
Removal
1) Open the seat.
2) Remove the helmet box front cover (1).
I705H1940025-01
Installation
Install the helmet box front cover in the reverse order of
removal.

Front Frame Cover Removal and Installation 4) Remove the seat by removing the nuts (3).
B705H19406014
Removal
Box Front Cover Removal and Installation (Page9D-
16)”.
2) Remove the front frame cover (1).
3
3
1
I705H1940029-02
Installation
Install the seat in the reverse order of removal.
Center Leg Cover Removal and Installation

I705H1940026-01
B705H19406016
Removal
Installation 1) Remove the front frame cover. Refer to “Front Frame
Install the front frame cover in the reverse order of Cover Removal and Installation (Page9D-17)”.
removal. 2) Remove the left and right center leg cover (1).
Seat Removal and Installation

B705H19406015
Removal
1) Remove the front frame cover. Refer to “Front Frame
Cover Removal and Installation (Page9D-17)”.
2) Disconnect the helmet box light coupler (1).
1
I705H1940057-01
! CAUTION
Do not attempt to disconnect the ambient
temperature sensor coupler.
Installation
I705H1940027-01
Install the center leg cover in the reverse order of
3) Disengage the seat damper (2). removal.
I705H1940028-01

Front Box Removal and Installation 4) Remove the front box inner cover (3) and disconnect
B705H19406017 the power terminal coupler (4).
Removal
1) Remove the lower leg shield and front frame cover.
Refer to “Lower Leg Shield Removal and Installation
(Page9D-16)” and “Front Frame Cover Removal and
Installation (Page9D-17)”.
2) Remove the ambient temperature sensor (1) from 3
the front box.
4
I705H1940033-02
5) Remove the front box (5) by removing the screws

and bolts.
I705H1940030-02
3) Remove the ECM (2) from the front box.
I705H1940034-01
2 5
I705H1940032-02
I705H1940035-02
Installation
Install the front box in the reverse order of removal.

Pillion Rider Handle Cover Removal and Center Frame Cover Removal and Installation
B705H19406020
Installation Removal
B705H19406018
Removal Pull out the center frame cover (1).
Open the seat and remove the pillion rider handle cover
(1).
1
“A”
“A” “A”
1 I705H1940058-01

I705H1940036-02
“A”: Hooked point Installation

Install the center frame cover in the reverse order of
Installation removal.
Install the pillion rider handle cover in the reverse order
of removal. Lower Frame Cover Removal and Installation
B705H19406021
Removal
Pillion Rider Handle Removal and Installation Pull out the lower frame cover (1).
B705H19406019
Removal
1) Remove the pillion rider handle cover. Refer to Installation
“Pillion Rider Handle Cover Removal and Installation Push in the lower frame cover (1).
(Page9D-19)”.
2) Remove the pillion rider handle (1).
“A” 1 “A”
I705H1940038-02
I705H1940037-01
Installation
Install the pillion rider handle in the reverse order of
removal.

Frame Cover Removal and Installation 3) Disconnect the rear combination light coupler (2).
B705H19406022
Removal
1) Remove the front frame cover, center leg covers,
pillion rider handle, center frame cover and lower 2
frame cover. Refer to “Front Frame Cover Removal
and Installation (Page9D-17)”, “Center Leg Cover
Removal and Installation (Page9D-17)”, “Pillion
Rider Handle Removal and Installation (Page9D-
19)”, “Center Frame Cover Removal and Installation
(Page9D-19)” and “Lower Frame Cover Removal
and Installation (Page9D-19)”.
2) Remove the fasteners and remove the footboard I705H1940041-01
cover (1). (LH only)
4) Remove the license plate light cover (3) and remove
the left and right frame covers along with the rear
combination light assembly.
I705H1940039-01
3
I705H1940042-01
5) Remove the frame covers (4) from the rear

combination light assembly (5).
I705H1940040-01
I705H1940043-02
Installation
Install the frame covers in the reverse order of removal.

Helmet Box Removal and Installation Footboard Removal and Installation

B705H19406023 B705H19406024
Removal Removal
1) Remove the frame covers. Refer to “Frame Cover 1) Remove the side leg shields, front box and frame
Removal and Installation (Page9D-20)” covers. Refer to “Side Leg Shield Removal and
2) Remove the mat (1). Installation (Page9D-15)”, “Front Box Removal and
Installation (Page9D-18)” and “Frame Cover
Removal and Installation (Page9D-20)”.
I705H1940044-01
3) Remove the helmet box by removing the seat lock

I705H1940047-01
bolt (2) and helmet box bolts.
2) Remove the left and right footboards.
I705H1940045-01
I705H1940048-01
Installation
Install the footboard in the reverse order of removal.
I705H1940046-01
Installation
Install the helmet box in the reverse order of removal.


B705H19408001
NOTE
“Exterior Parts Components (Page9D-4)”

9E-1 Body Structure:
Body Structure
Repair Instructions
Body Frame Construction
B705H19506010
8 (a)
10
3 7 9 (b)
4
5
6
D
FW 11
12
12 5
11 4
3
I705H1950003-02
1. Frame 6. Collar 11. Bearing

2. Crankcase bracket bolt 7. Crankcase bracket 12. Collar
3. Bushing 8. Crankcase bracket nut : 102 N⋅m (10.2 kgf-m, 73.5 lb-ft)
4. Bearing 9. Rubber damper bolt : 102 N⋅m (10.2 kgf-m, 73.5 lb-ft)
5. Spacer 10. Rubber damper

Body Structure: 9E-2
Engine Mounting Bracket Bushing Replacement

B705H19506011
Replace the engine mounting bracket bushing if necessary. Refer to “Body Frame Construction (Page9E-1)”.
Engine Mounting Bushing Replacement

B705H19506012
Replace the engine mounting bushing if necessary. Refer to “Body Frame Construction (Page9E-1)”.
Side-stand Construction
B705H19506015
(a)
2
I705H1950001-03
1. Outer spring 2. Inner spring : 50N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft) : Apply grease.

9E-3 Body Structure:
Side-stand Removal and Installation

B705H19506016
Removal
1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand.
2) Remove the side-stand. Refer to “Side-stand Construction (Page9E-2)”.
Installation
Install the side-stand. Refer to “Side-stand Construction (Page9E-2)”.
Center Stand Construction

B705H19506017
2 (a)
“a” “c”
“b” “d”
I705H1950002-03
1. Center stand 5. Cushion “d”: 57 mm (2.24 in)

2. Center stand inner spring “a”: 60 mm (2.36 in) : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)
3. Center stand outer spring “b”: 57 mm (2.24 in) : Apply grease to sliding surface.
4. Frame “c”: 60 mm (2.36 in)

Body Structure: 9E-4
Center Stand Removal and Installation

B705H19506018
Removal
1) Support the motorcycle using a jack.
! CAUTION
Make sure that the motorcycle is supported securely.
2) Remove the center stand. Refer to “Center Stand Construction (Page9E-3)”.
Installation
Install the center stand. Refer to “Center Stand Construction (Page9E-3)”.
Specifications
B705H19507001
NOTE
“Body Frame Construction (Page9E-1)”
“Side-stand Construction (Page9E-2)”
“Center Stand Construction (Page9E-3)”
Reference:
0C (Page0C-7)”.

B705H19508001
NOTE
“Side-stand Construction (Page9E-2)”
“Center Stand Construction (Page9E-3)”

Prepared by
April, 2006
Part No. 99500-34100-01E
Printed in Japan
476

Printed in Japan
K7

An 400

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

An 400

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

An 400

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AN400

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

© COPYRIGHT SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION 2006

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Precautions ...............................................00-1 General Precautions ........................................... 00-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! CAUTION • To protect Earth’s natural resources,

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• Inspect each lead wire circuit for poor connection by Fuse

• When taking measurements at electrical connectors

ECM / Various Sensors

• When connecting meter probe from the terminal side

3. Coupler “A”: Where male terminal fits

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Electrical Circuit Inspection Procedures

Open circuit check

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2) Disconnect the coupler “B” and measure resistance

“B”: Check contact tension by inserting and removing.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Voltage check Short circuit check (Wire harness to ground)

“D”: To other parts “E”: Other parts

“A” “B” “C”

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4) Disconnect the connector/coupler included in circuit Using the tester

“D”: To other parts

Using the Multi-Circuit Tester

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

General Information ................................ 0A-1 Final Reduction Gear Oil Replacement.............0B-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle Side View Vehicle Identification Number

Fuel / Oil / Engine Coolant Recommendation

Fuel (For Other Countries)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Liquid amount of water/Engine coolant

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Country and Area Codes

Wire Color Symbols

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning, Caution and Information Labels Location

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dimensions and Dry Mass

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Special Tools and Equipment

TT09900-06108-02 TT09900-18710-01 TT09900-20101-00 TT09900-20102-01

09900-06108 09900-18710 09900-20101 09900-20102

TT09900-20602-01 TT09900-20605-01 TT09900-20607-01 TT09900-20701-01

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

09913-70210 09913-75821 09913-75830 09915-64512

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine